‘ wa
TSDC OE MIE %)
;
‘Vi zi) ;
Parke ih
Rca e ATR etch ¢
’
ee if
ti iN
rt i i ehh Kiel
ee anutcht eset Seely
4 Wb be
hice 1S Popa ib 4m
- ae ee (thes iy
. i PATTER LAT
sty a is
Nes ¢t
sce t | oh Abate’ ‘4
ae wet it " }
male ult
inte ce i
. pe : as ;
the CK i sti
414,
Sa oe
+
¢
c
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences __ . :
This Journal, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to. sa ik.
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washin gton. To this end it publishes: ie.” Ps
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by ‘members of the Academy; (2) — is
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington; —
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (4
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is iss
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer —
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corres ond to calendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or —
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the Marcos
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. OF bo vs
Manuscripis may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they shoul be | ‘a
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References =
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate ;
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitied on a separate manuscript page. ears
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced
by zine etchings being preferable. i
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to wate,
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors =
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Mea od
Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices. — dq
Copies 4pp. ‘8S pp. - 12pp. 16 pp. Covers ; e
50 $.85 $1.65 — =. $2.56 $3.25 $2.00 (i ¥ e
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50 7
150 2.25 4.30. 5.25 6.50 . 8.00 i
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00: *
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi- =
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. Se aa
ai ea
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed ys Rear re
ree may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; addi 100,; a, ce
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies ¢ or r reprint
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. . ;
The raie of Subscription per volume 18.......eseececseecceeres waitcetts Pkg A . $6.00* ae ‘
Semi-manthly num bersi.. fies Ve VA wan Seemed eke 2. ee ee ee ae tet, pee ae eee
Monthly numbers............+-.-- Swi aia Ais lat Ee ee = i oo ate we. te Re
Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sciences," and - cae “
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris,;Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, DG .
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. © ay is
Exchanges.—The JourRNAL does not exchange with other publications. . ss -
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that elaim i is made...
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3 00, “Special rates
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy
* ae Ty, 38 Rees? Cae a
sf / = nae ae . ee Pe wv
feis= a weorsy a fa
4. : ee ed a GANT ny vais es Sy
oe Y > . > A a ae a cud d ee es aY a
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 20 JANUARY 4, 1930 No. 1
PALEONTOLOGY .—A new Callianassa from the Cretaceous of South
Dakota!) Mary J. Ratusun, U. 8. National Museum.
In 1927 a number of fossil crustaceans collected by William L.
Russell of the South Dakota Geological Survey were received through
Dr. Carl O. Dunbar of the Peabody Museum of Yale University.
They came from the Cretaceous of South Dakota and represent an
undescribed species of Callianassa.
Callianassa cheyennensis, sp. nov.
Type-locality —Very top of Pierre shale and just below Fox Hills sandstone;
collected along both banks of the Missouri River at several points between
the mouth of the Cheyenne River and the Cheyenne Agency; 17 fragmentary
specimens showing portions of the chelae. Type in the Geological Museum
at the University of South Dakota at Vermillion.
Measurements.—Propodus of left cheliped, holotype, length to end of
finger 14.6, length to sinus between fingers 10, greatest height 10.6, distal
height of palmar portion 9.2 mm.
_ Description.—The type-specimen (Fig. 1) shows the inner face of a propodus
of a left and probably major cheliped. Palm short and high, the greatest
height equal to the length through the middle. Upper margin straight ora
little convex, rounding down at each end. Proximal end not exactly at right
angles to upper margin but forming a slightly acute angle. Considering the
upper margin as horizontal, the lower margin after rounding down from the
proximal end slopes gradually upward to the tip of the finger. Surface nearly
flat. Finger (propodal) narrow, its base less than a third the height of the
distal end of the palm; from the base it narrows rapidly to a slender extremity
and curves gradually upward. On the inner surface of the hand there is,
close to the lower margin, a row of hair sockets of which 27 can be made out;
this does not include a few that may be at the proximal end. On the upper
margin the sockets are fewer and more distant but the number cannot be
determined. On the inner surface near the margin of the finger there is a
curved row of three small distant sockets; the two distal of these are paired
by a socket higher up, either on or just over the finger edge. At the distal
end of the palm near the sinus between fingers there are two large sockets,
1 Received November 18, 1929.
2 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 1
much larger than any others. A little below the upper margin in a straight
line not quite parallel with the margin, but sloping a little downward distally
to the condyle articulating with the dactylus, there is a row of linear spaced
sockets of which about 9 can be made out. A few more sockets are scattered
over the inner surface.
Callianassa cheyennensis.
Fig. 1. Inner view of propodus of left Fig. 2. Inner view of dactylus of right
cheliped, X 3. Holotype. cheliped, X 4. Paratype.
Fig. 3. Callianassa cheyennensis. Paratype.
Outer view of propodus of right cheliped, X 4.
The paratype (Fig. 3) is a right palm with the outer surface exposed. If,
as I assume, it is the same species as the holotype, it is a minor chela of a
larger specimen. The upper portion is broken off, the outer surface is convex
from top to bottom and the inner is flat. Parallel to the lower margin outside
there is a row of rather large well separated sockets 12 of which are visible,
running on to the finger. A large socket near the sinus between the fingers
is by far the largest of a series of 5 which follow the line of the propodal
finger; and on the edge there is a row of small, evenly spaced sockets at least
7in number. Below the middle of the palm there are 5 or 6 distant fair-sized
sockets making 2 subparallel oblique lines. On the distal edge of the palm
between the fingers there is a strong tuberculiform tooth pointing distad.
JAN. 4, 1930 PITTIER: VENEZUELAN PLANTS 3
The movable finger (Fig. 2) belongs to a right chela, perhaps to the prop-
odus just described, near which it lies; it is very thick, upper surface broad,
upper margin convex except for a deep transverse sinus which embraces
the articulating condyle. ‘Two sockets transversely placed on upper surface
not far from sinus. On inner surface just below upper margin there is a row
of 5 prominent oblique sockets. Further down at the middle two small
sockets are disposed longitudinally; 2 sockets on lower surface and a broad
triangular subbasal tooth. The thin prehensile edge is nearer the outer
surface; it, as well as the tip, are incomplete.
Affinity —The specimens have been compared with 3 specimens of C.
whiteavesii Woodward? from Sounding Creek, N.W. Territory. In this species
the palm is definitely longer than wide, its proximal end is at right angles to
both upper and lower margins, although the latter begins to slope upward at
about the middle of its length, making the proximal half of the palm higher
than the distal half. None of the specimens show the inner surface. The
outer surface is less convex than in cheyennensis, its upper edge thin and not ~
bent over so far on to the inner side. A smooth, blunt ridge runs inward
from the upper edge of the propodal finger and fades out about half way along
the palm. The surface below this is flattened or a little concave. In the
new species this surface is evenly convex. Close to the upper edge in white-
avesii there is a row of lengthwise punctae 12 of which can be made out.
Near and parallel to the proximal end, a row of 6 punctae, visible on the
counterpart of Woodward’s fig. 2b; and a row of 3 punctae arranged length-
wise and slightly obliquely at the middle of the palm and pointing toward
the upper edge of the propodal finger (on the counterpart only of fig. 2b).
The fingers are of about equal size. On the original of Woodward’s fig. 2a
there is a large, depressed, transverse socket on the palm near and parallel
to the dactylus.
BOTAN Y.—Botanical notes on, and descriptions of, new and old species
of Venezuelan plants.—III. Old and new species of Euphorbiaceae
(Conclusion).! H. Prrrimr, Caracas, Venezuela.
Croton redolens Pittier, sp. nov. (Sect. Hluteria)
Arbuscula redolens, aromatica, coma depressa, ramis contortis, nodosis,
glaberrimis, cortice griseo tectis, ramulis novellisque dense fulvo-tomentosis;
foliis alternis, petiolatis, membranaceis, petiolis laminis 2-3-plo brevior-
ibus, teretibus, tomentellis, apice 2-7-glandulosis, glandulis brevissime
stipitatis, laminis late ovatis, subcordiformibus, basi leviter emarginatis
rotundatisve, 5—7-nerviis, apice acutatis obtusiusculis, supra velutinis vel
praeter nervis parce stellulatis, subtus dense cano-tomentellis, marginibus
plus minusve sinuato-dentatis, dentibus villosulis; stipulis inconspicuis;
racemis terminalibus axillaribusve, pedunculatis, rhachi anguloso, longitu-
dinaliter sulcato, fulvescente-tomentello; bracteis inconspicuis; floribus
flavescentibus virescentibusve, pedicellatis, haud congestis, foemineis remotis
1-8 basalibus, masculinis 1-4-fasciculatis, cito deciduis; flor. foem.: pedicello
crasso calyce subaequante, calyce haud accrescente extus tomentoso intus
— NGeoleMag. n.s.7: 430. pl.17, fig. 2° (1900)
1 The two first contributions on new and old species of Venezuelan plants appeared
in THis JOURNAL 19: 175-186 and 351-357. 1929. Received November 15, 1929.
4 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 20, No. 1
parce stellulato, pilis bombycinis, segmentis ovato-lanceolatis obtusis; petal-
is lineari-lanceolatis, villosis, calyce brevioribus; ovario dense tomentello,
stylis semel dichotomi, cruribus denticulatis, basi parce stellulatis; flor.
masc.: pedicello gracili calyce subbreviori, calycis segmentis ovato-oblongis,
obtusis, tomentosis; petalis ovato-oblongis, obtusis, utrinque villosulis;
receptaculo bombycino-villoso; staminibus 15-17, glabris; capsula pedicel-
lata, subglobosa, trisuleata, extus dense stellulato-tomentosa; seminibus
carunculatis, laevibus, oblique transverse-sulecatis.
Arbuscula 2-3 m. alta, basi ad 12 em. crassa. Petioli 0.8-3.5 em. longi;
laminae 2.5-8 em. longae, 1.5-6 cm. latae. Racemi 4-10 em. longi, pedun-
culis 2-2.5 em. Flos masc.: pedicelli sub-2 mm. longi; calycis segmenta ex
centrum 2-2.5 mm. longa, 0.8-1.2 mm. lata; petala circa 1.5 mm. longa,
0.5-0.8 mm. lata. Flos foem.: pedicelli plus minusve 5 mm. longi; calycis
segmenta ex centrum 4—4.7 mm. longa, basi 1.5-1.8 mm. lata; petala 1.8-2.5
mm. longa, 0.1-0.4 mm. lata. Capsula 4-7 mm. longa; semina 2-5 mm.
longa.
FEDERAL District: On arid hills near Las Trincheras, 900 m.; Tacagua
valley, on the old cart-road from Caracas to La Guaira, forming small groves;
flowers and fruits September 6, 1925 (Pittier 11886, type); other collections,
same locality Pittzer 10250 (var. parvifolia), 10254 (var. velutina).
The female flowers are always distinctly 5-petalous, so that this interesting
species has to be placed in Section Eluteria, where it has so far no nearly
related Venezuelan ally. It presents itself in at least three distinct varieties:
the typical one (var. genuina Pittier, var. nov.); another with larger leaves
velvety on the upper face (var. velutina Pittier, var. nov.); and a third,
the tree more twisted and gnarled, the leaves also tomentellose on both faces,
but much smaller, biglandular or the glands obsolete (var. parvifolia
Pittier, var. nov.).
All parts of the tree, the leaves especially, have a very aromatic, pungent
smell, and are used as a home medicine. Vernacularly, the plant is known as
Sangredrago, a name which applies to the arborescent species of Croton
generally.
Croton anomalus Pittier, sp. nov. (Sect. Decarinium)
Arbuscula ramis glabris glabrescentibusve, ramulis parce adpresseque
stellulato-pubescentibus: foliis alternatis, membranaceis, breviter petiolatis,
basi eglandulosis, petiolis teretibus, adpresse pubescentibus indumento stellu-
lato pilis paucis erectis longioribus intermixto, laminis ovalibus ovato-
lanceolatisve basi rotundatis, leviter emarginatis, quintuplinerviis apicem
versus sensim angustatis et abrupte cuspidatis, marginibus irregulariter
sinuatis, dentatis serrulato-dentatisve, supra pilis simplicibus parcissime
hirtis vel glabrescentibus asperulisque, subtus dense cano-tomentellis; stipulis
elongatis, lanceolato-linearibus, pubescentibus; racemis terminalibus, rhachi
pubescente; bracteis linearibus, stellulato-villosis, persistentibus; floribus
foemineis 1-3 sessilibus subsessilibusve, calycis segmentis 6 (interdum 7)
ovalibus, obtusiusculis, valde inaequalibus, 4 anteriores reliquis majoribus,
supra obscure viridis stellulato-puberulis, subtus cano-tomentellis; ovario
dense fulvo-hispido, stylis ter-dichotomis, cruribus gracilibus, villosis, su-
premis brevibus; floribus masculis numerosis caducissimis pedicellatis, foemi-
JAN. 4, 1930 PITTIER: VENEZUELAN PLANTS 5
neis minoribus; pedicellis gracilibus, calycis segmentis late ovalibus, obtusis,
tenuiter membranaceis, venulosis, atque receptaculo utrinque villosis; petalis
calycis segmentis paullo longioribus, obvato-spathulatis, longe angusteque
unguiculatis, utrinque villosulis; staminibus 16, filamentis villosis; capsula
ignota.
Boe eiceuld ad 2 m. alta. Petioli 0.6—1.2-cm. longi; laminae 3-6.5 em.
longae, 1—2.7 cm. latae. Stipulae 0.8-1 cm. longae. Racemi 5-7 cm. longi;
bracteae circa 3mm. longae. Flos masc.: pedicelli 1.5-2.5 mm. longi; calycis
segmenta ex centrum 4 mm. longa, 1.8-2.4 mm. lata; petala 4 mm. longa,
1.2-1.6 mm. lata. Flos foem.: calycis segmenta majores ex centrum 6.5-7.2
mm. longa, 2.8-3.8 mm. lata.
Lara: Los Rastrojos, between Sarare and Barquisimeto, in bushes; flowers
April 9, 1925 (Pittver 11757, type).
This species departs from all the other species of Croton found heretofore
in Venezuela in the 6-7 calycinal segments, 4 of which are manifestly larger
than the 2 remaining ones. Though I am aware that its relationship to
C. glandulosus and C. chamaedryfolius is very remote, I have placed it pro-
visionally in Section Decarinium.
Croton timotensis Pittier, sp. nov. (Sect. Decapetalon)
Arbuscula tronco ramisque in aetate glabrescentibus, ramulis teretibus
villoso-tomentosis pilis simplicibus fulvescentibus; foliis modice petiolatis,
membranaceis, petiolis canaliculatis dense stellulato-tomentosis apice pauci-
(2-6-) glandulosis, laminis ovato-cordiformibus basi late emarginatis sub-
truncatisve (3—)5-(7)-nerviis, apice longe cuspidatis, margine dentatis,
supra praeter nervis stellulato-puberulis glabrescentibus minute tuberculatis,
subtus dense estellulato-tomentosis, pilis fulvescentibus; stipulis setaceis,
stellulato-villosis; racemis elongatis, remotifloribus, rhachi pedicellisque dense
tomentellis, bracteis lineari-subulatis; floribus 4—6-fasciculatis; foemnecs
subsessilibus interdum solitariis, calycis segmentis anguste oblongis, obtusis,
extus tomentellis, glandulis atris substipitates alternantibus; ovario fulvo-
tomentoso, stylis semel dichotomis, cruribus basi parce stellulatis; calycis
segmentis florum masculorum late ovatis, obtusis, extus fulvo-tomentosis;
petalis 10, calycis segmentis brevioribus, lanceolatis, basi longe attenuatis
glabris, apice ciliatis; receptaculo villoso; staminibus 39-51, filamentis villoso-
tomentosis; capsula ovoidea, extus parce stellulata; seminibus laevibus,
carunculatis.
Arbuscula usque ad 2.5 m. alta. Petioli 1.5—-5 em. longi; laminae 4-11 cm.
longae, 2-5 cm. latae. Stipulae 3-4 mm. longae. Racemi 15-22 cm. longi;
pedicelli florum masculorum circa 4 mm. longi; bracteae 4-5 mm. longae.
Flos masc.: calycis segmenta ex centrum 4-4.5 mm. longa, 2—2.5 mm. lata;
petala 3-4.2 mm. longa, 0.9-1.6 mm. lata. Flos foem.: calycis segmenta ex
centrum 5-6.5 mm. longa, 1.1-1.6 mm. lata. Capsula circa 6 mm. longa;
semina 4.5—5.5 m. longa.
Meriva: Vicinity of Timotes, 2000 m., in bushes along river; flowers and
fruits January 20, 1928 (P7ttier 12646, type).
This species is a most interesting addition to the flora of Venezuela, being
the first and only representative of Section Decapetalon, which according to
Muell.-Arg. comprised heretofore only 3 species, 2 in the Tropics of Asia and
Africa and another in Southern Brazil.
6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 1
Croton confusus Pittier, sp. nov. (Sect. Hucroton-Eutropia)
Arbor elegans, trunco erecto, cortice griseo tecto, coma elongata, ramis
vestutis glabrescentibus, juveniis dense rufo-tomentellis, pilis stellulatis;
foliis submembranaceis, imprimis utrinque stellulato-tomentosis, indumento
subtus petiolorumque densius et canescente, in aetate utrinque glabrescenti-
bus nervibus supra subtusque prominentibus, venulis reticulatis subtus
prominulis; petiolis elongatis, gracilibus vix sulcatis, laminis amplis, integris
trilobatisve, basi leviter emarginatis biglandulosis, glandulis magnis sessilibus,
lobis acuminatis, saepe sublobulatis, margine sinuato-dentatis, dentibus
glandulosis; stipulis setaceis, caducissimis; racemis foliis brevioribus rhachi
dense stellulato-tomentoso; bracteis inconspicuis, ovatis, villosis; floribus
luteis 6-9-fasciculatis, masculis foemineisque inmixtis, pedicellatis; pedicellis
masculis calyce subduplo longioribus, foemineis brevioribus; calycis masculi
segmentis ovatis, obtusis, extus dense stellulato-tomentosis intus receptaculo-
que tomentosis pilis simplicibus; petalis lanceolatis obovato-spathulatisve,
tomentosis, calycis segmentis longioribus; staminibus 24, glabris; calycis
foeminei segmentis oblongis, apice acutatis, obtusis; disci glandulis majuscu-
lis; ovario dense fulvo-hirsuto, pilis simplicibus; stylis e basi divisis, fere
glabris, cruribus apice breviter bilobulatis, lobulis latis obtusis. Capsula
non vidi.
Arbor ad 20 m. alta, basi 40 em. crassa. Petioli 4-14 cm. longi, laminae
7-22 cm. longae, 3.5-16.5 cm. latae. Racemi 12-16 cm. longi; pedicelli
florum masc. 4-6 mm., foemin. circa 2 mm. longi. Flos masc.: calycis
segmenta ex centrum circa 4 mm. longa, 2.2 mm. lata; petala 4.5-5 mm.
longa, 1-1.5 mm. lata. Flos foem.: calycis segmenta ex centrum circa 5
mm. longa, 1-2 mm. lata.
Yaracuy: Forested hills around Iboa near San Pablo, at an altitude of
450 m.; flowers January 2, 1929 (Pzttier 13077, type).
Confused at first with Croton gossypizfolius Vahl, it differs in the number of
stamens, which was found to be 24 in all the flowers examined; in the con- |
texture of the leaves almost invariably with two large glands at the base and
with small yellow glands on the margin; in the yellow flowers; and in several
other good characters. The vernacular name is Sangrito.
Croton caracasanus Pittier, sp. nov. (Sect. Hucroton-Cleodora)
Arbor parva vel mediocris, ramis glabrescentibus, ramulis plus minusve
lepidotis; foliis alternis, membranaceis, opacis, modice petiolatis, petiolis
gracilibus, anguste canaliculatis, parce lepidotis, apice hirtellis superne
biglandulosis, inferne hirtellis, glandulis sessilibus crateriformibus; laminis
ovalibus, basi rotundatis 5-nerviis, apicem versus acutatis, margine irregu-
lariter grosse serrato-dentatis, utraque pagina stellulato-lepidotis, lepidibus
haud contiguis, supra obscure viridis, subtus pallidioribus nervis vix prominu-
lis basi hirtellis; stipulis inconspicuis; racemis elongatis, rigidis, remotifloris,
saepe unisexualibus; basi saepe bracteis 2, foliaceis alternis suffultis; rhachi
gracili, anguloso, densius lepidoto; bracteis inconspicuis; floribus parvis,
numerosis, foeminers sessilibus, vulgo solitariis interdum binis; calyce breviter
tubuloso, lepidoto, segmentis ovatis, obtusiusculis; ovario cano-tomentoso,
stylis bifidis, cruribus crassis, subciliatis; floribus masculis breviter pedicellatis,
calycis segmentis late ovatis, extus tomentellis; petalis calyce subaequantibus,
extus glabris, intus receptaculoque bombycinis, margine dense cano-tomentel-
lis; staminibus 14-16; capsula depressa, trisuleata, parce stellulato-lepidota.
ao
JAN. 4, 1930 PITTIER: VENEZUELAN PLANTS /
Arbor usque ad 12 m. alta, basi 35-40 cm. diam., vel saepe arbuscula
depressa 2-3 m. alta. Petioli 1.5-4 em. longi; laminae 5.5-12 cm. longae,
3-7.5 em. latae. Racemi 10-22 cm. longi. Flos masc.: pedicelli 1-1.5 mm.
longi; calycis segmenta ex centrum 2.3-3 mm. longa, 1.7-1.9mm. lata. Petala
24-3 mm. longa, 0.9-1.2 mm. lata. Calyx foemineus circa 2.5 mm. longus,
segmentis 1.4—2 mm. longis, 0.9-1.3 mm. latis. Capsula 8 mm. longa, circa
10 mm. lata.
Lara: Vicinity of Duaca; flowers July 1925 (Saer d’Héguert 276, type).
FEDERAL District: Catia de los Frailes near Caracas, on rocky slopes;
flowers and fruits December 21, 1923 (Pittzer 11289); Chacafito Gorge, in
forest; flowers August 24, 1923 (Pittzer 11181).
This species, which seems to be very variable in size, is not uncommon
on the wooded hills with southern exposure and in the cool gorges around
Caracas. I do not think to be mistaken in placing it in Series Argyrocroton,
Subsect. Cleodora of Sect. Hucroton, although the two other Venezuelan
species of that Series, C. orinocensis and C. multicostatus differ in the habit, in
the glandless leaves and in the twice divided styles. C. caracasanus would
come near to C. stenotrichus Muell.-Arg. In Lara, it is known vernacularly
as Sangre de drago and Cdscara amarga.
Croton multicostatus Pittier, sp. nov. (Sect. Hucroton-Cleodora)
Arbor parva vel mediocris, ramulis crassis creberrime subferrugineo-
lepidotis, in aetate glaberrimis; foliis magnis, coriaceis, integerrimis, modice
petiolatis, petiolis teretibus, anguste canaliculatis, lepidotis, lepidis haud
contiguis, laminis late ovatis, basi emarginatis, eglandulosis, apice vulgo late
rotundatis, supra primum praeter costam nervosque dense stellulato-hirsutis
parce stellulatis, demum glaberrimis, subtus primum utrinque densissime
lepidotis, mox glabrescentibus glabrisve, costa venisque 12-15 parcissime
stellulato-lepidotis; stipulis lineari-lanceolatis, lepidotis, cito deciduis; racemis
terminalibus densifloris haud bene evolutis, rhachi alabastrisque lepidotis;
bracteis masculis 3-floris, lepidoto pubescentibus late triangularibus, con-
cavis, unilateraliter lobulatis, lobulo triangulari; petalis oblongis, obtusiuscu-
lis, extus minutissime puberulis, intus glabris, margine dense ciliatis; recepta-
culo villoso; staminibus 11-12, filamentis basi barbatis; bracteis foemineis
masculis majoribus, unifloris, intus glabris; calyce foem. subtubuloso, seg-
mentis ovatis, acutis, extus lepidotis, intus plus minusve villoso-tomentosis;
ovario dense rufo-villoso, stylis bis vel ultra dichotomis; et caetera ignota.
Arbor 8-12 m. alta. Petioli 4-5 cm. longi; laminae 9-19 cm. longae,
6-14 cm. latae. Stipulae 1.2—-2 cm. longae, 2-3 mm. latae. Bracteae foem.
ad 1 em. longae, masc. 0.5 cm. longae. Calyx foem. circa 1.2 em. longus,
lobulis 0.5 em. longis, 2.5-3 em. latis.
CaRaBoBo: Hacienda de Cura, 900 m., in forests; in bud August 15, 1918
(Pittier 8018, type).
This fine species, of which we unfortunately have only imperfect specimens,
belongs undoubtedly to Series Argyrocroton, Subsect. Cleodora of Section
EKucroton (Medea). The scales are of the same type as those of the Brazilian
Croton migrans Casaretto. The most striking character, which this species
has in common with C. wmbratilis H.B.K., consists in the unusually large
8 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 1
number of primary veins; the size and glabrescence of the mature leaves are
also unusual in the Venezuelan species. The tree is known locally as Torco.
Until more complete information is obtained, we assign to this species our
No. 11948, also imperfect, with unripe capsules. It differs from the typical
C. multicostatus mainly in the oval-lanceate leaves. The scales of the petioles
also seem to be smaller, with indistinct rays. The young capsules are obo-
void, 13-15 mm. long and scaly furfuraceous, the seeds 11 mm. long, smooth
and with a sessile caruncula. The calyx is persistent, but apparently not
accrescent. The tree is a large one with a trunk not less than 4 m. up to the
main limbs and about 50 cm. in diameter. In the valley of Caruao (Federal
District) whence our specimens come, it is known as Sarasaro.
Croton grossedentatus Pittier, sp. nov. (Sect. Eucroton-Cleodora)
Frutex humilis, trunco ramis vestutis glabris glabrescentibusve, ramulis
squamuloso-stellulatis, novellis petiolis racemorum rhachidibusque dense
hirto-tomentosis; foliis membranaceis, modice petiolatis, basi eglandulosis
7-nerviis, petiolis leviter canaliculatis, laminis oblongo-ovatis basi cordiforme
emarginatis, apice sensim acuminatis acutissimis mucronulatis, marginibus
fere e basi grosse serrato-dentatis, dentibus serrulatis apicibus glanduloso-
mucronulatis, supra obscure viridis parce stellulatis, subtus cano-tomentosis
costis nervibus venulisque transversalibus prominentibus; stipulis lineari-
setaceis, stellulato-pilosis; racemis brevibus axillaribus terminalibusque, basi
floribus foemineis 2-4 breve pedicellatis, apice floribus masculis cito caducis
gerentibus; bracteis parvis, hirsutis, caducissimis; floribus parvis; foemineis:
calyce persistente, segmentis oblongo-acuminatis, extus dense fulvo-tomento-
sis, intus glabris; ovario fulvo-hirsuto, stylis sub-4-partitis, cruribus gracilibus,
saepe bifidis, fere ad apicem villosis; floribus masculis foemineis minoribus,
calycis segmentis oblongis, apicem obtusem versus angustatis; receptaculo
villoso; staminibus 12, exsertis, filamentis glabris; capsulis obovoideis, extus
cano-villosis, indumento stellulato in aetate depauperato; seminibus ovalibus,
earunculatis, laevibus, brunneis.
Frutex usque ad 1.50 m. alta. Petioli 1—-5.5 em. longi; laminae 6.5-12 em.
longae, 3.5-6 cm. latae. Stipulae 8-10 mm. longae. Racemi 2.5-4.5 em.
longi. Flos masc.: pedicelli 3 mm. longi, calycis segmenta ex centrum 2.7—3.2
mm. longa, 1.2-1.4 mm. lata. Petala 2.8-3.3 mm. longa, 0.5-1 mm. lata.
Flos foem.: pedicelli 2-3.5 mm. longi, calycis segmenta e basi 5.5 mm. longa
(longitudino calycis 7 mm.), plus minusve 2.5 mm. lata. - Capsula 6-7 mm.
longa; semina circa 3.5 mm. longa
Lara: On arid hills along the road between El Tocuyo and Humocaro Bajo;
flowers and fruits, January 6, 1929 (Pittzer 13105, type).
Related to C. populifolius Mill. through the mode of division of the styles
and the number of stamens but differs in the eglandular calyx, in the serrature
of the leaves, and the simply subulate stipules. From C. urticaefolius Lam.
it is distinguished by the number of stamens (12 instead of 9-11), the glabrous
filaments, and also the shape of the leaves and the eglandular stipules.
JAN. 4, 1930 PITTIER: VENEZUELAN PLANTS 9
Croton truxillanus Pittier, sp. nov. (Sect. Hucroton-Cleodora)
Frutex vel arbuscula ramulis novellisque sordide pubescentibus, foliis
alternis, breviter petiolatis, membranaceis, sub-3-plinerviis, petiolo sordide
pubescente laminis 5-7-plo breviori, apice biglanduloso, laminis ovatis, basi
cuneatis apice breviter acuminatis, supra pubescentibus cinereo-viridisque, in
aetate glabrescentibus, subtus dense cano-tomentosis, pilis omnium stellatis,
marginibus obscure denticulatis; racemis terminalibus, elongatis, basi floribus
foemineis 2-7 subsessilibus, apice floribus masculis dense congregatis gerenti-
bus, rhachi gracili tomentoso; bracteis triangulari-lanceolatis, tomentosis,
foemineis 1-, masculis 1-—3-floris; florzbus foeminers: calyce persistente,
segmentis ovato-triangularibus, obtusiusculis, extus dense tomentosis, intus
glabris: petalorum rudimentis conspicuis, glanduliformibus: ovario dense
flavescente-tomentoso, stylis bifidis, basi glabris, cruribus gracilibus, stellato-
pilosulis; floribus masculis: calycis segmentis late ovatis obtusis, extus tomen-
tosis, intus glabris; petalis oblongo-linearibus, obtusis, basi villosis, calyce
longioribus; receptaculo villoso-tomentoso; staminibus 15-17, filamentis basi
villosis; capsulis subovoideis, extus dense stellulato-tomentellis; seminibus
oblongo-ovoideis, minute carunculatis, lucidis, biseriatim oblique undulato-
costatis.
Frutex vel arbuscula 0.50-3-metralis. Stipulae triangulares, inconspicuae,
1-3 mm. longae. Petioli 0.6—2 cm. longi; laminae 5-12 cm. longae, 2—5 cm.
latae. Racemi 6-12 cm. longi. Bracteae 3-4 mm. longae. Flos masc.:
calycis segmenta ex centrum 3 mm. longa, circa 1.5 mm. lata; petala 2.5 mm.
longa, 0.5-0.7 mm. lata. Flos foem.: calycis segmenta ex centrum 3.5-4 mm.
longa, basi 1-1.2 mm. lata. Capsula circa 4 mm. longa; semina 3.5 mm.
longa, 2 mm. lata.
TrugILLo: El Dividive, in scattered savanna groves; flowers and fruits
November 27, 1922 (Pittier 10820, type); Loma del Moron, near Valera, in
bushes; flowers November 18, 1922 (Prttver 12723, 12725); Mendoza, on steep,
arid hills; flowers January 19, 1928 (Prttier 12627).
So far this species has been collected only in State Trujillo, where it seems
to be rather common and is known as salvia muneca and punta de lanza. It
looks very much like Croton rhamnifolius H.B.K., but differs in the obliquely
grooved seeds, in the shape and dimensions of the calyx and in the rudi-
mentary petals in the female flowers.
Croton dolichostachyus Pittier, sp. nov. (Sect. Hucroton-Cleodora)
Arbuscula vel arbor parva, ramulis sordide pubescentibus, apice ramorum
congregatis subverticillatisve; foliis magnis mediocrisve, longe petiolatis,
membranaceis, discoloribus; petiolis crassis, canaliculatis, fulvo-pubescenti-
bus, laminis 3-4-plo brevioribus; laminis ovato-lanceolatis, basi breviter
3-nerviis, obsolete 3—4-glandulosis, cuneatis subrotundatisve, apice breviter
acuminatis, supra punctulatis parce pilosulis, subtus densius stellato-pubes-
centibus tomentosisve sordide canescentibus, marginibus minute serrulatis;
stipulis obsoletis; racemis longissimis, remotifloris, rhachi pubescente, angu-
loso, sulcato; bracteis triangularibus apiculatis; flos foem.: bracteis 1-floris,
floribus sessilibus, numerosis, calyce extus tomentello, intus glabro, segmentis
lineari-triangularibus, angustis, apice obtusiusculis; ovario dense rufo-
tomentoso; stylis profunde bifidis, cruribus longissimis, apice saepe clavatis,
parcissime stellulato-pilosulis: flos masc.: braeteis 2—5-floris, floribus breviter
10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 1
pedicellatis; calyce dense stellulato, segmentis ovato-acuminatis; petalis
linearibus, calyce subaequantibus, basi bombycino-barbatis; receptaculo
villoso; staminibus circa 20; filamentis glabris; capsula ovoidea, extus dense
rufo-stellulata.
Arbuscula usque 3-metralis. Petioli 2-7 cm. longi; laminae 12-16 cm.
longae, 3.5-7.5 em. latae. Racemi 18-30 cm. longi. Bracteae 2.5-4.5 mm.
longae. Flos masc.: pedicelli circa 2’m. longi; calycis segmenta ex centrum
2.5-3 mm. longa, 1.3-1.6 mm. lata; petala 2.2-2.6 mm. longa, 0.5-0.9 mm.
lata; flos foem.: calycis segmenta ex centrum 3-3.5 mm. longa, basi 0.5-1
mm. lata; stylorum crures ad 4mm. longa. Capsula circa 4 mm. longa.
Lara: Between Corora and Trentino, common on valley flats; flowers
January 16, 1928 (Pittier 12616, type). Zui1a: Near Mene Grande, in
bushes; flowers and fruits November 2, 1922 (Pittier 10651).
Belongs to the group of Croton rhamnifolius, from which it differs mainly
in the much longer petioles, in the very long racemes, in the shape of the
petals and in the number of stamens.
CROTON FERRUGINEUS H.B.K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 2: 77. 1817 (Sect. Hucroton-
Cleodora. )
Arbuscula ramis elongatis cortice griseo tectis, ramulis, novellis rhachi-
busque densius stellato-ferrugineis; foliis parvis, breviter petiolatis, mem-
branaceis, penninerviis, petiolis ferrugineo-hirsutis, laminis circa 5-plo bre-
vioribus; laminis ovalibus, basi rotundatis biglandulosis, apice late obtusis
mucronulatis, margine minute denticulatis, supra parce subtus densius
sordideque stellatis, costa venisque subferrugineis subtus prominulis; stipulis
nullis vel inconspicuis; racemis brevibus subdensifloris, rhachi anguloso;
bracteis parvis triangularibus, acutis, hirsutis, persistentibus, marginibus
glandulosis; flos foem.: bracteis unifloris, floribus sessilibus, calycis segmentis
ovato-lanceolatis, subacutis, utrinque flavescenti-hirsutulis; petalorum rudi-
mentis conspicuis, brevibus, glanduliformibus; ovario densius fulvescente
stellato-hirsuto; stylis fere usque ad basin bifidis, cruribus parce stellato-
pilosiusculis; flos masc.: bracteis 1-3-floris, floribus breviter pedicellatis;
calycis segmentis ovato-lanceolatis, obtusiusculis, extus dense villosis; petalis
obovatis, spathulatisve, sepalis longioribus, unguiculo elongato, angusto,
margine longe barbato; receptaculo villoso; staminibus 14-19, filamentis basi
villosis; capsula parva, ovoidea, dense stellato-pubescente; seminibus carun-
culatis, lucidis, minutisime rugulosis.
Petioli 5-10 mm. longi; laminae 2.5-4 mm. longae, 0.9—2 em. latae. Racemi
5-8 em. longi. Bracteae circa 1 mm. longae. Flos masc.: pedicelli 2—5.5
mm. longi; calycis segmenta ex centrum 2.7-3 mm. longa, cirea 1.3 mm. lata;
petala 2.7-3 mm. longa, cirea 1 mm. lata. Flos foem.: calycis segmenta ex
centrum 3—3.4 mm. longa, 0.7—1.1 mm. lata. Capsula 6 mm. longa; semina
5 mm. longa.
Méripa: Paéramo del Morro, 2500 m.; flowers and fruits April 1st, 1922
(Jahn 1063; redescription based on this).
It is difficult to distinguish Croton ferrugineus from the several varieties of
C. flavens L. Jahn’s specimen, however, seems to correspond closely to the
description of the first species, differing only in the smaller leaves, the larger
calyx and also in the presence of glandular rudiments of petals in the pistil-
JAN. 4, 1930 PITTIER: VENEZUELAN PLANTS 11
late flower, a detail which may have escaped to the original observer. From
C. flavens it differs in that the primary veins emerge from the costa at an
acute, not nearly right angle; also in the shape of the basal glands, in the
eaducous female calyx, in the styles divided nearly from the base, and in the
shape and indumentation of the male petals.
Julocroton acuminatissimus Pittier, sp. nov. (Sect. Oligonychia)
Frutex elatus, ramis ramulis angulosis petiolisque dense sordideque stellu-
lato-pubescentibus; foliis membranaceis, petiolis teretibus, laminis 6—7-plo
brevioribus; laminis ovato-lanceolatis, basi latioribus, 3-7-nerviis, rotundatis,
obsolete biglandulosis, apice longissime gradatim acuminatis, marginibus
irregulariter denticulatis, supra viridis crebre minuteque stellulatis, subtus
dense stellulato-pubescentibus; stipulis lineari-setaceis, integris, stellulato-
pilosulis; inflorescentiis subcapituliformibus, apice ramulorum congestis;
spicis breve pedunculatis basi bibracteatis, rachidibus pubescentibus; bracteis
foliaceis, bracteolis unifloris, lineari-setaceis, pilosulis; flos masc. non evolutus;
flos foem.: pedicellis brevibus, sepala utrinque stellulato tomentosis, 3
anterioribus magnis, ovato-lanceolatis, pinnatisectis, 2 posterioribus minori-
bus, integris, setaceo-linearibus; disci glandulis 3 anterioribus cohaerentibus,
subacutis, glabris, posterioribus obsoletis; ovario globoso, stellato-tomentoso,
stylis bis dichotomis, cruribus longissimis, tenuibus, pilosis. Et caetera
ignota.
Frutex usque ad 2m. altus. Petioli 0.7—1.5 cm. longi; laminae 4.5-10 cm.
longae, 2-7 cm. latae. Stipulae 1-1.5 cm. longae. Pedunculi primarii
7-8 cm., secundarii (spicarum) 0.5-2 cm.; pedicelli florum foeminorum
usque ad 0.5 mm. longi. Bracteae 2—2.5 cm., bracteolae 0.8—1.2 cm. longae.
Sepala majora circa 9.5.mm. longa, 4.5-5 mm. lata. Styli plus minusve 7
mm. longi. ;
Yaracuy: Between La Piedra and Yaritagua, in bushes; flowers
September 18th, 1923 (Pittzer 11175, type).
Belongs to Sect. Oligonychia, and is perhaps closely allied with Julocroton
montevidensis Muell.-Arg., differing mainly in the very long acuminate leaves
with shorter petioles, and in the less divided styles.
Manihot filamentosa Pittier, sp. nov.
Arbuscula glaberrima, trunco brevi, ramoso, brunneo, ramis cinereis,
efoliatis, ramulis glaucescentibus, stipulis parvis, lanceolatis subulatisve,
apice plus minusve denticulatis, deciduis; foliis apice ramulorum congestis,
longe petiolatis, membranaceis, petiolis gracilibus, laminis vulgo longioribus,
purpurascentibus, laminis plus minusve ovato-reniformibus, fere ad basin
5-lobulatis, basi late emarginatis minute bistipellatis, supra obscure viridis,
subtus glaucescentibus, reticulatis, costis prominentibus venis venulisque
vix prominulis, lobis penninerviis, sinuato-lyratis, lobulis apice plus minusve
rotundatis, longe acuminatis acutissimis, exterioribus interdum auriculatis,
saepe integris; stipellis subulatis; inflorescentiis terminalibus, ramulosis,
ramulis longe pedunculatis; floribus pedicellatis, virescentibus, pendulis;
pedicellis basi 2-bracteolatis, bracteolis subulatis; florcbus masculis: pedicellis
longiusculis; alabastris ovoideis, angulosis; calyce campanulato, lobulis late
ovatis, brevissime acutatis, marginibus introflexis; disci glandulis plus minusve
12 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 1
coalitis; staminibus 10, liberis, filamentis longissimis convoluto-flexuosis, 5
exterioribus longioribus, omnium glabris, antheris lineari-oblongis; florzbus
foemineis masculis majoribus; lobulis fere usque ad basin liberis, anguste
lanceolatis, acuminatis, marginibus introflexis; discus annularis; ovario
ovoideo, 6-carinato, glabro, stigmatibus brevibus biseriatim flabellatis;
capsula globosa, pedicello apicem versus gradatim incrassato.
Arbuscula (fide Saer) 2-3 m. alta. Stipulae 4-6 mm. longae. Petioli
6-23 em. longi; laminae 6—14 cm. longae, 9-15 em. latae; lobulo mediano 6-13
em. longo, 3.5-6 em. lato, infimi 4-7.5 em. longi, 2-3.5 cm. lati. Inflores-
centiae partiales 10-12 cm. longae, pedunculi circa 7 cm., pedicelli 8-10 mm.
longi; bracteolae 4 mm. longae. Flos masc.: calyx 10 mm. longus, lobulis
cirea 4.5 mm. longis, 4-4.5 mm. latis; fllamenta longiora circa 15 mm., bre-
viora 5 mm. longa; antherae bene evolutae 4-5.2 mm. longae. Flos foem.:
calyx 9-11 mm. longus, lobulis 6.5-7.5 mm. longis, 2-3 mm. latis. Capsula
(non bene evoluta?) 17 mm. longa, 18 mm. diam., pedicello 15 mm. longo.
Lara: Scattered in sandy thorn-bushes along the La Ruesga (mostly dry)
River in the vicinity of Barquisimeto; flowers and fruits August 20, 1929
(J. Saer d’Héguert 366, type); same locality, flowers April 1925 (same collector;
191).
Closely allied to W. carthagenensis (Jaeq.) Muell.-Arg., but differs in the
description of the leaves, in the longer, denticulate stipules, and more
especially in the stamens with very long filaments and elongate, almost
linear anthers. I am indebted to Mr. Saer d’Héguert for several interesting
details taken from the live plant and for the communication of the common
name, Yuca sibidiqua.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
The 993d meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, May 25, 1929.
Program: L. W. Tiuton, Variations in the optical density of glass —Most
optical glasses are not sufficiently homogeneous to obviate compensatory
figuring of the surfaces of certain highly corrected optical systems. These
variations in the optical properties of good glass are matters of the fifth
and sixth decimal places of index of refraction. They have been generally
considered as due to unavoidable differences in chemical composition. It
has, however, been shown by Tool and others that the properties of glass, as
measured at ordinary temperatures, are dependent on the character of the
heat treatments to which the glass has been subjected. Some quantitative
relationships between refractive index and effective annealing temperature
have been recently determined. Furthermore, in the case of a barium flint
glass, 90% of the existing optical heterogeneity was removed by special
reannealings under iso-thermic conditions.
It is now of interest to inquire as to whether the uniformity of optical glass
in general may be improved by more careful annealings. Local variations
in the index of refraction of samples from six types of optical glass were
measured by a prism method and the corresponding index gradients were
computed. The values so obtained for these specimens of ordinary crown,
JAN. 4, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 13
medium flint, and dense flint were, respectively, 0.6, 2.4, and 2.3 x 107°
percm. They were all lower than the gradients found in borosilicate crown,
light barium crown, and dense barium crown, v72., 4.9, 3.1, and 3.7 & 107°
per cm., respectively. Considering only two categories in classing these six
types of glass, it is found that the group which has the low index gradients is
identical with the group which has low index sensitivity to differences in
effective annealing temperature. Apparently there is a significant correlation
existing here. The index deviations can not be due entirely to differences in
chemical composition, and it may be inferred that more careful annealings
will greatly decrease the existing heterogeneities in all of these glasses.
By way of confirmation, Gifford’s data on the existing limits of uniformity
in optical glass were analyzed in a similar way, and with the same result.
When considering this encouraging prospect for increased uniformity in
optical glass, it is well to remember, however, that the index variations now
existing over distances of several centimeters in the best glass correspond to
differences of only 1°C. or less in effective annealing temperature. Con-
sequently, there are difficult problems in connection with the practical
execution of sufficiently iso-thermic annealings. (Auwthor’s abstract.) Discus-
sed by Hryt, Gisu, L. H. ApAms, and PRIzEsv.
E. G. AnpERSON, Colored light measurements on various photometers.—
Four different photometers were used to measure the light transmission of red,
orange-amber, green and blue filters. Each of ten observers made two sets
of measurements on each filter, the measurements being made on different
days. Each observer made from five to ten individual observations in each
set of measurements. The average deviations of the individual observations
from the observer’s mean, for each set of measurements were 3.0, 4.2, 4.5, and
4.5 per cent, respectively, for the Ives-Kingsbury, Flicker, Weber, Martens,
and the Standard Lummer-Brodhun photometers. The average deviations
of the means of each set of measurements from the mean of the two were 3.1,
5.0, 4.1 and 5.0 per cent respectively, for the photometers named in the same
order as above. ‘The results indicate that the measurements on the Weber
and Martens might well be adjusted for a normal or average observer by the
method of Ives and Crittenden for flicker measurements. The adjustment
of the Lummer-Brodhun measurements appear to be less definite. (Author’s
abstract.) Discussed by Prirst and L. H. Apams.
Haruan W. Fisx, Secular variation of magnetic intensity and its accelerations
in Pacific countries—Charts showing the lines of equal annual change in the
horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field have been prepared in
detail for various parts of the world by investigators in the countries chiefly
concerned, but it is difficult to combine these small charts into a chart of the
whole Earth, chiefly since they refer to different epochs. World-charts have
been prepared, such as that given as an inset on the British Admiralty chart
of “Curves of Equal Horizontal Force,’”’ but these show the general trend of
the changes over large areas, and omit details which the latest observations
have disclosed. In a previous discussion the author pointed out that in the
Western Hemisphere there are two distinct centers, or “foci,’’ around which
the rate of annual decrease of horizontal intensity is large, one of these foci
being in southern Argentina, and of greater intensity in the West Indies.
Separating these along the Amazon Valley there is a belt within which up to
about the year 1917, the horizontal intensity was increasing, but since that
date has been decreasing at a low rate in the west, and increasing slightly
along the Atlantic coast. Hence the lines of equal annual change of this
element on a chart of the Western Hemisphere take the form of two series of
14. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 1
concentric ovals which seem to undergo alternate dilation and contraction,
in part but not wholly, in phase with the sunspot cycle.
An analogous condition was found to exist in the Eastern Hemisphere. A
negative center (around which the horizontal component is decreasing) exists
in western Siberia, but in the southern part of the hemisphere there are two
such centers, one of extremely rapid change south of Cape Town, and a second
of less intensity west of Australia. In southern India there is a center around
which the horizontal intensity is increasing, and which offers especially
favorable conditions for investigation because of the number of active ob-
servatories in the vicinity. When the mean annual values of horizontal
intensity from the reports of an observatory near one of these foci of rapid
change have been suitably smoothed and plotted, it is found that the resulting
rate-curves are very dissimilar, even for observatories comparatively near
together. The contrast is even more striking when the acceleration-curves
are compared. The acceleration-curves for Sitka, Honolulu and Christchurch
(New Zealand), all of which are remote from foci of rapid change, are very
similar and all bear a close resemblance to the smoothed sunspot curve for the
same years. When a composite of these three acceleration-curves from such
widely separated observatories is plotted, and upon it is superposed a curve
made by plotting the departure of the annual sunspot numbers from the mean
number for the years under discussion, it is found in general that the accelera-
tions are positive as long as the number of sunspots is greater than the mean
number, and becomes negative when the number falls below the mean. This
is not in agreement with the widely accepted principle, that the apparent
secular rate increases as the number of spots decreases, and vice versa.
Acceleration-curves for stations within the area of rapid annual change
show other characteristics which seem to be superimposed upon the typical
changes which are concurrent with the sunspot cycle and exemplified by the
three observatories named. By use of the observatory reports and available
field-observations, it was possible to construct the lines of equal annual change
around the positive center in the vicinity of Ceylon as they were in 1918.
With much less data it was possible to draw the same lines in the positions
occupied in 1906. Consideration of the positions occupied by these lines as
the center passed from southern China to Ceylon furnishes an explanation
of the apparent inconsistencies in the acceleration-curves for neighboring
observatories. For illustration, as the center passed very near Toungoo, the
annual rate increased very rapidly on its approach and diminished correspond-
ingly as it receded; Barrackpore on the other hand was so situated with respect
to the path of the center that it remained between the same two contours, and
therefore experienced a very small change in rate. In a similar way the
differences in the acceleration and rate-curves for the Soviet observatories
near the negative center in western Siberia can be accounted for.
It is probable therefore that these areas within which the annual change of
horizontal intensity is large, are undergoing changes of various kinds. There
is an alternate expansion and contraction, in phase with the sunspot cycle,
and a continual shift of position accompanied by alterations inform. Whether
such areas disappear altogether to reappear elsewhere, it is not possible at
present to say. That high rates of change should continue in a given locality
for long periods is improbable because of the unreasonable distortions in the
distribution of the element which would result. For example, the horizontal
intensity at Cape Town has diminished by more than 16 per cent in the past
30 years. Should the same rate of decrease be maintained for 150 years more,
JAN. 4, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 15
that component would vanish, creating the conditions of a magnetic south
pole at that place. Whether the movement of these areas on opposite sides
of the Earth are in any way connected has not thus far been disclosed, and
unfortunately the present means for collecting the data necessary for a satis-
factory solution of the problem are far from sufficient. (Author’s abstract).
Discussed by GIsH.
Oscar 8. ApAMs, Recording Secretary.
ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
The 412th meeting was held at 8 p.m., Thursday, June 6, 1929, in the
National Museum. In the absence of the president and first vice-president,
Mr. F.C. BisHorp, the second vice-president, presided. ‘There were present
29 members and 22 visitors. Mr. Frank D. DEGANT, Cleveland, Ohio, was
elected to membership.
The first feature on the regular program was an informal address by Dr.
L. O. Howarp, entitled ‘Observations on some entomologists and their work,
during a recent western trip.”’ He outlined briefly the work being done
by a considerable number of entomological workers met by him during
his recently completed tour of certain portions of the West. Among these
were the entomologists at New Orleans, La.,—Ho.LiLoway in his work with
sugar cane insects, and Buiss in his investigations of the camphor scale.
During the time spent in California inspections were made of the activities of
CAMPBELL, STONE, SMITH, TIMBERLAKE, QUAYLE, BoypmEN, and others at
Alhambra, Riverside, and various other places in southern California. An
auto trip was then taken to San Francisco and Berkeley, where contacts were
made with VAN DuzeEE, VAN Dyk, BLAISDELL, EVERMANN, HERMS, SEVERIN,
STANDLEY, FREEBORN, and others, and inspections were made of the sugar
leafhopper work and the recent accessions to the Museum there. While at
Berkeley, Dr. Howard received from the University of California the honor-
ary degree of “LL.D” and was guest of honor at a banquet at which over
70 entomologists were present. While in Oregon, inspection was made of the
work of Mote, ATWELL, and others on European earwig, and of Rockwoop,
REEHER, and others on cereal and forage pests, and while in Washington
State with that of KincaprE, Hatcu, Doucntt, Spricut, and others. While
en route homeward, stops were made with such State workers as CHAPMAN,
RinEy, Wiuson, Mzrcatr, Fuint, Hayns, Batpurr, FRison, and others at
the Universities of Wisconsin, Minnesota, and Illinois. Dr. Howard com-
pared the scope and character of the present day entomological work with
that of the limited field and restricted activities of early workers, and had
only words of earnest praise for, and appreciation of, the work now being done,
and dwelt with hearty enthusiasm upon the prospects for the future in en-
tomological work. A number of slides of the entomologists under considera-
tion were shown. Discussed by BisHopp, McInpoo, GAHAN, Morrison,
and RoHWER.
The next feature on the program was an informal address by R. E. Snop-
GRASS, entitled “Reviews of some European literature on insect morphology.”’
This was a brief resume of some of the more important recent items
which had come to his attention of entomological literature dealing with
morphology. These included certain papers by WEBER, DENis, Morison,
JACKSON, and Uvarov. Separates of the pavers were exhibited. Discussed
by Howarp, CampBeLL, Ronwer, and BisHopp.
16 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 1
Dr. WILLIAM ScuHaus reported briefly on the recent accession by the Na-
tional Museum of the collection of Lepidoptera recently presented by the
Brooklyn Museum of Arts and Sciences. He was in Brooklyn from April 8
to 15 packing the collection and making arrangements for its shipment by
truck. It contains a considerable number of very valuable types of species
described by SmitH, Grote, HuttzeE, Harry Epwarps and others. The
entire collection comprises over 900 drawers and is valued at over $60,000.
It contains, among others, the Nomogan collection valued at $10,000.
The bequest to the National Museum by the late Col. Wirt Rosinson,
of the U.S. Military Academy at West Point, was reported by H. 8. BARBER,
whose duty it had been to prepare the insect collection for transportation to
Washington. Col. Robinson’s interest in Natural History had built up a
large collection of insects, besides birds and mammals, and he had erected
a private museum near his residence overlooking the James River at Wingina,
Va., where he had intended to devote his leisure to their study. By his un-
timely death only three months after retirement and just at the beginning
of this long contemplated leisure we have lost the chance of such discoveries
as his ardent, experienced industry would surely have made in this neglected
section of Virginia. The collection of beetles was arranged in about 150 large
drawers and is rich in unstudied material. His great liberality to students
resulted in his having no types but original series (probably paratypes) of
such of his discoveries as Arthromacra robinsoni Leng, Anthonomus robinsont
Blatchley, Pzezocorynus virginiae Leng, Gyrohypnus davis: Notman, ete.,
besides certain very rare forms such as the third known U. 8. example of
Enoclerus viduus (Klug) (synonym, Clerus jouteli Leng), are added to the
National collection. The occurrence of Lucanus elaphus in central Virginia
is demonstrated by four males and a female from near Wingina. The bulk
of the material was collected by him either near West Point, N. Y., or Win-
gina, Va., but he also collected in Panama, Jamaica, Cuba, and elsewhere.
Mr. BisHopr reported that an investigation recently had been started of
parasites of reindeer in Alaska, and that Dr. W. E. Doves had been assigned
to the problem, and would sail from Seattle on June 8 for Alaska, where a
laboratory would be established at Nome in coéperation with the territorial
government and the U.S. Biological Survey, with PALMER at Fairbanks and
MILLER at Nome.
J.S. Wave, Recording Secretary
Obituary
Rey. Francis ANTHONY Tonporr, 8. J., Professor of Physics and Director
of the Seismological Observatory at Georgetown University, and a member
of the AcapEMy, died on November 29, 1929, at:the age of 59 years. He was
born in Boston, Mass. , and received the degree of A.B. from Woodstock, Md.,
College in 1895, and Ph. D. from Georgetown in 1914. He was an eminent
ue nerey. © on seismolog gy and related subjects.
INTS OF THE ‘
AFFILIATED D SOCIETIES
Bar Saree UI otk CL
‘wt he aS 2 oS ae. 4"
1% i oF ingeet WO ot it ¥
Lies \ “
CONTENTS |
Jy Baa MOR AEH) ecek eS “see ss OE Ea
Botany.—Botanical notes on, and descriptions of, new and old species o
zuelan plants.—III. Old and new species of Rupherbinceas (Conel !
PROPER. coe. ae OR a bee bee ee eee teen ee
-PRocEEDINGS : i iy
The Philosophical Society. eee sees ee ease ects eeeeeceee ree eteten
The Entomélogical, Society: et oe ce ess » See
Osrruary: F. A. Aue
>
a ts
a
os
as
sad ~#
% ;
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY.
President: Auzs Hnoutdica U. S. Ni onal Museum.
JANUARY 18, 1980 No. 2
= | a ‘OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
| OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
JOHN B. REESIDE, JR. Epg@ar W. WoouarD — EpGar T. WHERRY
: NATIONAL MUSEUM GEORGE WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY BUREAU OF CHEMISTRY AND SOILS
g
s ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L. H. ApAmMs 8. A. Ronwtr
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY : ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E, A. GotpMan G. W. Stross
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
5 AGneEs CHASE J. R. Swanton
BOTANICAL SOCIETY 5 ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
Roger C. WELLS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
>.
So
a Se
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Royrat AND GUILFORD AVES.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
td Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office, at Baltimore, Md., under the
ty Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing ata special rate of postage provided for
« in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This Jounnat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to rere
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this end it publishes:
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; @)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; ony
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourNnatis issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corres ond to calendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appr on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should -
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate —
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
eerially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be a * ea
by zine etchings being preferable.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof en be sent to authors.
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors je
exercise due care in seeing that copy is follow
ed.
Authors' Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices, rok
Copies 4pp. {8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page,
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in
Ty pi may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional 100,
.
a
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprint
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript.
The rate Be haraah deat DEP DOlUMe TSE ss oie a 2s on od snes maces «eee eRe . $6. 00*
Semi-monthly Humbers s,s o:-''s sass «soins gab oo dhiee ace ethan Sark <0 4 6 te
Monthly numbers (13, 14, 15, July, August, September) . Ae Tree.
Remittances should be panes ayable to “Washington pelt of Sarshede and
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London.
Ezxchanges.—The JourNAL does not exchange with other publications.
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, iphesnice that claim is. nae
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members of scientific societies. etalates with the Academy
he i >
* -
* ince as
ere) a
an aS
ed Re
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Von. 20 JANUARY 18, 19380 No. 2
GEOPHYSICS.—Hypotheses on the development of the earth.: B.
GUTENBERG, Frankfort a/M. (Communicated by W. D. Lam-
BERT. )
The hypotheses that have been made as to the evolution of the earth
involve a great many assumptions. In general there are four groups
of these: the condition of the earth at the moment when the assumed
forces began to act, the forces themselves, the mode of action of the
forces and the condition of the interior of the earth today.
_ The usual method has been to search for a single force that might
have effected all the changes in the earth’s crust, and then to try to
explain all of them by this one force. But that method, of which the
best example is the hypothesis of contraction, is not sound. We must
try to find out all the forces that can produce changes in the structure
of the earth and the effects themselves. Only by applying this method
can we solve our problem.
The researches on the forces that act have given the following re-
sults. We have:
Chemical forces and gravity: They formed the different shells of the
earth and the changes due to chemical causes continue to occur in the
crust of the earth.
We have cosmical forces: They are difficult to state. The most
important are the tidal forces, which seem to have caused the separa-
tion of the moon from the earth.
Forces, the importance of which seems to have been overlooked are
those caused by the deviation of the earth’s crust from hydrostatic pres-
sure. The higher continents try to move toward the oceans. These
forces are of the order of 10° dynes per square centimeter (dynes /em?).
1 Received November 26, 1929. These hypotheses are to be more fully explained and
developed in the Handbuch der Geophysik, Band 8.
17
18 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 2
Other important forces are those caused by the cooling of the earth
and the crystallizing of the matter in the earth’s interior. Both together
effect a contraction of the circumference of the earth of the order of
2 cm. in a century.
Movements of masses, which disturb the equilibrium of the earth’s
crust, are caused by erosion and sedimentation.
The difference of height between the center of gravity of the con-
tinents and the matter that forms the bottom of the oceans causes
the ‘‘Polflucht’”’ forces, which strive to move the continents against the
equator with a force of the order of 107 dynes/cm.?.
To the greater forces belong, finally, the stresses caused by movements
of the earth’s crust relative to the axes of the earth.
All other forces seem to have no influence on the great changes in
the figure and the state of the earth. This seems to hold in the case
of the forces causing a westerly drift which are due to tidal friction,
and, according to Schweydar,? to the precession of continents. In the
latter case the complete analysis seems not to have been made, and it
appears to me to be not impossible that such a force is very small or
does not exist at all. Local chemical and physical occurrences are the
causes of local voleanic events. Finally small stresses are caused by
the movements of the poles with a period of one year and the Newcomb
period, by the changes of air pressure, by tides and changes of the water
level, by formation and melting of ice, by denudation and other similar
forces. They have only a little effect. In some cases they are the
“trigger” forces that cause breaking of the earth’s crust and earth-
quakes, and in others they cause changes of level, for instance the
uplift of Scandinavia.
The original state of the earth is unknown, but we can suppose that
at an early time it was a hot amorphous body the crystallizing point
of which was nowhere attained and which possessed relatively little
strength. Nevertheless even at that time the incompressibility and
rigidity might have been of the same order as today.
Now gravity acted on the matter and caused the heavier material
to be pushed down near the center. In addition there was a chemical
separation which, according to Goldschmidt,’ acted in a similar man-
ner as the processes taking place in a blast furnace. Both events
together caused the division of the matter into the core, the intermedi-
ate layer and the mantle. In subsequent time the difference of
density between core and intermediate layer prevented the mixture
?W.Scuweypar. Zeitschr. Ges. Erdkunde (Berlin) 1921: 123.
*V.M. Goupscumipt. Naturwissenschaften 10: 918. 1922.
JAN. 18, 1930 GUTENBERG: DEVELOPMENT OF THE EARTH 19
of these two parts and the existence of currents between them, and we
may suppose that the core of the earth is today in the same state as
after its formation. In the outer shell, however, currents might have
been caused by thermal and chemical events, which continue today.
At an early time when this occurred, the tides of the earth caused
by the sun seem to have come into resonance with the period of free
vibration of the earth, and, according to the researches of Jeffreys,
it seems possible that in this way one tide rose so high that a portion
of the earth was torn away and formed the moon. In the region
where it was formed, the outer shell of the earth was removed, hot
magma rose from the deeper parts to the earth’s crust which had
cooled to such a degree that its strength was great enough to prevent
currents. Before the formation of the moon, the earth’s crust prob-
ably had been nearly in a hydrostatic equilibrium. Now this was
disturbed, and from that moment we have one part of the earth’s
crust with a sialic shell and another part without it, where the moon
was removed from the outer shell. The bottom of the Pacific seems
to be the remaining part of this region which was denuded of sial,
while other parts are still covered by sial.
The sialic part of the earth’s crust must have a higher surface than
the region from which the moon has been removed, because the matter
of the deeper layers which entered the gap was heavier. ‘These de-
pressed parts of the earth’s crust were filled by water which had con-
densed and caused a sinking down of the bottom of the ocean and up-
lift of the continental parts, so that the difference of height between
ocean and continent grew larger.’ Now the forces that tend to bring
about equilibrium of the earth’s crust increased. They are given by
the following formula:
foe — (p — bh) ge h =2-10°-h dynes/cm.?
where P = hydrostatic pressure; p = average density of the rocks;
g = gravity; and h = average height of rocks above the average
height of the bottom of the sea, the water of the latter being assumed
to have the depth h and p = 1; the configuration of the coast is with-
out influence.
At the time before these forces caused an increase of the continental
part of the earth’s crust, the height of the continents above the bottom
of the ocean was probably greater than today, but even if we accept
‘H. Jerrreys. The Earth. Ed. 2, Cambridge, 1929.
°Cf. T. Gesztr. Gerland’s Beitr. Geophys. 22: 353. 1929,
20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 2
5 km., we get Pmax = 10° dynes per square centimeter. The average
strength of the earth’s crust (cf. Jeffreys, note 4) today is of the order
of 5.10° dynes/cem?. It is therefore to be expected that in the course
of time the continental matter in the regions with less strength would
flow and spread. ‘This event must have occurred in such a manner
that the isostatic equilibrium was maintained, that is to say, for any
two arbitrarily chosen columns with a height Z of the order of 100
kilometers,
h
\ pdZ
must have the same value. In the case of a homogeneous layer of
sial overlying a homogeneous mass of sima with densities p, and p,
respectively, as shown in the accompanying diagram, the following
relations must exist:
Surface of the earth
yo.
L N\
(
x{
(
|
EEE a ee ES
i
|
|
|
|
| sial
sial |
|
hi 4
Pl
Pl
ie]
ie
B
©
it
@*6 (0) 6 \s''9) 0 sie [el'e\/e evan rs
sima
p2
| hy
bp: + hip: = h pi Le ps = pi (hy — hy) Mp2 = pr (he — hy +x +p)
wi(x +) = piip, wix = pi: (pe: — pi)
Then, since p, is much greater than p,—p,, » is much greater than x; in
other words, in places where the layer of sial has grown thinner, this
must generally happen in the lower parts where sima must enter.
JAN. 18, 19830 GUTENBERG: DEVELOPMENT OF THE EARTH 21
Now the researches of Taylor, Wegener, Koppen® and others show
that observations of many different sorts are readily explained only
with the assumption that all continents were one entire complex
in earlier geological times and have moved apart one from the other
and do so even today. But contrary to Wegener,’ I think that this
happened by flowing as an effect of hydrostatic pressure and not by
fissuring.®
Figure 1. Development of the continents (+ = Europe)
a. Carboniferous; b. Cretaceous; c. Hocene; d. Quaternary
We do not know what was the position of the continental block
immediately after the formation of themoon. The equilibrium of the
earth’s crust was completely disturbed and stresses were caused which
tended to come into equilibrium. This must have been a period of
great movements. ‘There is not enough climatic evidence that can
be used to determine the position of the different parts of the earth’s
surface. ‘The first geological epoch in which some quiet seems to have
been restored was the Carboniferous. All climatic evidence seems to
show, as Képpen, Wegener and others have found, that at this time
nearly the whole complex of continents was situated in the southern
hemisphere of the earth. (Fig. 1.) Under the action of the hydro-
static forces of the earth this block began to drift apart. At the same
time the Polflucht forces tended to move the entire block over its base
in such a manner that the integral of all these forces became zero, so
that'the masses of the continental block situated north of the equator
6 KOPPEN UND WEGENER, Die Klimate der geologischen Vorzeit. Berlin, 1924.
7A.WxcGENER. Die Entstehung der Kontinente und Ozeane. Aufl. 4, 1929.
8B. GutenperG. Gerland’s Beitr. Geophys. 16: 239. 1927; 18: 225. 1927.
22 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 2
were of the same order as the masses south of it. This state now has
been reached with some approximation. The movements must cause
high mountains at the borders of the block, as actually observed.
In this case we must take into consideration that today the limits
of the continental block are given by the western coast of North and
South America, Antarctica, New Zealand, the Tonga Islands, New
Guinea, the Philippines and Japan. All parts of the earth’s crust
between these limits, according toseismological researches, seem to have
the same structure, and only the thickness of the layer of sial varies.
It is less in the bottom of the Atlantic and the Indian Oceans. On the
other hand, the limits of the Pacific are sharply marked by very great
absorption of the surface waves.* The varying friction on the base of
the block, which surely is of lesser order than the strength of the differ-
ent parts, caused variations in the flow. Alsoa great deal of the earth’s
crust was too strong to permit flowing at all. In such a manner the
difference of the thickness of the uppermost layer was caused.
Besides these motive powers there are apparently some kinds of
forces which strive to move the earth’s crust westward, but as has been
said, these seem to have been small.
During the action of these forces, the cooling of the earth’s crust
was proceeding, crystallization was going on, and the deeper layers of
the earth’s crust (say between 50 and 200 kilometers, as a first approxi-
mation) contracted, so that the outer shell had to fit the diminishing
base. The stresses arising in this manner accumulated. Only in
the outermost parts of the shell can they be equalized by breaking and
movements of the broken parts. In the deeper regions, in general,
there are movements by flow which begin as soon as the forces exceed
the strength, which differs in different parts of the earth’s crust. The
smallest strength is in the weak parts of the earth, which are the bound-
aries of the different layers, notably the borders of the Pacific. It is
there that the movements compensating the stresses caused by con-
traction must be most noticeable. These movements of shrinking are
accompanied by outflow of magma. Indeed the whole borders of the
Pacific are covered by volcanoes and signs of magmatic action have
occurred at different geological epochs.
But other factors have also influenced the events. There exist
a great many other forces!® which cause stresses superimposed upon
those caused by cooling. Where all these stresses act in the same
direction, movements must reach their maximum. On the other hand
* B. GUTENBERG. Handb. Geophys. 4: Lief. 1. 1929.
10 B. GuTenBERG. Handb. Geophys. 3: Abschn. 1. 1930.
JAN. 18, 19830 GUTENBERG: DEVELOPMENT OF THE EARTH © 23
the strength of the earth’s crust was influenced by different events.
Movements of the poles, or movements of the earth’s crust relative to
its base, caused regressions and transgressions, as the water at once
assumes any new position of equilibrium. Furthermore, sedimenta-
tion was greatest in the regions of transgression, and caused new sink-
ing of the bottom of these regions. In all places where sedimentation
occurred, there must have taken place compensating movements of
flow in deeper regions. ‘The masses pressed down reached hotter parts,
melting began below such parts of the earth’s crust, and a geosyncline,
an extremely weak zone, was formed. One recognizes that in such a
manner the weakness and the strength were modified in the different
parts of the continental block. Especially is it evident that in certain
regions sedimentation was relatively very great, and that even there
weak zones were formed. If now the forces assumed greater pro-
portions and the strength was exceeded, these zones were pressed out
and mountains were formed. During all these events isostasy was
maintained as nearly as possible by movements in the deeper layers.
On the other hand there originated thick layers of sediments, vast
regions of which, with thicknesses of many kilometers, being laterally
pressed together to depths of ten or even more kilometers.
I think that in this way all attributes of geosynclines are explained
in the most simple manner and in connection with the great events of
the history of the earth’s surface. The material of these geosynclines
being pressed out forms, as we have seen, a smaller but thicker region
of rocks. ‘Therefore it is not permissible from the thickness of these
layers to draw conclusions about the original thickness, and it is not
necessary to base calculations upon sedimentation of so great a thick-
ness as has usually been done.
After this event the geosyncline has lost its mobility and the weak
zone has disappeared. ‘The mountains thus formed are very steep,
denudation has abnormally great values, and sedimentation increases
near the new coast, the conditions there being then favorable to the
formation of a new geosyncline, running nearly parallel to the pre-
ceding one.
Now we will turn back to the forces that press out the weak zones
and form the geosynclines. First we have the stresses caused by
shrinking of the earth’s crust. They are superimposed on forces
caused by the Poljlucht, which press together the northern and southern
parts of the continental block in the neighborhood of the equator,
where they tend to produce an elevation with a height of twenty meters.
The stresses caused in this way are entirely insufficient to produce any
24 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 2
motions as they are only of the order of one hundredth of the strength,
but they enhance the effect of the stresses caused by the contraction,
with the result that these stresses reach their maximum to the north
and to the south of the equator and are directed against it. |
Generally the first motions caused by these stresses must arise in
a geosyncline in the neighborhood of the equator, and must produce
mountains nearly parallel to it which extend over large regions. In
these regions the geosynclines were pressed out, as has been pointed
out. This happens not only at the outside of the earth’s crust, but
also on the inside, approximately according to the laws of isotasy.
Unterstromungen,—currents in the deeper layers,—were produced to
maintain the equilibrium, as nearly as possible. The motion extended
over larger regions, but by degrees the stresses caused by contraction
became exhausted. The Polflucht forces remained unaltered. They
could affect some motions in the disturbed regions, but finally all was
solidified, strength reached its normal value, the motions ceased, the
initial conditions recurred, an epoch of the revolution of the history
of the earth had passed and, during subsequent time, only epirogenic
movements took place.
In the following epochs the stresses caused by the cooling of the
earth accumulate anew and finally a new orogenic period begins, but
now according to the changes of the position of the equator and other
regions in the neighborhood of the new equator. ‘These parallel
changes of the position of the equator and the zones of mountain build-
ing can be easily traced in the case of Europe, where both travelled
southward during the later geological epochs.
My sketch of the evolution of the earth has come toitsend. Ithink
I have shown how it can be explained on the basis of forces that must:
be expected according to theory, and is in good agreement with a
great deal of observation. Let me now put a last question: What will
be the further evolution of the earth? The continental block is at
present lying nearly symmetrical to the equator. Therefore it is not
probable that great movements of this block as a whole will arise. In
other words, it is improbable that the poles will make greater move-
ments relative to the earth’s crust. Indeed observations of Lambert4
and others have shown that these movements today are very small and
that their direction is opposite to that we have found for the preced-
ing geological epochs. The changes of climate during the last epoch,
the glacial period, have nothing to do with our problem. ‘They are
1W.D. Lampert. Astron. Journ. 34: 107. 1922.
JAN. 18, 1930 WHERRY: A LONG LOST PHLOX 25
caused by changes of the astronomical elements of the earth (cf.
Képpen and Wegener, footnote 6).
The motions caused by hydrostatic pressure continue, though dimin-
ishing a little according to the degree of spreading out of the continen-
tallayer. The distances between the different points of the continents
must increase and the surface of the stretched regions must continue
to sink. Probably the sinking of the western coast of Europe is an
accompanying effect of these events. Finally stresses caused by the
shrinking of the earth and the Poljflucht forces accumulate until a new
orogenic period begins and new mountain building sets in, in the neigh-
borhood of the equator. It may be stated that there is a great differ-
ence between the events in the interior of the continental block,—for
example, in Europe, where Polflucht forces and shrinking work together
—and in the borders of the block,—the coast of the Pacific, where as in
the case of America the shrinking stresses are compensated together
with the hydrostatic movements which continue to act nearly un-
altered.
BOTANY .—A long lost Phlox... Epcar T. WHERry, Washington,
DEC:
The herbarium of Samuel B. Buckley, now at the Missouri Botanical
Garden in St. Louis, includes a specimen of Phlox labelled ‘Phlox
No. 2, Mts. White Sulphur Springs, Va. June, 1838.’’ This bears a
superficial resemblance to P. pilosa, but closer examination shows that
Buckley was right in declining to ascribe it to that or any other recog-
nized species. How this striking plant escaped the attention of the
many botanists who visited the region around White Sulphur Springs
(now in West Virginia) during the subsequent three quarters of a
century is amystery, but the fact remains that it is not included inany
collection made during that period to which the writer has had access,
nor is it mentioned in Maillspaugh’s flora of the state. This Phlox
was first rediscovered by Miss Marian 8. Franklin of Lewisburg about
1919, and specimens collected by her near White Sulphur Springs are
preserved in the Gray Herbarium (September 4, 1920, in fruit) and
the herbarium of the University of Pennsylvania (May 22, 1922).
It had been labeled P. pilosa, and when I first saw it in the field, during
a vacation trip in 1923, the same misidentification was made. Early
in June, 1929, on another visit to the region, in the company of Mr.
1 Received December 15, 1929.
26 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 2
J. E. Benedict, Jr., its relationships were worked out, and several
stations for it were discovered. ‘The data obtained justify announcing
it as an independent species, which seems appropriately named:
Phlox buckleyi Wherry, sp. nov.
Plant perennial, with one or more decumbent stems 3 to 20 cm. long, each
bearing at the tip a closely set group of long narrow evergreen leaves, from
the midst of which arises the erect flowering shoot, 15 to 40 cm. tall, with 3
to 7 nodes below the inflorescence; stem glabrous below and increasingly
glandular-pubescent upward; leaves glabrate, or the upper more or less
pubescent, opposite, the blades thickish, sessile, acuminate; lower leaves
linear to somewhat lanceolate or oblanceolate, often ensiform, mostly 50 to
125 mm. long and 2 to 5 mm. wide, the upper ones ranging from short lanceo-
late at the base of the flowering shoot, to linear-lanceolate, up to 80 mm. long
and 8 mm. wide, near the middle, and to broadly lanceolate, 40 mm. long and
12 mm. wide, toward the top; inflorescence a small to moderately large corym-
bose or somewhat paniculate group of cymes, densely glandular-pubescent;
bracts similar to the uppermost leaves, rapidly decreasing in size upwards;
pedicels short; calyx 7 to 13 mm. long, the sepals united to about 2/3 their
length, tipped with short awns; corolla-limb bright purple, usually near
phlox or mallow purple (Ridgway’s 65 or 67 b), the eye somewhat paler and
often bearing a purple 5-rayed star formed by deltoid patches of slightly
deepened color toward the lobe-bases, the tube purplish violet to gray, glandu-
lar-pubescent; petals 25 to 35 mm. long, united to 2/3 their length, the tube
thus 17 to 23 mm. long, the obovate to nearly orbicular lobes 8 to 12 mm. long
and 7 to 10 mm. wide, terminally truncate and entire, slightly erose, or barely
emarginate; stamens nearly as long as the corolla-tube, or one sometimes
longer, the average distances from tube-orifice to anther tips being respec-
tively 0, 0.5, 2.0, 3.5, and 5.0 mm.; anthers cadmium yellow or essentially so;
styles 14 to 20 mm. long, united to within 1 mm. of the tip, the 3 stigmas lying
in the midst of the anthers, or slightly exserted; ovules usually 2, but sometimes
1 or 3 per cell; capsule about 5 mm. long,
Type locality, White Sulphur Springs, Greenbrier County, West Virginia;
type specimen collected by S. B. Buckley in June, 1838, in herbarium of
Missouri Botanical Garden.
Thus far, six localities for Phlox buckleyi have been found, which,
from west to east, are as follows: Greenbrier County, West Virginia,—
? mile southeast of Caldwell, + mile south of White Sulphur Springs
station (probably the site of Buckley’s original collection), and 14
miles southeast of White Sulphur Springs village; Alleghany County,
Virginia,—1 mile north of Alleghany station, 14 miles southeast of this
station, and 1 mile southwest of Longdale Furnace. The maximum
diameter of its recognized range is thus barely 40 miles (65 kilometers).
The normal habitat at all these places is a thinly wooded slope toward
the base of a hill of Devonian shale, the soil being usually a humus-
rich gravel of subacid reaction.
JAN. 18, 1930
WHERRY: A LONG LOST PHLOX
Figure 1. Phlox buckleyi Wherry.
27
28 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 2
This very distinet species belongs in a different section of the genus
from P. pilosa, which it resembles at fitst sight, as shown by thetde-
cumbent stems with evergreen terminal leaves, the well-united sépals,
and the long stamens and styles. It is actually most closelyirelated
to P. ovata, which grows in the same region, but differs in the much
narrower leaves, the abundant glandular pubescence, and the double
ovules; moreover, even where intimately associated, the two show no
tendency to intergrade or to hybridize. Its aspect is brought out by
the two photographs reproduced on page 27, the upper representing
a habitat view taken at the locality southeast of [Caldwell, West
Virginia, June 1, 1929, and the lower a group of pressed specimens
from the same place, X i. The highly distinctive tufts of ensiform
leaves suggest, as a common name for the species, Swordleaf Phlox.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
The 995th meeting was a joint meeting with the Geological Society of
Washington, and was held in the auditorium of the Interior Department
building, Wednesday, October 23, 1929, with Vice-President LAMBERT of the
Philosophical Society in the chair.
The program of the evening consisted of an illustrated address by Dr.
BENO GUTENBERG, Professor of Geophysics at the University of Frankfurt-
am-Main, on “‘Some hypotheses on the development of the Earth’s crust’ (pub-
lished in this number). It was discussed by Messrs. Bow15 and H&cx.
The 996th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, November 9,
1929.
The program of the evening consisted of two illustrated communications:
P. R. Hey, V. L. Carisuer, and W. F. SnypER. Absorption of sound
at oblique angles of incidence.—The effect of oblique angles of incidence upon
the sound absorption of a substance is a point concerning which there has
been up to the present time no experimental evidence. Parts has published
a theoretical discussion leading to a formula which indicates that as we pass
from normal incidence to grazing incidence the absorption should increase
considerably, being about 50 per cent greater at 60°.
Experiments recently performed at the Bureau of Standards appear to
show that the absorption of sound is independent of the angle of incidence.
It seems probable that the error in Paris’ discussion is due to the fact that
sound absorption is produced by friction, converting sound energy into heat.
Friction is likely to produce rotational motion in fluids, and where rotational
motion exists there can be no velocity potential. In consequence, the cus-
tomary differential equation for sound motion, in which the dependent vari-
able is the velocity potential, fails to hold in a region of sound absorption.
(Authors’ abstract.) Discussed by HumpHreys, Hutsurt, - LITTLEHALES,
GisH, PAWLING, and others.
\
JAN. 18, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 29
E. O. Huxsurt: Jons and electrical currents in the upper atmosphere.—
It is assumed that the ionization in the upper atmosphere is caused by
the ultraviolet light of the sun and that the ion and electron densities at noon
at the equator are those required by the theory of wireless wave propagation.
From the laws of recombination of the ions and the diffusion and drift of the
ions in the earth’s magnetic and gravitational fields the distribution of the
ions over the earth is worked out. This distribution turns out to be that
required by the diamagnetic theory of the solar diurnal variation of the earth’s
magnetism. The gravitational drift currents are found to flow mainly along
the parallels of latitude in the following way: On the daylight hemisphere
(1) a current sheet flowing eastward in the levels above 150 km. which at the
sunrise and sunset longitudes divides into two sheets; (2) one of these flows
westward on the day side of the earth underneath (1) in the levels below 150
km., and (3) the other sheet continues eastward in the upper levels around on
the night side of the earth. The current is mainly between the fortieth par-
allels of latitude, north and south, and falls to lower values at the higher
latitudes. The total currents in the three sheets are about 10’, 8 x 10° and
2 x 10° amperes, respectively. The east and west daytime current sheets sub-
tract from each other leaving in effect an eastward current of about 2 x 10°
amperes flowing around the earth all the time. This causes a magnetic field
agreeing in magnitude and type with that obtained by Bauer in his 1922
analysis of the magnetic field of the earth of external origin.
As a result of the drift currents, the sunset longitude of the earth is at a
potential of several hundred volts above that of the sunrise longitude. This
electric field combined with the earth’s magnetic field causes the ions and
electrons on the night side of the earth to drift upward with velocities of
order 10? cm. sec.~!. The ions and electrons move into regions of lower
pressure and therefore do not recombine as fast as they otherwise would.
This removes a difficulty from an earlier calculation which yielded too great
a night-time rate of disappearance of the free charges. The upward drift of
the ionization causes a rise of the Kennelly-Heaviside layer which is, partially
at least, compensated by the fall due to the cooling and contraction of the
atmosphere at night, and is complicated by the diffusion of the ions. It is
difficult to say how much of the night-time rise of the layer observed in
experiments with wireless rays may be genuine rise and how much may be
an apparent rise due to delayed group velocities, or to other causes. (Author’s
abstract.) Discussed by Gisu, L. H. Apams, and others.
Epa@ar W. Woo.uarp, Recording Secretary pro tem.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
455TH MEETING
The 455th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club November 13, 1929,
President Capps presiding.
Program: Ki. W. Berry: Arctic climates as indicated by fossil plants, and a
possible explanation. Discussed by Davip WHITE.
REemiInGToN Ketitoce: Migration of marine mammals in relation to climate.
W. J. Humpureys: Factors of climatic control.
456TH MEETING
The 456th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club November 27, 1929,
President Capps presiding.
30 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 2
Informal communications: Davin WHIT called attention to the excellent
exposure of Cretaceous and Tertiary sediments along 16th Street above
Florida Avenue.
Program: H. H. Bennett: Contributions by the Bureau of Soils to the
problem of erosion. The farm and grazing lands of the country are not in-
exhaustible, as vast areas are subject to severe impoverishment and destruc-
tion by unrestrained soil erosion. The normal process of soil erosion of un-
disturbed land is insignificant compared to the accelerated washing of the
land due to the removal of forest and brush growths, the breaking of ground
and the matted sod of the prairies, and the destruction of herbage by over-
grazing. Erosion, due to the latter causes, operates chiefly on the top soil,
the most productive part of the land, and the amount of wastage depends on
the soil, the slope, the amount and rapidity of rainfall, the crops grown and
the methods of cultivation. On some highly erosive lands as much as one
inch of soil may be removed in one year and it is believed that not less than
one billion five hundred million tons of rich soil matter are swept out of the
fields each year. The amount of plant food washed out of the fields each year
is more than twenty times the annual loss by the crops taken from those fields.
That lost through crops can be replaced by fertilizers and soil improving
crops but that removed by erosion is irreplaceable. Experimental erosion
and moisture conservation stations are being established in a number of
major regions of varying soils and climate and various structures such as
terraces and dams, as well as various types of vegetation, will be tested under
field conditions in attempts to slow down the losses.
Discussed by GoLDMAN, WHITE, PEPPERBERG, and RUBEY.
C. N. Munns: Contributions by the Forest Service to the problems of erosion.
Discussed by RuBEy and THOMPSON.
C. 8. Howarp: Suspended matter in the Colorado River. Water-Supply
Paper 636-B of the United States Geological Survey describes the methods
of sampling and the results obtained in a study of suspended matter in the
Colorado River from 1925 to 1928. These results, with additional data for
1928-1929, show that the most rapid fluctuations and the largest loads oc-
curred during the periods of the summer floods when a large proportion of the
flow of the river was caused by rains in the semi-arid portion of the drainage
area, The daily load of suspended matter at the Bright Angel station in the
Grand Canyon ranged from 3,700 to 20,700,000 tons. The annual load at the
same station ranged from 189,000,000 tons in the lowest year to 443,000,000
tons in the highest year. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by BAKER, BEN-
NETT, Munns, GOLDMAN, RuBEY, THOMPSON, COLLINS, and ALDEN.
457TH MEETING
The 457th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club December 11, 1929,
President Capps presiding. Vice-President G. R. MANsFIELD took the chair
during the presentation of the presidential address: Glaciation in Alaska.
37TH ANNUAL MEETING
The 37th annual meeting was held at the Cosmos Club after the adjourn-
ment of the 457th regular meeting, President Capps presiding.
The annual report of the Secretaries was read. The Treasurer presented
his annual report showing an excess of assets over liabilities of $1,205.54 on
December 10, 1929. The auditing committee reported that the books of the.
Treasurer were correct.
JAN. 18, 1930 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 31
The results of balloting for officers for the ensuing year were as follows:
President: G. R. MANSFIELD; Vice-Presidents: O. EK. M®InzER and F, L.
Hess; Treasurer: H. G. Fercuson; Secretaries: JAMES GILLULY and C. H.
Dane; Members-at-Large of the Council: W. D. CotLtins, HERBERT INSLEY,
H. D. Miser, G. B. Ricnharpson, and W. C. Mansrietp; Nominee as Vice-
President of Washington Academy of Sciences representing the Geological So-
ciety: S. R. Capps.
A. A. Baktr, JAMES GILLULY, Secretaries.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
Mr. and Mrs. W. H. Hoover and Mr. F. A. GreELry have returned in
November from their three years’ occupation of the Smithsonian solar
observing station on Mount Brukkaros, South West Africa.
Professor A. 8. HitcHcock has returned from Africa, where he obtained
large collections of grasses.
The collections of the Division of Fishes, U.S. National Museum have been
greatly enriched by the receipt of a large number of Chinese fishes from Mr. A.
DEC. SowERBY and Dr. D. C. GRAHAM.
Dr. E. P. Cuark, research chemist of the Interstate Cottonseed Crushers’
Association, and Dr. Hrersert L. J.!HALLER, associate in the department of
chemistry of the Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research, have accepted
appointment in the insecticide division of the chemical and technological
research unit of the Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. As organic chemists
in the field of insecticides, they will investigate the structure of substances
occurring naturally in certain tropical plants which are characterized by
high toxicity to fish and which are believed to have promising possibilities as
insecticides. When the structure of such compounds has been sufficiently
investigated, attempts will be made to synthesize them or certain of their
derivatives. The effect of all compounds isolated or synthesized will be physi-
ologically tested upon fish, tadpoles, insects, and animals, as it is important
to know their toxicity to man as well as their effect upon insects.
Professor C. C. GHosH, Entomologist in the Agricultural College at Manda-
lay, Burma, paid a brief visit to Washington in December during the course
of a trip around the world.
W. V. Kine, of the Bureau of Entomology, who has been for seven months
investigating mosquitoes in the Philippines for the Rockefeller Foundation,
has been studying the mosquito collections in the National Museum.
» Professor Jos1AH BrinGes, of the School of Mines of the University of Mis-
souri, is studying Ozarkian gastropods at the National Museum in connection
with the work of the Missouri State Bureau of Geology and Mines and in
cooperation with members of the U. 8. Geological Survey.
Dr. C. E. Resser has been appointed Curator of Stratigraphic Paleontol-
ogy in the National Museum. Dr. Resser has been connected with the
Division of Paleontology since 1915.
it Duta: aia: COaPate apell Uae AHO ae, ey es eT Menge We, 1
Eenuae uA ania Aovioss oy il, tre waraeae att OF
~
eT
2 a 4
A bs et a
4 P onl
Lae le :
: is bs
¢ W- “4
} J 7 SRE
. 54
Hee, See Bae Baan oii ape ie vie ieien 1S Wixi 20) Seats nk
te Ws hh iets oa Aes:
1 dh Flares 5 200 WORT AS reo aol t ‘tea’, or aS neha spose: la wil
‘Al bite tae Mes te Oa aie cei Fe athe bbe tae
REY. hata oan SOMA. adetas ee IIH Ve Bi *
Cie R QS tee E acim ee iat ad “iia of ly UA) ists
AWA A Miah ts Wald | DEH Ae Wa fa Peat at costes Tap Eh, At iat St
=e) 1G TS “9 ‘hy ha hae Pviwyy y ine Le wee Mare, a
; . C oy i
| 5 ; in te i
Lv Glee eee? elie Ab reer pee oe sted rene cal an ‘a
a ray
$+ rt s
see teenls
A WA) POE Dene |
r
AU nent et ee fae 7: ae die re
Teo ore ORAL AL yt revi eeergcn; conn Pas
ON PA ae cate mye pee toh .
‘ apy ids Ms Fe etesee,
PAT LR 4 . Mga beidtd eet? badianwee wed Ay SRR
‘ ha ey * “oe ae
‘Writer yt ty +e ri me % ata ” be ¢ iA arte ee 3 hi
ee TE fork, tear kh pi? Lema tn oe arth het cong st ta
; > ae wt the nr | at ite % yey
; 7 Aon
s ee ae t
, as “petty Ph? Ay Sh PRS wal ail: hy. paca othe t saPt this ae et hh ae
te Livni Tine: 3d 265 Aiding ee abt gh ie ean 34% ar:
Periieicgnirraye ch ewe hl angel aa eta ieee! : palletes thd
Eats Sate Goch. tbc Lain taaa tarnsehins et Fo tes eaptiai tits, she's Ne egESE Br jg
Paisrt oi RET Ase At AL ak) £} eee FRR; rrp iy? apfo'sire&: ott pnts ¢
nNOMRe Pha, HS, ciate ois. sate htea gh ei el ae iigl geeaa
‘eek VAST, | actth ha | eiee Hives “let: 745 ape it? hy + Se thes wi iit
pS Leek Dp yan tty treitia aig vet dies Hened bk Neco us) pecaireageans a
este he. ceeds tend ths Ue aeedaiere Cob oumnecdee. [fv 2h. ol
,
hike akin gant ot eb: ele Pale fice: ela saoe eee Age: Meigs idee
es oe one aaa rh rere gtseiBe edt ei Shine a Ape Ware we
oA : OFF
“ oh ae.
i
opeake i pe fae ehasd geite gaat jafatheaadae ROR
ein Gear crete et 15k dginct eeu! Fetes Sac loatedase tha ay
F A
Oi Ness bh path rane GE me pave iT: gs
A ey Mey ae tater Roe EE we $35 Hiss min 4
aged is ti tp a td. twa ae os a Bs age bis pee
aay Joints Zt Age ees: besegeal tog bic:
a Gi tits ¢ Bist et a oe, Cae oi Py Ole bad
Bich aah inn ae coahe mr
;
Dia ‘— he eee Cin : : :
i la a a
wig 7 Sree ie Nod sen Pre
ae int Ee ae ae roel fe Se ks 5) OO ce a Pr
’ F. 4 vr - f) oF is + = ; Poa’,
oy * a4 ” ¥ : oe * a a i = 4 Ke
& fs ee. p Lie ny 2 Re : inp wile a :
weg
“4 f
~ if 4
- ‘
. f ~P®
.
‘ ’ ! _
ibe D gol
v ay
na “y i ry
a evs ’ 1 ,
j = j ge
} ‘ ha 5
°.
~
un J
’
_
“2
.
‘
CONTENTS :
_ Onietnan Parers i pi
2B Geophysics. —Hypotheses on the development of the earth. B. Gu E
Botany.—A long lost Phlor. Epaar T. WHERRY.............2-...0000
oN de . -- Proceepives ; pe i
The Philosophical Sbeinby k's tein feck Manabe pug «Last ~ ote ee ge
The-Geologioal Sgetetyy: jv. aiwets ngs gece vans hey oss nen eines eee
ScIENTIFIC NoTEs AND NEW pat ses ne ik es Sea eanng fo wit pone emt ee
This JourNau is indexed in the International Index to Periodicals to be found in pub
~ ‘ Se
.
| OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
- President: Aue’ HrouéKa, U.S. National Museum. =
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. Tuckerman, Bureau of Stané
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lampert, Coast and Geodetic §
‘Treasurer: R. L. Farts, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
o
cs
~4
Y
aN
>
>> Sis
~~
‘ “|
a .
ne ta
[ea
tity
re ae
. .
7 ak
ual
, re. aod
FEBRUARY 4, 1930 No. 3
‘ Bat A ae
ae
SS "G f
» fy
* oe
Ma ‘he
“ip of
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
Epaar W. WooLarpD EpGar T. WHERRY C. Wyre: Cooxs
GEORGE WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY BUREAU OF CHEMISTRY AND SOILS GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L. H. Apams S. A. RoHweEeR
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
BE. A. GoLpMAN G. W. Stosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
AGnres CHASE J. R. SWANTON
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
Rogrr C. WELLS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Royau anp GuItrorp AVEs.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office, at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24.1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for
in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918
ae ee
ee
ae 78s ie
Journal of the Washington Academy i Sciences i te ae
o: ee 3
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Matec: of Sciences, aims be el heehoreny,
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. Tothisendit publishes: —
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington; i a
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affliated societies; (4) =
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourNatis issued a
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer ‘ 3
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt a
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they shouid be ‘.
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The ~~ = |
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References oi
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate _
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered — ue
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. patie am
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced oe ee
by zinc etchings being preferable. 2
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publieation no proof will be sent to authors: ee
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors eee
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. ee ae
Authors' Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of preg ne = oa
Copies 4pp. {8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp Covers f
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 ~ $2.00 SY
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50 4
150 35 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. |
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi- egy
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. \ aeeaoe i
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed’l in is e
100" may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional 100, 3
ae? ; Seta og
. As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints: |
should invariably be attached to the first page of his apa * - ve. ae
The rate of Ruberioe> per volume Sie)s% pas ea me koa ea ee gcc tee , $6. o0* Eee oa
Semi-montiily nitmbaresy «0 oC ak eaten vc ninie se noe ack bel onan EDV ES Cece yi gett a
Monthly numbers (13, 4d, 15, July, August, September) isin spate a. bE = pte (50 iS ¥ 4
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Seige and aia ha
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. ae = “2
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. ou (a
Exchanges.—The JournNnAL does not exchange with other publications. :
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made ee
within thirty days after date of the following 1 issue. aS
JS
—_
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Specia rates, re
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy c.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Von. 20 FEBRUARY 4, 1930 No. 3
METEOROLOGY .—On the effect of vertical convection on lapse rates.?
C.-G. Rosspy, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. (Com-
municated by EpGarR W. WooLARD.)
Because of the dynamic (adiabatic) heating or cooling which ac-
companies vertical motion of air in the earth’s atmosphere, the occur-
rence of convectional movements will in general result in a modification
of the lapse rates that exist prior to such convection. The following
treatment of this effect, which is believed to be new, is shorter and
simpler, and in several respects more satisfactory, than that customa-
rily given.?
Let T be the absolute temperature, 6 the potential temperature, p
the density, and d7'/dz the lapse rate within an infinitesimal stratum
of dry air of thickness dz and cross section g. Suppose the stratum to
undergo a vertical displacement, due to convectional movements;
and let To, 0, go, po, (aT'/dz)o, dz, denote the values of the preceding
quantities before the displacement, and Ji, 6, qi, pi, (dT /d2):, dé,
those after the displacement; the potential temperature @ remains
constant, the process being assumed adiabatic. Denote the lapse rate
before displacement by —ao, that after displacement by —a,; and
put y = Ag/c,, where A is the reciprocal of the mechanical equivalent
of heat, c, is the specific heat at constant pressure and g is gravity.
The potential temperature is given by
REA Niles
a)
&
1 Received November 19, 1929.
2 F.M. Exner. Dynamische Meteorologie. 2te aufl., pp. 57-59, 85-86. 1925.
W.J.Humpurers. Physics of the Air. 2ed., pp. 36-37. 1929.
30
34 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 3
in which p= is the barometric pressure, P is the standard pressure, and R
is the characteristic gas constant. Differentiating this equation, we
have
dé ed ce acs
dz T\d pe &
Substituting dp = — pgdz gives
pee ‘ea a af
de Tld& “ee |
whence
dé 6
ger Noted Mages 1
(S), = x - (1)
Ay 9
le ae ete ae 2
(S),-x- 4, Q)
The constancy of mass requires that pogodZo = p1gid2:, or
dans Deir ounlls
dai Po Wo Po Yo Ts.
Now
EEE ERAN ek gees (3).
dz1 dzy dz, dzp Po Yo T;
Multiplying (1) by 2&2 gives, by (3),
Pogol'
dé 6 Pig To (
— = — — ae 4)
7 oi i Sinica? Po Qo 1
Eliminating dé/dz,; between (4) and (2), we have
6 Pi Qi iE 6
fy = gy) eee eee
To y a0) Po Yo T; T; \y ;
or
Mme el Fees AY. (5)
Po Yo
In particular, if g. = qo, we get from (5)
FEB. 4, 1930 REESIDE: CRETACEOUS FAUNAS 35
Seite akin,
pen ee eats + Wa — —,
Gavin) pe UNd27.0 Ce Gs
The explanation of subsidence inversions is apparent from these
equations.
The equation of continuity furnishes an adequate expression for the
variation in dz.
GEOLOGY .—The Cretaceous faunas in the section on Vermilion Creek,
Moffat County, Colorado... JoHN B. Reestpe, Jr., U. 8. Geologi-
cal Survey.
Some years ago the writer assisted Messrs. J. D. Sears and W. H.
Bradley in studying the unusually complete stratigraphic section along
Vermilion Creek, in T. 10 N., R. 101 W., Moffat County, Colorado.
Mr. Sears later published? a description of the lithologic units together
with correlations based on areal studies, on stratigraphic and lithologic
considerations, and on the fossils found. ‘The regional sequence of
rocks from pre-Cambrian to Eocene is present. No detailed statement
of the species of fossils observed in the section has been published, how-
ever, and it is the chief purpose of this paper to record in some detail the
collections from the Cretaceous beds.
The nomenclature applied to the Cretaceous beds of Vermilion
Creek is that derived from southwestern Colorado: Dakota (?) sand-
stone, Mancos shale, and Mesaverde group, though only part of the last
is exposed, a fault having carried the higher Cretaceous rocks far below
the present surface. The locality is close enough to southern Wyoming,
however, to show some of the stratigraphic subdivisions generally
accepted in that region. As Mr. Sears has noted in the report cited
above and in a later one,’ the Mancos shale contains at the base a
thin member similar to the Aspen and Mowry shales in its peculiar
lithology and its fossil content; resting upon the basal member a thin
sandstone similar in lithology and fossil content to beds at some places
included in the Frontier formation; and upon it a thick shale member
corresponding to the Hilliard shale in position, though including in the
upper part shaly marine equivalents of part of the coal-bearing rocks
that farther northwest would not be included in the Hilliard shale.
1 Received January 4, 1930. Published with the permission of the Director of the
U.S. Geological Survey.
2 J.D. Sears. Geology and oil and gas prospects of part of Moffat County, Colorado,
and southern Sweetwater County, Wyoming. U.S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 751: 278-281. 1924.
3 J. D. Sears. Geology of the Baxter Basin gas field, Sweetwater County, Wyoming.
U.S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 781: 15-22. 1926.
36 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 3
In terms of the section east of the Rocky Mountains the Mancos
of Vermilion Creek includes equivalents of the Graneros, Greenhorn,
Carlile, Niobrara, and lower Pierre formations, the last containing repre-
sentatives of the Eagle and Telegraph Creek beds. In terms of the
European classification it is the Turonian, Coniacian, Santonian, and
lower Campanian, possibly extending also into the upper Campanian.
The part of the overlying Mesaverde group present is probably equiv-
alent to the middle part of the Pierre or upper Campanian, though
very few fossils are available as a basis for an opinion. In summary
form the section of the Mancos may be interpreted as follows, the unit
numbers referring to the detailed section given below:
Equiwalent in
Feet.
European equivalent Plains Region
Campanian:
Upper(?): No. 1, fossiliferous.......... 100 )
No. 2 (part), fossiliferous.... 489
Noi? Goatt); barren 2.04. 72 735 1324
Lower
Lower: No.3, fossiliferous.......... 140 ) Eagle part of
No. 4 (part), fossiliferous.... 200 j fits ad eee Pierre
No; 4: (@art);pbarren stone 816 1156 shale
Santonian: |
Upper: y No. 4 (part)> fossiliferous...22..<.- 886 Tel. Creek |
| formation J
Lower: No. 4 (part), fossiliferous.... 383 |
No: S,fossiliferons. 32.46 bss. 75
No4G tossiiterois 7)... as Ls 75 533 | Ni
— iobrara
Coniacian: No. 7, fossiliferous.......... 320 eo
No.8 tossiliterous? 2). 430
INO: 9: TOSsIILErOUS. ) barren yori. ois uk 3 Greenhorn-Graneros
No. 20, fossiliferous......... 118 155 | (Aspen of authors)
Total 5367
It is notable that the Turonian Prionotropis woolgari fauna, which
should appear between that containing Metoicoceras whiter and that
containing Prionocyclus wyomingensis, was not found in this section
and that there is little room for it. It is possible that the sediments
which represent the time of the woolgari fauna are very thin or lacking,
though there is no particular physical evidence of a hiatus. The fauna
in the lower part of the Niobrara equivalent (Coniacian), containing
Inoceramus deformis, Baculites codyensis, Phlycticrioceras oregonense,
etc., is much like that described by the writer from the lower part of the
Cody shale of northern Wyoming.’ The very large shells of Inocera-
mus (Haploscapha?), mostly represented by fragments coated with
Ostrea congesta, are abundant in the Niobrara equivalent and extend
above it into the Telegraph Creek equivalent (upper Santonian) only
in a scarcer and depauperate development. In some parts of the sec-
tion specimens more than four feet in maximum dimension were seen in
cross section. In the upper part of the Mancos shale fossils are ex-
tremely rare and extended search yielded only a few scattered species,
except in the sandstone lenses at the top of the equivalent of the Eagle
sandstone (lower Campanian), where a more extensive and significant
fauna occurs. |
The detailed section is as follows:
CRETACEOUS BEDS ON VERMILION CREEK, Morrat County, CoLoRAbDo
Feet.
Mesaverde group (part):
Williams Fork (?) formation:
White and gray sandstone; gray and drab shale; coal beds;
upper part cut off by faulting against Wasatch forma-
DA Orel MAM par tank ocd cheek Marston hs ehbaetole dinate Se cos 500
Iles (?) formation:
Massive white sandstone predominant; a little gray shale and
carbonaceous shale. At 75 feet above base occur
Halymenites major Lesquereux, Inoceramus sp., Cardiwm
sp., Mactra formosa Meek andHayden. About....... 1700
*J. B. Rexsipz, Jr. Cephalopods from the lower part of the Cody shale of Oregon
Basin, Wyoming. U.S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Paper 150: 1-19. 1927.
38 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 3
Mancos shale:
1. Gray shale, increasingly sandy toward top................. 100
2. Gray to slate-colored shale; at top of unit and 490 feet lower
are lines of rusty-brown fine-grained calcareous sandstone
concretions several feet in diameter, containing fossils of
Montana age. In the upper horizon were noted Pteria
nebrascana Evans and Shumard, Baculites sp., Lunatia sp.;
in the lower, Inoceramus barabint Morton................ 1224
3. Rusty-brown medium-grained sandstone in short lenses at four
horizons, separated by gray shale; most prominent lens, 6
feet thick, at base; next, 2 feet Ah 25 feet higher; third, 1
foot thick, 88 feet above base; fourth, 8 feet thick, at top.
In the highest lens occur Inoceramus sagensis Owen, Ostrea
sp., Lucina n. sp., Corbula n. sp., Teredo sp., Volutoderma
n. sp., Anisomyon aff. A. subovatus Meek and Hayden,
Hamites novimexicanus Reeside, Baculites ovatus Say, B.
asper Morton, Scaphites hippocrepis DeKay, S. aquilaensis
Reeside, S. stantonz Reeside; in the next to lowest, Inocera-
mus sagensis Owen and Haresiceras natronense Reeside; in
the lowest, Solemya bilix White, Inoceramus sp., Ostrea cf.
O. congesta Conrad, Lucina n. sp., Corbula n. sp., Ichthyo-
dectes? ‘SP. 0:2 . «0% fara «ph BAe Cees tot eee 140
4. Gray to slate-colored shale, irregular ian a line of gray
calcareous septarian concretions at base; thin beds of soft,
fine-grained gray sandstone at 647, 657, 1213, 1233, and
1269 feet above base of unit. At 2085 feet above base occur
Lucinan.sp., Corbulan. sp., Baculites sp., Hypsodon? radiatu-
lus Cockerell; at 1269 feet, Inoceramus sp., Hypsodon?
radiatulus Cockerell; at 657 feet, Desmoscaphites basslerz
Reeside and Ichthyodectes? sp.; at 150 feet, Pterza gastrodes
Meek, Inoceramus sp., Ostrea congesta Conrad, Baculites sp.,
Scaphites vermiformis Meek and Hayden; at 45 feet, Baculites
codyensis Reeside; at 35 feet, Inoceramus aff. I. stantoni
Sokolow; at 25 feet, Lingula aff. L. nitida Meek and Hayden,
Veniella mortont Meek and Hayden, Lucina subundata Hall
and Meek, Fusus? sp., Baculites codyensis Reeside, Scaphites
ventricosus Meek and Hayden. In the lowest 400 feet
fragments of a large, thick-shelled species of Inoceramus
(Haploscapha?), coated with Ostrea congesta Conrad, are
abundant; in the next overlying 800 feet they still occur but
are rather rare and of smaller size..............0.+.-..-.. 2285
FEB. 4, 1930 REESIDE: CRETACEOUS FAUNAS 39
5. Dark slate-colored shale, including five or six bands of fine-
grained gray sandstone that weather to low ridges. At 25
feet above base occur Lucina sp., Baculites sp.; at 15 feet,
Ostrea congesta Conrad and Lucina subundata Hall and
Meek. Jnoceramus (Haploscapha?) sp. and Ostrea congesta
SLeeOUnGaMitNLOUueMOUt .oee. Sls.) kee sy a SS TY. E
6. Light bluish-gray shale, laminated, breaking into flat pieces
when fresh; a line of gray calcareous septarian concretions
as much as 1 foot in diameter at base. At 20 feet above base
occur Lingula aff. L. nitida Meek and Hayden, Nucula sp.,
Yoldia aff. Y. scitula Meek and Hayden, Arca n. sp., Inocera-
mus sp., Ostrea congesta Conrad, Lucina subundata Hall and
Meek, Anchura? sp., Anisomyon n. sp., Fusus n. sp., Baculites
asper Morton; at base, Inoceramus umbonatus Meek and
Hayden, Ostrea congesta Conrad, Baculites asper Morton,
Ichthyodectes? sp. Inoceramus (Haploscapha?) and Ostrea
congesta are abundant throughout... ......0 2022 .00505..
7. Dark slate-colored shale with irregular bedding; zones of light-
gray laminated shale; many thin layers of shaly sandstone
that weather into papery flakes; lines of gray calcareous
septarian concretions as much as 1 foot in diameter at 75 and
90 feet above base of unit; reddish sandy streaks with some
reddish concretions at 125 and 190 feet above base. At 215
feet occur Inoceramus sp., Ostrea congesta Conrad, Anisomyon
n.sp., Baculztes codyensis Reeside; at 190 feet, Inoceramus aff.
I. stantont Sokolow; at 180 feet, Inoceramus aff. I. stanton
Sokolow, Ostrea congesta Conrad, Lucina sp., Baculites
codyensis Reeside, Helicoceras aff. H. corrugatum Stanton,
Echidnocephalus? sp., Leucichthyops vagans Cockerell (?); at
130 feet, Inoceramus aff. I. stantoni Sokolow, I. undulatopli-
catus Roemer, Ostrea congesta Conrad, Baculites codyensis
Reeside; at 125 feet, Inoceramus sp., Ostrea congesta Conrad,
Sauvagesia cf. S. austinensis (Roemer), Isurus? sp.; at 75 feet,
Inoceramus aff. I. stantont Sokolow, Baculites sp., Scaphites
vermiformis Meek and Hayden; at 55 feet, Inoceramus aff.
I. stantont Sokolow, Ostrea congesta Conrad, Vanikoro? sp.,
Baculites asper Morton, Hypsodon? sp.; at base, Inoceramus
aff. I. stantont Sokolow, Baculites sp. Inoceramus (Haplo-
scapha?) sp. and Ostrea conaesta are abundant throughout.... 320
8. Light bluish-gray shale, laminated, breaking into flat pieces
when fresh; a line of gray calcareous septarian concretions at
330 feet above base of unit. In the concretions occur Inocera-
~]
Ot
~I
Ou
40
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 3
mus aff. I. stantont Sokolow, Ostrea congesta Conrad, Lucina
subundata Hall and Meek, Phlycticrioceras oregonense Ree-
side, Scaphites sp.; at 325 feet, Inoceramus deformis Meek,
Ostrea congesta Conrad, Baculites asper Morton; at 295 feet,
Inoceramus deformis Meek, I. aff. I. stantont Sokolow, Pteria
gastrodes Meek, Baculites sp., Phlycticrioceras oregonense
Reeside, Helicoceras cf. H. corrugatum Stanton; at 285 feet,
Cyphosoma n. sp., Solemya n. sp., Inoceramus deformis Meek,
Inoceramus aff. I. stantona Sokolow with original color
pattern preserved, Ostrea congesta Conrad, Anisomyon?
n. sp., Baculites asper Morton, Phlycticrioceras oregonense
Reeside, Scaphites ventricosus Meek and Hayden; at 240 feet,
Inoceramus deformis Meek, Ostrea congesta Conrad, Baculites
sp., Scaphites sp.; at 220 feet, Inoceramus deformis Meek,
Inoceramus aff. I. stantont Sokolow, Ostrea congesta Conrad,
Baculites asper Morton. Inoceramus (Haploscapha?) sp. and
Ostrea congesta are abundant throughout...................
9. Dark slate-colored shale with irregular bedding. Near top of
10.
i ks
12.
13.
14.
15.
unit occur Nodosaria n. sp., Inoceramus aff. I. stantont Soko-
low, Lucinasp., Mactra emmonsi Meek, Lunatia? sp., Anchura
n. sp., Cerithium? n. sp., Baculites ef. B. gracilis Shumard,
Helicoceras aff. H. corrugatum Stanton, Placenticeras cf. P.
pseudoplacenta Hyatt. Inoceramus (Haploscapha?) sp. and
Ostrea congesta Conrad are fairly abundant throughout... ..
Large, dark reddish-brown sandstone concretions containing
Inoceramus fragilis Hall and Meek, Ostrea sp., Scaphites
warrent Meek and Hayden, Prionocyclus sp., Corax sp.......
Dark slate-colored shale with irregular bedding............
White sandstone, stained somewhat brown on surface; makes
2 G@ip Slope... .. 2 bios cee oe Re
Gray and brown carbonaceous shale; lens of coal as much as
18 inches»thick:: . 2: .:234.2d66n0e et hee ee
Massive fine to medium grained sandstone; upper part white,
lower part buff; slightly cross-bedded; a little gray shale
present. Near top of unit occur Lingula cf. L. nitida Meek
and Hayden, Solemya? obscura Stanton(?), Inoceramus sp.,
Mactra sp., Corbula kanabensis Stanton, Lunatza aff. L.
concinna Hall and Meek, Prionocyclus sp., Petalolepis? fibril-
lates Gorkerell (?).....'.... ASE Se eee
Guay sandy shale»... Sates. Se ee ee
430
106
315
50
25
FEB. 4, 1930 BERRY: A NEW HYPURAL FAN 4}
16. Gray fine-grained sandstone in layers 1 to 6 inches thick, and
eray sandy shale, interbedded. At middle of unit occur
Inoceramus fragilis Hall and Meek, Ostrea sp., Scaphites sp.,
Prionocyclus wyomingensis Meek; at base, Ptychodus sp...... 54
ig tammy shale with cone-in-cone structure. .....0. 6) 04.0.5 0. < 1
18. Hard platy shale; bluish-white to cream-colored on weathered
surface, dark brown onfresh surface. Fishscalesabundant. . 34
PERNT OMG ee se tv veer eh tst aes eee eeaIO fat enn Wino o lt bits 3
20. Hard platy shale; bluish-white to cream-colored on weathered
surface, dark brown on fresh surface. Fish scales abundant
and at 75 feet above base of unit occur Inoceramus labiatus
Schlotheim, Metoicoceras whiter Hyatt, Leucichthyops vagans
Wocleenelll gery Ne Me te ea SE Ah RG Roi Voom at 118
Total thickness.. 5367
=
Dakota(?) sandstone:
Gray coarse-grained sandstone; gritty and conglomeratic bands.. 50
Peavacwalesand: thimrsamadstONes. eu 0 yh. Stay Gh ae bt ese a 15
White medium-grained sugary sandstone, friable............... 22,
MB eet ast ia cea hoe atlas faye ened. oe slats os MEU wean alonethtiare 24
ihemt-eray- shale, ereenish) tinG!. (0s...) ok SY wee oe ee ees 16
White coarse-grained sugary sandstone, friable; contains many
CLEKGLS Cape Un Stags RMS rs ou eink A ie Ec LA 3
White and light-gray conglomeratic sandstone; many zones of
small pebbles; mostly. of black chert. ......4...45..0.0.. 0: 27
Total thickness. . 157
Morrison formation.
PALEONTOLOGY.—A new hypural fan from the Miocene of Mary-
land.1 WituaARD Brrry, Ohio State University (Communicated
by Joun B. Rexsipe, JR.)
While collecting along the Calvert Cliffs of Maryland this past
summer the writer found many fragments of fossil bone. Those worth
preserving were turned over to the National Museum at Washington.
However, in a chunk of material collected to show the lithology of
the formation, a rather well preserved hypural fan was later found
that seems worthy of record. ‘The material was from the talus at the
base of the cliffs south of Camp Roosevelt, and is probably from the
Calvert formation of the Miocene.
The specimen may be described as follows:
1 Received December 6, 1929.
42 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 3
Xiphias ? drydeni W. Berry, n.sp.
Terminal vertebral centrum moderately concave in front and circular in
cross section, its neural and haemal spines fused into a solid fan-shaped body;
the anterior haemal spine less completely fused with the next following than
are the rest, and separated from it near the point of attachment to the cen-
trum by a perforation 4 mm. in diameter passing completely through the
fan and connecting with a perforation of equal diameter on the dorsal side
of the anterior haemal spine at the point of attachment to the centrum.
There is also a smaller perforation extending posteriorly through the fan.
There were apparently lateral processes which have been broken off but the
bases are still present on either side of the centrum.
Figures 1-2.—Dorsal and side views, natural size, of the hypural fan of Xiphias?”
drydeni W. Berry, n. sp.
This species cannot be referred to Xiphias? radiata, described from the
Aquia Formation (Eocene) by Clark,? because of the difference in concavity
of the front of the centrum and because of the perforation opening above the
anterior haemal spine. The extreme height of the fan is 5.6 em. and the
diameter of the centrum is 1.5 em., the ratio of the two differing greatly from
those fans described from the Eocene. This species differs also from those
found in the Tertiary of South Carolina in having a circular cross section of
the centrum. It is named after Mr. A. L. Dryden, who was with me during
the collecting season when it was found.
Occurrence.—Calvert formation (?), Miocene, Calvert Cliffs, Maryland.
The type is in the Geological Museum of The Ohio State University, Ac-
cession number 17109. :
7W. B. CuarKx. Eocene deposits of Maryland. Md. Geol. Survey Rept., p. 112.
1901.
FEB. 1 1930 WHERRY: PLANTS OF SHALE-BARRENS 43
BOTANY.— Plants of the Appalachian shale-barrens.: Epcar T.
Wuerry, Washington, D.C.
The term shale-barren was appropriately applied by Steele? to a
unique type of plant habitat occurring locally in the central Appala-
chians, within the area delimited by two heavy lines on the accom-
panying map, figure 1. ‘These barrens are developed on shale-slopes,—
places where hard shaly rocks of the Romney (middle Devonian) and
Jennings (early upper Devonian) formations outcrop on steep hillsides,
the surface being strewn with frost-broken fragments. They are
typically occupied by a sparse, scrubby growth of pine, oak, mountain-
laurel, and other woody plants, with herbaceous ones scattered be-
tween, grading into normal woodland wherever conditions permit the
accumulation of sufficient soil. A number of endemic species and
Fira. 1. Location of the Shale-barren Region
varieties have been observed to characterize this shale-barren plant-
association, and others no doubt remain to be discovered. As no
annotated list of these has ever been published, one is here presented
in the hope of encouraging further investigation of the region.
The shale-barrens thus far discovered are located as follows:
Maryland, at intervals along the National Highway, U. 8. route No.
40, between Cumberland and Indian Springs (20 miles west of
Hagerstown).
Northern West Virginia; similarly along route No. 50 from south of
Keyser to Gore, west of Winchester, Virginia.
1 Received January 4, 1930.
2 Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 18: 359. 1911.
44 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 3
Southeastern West Virginia, on various hills in the vicinity of White
Sulphur Springs, especially the western slope of Kates Mountain,
which is reached by a trail from the railroad station; Slaty Moun-
tain, north of Sweet Springs.
West-central Virginia, along state route No. 39 east of Monterey; on
various hills in the neighborhood of Hot Springs; along the Chesa-
peake and Ohio railroad near Millboro, Goshen, and Augusta
Springs, and its branch line north of Covington; and near U. 8.
route 60 west of Covington.
In figure 1 the above listed places are indicated by dots, which
apparently fall into two separate groups, although the gap between
these merely reflects the relative inaccessibility and consequent lack
of exploration of the intervening territory. Further northeast as well
as further southwest the shale-slopes rapidly diminish in size and bar-
renness, owing to changes in physical and chemical character exhibited
by these Devonian strata along their strike. Certain formations of
other geologic ages, such as the Martinsburg (upper Ordovician) oc-
casionally yield superficially similar shale-slopes, but no typical bar-
rens.
The peculiarities of the shale-slopes which lead-to their being
occupied by endemic plants appear to be the sparsity of soil, the way
in which the loose rock-flakes creep down the slopes under the influence
of the weather, and the limited amount of available moisture and
nutrient elements. The rock is made up largely of quartz and clay
minerals, and exhibits a neutral reaction. The accumulation of humus
in the heaps of loose fragments results in the development of con-
siderable acidity, little mineral matter capable of neutralizing the
organic acids formed being present. ‘The litter is evidently too porous
to permit the accumulation of much available nitrogen, and tests have
failed to show the presence of nitrates or ammonia in appreciable
amount.
The more notable plants of these habitats are here listed in the
standard order followed in manuals of botany, notes being given
as to the distribution, relationships, history, etc., of the endemic ones.
NoTABLE PLANTS OF THE SHALE-BARRENS.
Cheilanthes.—The Hairy Lipfern, C. lanosa (Michx.) Watt, grows on
various kinds of rock throughout the southeastern uplands, and invades
the barrens wherever cliffs are well-developed. The only peculiarity
it shows here is a stunted aspect, owing to the general sterility.
FEB. 4, 1930 WHERRY: PLANTS OF SHALE-BARRENS 45
Woodsia Abundant evidence has been assembled by Fernald? indi-
cating that during pre-Glacial times Rocky Mountain plants migrated
eastward across northern North America, and some of these plants
found their way down the Allegheny mountain system. One of
the latter was the Rocky Mountain Cliff-fern, W. scopulina D.C.
Eaton, which as recently recorded,‘ is now known from six southeastern
stations. Two of these, near Covington and Sweet Springs, are on
the cliffs of typical Devonian shale-slopes, the remainder being on more
or less similar rocks of other geologic ages. The fronds exhibit features
differing to some extent from those of the Rocky Mountain occur-
rences, and Fernald has suggested that the differences may be of speci-
fic rank, although in view of the variability of the species, it seems more
probable that this Allegheny Cliff-fern should be classed only as a
variety.
Selaginella—The widespread Rock Spikemoss, S. rupestris (L.)
Spring, varies in aspect somewhat with the nature of the substratum.
On the shale-barrens, which it occasionally enters, it is often relatively
slender and grayish in color, but the differences are not believed to be of
taxonomic importance.
Allium.—Nodding Onions, grouped under the general head of A.
cernuum Roth, occur nearly throughout the United States, falling into
several geographic races, not as yet fully worked out. One of these,
A. oxyphilum Wherry, is endemic in the shale-barren region, usually
occurring on the more heavily wooded portions of the shale-slopes,
though sometimes remote from them. Perhaps it should be classed as
only a variety, but this can not be decided until someone makes a
field study of the group as a whole.
Eriogonum.—This typical Rocky Mountain genus has very few rep-
resentatives in the east, but one of the latter, H. allenit Wats., is a highly
characteristic member of the shale-barren flora. The Yellow-buck-
wheat, as it is locally called, prefers the barest and most sterile situa-
tions, its long tough roots penetrating crevices in the shale rocks and
holding the clumps in place in spite of the downward creep of the sur-
face fragments. Its ancestors presumably crossed the continent and
came down the Alleghenies during pre-Glacial times, but subsequent
climatic changes destroyed all traces of them, leaving behind this
single endemic species.
3 Mem. Amer. Acad. Arts Sci. 15: 239. 1925.
* Amer. Fern. Journ. 19: 101. 1929.
46 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 3
Polygonum.—One of the dry-soil Knotweeds, apparently P. tenue
Michx., is abundant in the more open parts of the barrens.
Anychia.—Several members of this genus occur on sterile gravelly
soils in many parts of the eastern United States, and naturally invade
the shale-barrens. The one which becomes most conspicuous in these
habitats, though without exhibiting any consequent morphologic
changes, is A. divaricata Raf. This has often been regarded as identi-
cal with A. polygonoides Raf., but, as pointed out by Steele,® is un-
doubtedly distinct.
Paronychia.—Only one Nailwort has been observed on shale-slopes,
the Texan species, P. dichotoma (L.) Nutt., which is known in the
eastern states in few localities.
Silene-—The Pink Catchfly, S. pennsylvanica Michx. or S. carolin-
tana Walt., growing as it does in gravelly soil in so many places,
could not fail to invade the shale-barrens. So far as known no signifi-
cant change results, although the plants are often rather stunted in
aspect. One of the many forms of Fire Catchfly, S. virginica L. is also
occasional in these habitats; it does not seem to be an endemic type,
although the variations of this species remain to be interpreted.
Anemone.—On the more heavily wooded shale-slopes one or more
members of the section Anemonanthea of this genus occur, but their
identity has not been worked out. Perhaps only forms of A. lanci-
folia Pursh (A. trifolia of current manuals) are represented, although
it seems quite probable that the imperfectly known A. minima DC. is
a member of the same flora, and has been largely overlooked owing to
the fact that little collecting has been done in these regions in early
Spring.
Clematis —Members of the section Viorna of this genus are present
on several shale-barrens, but their relationships are obscure. In 1814
Pursh had described C. ovata from the mountains of South Carolina,
and Britton® concluded this to be identical with the plant of the Kates
Mountain shales, although the published description of the type speci-
men indicates that it is too incomplete to justify considering this as
established. The Clematis of the Millboro barren was described by
Steele in 1911 as C. viticaulis, and matters are still further complicated
by the occurrence on others of C. sericea Michx., which is usually sup-
posed but not known to be the same as C. ochroleuca Ait. of Atlantic
lowland regions. Before this tangle can be unravelled it will be neces-
6 Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 18: 363. 1911.
6 Mem. Torr. Bot. Club 2: 28. 1890.
FEB. 4, 1930 WHERRY: PLANTS OF SHALE-BARRENS 47
sary to study all of these plants in fresh condition, make sure as to the
identity of Michaux’s and Pursh’s species by exploration of the type
localities, and find out the extent of variability within the individual
colonies. This would make an interesting study for someone who has
the opportunity to carry on the necessary field work.
Arabis.—An endemic derivative of the widespread Smooth Rock-
eress, A. laevigata (Muhl.) Poir., grows on the shale-barrens, being re-
markable in blooming in Summer instead of Spring. It has been
named A. serotina by Steele, but its relationships to other variants of
the species remain to be worked out.
Draba.—The little Rock-twist, D. ramosissuma Desv., grows on
cliffs of many kinds of rock in the southeastern uplands, and enters the
shale-barrens on the more sheltered ees, without exhibiting any
resulting morphologic effects.
Sedum.—Three of the Stonecrops of the Allegheny region occur to
some extent on shale slopes: American Live-for-ever, S. telephiordes
Michx.; Triplet Stonecrop, S. ternatum Michx.; and Mountain Stone-
crop, S. nevir Gray, the last being most characteristic of these habitats.
None of them show, however, any recognizable changes on passing
from one type of rock to another, which they do freely.
Trifolium.—The most chacteristic endemic of the shale-barrens is the
Longleaf Clover, T. wrginicum Small. This is a derivative of the
Buffalo Clover, 7’. reflecum L., which grows on the western slopes of the
Alleghenies and further west, and was reduced to a variety, 7. reflecum
virginicum, by McDermott.? The latter author stated it to be ‘“‘abun-
dant throughout the Appalachian mountains’’, although for many
years but one locality was represented in herbaria. Up to early in
1929, eight stations for it had been definitely made known,* another
since reported in Mineral County, West Virginia, bringing the total
to nine. It favors the barest and most sterile situations, withstanding
the instability of the surface fragments by sending long tough roots into
crevices in the more solid rock below.
A stragalus.—A small member of this genus is well developed on a
few of the shale-barrens; it has also been found on limestone in Fred-
erick County, Virginia, by Hunnewell.? This agrees fairly well with
A. distortus T. & G., but may be varietally distinct from the species
as developed in the central United States—Texas to Iowa and east-
ward, but not coming within 400 miles of the shale-slope region.
’ North American Species Trifolium, p. 273. 1908.
® Torreya 29: 105. 1929.
®°Rhodora 31: 256. 1929.
48 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 3
Viola—The Birdsfoot Violet, V. pedata L., is a typical occupant of
sterile gravelly soils in many parts of the eastern states, and would
naturally be expected to invade the shale-barrens. When it does, its
leaves exhibit a distinctive type of cutting, but whether it also differs in
other characters has not been ascertained.
Oenothera.—Both an unusually small and an unusually large flowered
representative of the section Onagra of this genus grow on shale-slopes.
The former was suggested by Steele!® to be O. parviflora L., but has not
been sufficiently studied. The latter is, however, an endemic species,
O. argillicola Mackenzie. When this remarkable Evening-primrose is
in bloom in late Summer, its habitats seem rather inappropriately
classified as barrens, for it makes a magnificent floral display. It
is, however, rather closely restricted to sterile situations, having, for
a biennial, an unusually extensive root system. An interesting out-
lying occurrence of it has been noted, along the Juniata River opposite
Losh Run station, in Perry County, Pennsylvania (marked by a circle
on the map, Fig. 1); this has unfortunately been destroyed by the con-
struction of U. 8. Highway No. 22. The rock there is a shale of the
same geological age as that underlying the more southern shale-barrens,
but apparently too rich in lime and other plant-food elements, or too
readily weathered into soil, to favor the growth of other endemics.
Pseudotaenidia.—P. montana Mackenzie, or, as it may be called, the
Mountain-pimpernel, represents not only an endemic species but also
an endemic genus, no near relatives being known anywhere. Few
localities of it appear to be on record, but it is not uncommon in woods
on shale-slopes. The occurrence reported near Luray, Virginia, was
no doubt on the shale there, which though resembling the Devonian
rock in appearance, is actually of another geologic age, and differs so
much in composition as to yield no typical barrens.
Asclepias.—Several common milkweeds of sterile gravelly soils enter
the shale-barrens, including A. quadrifolia Jacq., A. verticillata L.,
and A. tubersoa LL. The last named often has abnormally pale corolla-
color in such habitats, but no other differences have been recognized.
Convolvulus.—The widespread Dwarf Convolvulus, C. spithamaeus
L., exhibits considerable geographic variation, the details of which re-
main to be worked out. One of its derivatives, which may be termed
the Velvet Convolvulus because of the strikingly velvety leaves, ap-
pears to be particularly well adapted to shale-barren habitats, where
it locally forms vast patches of more or less regularly spaced stalks,
10 Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 13: 366. 1911.
FEB. 4, 1930 WHERRY: PLANTS OF SHALE-BARRENS 49
to the exclusion of most other vegetation. As recently pointed out,"
this is apparently C. stans Michx., the type locality of which was in
Canada, near Lake Champlain. It is noteworthy that shale rocks,
similar in aspect to those of the region under discussion, occur in this
vicinity, although for that matter the plant is not entirely restricted
to such rocks, for specimens have been seen in herbaria from Ducktown,
Tennessee, and Atlanta, Georgia, where very different formations are
represented. Further field study of this group is much to be desired.
Phlox.—Festoons of Moss-Phlox drape the ledges on many of the
shale-slopes, the white or pale lavender flowers with which they are
covered in Spring giving them a different aspect from the related
material of other habitats, and the name P. brittonit Small has been
applied. A detailed study” has shown, however, that in view of the
marked variability of this group of Phloxes, the differences can not be
regarded as having more than varietal significance, leading to the com-
bination P. subulata brittona. Besides growing on shale, this plant
extends down the Potomac valley nearly to Washington, D. C., on
other types of rock.
A highly distinctive species, termed the Sword-leaf Phlox from the
shape of its evergreen basal leaves, and recently named P. buckleyi
Wherry, is included in this enumeration because, although not growing
on barrens, it seems to thrive best in woods near the bases of shale-
slopes. It is an endemic relative of the more widespread Mountain
Phlox, P. ovata L., which enters the same habitats to some extent
without, however, exhibiting any recognizable morphologic changes.
Pensiemon.—The Mountain Penstemon, P. canescens Britton,
thrives on sterile gravelly slopes throughout the southeastern uplands,
and naturally invades the shale-barrens. When it does so, the corolla
color seems to be paler than usual, although no other distinctive
features are known to have developed.
Houstonia.—Several species of Summer-bluets grow in the shale-slope
region, and H. tenuzfolia Nutt. becomes particularly abundant in these
habitats, showing no differences from occurrences on other formations.
Campanula.—The lovely little Allegheny Bluebell, C. divaricata or
C. flexuosa Michx., thrives on various types of rocks in the Appala-
chians, including the shales here under discussion. Its characters
remain, however, essentially uniform throughout.
11 'Torreya 29: 106. 1929.
12 Bartonia 11: 27. 1929.
50 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 3
Liatris—Gayfeathers are a striking feature of several of the shale-
barrens, but their nomenclature needs further consideration. Perhaps
the commonest is a derivative of L. spicata (L.) Willd., which corre-
sponds more or less to L. spicata montana Gray.
Solidago.—One of the several goldenrods of these habitats, an
apparent relative of S. arguta Ait., has been described as a distinct
species, S. harrisii Steele. Others also deserve critical study.
Aster—The widespread A. lowrieanus is represented on the barrens
by a plant with creeping rootstocks which adapt it to growth in the
heaps of loose shale, and it has received the appropriate name of A.
schistosus Steele. Other species of this genus also occur in these habi-
tats, but show no recognizable changes there. The latter statement
apparently applies as well to the Antennarias, although they have not
been investigated closely. 7
Silphium.—Rosinweeds are mostly native to the prairies of the
central United States, but a few of them push eastward into the
Alleghenies. One of these, S. reniforme Raf., is a striking member of
the shale-barren flora, although it grows to some extent on other forma-
tions as well.
Helianthus.—Several Sunflowers occur on or near shale-barrens,
but the only one recognized as showing distinctive characters is a
rough-leaved representative of a widespread species, which has been
named H. laevigatus reindutus Steele.
Senecio.—Three or four Groundsels are known in the shale-slope
region, one of them being especially noteworthy. The Everlasting-
Groundsel, S. antennariifolius Britton, is a highly characteristic occu-
pant of the barer situations, often spreading into large patches,
and having been but rarely observed in any other habitats. This
endemic, like several others, is most nearly related to a Rocky Moun-
tain species, and in the key in Gray’s Manual, ed. 7, the range is
actually the only feature used to distinguish it from S. canus Hook.
GS. purshianus Nutt.) of that region.
In conclusion, two tabular arrangements of the species above dis-
cussed may be given to bring out certain interesting points about them:
(1) a geographic list, showing the inferred sources of the plants and the
type of endemism they represent; and (2) a chronologic list of the arti-
cles in which the more pronounced endemics have been described,
showing how this interesting flora has been critcally studied only at
more or less long intervals.
FEB. 4, 1930 WHERRY: PLANTS OF SHALE-BARRENS ol
TABLE 1. GEOGRAPHIC LIST OF PLANTS OF THE SHALE-BARRENS!3
Without near relatives: Pseudotaenidia montana
Derived from Rocky Mountain species: Woodsia scopulina var.?
Eriogonum alleni
Senecio antennariifolius
Derived from prairie species: Trifolium reflecum virginicum
Astragalus distortus var.?
Silphium rem forme
Derived from surrounding species: Allium oxyphilum (from A. cernuum)
Arabis serotina (from A. laevigata)
Anemone spp.
Clematis spp.
Viola pedata var.?
Oenothera argillicola (from O. biennis)
Convolvulus stans (from C. spithamaeus)
Phlox subulata brittonii
Phlox buckley (from P. ovata)
Inatris spicata montana?
Solidago harrisit (from S. arguta)
Aster schistosus (from A. lowrieanus)
Helianthus laevigatus reindutus
Entering without essential change: Cheilanthes lanosa
Selaginella rupestris
Polygonum tenue
Anychia divaricata et al.
Paronychia dichotoma
Silene pennsylvanica et al.
Draba ramosissima
Sedum nevii et al.
Oenothera parviflora?
Asclepias tuberosa et al.
Phlox ovata
Penstemon canescens
Houstonia tenuifolia et al.
Campanula flexuosa
Aster spp.
Antennaria spp.
Helianthus spp.
Senecio spp.
13This is by no means a complete list of the plants which grow on the barrens, but
does include most of the more striking or noteworthy ones thus far observed. Fur-
ther study will no doubt result in adding to the list, as well as in shifting of some
species from the category ‘‘entering without essential change’’ to other classes.
52 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 3
TABLE 2. CHRONOLOGICAL List OF SHALE-BARREN ENDEMICS OR NEAR-ENDEMICS
1803. Muicuaux, Flora Boreali-Americana 1: 136. Convolvulus stans.
319. Clematis sericea.
1814. Pursu, Flora America Septentrionalis 2: 736. Clematis ovata.
1841. RarinesqueE, Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc. n.s.7: 342. Silphium reniforme.
1889. Watson, in Gray’s Manual, ed. 6, p. 734. Hriogonum allent.
1894. Sma, Mem. Torr. Bot. Club 4: 112. Trifolium virginicum.
1898. Brirron, in Britton & Brown Illustr. Flora 3: 478. Senecio antennariifolius.
1900. Smauu, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 27: 279. Phlox brittonit.
1903. MackKrENzIk, Torreya 3: 159. Pseudotaenidia montana.
1904. Mackernziz, Torreya 4: 56. Oe¢enothera argillicola.
1911. Sverre, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 13: 364. Clematis viticaulis.
365. Arabis serotina.
369. Solidago harrisit.
373. Aster schistosus.
374. Helianthus laevigatus reindutus.
1925. Wuerry, THs JoURNAL 15: 370. Allium oxyphilum.
1929. Wuerky, THIS JOURNAL 20: 25. Phlox buckleyr.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
The largest single monetary award in America for scientific accomplish-
ment has been created by Popular Science Monthly, which, beginning this
autumn, will confer an annual prize of $10,000, accompanied by a gold medal,
upon the American citizen who has been responsible, during the preceding
year, for the achievement in science of greatest potential value to the world.
The award will be bestowed under the auspices of the Popular Science
Institute, a research organization maintained by the magazine, of which
Prof. Coututns P. Briss, associate dean, New York University, is director.
The Institute has enlisted the services of twenty-four leaders in American
science to serve as a Committee of Award, whose task it will be to select the
prize-winning effort. The prize will be conferred for the first time in Septem-
ber, 1930, and the initial period of scientific accomplishment to be con-
sidered by the Committee of Award will be the twelve months ending June
30,1930. All scientific workers, professional and amateur, academic and
commercial, are eligible.
The Committee of Award consists of: Dr. CHartes G. AsBsBort, Prof.
Couuins P. Buiiss, Dr. Samurt A. Brown, Dr. Gzorcre K. Bureszss, Dr.
Witu1amM W. CampBELu, Dr. Harvey N. Davis, Dr. Artuur L. Day, Dr. E.
EK. Free, Travis Hoxs, Dr. Frank B. Jewett, Dr. VERNON KELLOGG,
Cuarues F. Kerrertne, Dr. ArtHur D. Litriz, Dr. Joun C. Murriam,
Dr. Ropert A. Mrurrkan, Dr. HENRY FarrFieLp OsBorn, Dr. ELMER A,
SpeRRY, Dr. Samuret W. Stratton, Dr. Etisu THomson, Dr. Epwarp R.
WEIDLEIN, Henry HerMAN WEsTINGHOUSE, Dr. ALBERT E. Wuite, Dr.
Wiis R. Wuitney, and ORVILLE WRIGHT.
The creation of this award, it is expected, will serve to further stimulate
ae. and inventive activity in this country, especially along practi-
cal lines.
NCEMENTS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES :
ay, February 5, The Society of Engineers
= The Medical Society
Y; feb eaare 6, The Entomological Society
February 7, The Geographic Society
r, February 8, The Biological Society
February 11, The Institute of Electrical Engineers
Soe! 12, The Geological Society
The Medical Society
The Chemical Society
; - The Geographie Society
The Philosophical Society __
- The Helminthological Society
The Anthropological Society
1S Roa datas The Historical Society
February 19, The Society of Engineers
~The Medical Society
srams of Fis rhedtines of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if
editors. by the es and twenty-fifth day of each month.
rae
i
eee
hag
. ra
CONTENTS
ORIGINAL PAPERS
Meteorology.—On the effect of vertical convection on lapse rates. x c
Geology.—The Cretaceous faunas in the section on Vermilion C
County, Colorado. Joun B. Ruusrpn, JR........../......0.0008
Paleontology.—A new hypural fan from the Miocene of Maryland. be
Botany.—Plants of the Appalachian shale-barrens.
ScrentiFic NOTES AND Ms ee
This Jovawax. is indexed in the International Indes tol Periodieala ee .
curd Secretary: i B. ee uM IAN, B
Recording Secretary: Cuartes THom, Bureau of C
Treasurer: Henry G. a Coast and Geodetie
1
we ;
VoL. 20 Frsruary 19, 1930 No. 4
ees
/
a Re
i whe & i)
\ ft, a te
Fy.
° ~~ - Qn z
My c® Gs
x &
yy Ime = mf,
‘hee i 1
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
EpGgar W. WoouaRrp EpGar T. WHERRY C. Wrtue Cooxs
GEORGE WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY BUREAU OF CHEMISTRY AND SOILS U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
H. E. Merwin Haroup Morrison
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. GoLDMAN G. W. Strosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GLUOLOGICAL SOCIETY
AcGnes CHase J. R. SWANTON ©
ROTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
RoGeErR C. WELLS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
%
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THD
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Royat anp GUILFORD AVES.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office, at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24.1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for
in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This Journal, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims i, i
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. Tothisendit publishes: = a
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) os aa
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington; ae a
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (4) _— 4
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourNaLisissued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corres ond to calendar years. Prompt —
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or.
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Raa
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they soil bi? Piss,
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References —
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered —
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reprodigliak =
by zine etchings being preferable. ey Fs
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authored: Bet. *
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors _ pte
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. oe + Be
Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices.
Copies 4pp. ‘Spr. 12 pp, 16 pp. Covers
50 $3.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00 re
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50 |
150 2.25 4,30 ee ee 6.50 3.00 a7"
200 2.50 4.80 .. 5.75 7.00 - 3.50*
250 3.00 5. 30 6.25 +t. 50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive. agi ag
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. t,
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address ria ©
the corner may be obtained at the following Erie: First 100, vi 00; scion ae ie
$1.00 : Je é %:
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies « ‘or reprinta
should invariably be attached to the first page of his ae ee
The rate of Subscriplion per volume is...... tue bhp Ret oe eee eta % . $8 00
Semi-monthly numbers...... 5... ..0¢eeeceseseneneeceneee See os ok Pile See err.
Monthly numbers (13, 14, 15, ‘July, August, scones S adtestan SN caer’ 50
Remitiances should be made payable to ‘Washington ik dacdetiby of Sclanoset a pre
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. c
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. Sage
Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other publications. ;
Missing Numbers will be replaced without, charge, igi Sapscoh rad claim i is made
within thirty days after date of the silowing § issue.” em nee pare
*Volume I, eth from June 19, 1911, to December 19, », 1911, will be ndiit ns $3. 00. Special atk
are given to members of scientific societies ‘affiliated with the Academy
Co sty
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 20 FEBRUARY 19, 1930 No. 4
GEODESY.—The scientific and practical value of triangulation.
Wiuu1am Bowin, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Triangulation, as is well known, is a method of surveying by means
of which the distances and directions between widely separated points
on the earth’s surface can be determined with almost any degree of
accuracy desired. When the triangulation is connected with astronomi-
eal determinations of latitude, longitude and azimuth, geographic
positions of points on the earth’s surface can be derived.
Triangulation is based on the elementary mathematical principle
that when the length of one side of a triangle and the angles of that
triangle are known the lengths of the other two sides can be computed.
In actual practice base lines, varying in length from 4 to 15 miles, are
measured on suitable terrain and from such bases chains of triangles
are extended across the country to cover areas that are to be investi-
gated scientifically or which are to be surveyed and mapped. Neces-
sarily, the two ends of a triangle side must be intervisible from the
ground, or structures in the form of stands or towers must be erected
in order that the observer at one end of the line may see a pole, target,
heliotrope or lamp placed directly over the station at the other end.
Every nation of the world that is well-developed industrially has at
least made a start in extending a triangulation net over its area. In
the United States we have about 27,000 miles of are of first-order
triangulation and traverse, by which geographic positions are deter-
mined, in addition to what is called third-order triangulation which
has been executed along our coasts. Then, in the interior of the
country, there is a large amount of triangulation of various orders
below first-order which has been used in the topographic mapping.
1 Received January 11, 1930.
53
54 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO.
FIRST-OROER TRIANGULATION OF NCRTH AMERICA,
work eaniioted or for whe
reconnassonce has been “
1| Glock bonds sa Mexico @ ol lhe United
States ipdicote work accomps/ished.
Hrolched bonds tn Conoda\ ovd fhe Uniled Stotes sAadicote
Elwork co Templeted for fhe \/mmediore future,
rrow Bonds Mdgrcae fraverse-——
Sonuary /, 19 P
Fig. 1.—Triangulation of North America, showing recent work in Canada, the United
States, and Mexico.
eee ee ee
FEB. 19, 1930 BOWIE: TRIANGULATION 55
First-order triangulation which is the framework on which all lower
orders are based is now being executed only by the Coast and Geodetic
Survey. This bureau will supplement the first-order work with ares
of second-order triangulation. ‘The ares of these two classes of trian-
gulation will be so spaced that when the network is completed there
will be few places in the United States more than about 25 miles from
a first or second-order triangulation station.
In this high grade triangulation the best available theodolites are
used. The tendency has been during the past few decades to reduce
the theodolites in size but to increase the accuracy with which the parts
are fitted together, to improve the optics and to increase the refinement
with which the horizontal circle is graduated or divided. Since the
atmosphere is seldom very clear, only in exceptional cases is it possible
to make observations on poles or targets, for the lines are in general
more than 8 miles long and sometimes reach a length of 100 miles or
more. Heliotropes have been used as targets on which to make obser-
vations but they can only be employed when the sun is shining and
even then only during the latter part of the afternoon when the atmos-
phere becomes steady. For several decades the Coast and Geodetic Sur-
vey has been making practically all the angle measurements for the main
scheme of triangles at night. For this purpose, automobile headlights,
each provided with a contracted filament lamp, are used. The beam
going out from such a lamp can be easily observed with the unaided eye
at distances varying up to 40 miles if the atmosphere is at all favorable.
In some parts of the country, notably the southwest where the atmos-
phere is generally quite clear, the light from the signal lamp has been
seen with the unaided eye over distances of more than 100 miles.
Thirty-two pointings are made over each line of the triangulation
during the angle measurements and the average of the results is used as
the direction to be employed in computing the angles of the triangles.
Necessarily in the computations the spheroidal shape of the earth’s
surface must be taken into consideration. If the lines are only a frac-
tion of a mile long the curvature of the earth really does not affect the
measured angles, but the spherical excess, the amount that the sum of
three angles of a spherical triangle exceeds 180 degrees, is in some cases
more than one minute.
The closing error of the triangles as observed for first-order triangula-
tion averages slightly under 1”. This accuracy is all that is required
for any except the most special scientific work.
56 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL, 20, No. 4
The base lines of the triangulation are measured now with 50-meter
invar tapes and the probable error of the derived length is seldom
greater than one part ina million. The actual error is believed to be
seldom or never greater than 1/300,000.
The principal purposes of the triangulation are eminently practical.
In the subdivision of our country into states, counties and even smaller
political units, it is essential that the boundary lines be known in their
proper geographical positions. The triangulation of the country fur-
nishes just the information that is needed in the accurate location of such
political boundary lines. It is also essential that the boundaries of
private property be easily recoverable. This can be assured whenever
geographic positions or plane coordinates are determined for the angle
points of the boundary of a farm or of a city lot. When such coordi-
nates have been given and they are referred to the general triangulation
system of the country, it is possible to relocate the boundary corners
even though all of the monuments set on them may have been de-
. stroyed.
Triangulation furnishes information of value in connection with the
alignment surveys of highways and railroads and in bridge and tunnel
location and construction. Also it furnishes the basis for the surveys
made along rivers for flood control or river improvement. Its most
important practical value is in connection with the charting of the
coasts and the topographic mapping of the country. Commercial
and naval vessels must have accurate charts. There are few important
human activities that do not depend for their successful execution on
exact knowledge of geographic positions, distances, directions, eleva-
tions and the configuration of the ground. All of this information is
furnished by the modern topographic map. That map in turn depends
on the triangulation system of the country in order that the various
adjoining sections of it may be accurately fitted together. When the
triangulation system of the whole country is used in mapping there will
not be those gaps, overlaps and offsets where two maps meet which
oiten bother the cartographer who constructs them and others who use
them. ‘Triangulation is used extensively in military surveying and
mapping. !
Triangulation also has very important scientific values. It is
only by means of connected ares of triangulation with the astronomic
latitudes and longitudes determined at some of the stations that one
can determine the dimensions of the earth. From gravity data alone
the shape of the earth can be obtained, but triangulation by which dis-
FEB. 19, 1930 BOWIE: TRIANGULATION 57
tances across wide areas are measured is necessary for the determina-
tion of the size. The shape and size of the earth have already been
determined a number of times but in each case the data used covered
only a comparatively small part of the earth’s surface. With more
extensive data over greater areas closer approximations to the true
figure of the earth can be made.
The shape and size of the earth are needed in all surveying and
mapping operations which are executed on a large scale, in navigation,
and in explorations. The figure of the earth is needed as well as the
distances between widely separated points in connection with certain
astronomical observations, especially in the determination of the
parallax of the moon.
It has been found that the combination of astronomical and triangu-
lation data enable one to learn much in regard to deviations from nor-
mal density in the outer portion of the earth. In fact it is by means of
astronomical and triangulation data that the first comprehensive quan-
titative test of isostasy was made. It was found that the material
under continental areas is lighter than normal while the material under
ocean areas is heavier than normal. The deviations from normal
density were found to be sufficient to balance the topographic features.
This condition of balance or equilibrium of prisms of the earth’s crust
is called isostasy. :
While the application of the principle of isostasy to triangulation an
astronomical data brought these data into very close agreement it was
found that there were some outstanding differences. Further inves-
tigation in the field of isostasy involving values of gravity led to the
rather definite conclusion that the abnormalities or residuals in the
geodetic data resulted from the presence of extra heavy or extra light
material near the geodetic stations, both horizontally and vertically.
It seems to be reasonably certain that the deflections of the vertical, as
differences between triangulation and astronomical data are called,
can be used for the purpose of disclosing buried structure. There
is now available in the United States a large amount of geodetic data
in the form of deflections of the vertical which can be used in connec-
tion with geological studies.
Now that isostasy has been substantiated as a scientific principle we
are able to use triangulation and astronomical data to show the devia-
tions of the geoid or water surface of the earth from the spheroid or
mathematical surface which most nearly fits the geoid. A surface can
be passed through the astronomical stations at right angles to the direc-
58 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 4
tion of gravity and also through the derived directions of gravity at
places where triangulation has not been executed or astronomical
observations made, but where the deflection of the vertical on the
isostatic principle has been computed. What might be called a geoid
contour map could be constructed which would show the deviations
of the geoid from the spheroid.
One of the most notable cases of the use of triangulation in a scien-
tific problem was the measurement, by means of a base and triangula-
tion, of the distance between San Antonio Peak and Mt. Wilson in
southern California for the use of Prof. A. A. Michelson in the deter-
mination of the velocity of light. The length of the base was about
22 miles while the distance between the two peaks was about 23 miles.
Every possible correction was applied to the triangulation in order to
eliminate the effect of systematic errors. The base line was measured
with a probable error of about one part in 10 million, while the probable
error of the distance between the two peaks was about one part in 6
million. It seems reasonably certain that the distance furnished Prof.
Michelson was not in error by as much as one millionth of the distance.
Triangulation has been used in this and other countries in the deter-
mination of the distortion of the earth’s surface during earthquakes.
Already rather extensive investigations have been made in California
by means of triangulation, and plans are now being formulated for
an extension of the tests. Ares of triangulation are being extended
across areas where there are fault zones which have been active in his-
torical or at least in late geological time. It is planned to have this
triangulation repeated at intervals of ten or some other number of years
to see if any strains have taken place in the earth’s material. Should
an earthquake occur along any of the faults or in fact anywhere in the
vicinity of this triangulation the work will be repeated in order to learn
how much movement of the ground had occurred at different distances
from the fault, and how far from the fault one must go in order to find
undisturbed points. These tests by triangulation in regions of seismic
activity are of particular importance to the geologist for by them he
can obtain an idea as to whether an earthquake is a local or a general
phenomenon. |
The Coast and Geodetic Survey has in the last few years made a
readjustment of the triangulation net of the western half of the United
States involving about 13,000 miles of are. The bureau is now engaged
in the computation and adjustment of the net of the eastern half of the
country. The latter work will be completed in the next two or three
FEB. 19, 1930 REESIDE: CRETACEOUS PELECYPOD 59
years after which standard or final geographic positions can be furn-
ished for the triangulation stations to engineers, scientific workers, or
others who may need the data. Of course there is no such thing as a
final position for there is abundant evidence that the earth’s surface
during geological time has undergone changes both vertical and hori-
zontal, but it seems reasonably certain that very few of the triangula-
tion stations of this country will be affected by geological processes to
an extent that will vitiate the data in a few hundred years at least.
Regions of considerable seismic activity will of course have triangula-
tion stations whose positions are likely to change during earthquakes
and even between such earthquakes but such areas form only a small
portion of the total area of the country.
The accuracy of the triangulation, as shown by the adjustment of the
western net, is quite remarkable. ‘There were 16 circuits with peri-
meters averaging about 1200 miles. ‘The average closing error of these
circuits was about one part in 430,000. There were only two of the
circuits for which the closing error was greater than about 1/200,000.
While it is doubtful if the length of a line of triangulation is known with
an accuracy greater than 1/100,000, yet where there is a series of such
lines combined to measure a distance across country, the errors of the
individual lines tend to balance out according to the law of AGENT Er
tion of accidental errors.
The scientific and practical needs for triangulation data are increas-
ing from year to year. The demands for such data have led the Presi-
dent of the United States to include in his budget for the fiscal year
1931 a substantial increase in the money to be devoted to geodetic
surveys, including triangulation. It is hoped that the triangulation
net composed of first and second order work will be finished within the
' next ten or twelve years.
PALEONTOLOGY .—A Cretaceous pelecypod with color markings.
JOHN B. ReEsipg, JR., U. 8. Geological Survey.
Color markings are so rarely preserved on fossil shells that the ex-
ceptional case of their preservation seems always worthy of record,
particularly where the genus concerned is extinct. The writer here
presents a note and figures descriptive of a species of Jnoceramus re-
lated to Inoceramus stantoni Sokolow from the lower part of the Mancos
1 Received January 4, 1930. Published with the permission of the Director of the
U.S. Geological Survey.
60 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 4
shale of Vermilion Creek, Moffat County, Colorado.2 The specimens
are completely flattened in a calcareous shale and the original sculp-
ture and outline may be only guessed at. The fossils in adjacent lay-
ers, however, show that the age of the beds is that of the lower part of
the Niobrara limestone (Coniacian).
The markings on these shells show as light-brown, nearly straight
bands radiating from the beaks and gradually increasing in width
toward the basal margins. The width of the individual bands differs
much, though there seems to be a wider band near the middle of each
shell and narrower bands on each side of it. What the original color
of the bands may have been seems scarcely worth conjecture, but it is
beyond doubt that the pattern preserved is that of the coloring of the
shell in life.
Figure 1.—Jnoceramus aff. I. stantoni Sokolow, from the Mancos shale of Vermilion
Creek, Colorado. Three individuals showing color markings. U.S. National Museum
cat. No. 73736.
PETROGRAPHY.—Pacificite, an anemousite basalt.1 Tom. F. W.
BartTu, Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of Washing-
ton. (Communicated by L. H. Apams.)
Introduction. In many lavas the amount of silica is insufficient for
the formation of feldspar, and consequently minerals undersaturated
in silica are formed, among them the feldspathoids. Microscopic
investigations of the undersaturated lavas of the Pacific island volean-
oes have shown that nephelite occurs throughout the area, forming
2 See Tu1s JOURNAL, 20: 40. 1930.
1 Received January 18, 1930.
FEB. 19, 1930 BARTH: PACIFICITE 61
nephelite basanite, as well as phonolitic trachyte and, rarely, phonolite,
these lavas being in much smaller amount than the basalts. The
minerals of the sodalite graup and analcite, as well as melilite, occa-
sionally occur, but the feldspathoid leucite is never met with at the
Intra-Pacifie volcanoes.
It has been noted, however, that there occur certain purely feld-
spathic basalts, without nephelite and usually with olivine, the analyses
of which show the presence of very considerable amounts of nephelite
in the norm, although none of this appears in the rock. A number of
these rocks have been studied by me and the conclusion has been
arrived at that much of what is apparently a normal plagioclase is in
reality anemousite.
Anemousite is a plagioclase with carnegieite in solid solution, carne-
gieite being the triclinic form of the molecule Na;Al,8i.03, which ordi-
narily occurs as the hexagonal nephelite. Anemousite was first
described by Washington and Wright? on specimens from the island of
Linosa, in the Mediterranean, this being, so far, the only known occur-
rence. Carnegieite has been made artificially,? and it appears to be the
abnormal nephelite described by Esch from the Kamerun.‘ Bowen:
has studied the system, nephelite (carnegieite)-anorthite. The possi-
bility of the presence of anemousite or carnegieite instead of nephelite
in lavas, dependent on the conditions of solidification, was pointed out
in the paper. on the feldspar from Linosa, in which it is said (p. 64):
“With identical chemical composition of the rock, we would have in the
one case a nephelite tephrite, and in the other a feldspar basalt, but
the norms of both would be the same and would show normative nephe-
lite.’ The pacificites are an example of this.
We have in these lavas a rock that, under other conditions, would
have contained very considerable nephelite, whereas this molecule
actually enters a triclinic plagioclase. Under the former conditions
the rock would be a nephelite basanite or tephrite, while it has the
mineral composition of a feldspar basalt. Recognition of this difference
seems to be called for, so that I propose the name pacificite for this group
of anemousite basalts. If olivine is present in abundance the rock
would be called olivine pacificite. This name is appropriate inasmuch
2 WASHINGTON and WriecutT, Am. Journ. Sci. 29: 52-70. 1910.
’Tuucutt, Neues. Jahrb., Beil. Band 9: 561. 1894; WasHinaton and Wria«xt,
op. cit., p. 64; Bowrn, Am. Journ. Sci. 38: 564. 1912; Bowrn and Greta, Ibid., 10:
204. 1925.
4H. Escu, Sitzb. Berl. Akad. 18: 400. 1901.
5 BOWEN, op. cit., pp. 551-573.
62 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 4
as such anemousite-bearing lavas would seem to be widely scattered
throughout the Intra-Pacifie basin, as is shown by the descriptions and
analyses published by Lacroix, Washington, and others. For example,
in discussing the lavas of Maui, it is remarked® that the alkalic tend-
ency of these rocks is indicated “by the constant presence, modal or
normative or both, of nephelite in the andesites and basalts of Halea-
kala.”’
Although the feldspar of the pacificite is undersaturated it can not be
called feldspathoid, and consequently the rock can not be reckoned
with the tephrites or basanites, because according to the definition
of these the presence of a feldspathoid is essential. ‘Therefore pacificite
is to be classed with the basalts.
Mineral composition. A quantitative description of two pacificites
follows.
1. Pacificite. Three miles from Rest House, Haleakala, Maui,
Hawaiian Islands. Analyzed by M. G. Keyes, under name of
nephelite andesine basalt.7
This rock is somewhat trachytoidal in texture. Abundant thin
laths of plagioclase grade on the one hand into larger phenocrysts
(labradorite), and on the other hand into an interstitial groundmass
(anemousite). Very few phenocrysts of euhedral olivine, and many of
grayish brown pyroxene are present. In the groundmass very minute
augite grains and much ore are met with.
Olivine (2 per cent’). The axial angle is very close to 90°, some grains
probably show a negative character. The composition is consequently
about 15 fayalite.® 7
Pyroxene. The phenocrysts and microphenocrysts of pyroxene
make up 15 per cent of the rock; the amount in the groundmass is
probably somewhat lower. The axial angle is 2Vy = 56°+ 3°, dis-
persion p > v, the extinction angle is c : y = 48°. The refringence
shows some variation, indicating a different composition of the various
grains; an average value is 8 = 1.705.
The value of 2V indicates that no appreciable amount of either
clinoenstatite or acmite can be present, and the value of 6 indicates an
amount of about 50 per cent of the diopside molecule, the rest being
chiefly hedenbergite.
6 WasHINGTON and Keyes, Am. Journ. Sci. 15: 216. 1928.
‘ WASHINGTON and KEYEs, op. cit., p. 21C.
3 This is the volumetric percentage found by the Rosiwal method.
* This is approximately the composition of the olivine of Kilauea, as shown by
AvURovssEAU and Merwin (Am. Mineral. 18: 560, 1928).
— a ae ee eee
FEB. 19, 1930 BARTH: PACIFICITE 63
Ore (8 per cent). The percentage of ore shown in the thin sections is
less than that shown in the norm. This is because much of the norma-
tive magnetite and ilmenite is modally present in the augite. It was
not possible to determine the relative amounts of magnetite and ilmen-
ite in the thin sections, but the norm indicates that the amount of
ilmenite is equal to that of the magnetite or that the latter is very
titaniferous.
Feldspars. The phenocrysts show the following properties:
The lowest index of refraction, a = 1.557 : 55 An
Maximum extinction in zone L (010), a’:(010) = 33° : 58 An
Positive axial angle, 2V = 75° : 55 An
Extinction angle in section Ly, a:a = 28° : 53 An.
This feldspar may be an anemousite, for the data correspond fairly
well with those given by Wright? for the anemousite from Linosa. How-
ever, the above data also fit in very well with a normal labradorite, and
since no further proofs of the presence of carnegieite are obtainable, the
feldspar of the phenocrysts may be regarded as a normal plagioclase
of about 50 An.
TABLE 1.—Ca.tcuLATION OF THE MINERAL COMPOSITION OF PACIFICITE FROM
HALEAKALA
Anemousite Labradorite Ola
Ore ee Can ae a (15 Fa) Pyrox.| Apat. | Total
oy Diy, Shel one ee oie 6.9 6.7 | 14.5 4.6 0.8 | 2:1 45.6
SO PES Ao hk, ort oe 4.3 0.8 Sek
JN Sal pene a naa 1.9 on 4.1 3:9 0.6 16.2
Fe,03 nb ORES CACORE OORT OEE OPS Bt) 0.9 4.4
CIO ree ial yee es nehikes 9.0 0.3 1.9 7.0
BUM ee Sh pits ae hoce & OR on 4.1
CAO he aes, Dy i on Gea 8.5
1 ic Oc ee 3.5 7D 0.1 6.1
LG) Ce ee ae Cone 1.8 1.8
OO tee a 0.5 0.5
“TRG SGST DOR ee eae 2k ee an oe one fe 1 Sron tO 2Gn) lor On Ze Oe6 ugile eee) 12 | 10020
The more sodic feldspars of the groundmass, however, certainly ex-
hibit optical properties that do not correspond with those of any normal
feldspar series.!° The shading of the feldspar laths into an interstitial
groundmass is accompanied by a lowering of the refringence. A
common value of the mean index is 8 = 1.550 +, while a still is higher
10 This was referred to andesine or oligoclase-andesine by WASHINGTON and KeEyrEs,
who determined the optical characters only approximately.
64 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 4
than 1.545; the axial angle of such grains is (+) 2V = 60° + 3°.
It is hardly possible to detect any grains with 6 lower than 1.550,
obviously indicating that neither nephelite nor ordinary alkali feld-
spars are present.
There does not exist any known mineral with the above stated
optical properties. But since the aspect is very much like that of a
feldspar, and since the chemical analysis of the rock shows that some
undersaturated mineral has to occur, a plausible explanation is that this
mineral belongs to the anemousite series.
The calculation of the rock analysis is shown in Table 1. Table 2
shows the mode compared with the norm.
TABLE 2.—MoprE AND NorM OF PACIFICITE FROM HALEAKALA
Mode | Norm
IMETHOUSILG : 04. Ske eck oe eae) AS” | OTe aha. toy 02's 5 ss oh ee 10.6
Prariociase (o0"An)<..5. 2 aoe5s6. ee TOMAR aro Ss. Oe a ek eee 21.0
Ameen 117
PPT ORENE 42 ci tstes Steals ae ds C2) ee 20 WN INGp a aa dd woesuig ets acl: wah eer 16.5
SmnenC a Pa) ses ti. ok opie. oe ee DPD... eas sa. ets sha cae oe ZL. 3
ORM 2 RO eee ie
(0) 1 Dobe Nags a Re I I ee DS | I te ok oe pace, ate os ote eh Se ee 6.5
Lh en 9.7
re ee TE DAD. ne Anne 13
A pyroxene from Haleakala has already been studied by Washington
and Merwin." A comparison of the composition of this pyroxene!”
with the calculated composition of the pyroxene in the pacificite gives a
further proof of the correctness of the interpretation of the rock analy-
sis. The molecular compositions (by weight, with titanium dioxide
reckoned with silica) are as follows.
Analyzed Augite from
augite pacificite
AD OSTAG es is Came ts en ee 66
PCCeR DEL OIGe 00:5 ee Ee A Se 2 a 2a
TMS eles a nes, oe Mee ee pn 5 3
Pes Cathe tor). ph). SE eet be 2
Besqmmom@es (0/29/22), Sarr ta Oy 9 5
For the analyzed augite: 6 = 1.706, c:7 = 48°, 2V. = 60°: for the
pacificite augite: 8 = 1.705, c:y7 = 48°, 2V = 56°.
11 WASHINGTON and MEerwIn, Am. Journ. Sci. 3: 117. 1922.
12 This pyroxene was found along the trail from the Rest House to Red Hill.
FEB. 19, 1930 BARTH: PACIFICITE 65
The slightly higher content of hedenbergite in the augite of the
pacificite is probably due to the admixture of the groundmass pyrox-
enes which presumably are richer than the phenocrysts in iron.
The anemousite is not homogeneous but consists of a series of solid
solutions. The average composition by weight calculated from the
chemical analysis comes out as follows:
Orunoclasen soe eee. ME aD
ANIC TUG Saag Sabiltaldee Maou ies se AME! ans Charge 30
ENMIOEUNTLCR 0/4 See eee. eee ee te 1D
Warnemielie le ees: MEME eee cys Bo
This composition must correspond with fair accuracy to that of the
average feldspar of the groundmass of the rock. No serious alteration
of the figures is possible, and since the optical properties of the ground-
mass exclude with certainty any ordinary undersaturated mineral,
the fact that this rock represents a new lava type has been established,
and in all probability the undersaturated mineral must be looked upon
as an anemousite feldspar.
2. Olivine pacificite. Kaula Gulch, above Ookala, Mauna Kea,
Hawaii, Hawaiian Islands. Analyzed by H. S. Washington
and by him called chrysophyric basalt.18
This lava contains abundant phenocrysts of olivine in a very fine
grained, grayish groundmass consisting of small crystals of pyroxene,
a little ore and some feldspar laths that partly grade into an inter-
stitial feldspar-like mineral.
Olivine (17 per cent). The negative axial angle is 85°, the mean
index of refraction, 6 = 1.703, corresponding to 26 Fa.
Pyroxene (34 per cent) shows somewhat variable optical properties.
The positive axial angle is around 58°, and the mean index is about
ee 1000.
The index indicates an amount of not less than 40 per cent diopside,
and the axial angle shows that no clinoenstatite or acmite molecules
are present in appreciable amount. ‘The residual 60 per cent must
consequently be chiefly hedenbergite. The amount of sesquioxide
is presumably small, but can not be accurately stated.
Ore (6 per cent) is a mixture of ilmenite and magnetite.
Feldspars. Very few phenocrysts (much less than 1 per cent) of
labradorite-bytownite (about 72 An) are present.
13 WASHINGTON, Am. Journ. Sci. 5: 499. 1928.
66 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 4
Some of the well developed thin feldspar laths in the groundmass
have a mean index of refraction, 8 = 1.555—-1.550; they are optically
positive with 2V about 85°, and may consequently be regarded as
normal plagioclase with the composition of a calcic andesine. The
more sodic feldspars, however, are anomalous," a great many of them
show the following properties: 6 = 1.545 + 0.002, (+) 2V = 84° + 4°.
Some feldspar powder of the rock was obtained by magnetic separa-
tion and was embedded in different index liquids. On grains lying
normal to an optic axis the following measurements were made:
1.545
(+)84
1.550
(+ )85
1.552
1.540 | 1.535
(+)85
(+)75 | (+)80
Variations of the axial angle from +10° to +65° were observed on
grains of low refringence (8 < 1.540).
That the relation between the refringence and the axial angle in these
feldspars is very different from that in the plagioclase series is shown
graphically in Fig.1. Since all the potash feldspars and also the nephe-
lite are optically negative, they can with certainty be excluded, and
thus the only possible explanation again seems to be that these feld-
spar-like minerals belong to the anemousite series.
TABLE 3.—MopeE Anp Norm OF OLIVINE PACIFICITE FROM KauLa GutcH, Mauna KEA
Mode Norm
JN Onn ST th he ee ie = 34 | ORs Stee oh ie hie ee ee 5.6
Prraciacse (45 An) | si. ec eee Fe | CADE oe be Oe ooo ae ee 19.9
AMe Potash sf bs%cn eon ee ee 6.1
LEE Crs |p ge ae id ek ae eee Sp Ne. 2 244 DSP De. eee 10.8
treme Bayes 2. dc iiycee hich Oe cla pe 18.9). Dike cco ue gk abored ob etews eee 30.9
Ole on bk dine Se ee neg 17.3
on Eyes cy De Oe ed oy a COMB as cds snk Se ee eee 4.9
Y). a0 ee eee 4.3
A pesee ieee TE Sayan BANE i) Apy .5 ai.) << Sates See ee eee 1.3
The mode and norm of this rock are entered in Table 3. The method
of calculation is the same as that which was used for the rock previously
described. ‘The figures are in perfect agreement with the microscopic
observations.
14 The colorless substance of the ground mass was doubtfully referred to nephelite by
WASHINGTON, who remarks that its amount is much less than that of the nephelite in the
norm.
~
FEB. 19, 1930 BARTH: PACIFICITE 67
The calculated average composition of the pyroxenes is as follows:
DAO OSIO Hee ass ss sane 61
IbfedemochetGa |. te a oe ee
PME TING Cater SO8 SW Soya ols... AMEE, Soe ane 4
The calculated average composition of the anemousite is:
Ort mnoc Se Pe. es ek I ee ae IG ty id a 9
PIGOS eee Ce heen a «Dee eh ell 54
GA ROTRUGL GTI Fc ie SRC rn eR A spe ne a ee a IB
CAME OTOIUC eos See ee Rade MURS ome S oo 8 24
Ba 155 1 5y 153
Fig. 1.—The axial angle plotted against the mean index of refraction for the plagio-
clase series and for the series of feldspar-like minerals occurring in the pacificite. The
value at 8 = 1.559 is taken from Wright’s (Washington and Wright, Am. Journ. Sci.
29: 52-70. 1910) measurements on anemousite from Linosa.
The preceding pages contain all the information on this anemousite
feldspar available by analytical and optical methods. Several vain
attempts have been made to obtain pure anemousite from the rock
for a chemical analysis. But these lavas are too fine grained; very fine
68 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 4
dust and minute grains and skeletons of ore and pyroxene are mixed
with the colorless minerals in such an intricate way that even if the
rock is ground down so extensively that the powder sticks together
like clay, and all methods of mechanical separation are carried out very
slowly, it has been impossible to get even approximately pure material.
Of course it is possible to concentrate the colorless minerals, but so
much of the dark minerals is always admixed that the calculation of the
composition of the colorless phases can never be very accurate, because
an estimation of the proportion and nature of the colored contamina-
tions in such a finely ground powder would always be a mere guess. If
the calculation is based directly on the chemical analysis of the rock,
however, both the amount and composition of the colored minerals
can be obtained by optical analysis.
It is hoped that a study of the system nephelite-albite will throw
more light on the nature and properties of anemousite. In connection
with such a synthetical study the genesis of the pacificites will also be
discussed.
I wish to express my sincere thanks to Dr. H. S. Washington of
this Laboratory for the free ‘use I have had of his large rock collection,
for his furnishing me with data of the petrology of the Pacific Islands,
and for his very welcome criticism of this paper.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
THE ACADEMY
225TH MEETING
The 225th meeting was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club on
Thursday, April 4, 1929.
Program: AUSTIN H. Cuarxk of the U. 8. National Museum delivered an
illustrated address on Evolution. Any tenable theory accounting for the
development of animal forms must take into consideration three distinct, but
interrelated, sets of facts. These are: First, indubitable evolutionary lines,
such as those found in the horses; second, breaks or gaps in the continuity of
these lines, and especially between the lines themselves, as between the cat
and the dog lines; third, the fact that all fossils, including the very earliest,
fall at once into their respective phyla as the phyla are defined on the basis of
the data derived from recent animals alone—in other words that in all
geological history there has been no change in the interrelationships between
the phyla. Perhaps the term evolution might be so restricted as to cover only
development of animal types within the phyla, the word mutations being
used to indicate the gaps, and primagenesis might be used to cover the
original formation of the phyla by different paths of development from the
single cell; the entire concept of the development of animal forms might be
called zodgenests.
FEB. 19, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 69
The evolutionary history and present interrelationships of animal types
are a reflection of the possibilities for variation afforded in the early stages.
These are least in the birds, which form the most unified of.any of the verte-
brate groups. Indeed, all of the vertebrates together show scarcely more
structural diversity than is seen in certain individual species of insects or
crustaceans in the course of their life history.
The relationship between man and any one of the apes may be compared
to that between the greyhounds and the bull-dogs, which differ physically
and mentally both from each other and from the wolf from which they are
derived and do not intergrade either with each other or with the wolf. These
dogs thus illustrate perfect continuity of descent coupled with abrupt dis-
continuity of form and mental attributes. The ancestor of man is not known,
but probably was not an ape as we understand that term. (Author’s abstract.)
226TH MEETING
The 226th meeting was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club on
Friday, May 10, 1929.
Program: Epwarp W. Berry of Johns Hopkins University delivered an
illustrated address on The history of the Andes. Among the major tectonic
features of the earth the Andes are unique in their continuous great elevation
over 65 degrees of latitude; in that they overhang a coast with several great
deeps near shore; and in that they cross much of the equatorial and south
temperate zones and hence lie across the paths of the two most continuous
and most important wind systems of our planet—the southern trades and
the south temperate westerlies. Nearly all of the apparent anomalies of
South American climate are explained by this fact, which is also the clue to
the most important method for arriving at the amount and date of uplift of
the present mountains.
In the central and northern Andes the present coastal region lies in the
rain shadow of the moisture-carrying trade winds, gets little moisture from the
Pacific because of the cool Humboldt or Peruvian current, and is consequently
a desert or semi-desert. In the southern Andes, Patagonia lies in a rain
shadow of the moisture-carrying ‘‘roaring forties’’ and is consequently arid.
The evidence furnished by late Tertiary fossil plants, which have been col-
lected from a great many localities on both sides of the mountains as well as
from great elevations within the montane belt, shows that the major elevation
did not take place until near the close of the Tertiary period, or slightly later.
Traces of wet lowland tropical forests, whose existing relatives are confined
to the basin of the Amazon, are found at elevations of from 11000 to 13500
feet along with petrified woods showing no seasonal rings, and similar floras
are found fossil in the Peruvian desert. Similarly, fossil floras indicative of a
heavy rainfall, and with coal measures, are found not only along the West
Coast in southern Chile, but also east of the present mountains in the, at
present, arid belt of Argentina.
These prove that the amount of vertical elevation since Pliocene time
amounted to over 5000 feet as a minimum figure. This is corroborated by
the present physiography with its discordant stream profiles, by the great
topographic maturity of the more elevated as compared with the less elevated
parts of the terrain, by the finding of marine Pliocene fossils in the southern
Andes at elevations of over amile, by observed changes in the drainage pattern,
and by the distribution of the present life—especially the plants, birds, and
freshwater fishes.
70 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 20, No. 4
The general geologic history of South America was shown to have con-
sisted of sedimentation in a series of geosynclines extending approximately
north and south, the western margins of these geosynclines lying progressively
farther west during the Paleozoic. The major periods of folding, according
to our present information, were in supposed pre-Cambrian rocks, in pre-
Carboniferous rocks, in the pre-Mesozoic rocks, and in the pre-Cenozoic
rocks. Igneous activity appears to have reached a maximum during the
Cenozoic, and the major uplift was many millions of years subsequent to the
folding of the rocks. The antecedent times when the Andean segment was
above sea level were early Cambrian, and earlier, part of the Ordovician,
late Devonian and early Carboniferous, during the Permian (maximum earlier
emergence) and most of the Triassic.
The address was illustrated by diagrams and maps showing the main
tectonic lines, the climatic elements, etc., and views illustrating the types of
country developed in the various climatic zones and in the rocks of various
geological ages. (Author’s abstract.)
227TH MEETING
The 227th meeting was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club on
the evening of Tuesday, November 26, 1929.
Program: The meeting was devoted to a symposium on The 1929 Scientific
Explorations in Alaska. Brief addresses on the various phases of the work
were given by ALES Hrpui¢éKa for Anthropology, H. B. Cotuins for Archeol-
ogy, R. Y.Sruart and E. E. Carter for Forestry, PHitip Smits for Geology,
and W. R. Greae for meteorology. Abstracts of most of these addresses
follow:
The 1929 anthropological researches of the speaker in Alaska were devoted
to the Yukon River, throughout its extent (2300 miles). Their main objects
were to secure anthropometric data on the remaining full-blood Indians and
Eskimo along the river; to collect whatever older skeletal remains might still
be found along the river; and to advance as far as possible our knowledge of
the earlier settlements or migrations along the Yukon River. Substantial
and interesting progress was made in all these directions, notwithstanding
the inclement season. The expedition resulted in the securing of valuable
data as well as much of the older skeletal material, and due to good fortune
brought also a large series of specimens belonging to the fossil ivory culture
of the northwestern Bering Sea and northeastern Asia. (Author’s abstract.)
Archeological investigations of the past four years around Bering Strait
have revealed the existence of an ancient phase of Eskimo culture more highly
developed, especially in regard to art, than any since known to the Arctic
regions. This old Bering Sea culture is apparently ancestral to the extinct
Thule culture, the most ancient Eskimo culture of the eastern regions.
However, there may possibly have been a late return migration which super-
imposed certain Thule traits on the older Bering Sea culture. A vague simi-
larity in art and other general resemblances in material culture may indicate
an ancient connection with the Indians of the Northwest Coast, although
this cannot be determined until some knowledge is had of the archeology of the
latter region. Therich curvilinear art of the old Bering Sea culture has been
traced through a transitional stage, much less elaborate, into the still simpler
patterns of the modern Eskimo. The early stages have not been found.
Evidence of a direct and indirect nature points to Northeastern Siberia,
between the Anadyr and Kolyma Rivers, as the probable place of origin of
the old Bering Sea culture. (Author’s abstract.)
FEB. 19, 1930 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS all
There is great need for continued employment within the Territory.
The activities there are largely seasonal. The fishing season is quite short
and the timber and mining work must be curtailed in the open during the
more rigorous months. The largest opportunity for building up a twelve
months pay roll seems to lie in the establishment of forest industries in the
Territory, such as the pulp and paper industry, which could operate their
plants throughout the entire year. There is also a large opportunity open
for the development of trade in fur-bearing animals, if the proper protection
is given to the range available to them. The need for protection in this
respect is much greater in interior Alaska than in southeastern Alaska because
the fire hazard is more acute in the interior. (Author’s abstract.)
Five projects were undertaken by the Geological Survey, namely, (1) in
cooperation with the Forest Service inducing the Navy Department to send a
detachment of airplanes to southeastern Alaska to photograph 12,000 square
miles for mapping and study and participating in the conduct of the work in
the field; (2) a reconnaissance of the Alaska Range at the head of the Copper
River valley and extending northward into the Tanana Valley; (3) an ex-
ploration of the western slopes of the Alaska Range west of Cook Inlet and
north of Lake Clark; (4) a scouting trip into parts of the Yukon-Tanana
region of central Alaska, with a view to visiting tracts that had not heretofore
been studied and making a comprehensive correlation of the geology of that
general region; (5) the installation of a new seismograph at Dutch Harbor,
Unalaska Island, and the rehabilitation of the seismograph at Kodiak Island
and the placing of observers at each of these stations. In addition, the
Geological Survey carried on its usual investigations of the general develop-
ment of the mineral resources of the Territory and its technical administra-
tive duties relating to the operations under leases and permits granted for
mining certain mineral deposits on Government-owned lands. (Auwthor’s
abstract.)
In 1927 the Alaskan Legislature requested codperation and assistance from
the Federal Government in the development of facilities for safe and efficient
flying in the Territory. One of the aids specially requested was the organiza-
tion of an airways weather service. A definite start to this end was made
early in 1929. Fairbanks was chosen as the organization center largely
because it is the point from and to which there is the greatest amount of
flying. Five substations have been established, at Anchorage, Crooked
Creek, Dillingham, Golovin and Ketchikan. These regularly report by
Signal Corps radio twice daily, or oftener if necessary, to Fairbanks. In
addition, reports are received from twelve other stations which had previously
been established. The observations are used not only for the information
they give as to current conditions but also as the basis for flying-weather
forecasts. In addition, permanent records are kept and these will be used in
statistical and other studies of conditions in this region,—one of the most
interesting, meteorologically speaking, in the world. (Author’s abstract.)
Water D. Lambert, Recording Secretary.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
The Geological Society of America, together with its affiliated organizations,
the Mineralogical and Paleontological Societies, held their annual meetings
from December 26th to 28th in Washington, celebrating the fiftieth anni-
72 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 4
versary of the creation of the U. 8. Geological Survey. Most of the sessions
were held at the Wardman Park Hotel, but some at the National Museum.
Thursday evening the retiring President of the Geological Society, Professor
HernricH Riks, gave an address entitled Some Problems in the Non-metallics,
pointing out how much remains to be learned as to the origin, significance,
etc., of many deposits of non-metallic minerals. In all about 125 papers ona
wide variety of subjects were presented.
A series of five illustrated lectures relating to The evolution and cultural
history of mankind is in progress under the auspices of the Anthropological
Society of Washington. They are being given in the auditorium of the U. 8.
National Museum and are open to the public. Dr. Fay CoorrrR-CoLe spoke
on January 7 on The coming of man, and Dr. ALES HrpiicKa on January 21
on The differentiation of man into races and his spread over the earth. The
remaining lectures are as follows: February 4, Dr. CLarK WisstER, The
culture area; February 18, Dr. Hnerpert J. Sprinpen, The Civilizations of
Middle America; March 4, Mr. Neitz M. Jupp, Prehistoric pueblos and cliff-
dwellings of the Southwest.
Mr. Herpert J. Krrecer, of the National Museum, is continuing field
work in Santo Domingo, where he has been carrying on anthropological re-
searches during the past two years. Mr. Henry B. CoLuuiins is inspecting
excavations at village sites at Vaughan, Miss., where work is being carried
on by the University of Mississippi.
Mr. Grorces G. AINSLIE, of the Bureau of Entomology, is spending several
months at the National Museum in a study of certain groups of moths.
Mr. Kurt TricHertT, who has a Rockefeller Foundation fellowship in
paleontology for 1930, is studying American Ordovician and Silurian fossils
in the National Museum for comparison with those of Europe.
Dr. F. DREVERMANN, Director of the Senckenbergische Institution at
Frankfort, Germany, recently visited the department of geology of the
National Museum to examine methods of preservation and exhibition of
collections.
The second half-year of the Bureau of Standards Educational Courses has
recently begun. In addition to the continuation of most of those announced
in This JouRNAL 19: 442, there are to be courses in advanced pas theory and
the theory of elasticity given during this period.
The second semester of the Department of Agriculture Graduate School
has also opened. New courses comprise: Physiology of plant growth and
development, Russian for beginners, and business cycles in relation to agri-
culture.
fee NP EMENTS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
es : Wednesday, February 19.
Thursday, February 20.
Friday, February 21.
a Saturday, February 22. |
Wednesday, February 26.
Friday, February 28.
Saturday, March 1.
_ Tuesday, March 4.
The Academy
The Society of Engineers
The Medical Society
The Academy
The Geographic Society
The Biological Society
The Geological Society
The Medical Society
_ The Geographic Society
The Philosophical Society
The Botanical Society
The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if
sent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month.
CONTENTS
ORIGINAL PAPERS
Page
Geodesy.—The scientific and practical value of triangulation. Witu1am Bowie.. 53
Paleontology.—A Cretaceous pelecypod with color markings. JouNn B. Remsips, JR. 59
Petrography.—Pacificite, an anemousite basalt. Tom. F. W. BARTH............... 60
PROCEEDINGS
The AGADEMY .. veevice ccs os cece ne PUREE UC Es at ob soba dea bet. hae .. 68
Scrmentiric NOTES AND NEWS . ..¢ oibga cic we eae ewok snacvank a ca cuepaes aaa 71
This JourNAL is indexed in the International Index to Periodicals to be found in public libraries
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Witu1AM Bowte, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. TuckERMAN, Bureau of Standards.
Recording Secretary: CHARLES THOM, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils.
Treasurer: Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
<
Vou. 20 Marcu 4, 1930 No. 5
fan SON.
JOURNAL “e,’%
so 4, ze?
“= Museum fH
OF THE Sashes
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
Epear W. Woorarp Epq@ar T. WHERRY C. Wytu: Cooxn
@BORGE WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY BUREAU OF CHEMISTRY AND SOILS U. &. GEOLOGICAL BURVEY
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
H. E. Merwin Haroutp Morrison
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
. EH. A. GoupMAN G. W. Srosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
Aanrs CHaAsE J. R. Swanton
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
Roger C, Weis
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THD
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Royau AND GUILFORD AVES.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office, at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24. 1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for
in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918
Ty te ee ey .* ‘A
bh: ss.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This JOURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: ee.
(1) original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) pro- aXe eee
ceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (8) notes =
of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourNAL is issued BR:
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer 4
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond tocalendar years. Prompt _ .
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or #
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, i in eae
issue of the JourNat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. " fa
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The —
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. ‘To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. a
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced ;
by zine etchings being preferable. et
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors SRE:
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. an
Authors’ Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers
bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and —
date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered. :
my
SS ee th! read’ . -
ea eee Py ee eee
<
P ‘
tow q ee ete
pis. he“ 2) 5
“age
0 we
y - $50
Vs a a ni i he ;
“ha Manes. & “yi Pts Pa
TR a al abies is a he Gay a
eS OE See ea Ot ee
bat at 4
rt
re, hee
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address phateie in
a corner may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional 100,
1.00.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints —
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. :
wa he wate of Suber piton Mer COlUINE FS Voi aes cows Wield Fh 4 Nelo h inn Genome ry $6:00* 4
7POMNENONPOEY NUMIDOIS. 55.0 vege Sab ove blac Sek wae ee nae, ceed Oak «A se ae *
Monthly numbers.......... gb vies Sp Sea aa eEs pineal Ok ke wey eee rae Re tt — 0
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Seichock 4 and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C.
Exchanges.—The J OURNAL does not exchange with other publications. gis aie
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim i is made aes
within thirty days after date of the following issue. Ra
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3. 00. - Special rates
are en to members of scientific societies affiliated with the jee:
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 20 Marcu 4, 1930 No. 5
GEOPHYSICS.—WNote on a comparison of sunspot numbers, terrestrial
magnetic activity, and long wave radio signal strength L. W.
Austin, Bureau of Standards.
The figure shows a comparison of the monthly averages of sunspot
numbers, terrestrial magnetic activity (horizontal range) measured
at Cheltenham, Md., and the daytime ratio field strength of signals
received in Washington from the trasmitting stations at Bordeaux,
France (FYL) (f = 15.9 kc, } = 18900 m,) and at Nauen, Germany
(DFW) ( = 23.4 ke, \ = 12800 m).
The resemblance of the sunspot curve to the other three is not close,
but the similarity in the changes in magnetic activity to those in day-
light signal strength seems to be unmistakable. The resemblance of
the Bordeaux signal curve to that of the magnetic activity seems closer
even than the resemblance between the two signal curves. The
deep drop of both the magnetic and signal values in November (more
rarely in December) is especially striking. This early winter drop in
signals has often been noticed, and in the case of transmission between
Europe and America, has been sometimes ascribed to the proximity
of the signal path to the area of Arctic darkness. It now appears that
this and other seasonal variations both in magnetic activity and
East-West long-wave signal strength may be due to common causes.
1 Received January 22, 1930. Publication approved by the Director of the Bureau
of Standards.
73
74 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 5
As
NUM BE,
MAGNETIC ACTIVITY
(HORIZONTAL RANGE)
GAAMIAS
%
Ss)
780 S/G/VAL
FIELD STRENGTH
ie BORDEAUX (F YL)
fi
/40r}
teal
Li /20 |
x
Q\/00 V
y
Qq
Q 60 S/GNAL
= FIELD STRENGTH
Ss NAUEN (OF W)
\ 50
9
S
S 40
‘h Woh:
Spi eet Se Rey Res ee Be Ko eS Ke SR
STS SSIS Seyyrs sys sss escn eee
1924 JIZ5 1926 192 1/928 1929
Fig. 1.—Curves of sunspot numbers, magnetic activity, and radio signal strength.
BOTANY .—The identity of the South American fish poisons, “cube”
and “‘timbé.”! E. P. Kiuurp, U. 8. National Museum, and A. C.
SmirH, New York Botanical Garden.
Recent investigations by chemists and entomologists, members of
the Department of Agriculture staff, and others have shown that the
roots of a plant called “‘cube’”’ contain a substance of value as an in-
1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
MARCH 4, 1930 KILLIP AND SMITH: FISH POISONS 79
secticide.2 The plant was brought to the attention of the Department
of Agriculture through the suggestion of William J. Dennis, an Ameri-
ean resident in Peru, who obtained a patent (U. S. No. 1,621,240)
on its use. The roots first tested came from Huancayo, a city of
the high cordillera of Peru; a second lot of roots was obtained later
from Iquitos, in the low-lying Amazon region of northeastern Peru.
The plant was said to be a shrub about five feet high. Little additional
information was available.
On a trip of botanical exploration which we have just made into the
interior of Peru and across Amazonian Brazil in the interest of the
Smithsonian Intitution and the New York Botanical Garden we saw
thousands of plants of ‘‘cube’ in cultivation on plantations, and in a
wild state in the dense forest occasional plants that appear to be nearly
or quite identical. The name cube’ was applied to it in the region about
Huancayo and southward. Farther to the north in Peru the plant was
referred to locally as “‘cofiapi’”’ or ‘‘pacai,’”’ the most commonly used
names, however, being ‘‘barbasco legitimo’”’ or simply “barbasco,”’
which is the general name given to fish poisons in Spanish America.
In Brazil the word ‘‘timb0’’ is used for fish poisons in general, the ‘‘bar-
basco legitimo’ of Peru becoming “timb6é legitimo.’ In British
Guiana cube and other fish poisons are known as “‘haiari;’ in French
Guiana the word “‘nicou” is similarly employed.
We found that although several kinds of plants were used as fish
poisons, such as Cracca toxicaria, Cracca nitens, and one or more species
of Clibadium, and in Brazil, certain species of Lonchocarpus, one plant
alone (cube) was most commonly cultivated and almost everywhere
was said to be the most powerful. Curiously we never discovered
this plant in flower or fruit, a circumstance giving rise to interesting
speculation. Inasmuch as the roots are dug up at the end of the third
or fourth year and we rarely saw individuals that were more than six
or seven years old, it is possible that the plant flowers only with age.
Or, cultivated for centuries as a fish poison, the present plants may
represent a selected strain in which the content of the roots is at a
maximum and the production of inflorescence at a minimum state.
From the vegetative characters it seems clear that the plant in
question is Lonchocarpus nicou (Aubl.) DC., described! by Aublet
in 1775 as Robinia nicou from a plant cultivated in French Guiana.
2 See Dept. Agr. Bull. 1201: 6-7, 10-20, 34, 58, 54. 1924; Science 70: 478-479. Nov.
15, 1929.
’ Pronounced coo’bay. Sometimes called cubi (coo’bee).
ENING HIGR TANG D. (il. ple ose, Leto.
76 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 5
Le STATES NATIONAL MUSEUM
XPLORATION IN PERU
Fig. 1. Lonchocarpus nicou (4 natural size).
MARCH 4, 1930 KILLIP AND SMITH: FISH POISONS Cth
In shape and size the leaflets correspond almost exactly with those
figured by Aublet; in both cases the tips are caudate-acuminate and
the bases show variation from subacute to subrotund. Portions of
our material were submitted to the British Museum (Natural History)
for comparison with the type specimen of Lonchocarpus nicou, and the
comparison has confirmed our identification. The striking appressed
pubescence noted on the under surface of the leaflets in recent material
is matched in the original. Aublet states, moreover, that his plant
was used as a fish poison under the name “‘nicou.”’
From our field observations and from study of the herbarium mate-
rial collected the species may be described thus:
Loncuocarpus Nicovu (Aubl.) DC. Prodr. 2: 261. 1825.
Robinia nicou Aubl. Pl. Guian. Franc. 771, pl. 308. 1775.
Shrub or small tree, up to 3 meters high,® with a main stem 4 to 8 cm. in
diameter, with branches borne near summit, the trunk and the branches
becoming scandent with age, the trunk sometimes climbing upon nearby
shrubs or trees often to a height of 10 meters; leaves alternate, odd-pinnate,
the base of rachis and petiolules thickened, the leaflets opposite (2 to 4,
usually 3, pairs), oblong, occasionally lance-oblong or oblanceolate-oblong,
12 to 25 cm. long, 4 to 10 cm. wide (average size about 17 x 8 cm., extremes
up to 35 cm. long, 17 cm. wide), caudate-acuminate at apex (tip averaging 2
em. long), subacute to subrotund at base, entire, coriaceous or subcoriaceous,
above dark green, sublustrous, and essentially glabrous, beneath paler,
sometimes glaucescent, usually densely covered with straight appressed
reddish- or golden-brown hairs,* pinnate-nerved, the midnerve sometimes
impressed above, prominent beneath, the lateral nerves 7 to 10 to a side,
ascending, arcuate toward margin, the venation closely reticulate.
Aublet describes the inflorescence as:
“Calix; perianthium monophyllum, turbinatum, quinquedentatum. Co-
rolla, papilionacea, purpurea, vexillo amplo, erecto. Pericarpium; legumen
longum, acutum, gibbosum, glabrum, rufescens, uniloculare, bivalve. Semina
tria aut quatuor, subrotunda, compressa, marginibus valvarum affixa,.”’
The type specimen was collected in a clearing above the home of M. Budet,
at Orapu, French Guiana.
Specimens examined :’
> Our notes show the following variation of the height with age:
Plants 1 year old, 0.75-1.3 meters; plants 2 years old, 1-1.3 meters; plants 4 years old
but recently cut back, 1-1.7 meters; plants 2 years old, 1-1.7 meters; plants 2 to 3 years
old, 2.5-3 meters; plants 3 years old, 3.7 meters; plant 2 years old, 2.2 meters high, the
main stem bending toward a tree and climbing up its trunk to a height of about 8 meters.
6 In the case of forest plants and those in overgrown abandoned plantations, the in-
dument was invariably paler and less dense, owing presumably to the greater amount of
shade.
7 Unless otherwise stated the collections here cited are of cultivated plants collected
by the writers.
\
78 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 5
Peru: Dept. Ayacucho: Kimpitiriki,s Rio Apurimac, 400 meters, nos.
22913, 23053. Dept. Junin: Near La Merced, 1300 meters, no. 23878; Santa
Rosa, on Pichis Trail, 650 meters, no. 26200; Puerto Yessup, 400 meters,
no. 26369; Puerto Bermudez, 375 meters, nos. 26490, 26597, 26612; El Trionfo,
on Rio Pichis, 350 meters, no. 26692; Cahuapanas, on Rio Pichis, 340 meters,
no. 26712. Dept. Loreto: Puerto Leguia, 290 meters, no. 27504; Masisea,
275 meters, no. 26837; Iquitos, 100 meters, nos. 26886, 26893, 26895, 26945,
27096, 27135, 27159, 27278, 27362, 27369, 27380, 27487; Mishuyacu, near
Iquitos, nos. 29917, 29957; Pefia Blanca, on Rio Itaya, near Iquitos, 110
meters, no. 29668; Yurimaguas, lower Rio Huallaga, 135 meters, nos. 27565,
27566, 27994, 27997, 28211, 28812, 29061, 29066; Balsapuerto,135-350
meters, nos. 28158, 28255, 28300, 28325 (wild), 28458, 28586 (wild), 28621
(wild); Lower Rio Marafion, 150 meters nos. 29279, 29280; mouth of Rio
Santiago, Tessmann 4447 (in Berlin herbarium; fragment U.S. N. M.).
Fig. 2. Plants of Lonchocarpus nicou. Fig. 3. Lonchocarpus floribundus.
Braziu: State of, Amazonas: Mandos, 25 meters, no. 30026, 30038, 30137,
30177 (apparently wild). State of Pard: Gurupa, lower Rio Amazon, no.
30608 (apparently wild); Breves, Amazon Estuary, no. 30576; Para, no.
oe State of Matto Grosso: Santa Izabel, F. Lima (Herb. Mus. Goeldi
10863).
British Guiana: Demerara, Parker (in Kew herbarium).
8 At this locality alone the name ‘“‘cube de almidén’’ was sometimes used, ‘‘almi-
dén’’ meaning starch.
MARCH 4, 1930 KILLIP AND SMITH: FISH POISONS 79
From this list it may be seen that we found the plant most exten-
sively cultivated in the region about Iquitos (100 meters altitude).
Many of the plantations contained several thousand trees. Yurima-
guas, on the Huallaga River, a few miles above its mouth, is also a
center of cultivation. Doubtless this is also the plant used by the
natives of eastern Ecuador. Our stops in Brazil were few, but we found
Lonchocarpus nicou, both in the forest and in cultivation, at Mandos
and Gurupd, and in cultivation at Paré. In material recently lent us
through the courtesy of the Director of the Royal Botanic Gardens,
Kew, England, there is a specimen of a cultivated fish poison from
Demerara, British Guiana, that clearly is Lonchocarpus nicou.
A more-detailed account of South American fish poisons, including
descriptions of the native method of use, is in preparation for future
publication. At present it seems advisable to mention two other
plants, the roots of which serve for poisoning fish.
Along the south bank of the Rio Negro above Mandos we found a
large plantation of a second species of Lonchocarpus, L. floribundus
(Killip & Smith 30041). This was a low shrub, 1 to 1.5 meters high,
in fine flower and fruit. ‘The roots were of a softer, more porous tex-
ture than those of Lonchocarpus nicou, but were said to be quite as
effective as a fish poison. Samples of these are being analyzed.
At Gurupa, a settlement on the lower Amazon River at the mouth
of the Rio Xingt, several plants of ‘a third species of Lonchocarpus
were obtained, the roots of which were reported as a fish poison even
more effective than Lonchocarpus nicou, which also is grown in that
vicinity. This exceptionally powerful plant had been identified?
by Dr. Adolfo Ducke, the Director of the Museu Nacional of Rio de
Janeiro as Lonchocarpus nicou. Although at the time of our visit, Nov-
ember, the plant was neither in flower nor in fruit, excellent flowering
and fruiting material has generously been deposited in the U. S.
National Herbarium by Dr. Ducke. Comparison of this with Aub-
let’s description and illustration of Lonchocarpus nicou leads us to the
conclusion that it represents a distinct species. In this Gurupa
plant the leaflets have short tips, not over 1 cm. long, and the fruit is
broadly ovate to oblong-ovate; whereas, as already noted, the leaflets
of Lonchocarpus nicou are long-acuminate (tip 2 to 4 em. long) and the
fruit, as shown in Aublet’s illustration, is linear-oblong.
The Gurup4 plant may be known as:
* Archiv. Jard. Bot. Rio de Janeiro 4: 88, 89, 139. 1925.
80 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 5
Fig. 4. Lonchocarpus urucu (type specimen, 3 natural size).
MARCH 4, 1930 KILLIP AND SMITH: FISH POISONS 81
Lonchocarpus urucu Killip & Smith, sp. nov.
Robust, much-branched shrub, the upper branches slightly scandent,
the bark of the larger branches grayish, that of the smaller branches brown,
lenticellate, and usually puberulous; leaves 5- to 9-foliolate, the rachis sub-
terete, longitudinally striate, 12 to 25 cm. long (leaves of scandent portions
much smaller), puberulous with dark brown or grayish, often gland-tipped
hairs, the base (about 1 cm.) very fleshy; petiolules fleshy, sparingly puberu-
lous; leaflets broadly ovate, obovate, or oblong, 10 to 17 cm. long, 5 to 8 cm.
wide, abruptly short-acuminate at apex (tip 5 to 10 mm. long), rounded at
base, pinnate-nerved (nerves prominent beneath and covered beneath with a
dark brown or blackish indument, the midnerve impresed above, the sec-
ondary nerves 9 or 10 to a side, ascending, arcuate toward margin), thick-
coriaceous, essentially glabrous and lustrous above, appressed-hirtellous with
reddish-brown hairs beneath; racemes axillary, 3 or 4 borne near the ends of
stout branchlets 8 to 18 em. long, the rachis 10 to 20 em. long, rufo-sericeo-
tomentose; flowers in short-peduncled, closely approximate fascicles, the
pedicels about 3 mm. long, densely rufo-sericeo-tomentose; bractlets orbicu-
lar-ovate, 0.7 to 1 mm. long, acute; calyx cylindric-campanulate, 4 to 5 mm.
long, 2 to 2.5 mm. in diameter, densely rufo-sericeous, 5-toothed, the teeth
triangular, 2 mm. long, 3 mm. wide at base, the two vexillar teeth connate
into a broad lobe 5 mm. wide at base; petals reddish violet, pubescent without
(especially distally), with short, appressed, pale hairs, the wings and carinal
petals conspicuously ciliate at apex; standard suborbicular, bilobulate at
apex, rounded at base to a narrow claw 3 mm. long, the blade about 10 mm.
long, 12 mm. wide; wings obovate-oblique, rounded at apex, tapering at
base to a narrow claw about 4 mm. long, the biade 9 mm. long, 5 mm. wide;
carinal petals falcate, auriculate, obtuse, the claw 4 mm. long, the blade 9
mm. long, 5 mm. wide; staminal tube glabrous, slightly dilated at base, the
filaments about 13 mm. long, free for the ultimate 3 mm.; ovary sessile,
linear, minutely pale-puberulous, 4-ovuled; style about 7 mm. long, glabrous
or slightly pubescent, arcuate; stigma capitellate, slightly broader than the
slender tip of the style; legume broadly ovate to oblong-ovate, 4 to 9 cm.
long, 2.5 to 3 em. wide, rounded or subacute at apex, subacute or bluntly
acuminate at base, strongly flattened, minutely hirtellous with subappressed
hairs, 1- (rarely 2 or 3) seeded, the vexillar margin faintly ridged, the carinal
margin rounded; seeds cochleate-reniform, about 2 cm. long, 2 em. wide, dark
brown.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,040,936, from a plant culti-
vated at Gurup4, State of Para, Brazil, September 29, 1916, A. Ducke (Museu
Goeldi no. 16561, flowering specimen). Description of the fruit is based on a
specimen collected by Dr. Ducke at the same locality in November, 1923
(Jardin Botanico Rio de Janeiro no. 11708; U. S. National Herbarium no.
1,442,506).
Represented also by Killip & Smith 30585, from the same locality. The
name “‘timbo uructwi”’ is given this plant by the natives because of the reddish
indument of the inflorescence.
82 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 5
ZOOLOGY .—A new raccoon from Lower California. E. W. NELSON
and E. A. GotpMAN, Biological Survey.
Study of the raccoons of Lower California has indicated differential
characters for a hitherto unrecognized subspecies inhabiting the south-
ern half of the peninsula. The new form may be described as follows:
Procyon lotor grinnelli,? subsp. nov.
Lower California Raccoon
Type-—From La Paz, Lower California, Mexico. No. 147181, @ adult,
U.S. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by Nelson
and Goldman, February 15, 1906. Original number 19139. |
General characters.—A large, pale subspecies with a rather broad, high,
evenly arched skull. Similar to Procyon lotor pallidus but slightly darker
and cranial characters, especially the more evenly arched profile of skull,
distinctive. Compared with Procyon lotor psora, general color paler, more
grayish, less deeply suffused with buff, the long black guard hairs over dor-
sum less in evidence; top of head grayer, less heavily mixed with black; black
areas at posterior base of ears smaller; skull with frontal region more highly
arched.
Color.—Type: Upper parts in general coarsely grizzled iron grayish, the
median dorsal area faintly suffused with pale buff, becoming pronounced on
back of neck, rather thinly overlaid with black; top of head gray, mixed with
black, producing a grizzled effect; face with solid black mask and white
markings usual in the group; under parts in general overlaid with very pale
buffy grayish, the brown undertone showing through; throat patch blackish;
ears grayish, with rather small black patches at posterior base; limbs about.
like under parts, but becoming whitish on feet; hind limbs with a small, pure
brownish area on outer side near heel; tail with the usual annulations and
black tip, the light rings pale cream buff and the narrower dark rings (six in
this specimen, varying to seven in others) consisting of black-tipped hairs
with an underlying buffy suffusion; dark rings less evident on under side of
tail and scarcely complete, tending to fade out on median line, except two
near tip.
Skull.—Similar to that of P. l. pallidus, but braincase and interorbital
region broader; frontals rising higher anteriorly, the upper outline a more
evenly convex curve (anterior frontal outline descending in a more nearly
straight line from apex immediately behind postorbital processes in pallidus);
dentition about the same. Compared with that of P. 1. psora the skull is
less flattened, the frontal region more highly arched; braincase rather broad
and other cranial details much as in psora.
Measurements.—Type: Total length, 913 mm; tail vertebrae, 335; hind
foot, 132. Skull (type): Greatest length, 122.1; condylobasal length, 115.5;
zygomatic breadth, 77.9; interorbital breadth, 24.3; least width of palatal
shelf (between last molars and interpterygoid fossa), 16.7; upper canine-
molariform toothrow (alveolar length), 44.1.
1 Received January 27, 1930.
2 Named for Dr. Josep GRINNELL, Director of the Museum of Vertebrate Zoology,
University of California, in recognition of his extensive contributions to the knowledge
of the fauna of Lower California.
MARCH 4, 1930 SHAMEL: OPOSSUM FROM ARGENTINA 83
Remarks.—Two subspecies of raccoons enter northern Lower California.
These are Procyon lotor pallidus Merriam, of the Colorado desert in the north-
eastern part of the peninsula, and the animal described by Mearns as Procyon
lotor californicus from the ocean beach near the last Mexican boundary
monument, San Diego County, in the southwestern corner of California.
The latter inhabits the comparatively humid northwest coast region of Lower
California south to San Quentin. Some specimens from near the type
locality of calzfornicus suggest gradation toward pallidus, but general com-
parisons indicate that calzfornicus can not satisfactorily be separated from
P. l. psora Gray, from Sacramento, California.
Raccoons are dependent upon water for existence, and owing to exceed-
ingly arid conditions in the central section of Lower California their general
range is interrupted for considerable distances. ‘The form here described,
occupying the southern half of the peninsula differs rather markedly in com-
bination of characters from both of the more northern subspecies. It re-
quires no very close comparison with P. 1. mexicanus of the adjacent main-
land of Mexico, which in general, is paler, with the black postauricular spots
obsolescent, and skull notably depressed in frontal region.
Specimens examined.—Kight, all from Lower California, as follows: La
Paz (type locality), 2; Mount Miraflores, 1; San Ignacio, 5.
ZOOLOGY .—A new murine opossum from Argentina.: H. Haroup
SHAMEL, U. 8S. National Museum. (Communicated by JoHN
B. REESIDE, JR.)
In 1920, Dr. A. Wetmore visited southern South America in the
interests of the United States Biological Survey to make a study of
the present status of northern migratory birds, particularly shore
birds, which winter in the southern portion of the southern’ hemis-
phere. While engaged in this work he incidentally made a collection
of 120 mammals, which is now in the U. 8. National Museum. In
this collection I have found a small opposum new to science. |
Marmosa muscula sp. nov.
Type.—Adult male skin and skull, No. 286330 U. S. National Museum,
collected by Dr. A. Wetmore in Formosa, Kilometro 182 (Central Formosa),
Argentina, August 9, 1920.
Diagnosis.—A very small member of the genus, the smallest so far known,
distinguished by its mouse-like coloration and its comparatively short tail.
Color.—This little animal is brownish in general tone of color. The hairs
everywhere dark slate for the greater part of their length, this area followed
by a subapical ring of colonial buff (Ridgway 1912). On the back the ends
of the hairs are tipped with mars brown (Ridgway 1912), which gives to the
1 Received January 28, 1930.
84 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 5
back a mixed buff and brown appearance, neither element strongly pre-
dominating. On the sides the buff is nearly clear and the dark tips are few
and inconspicuous. Underparts clear colonial buff, the dark bases of the
hairs showing through inconspicuously. ‘There is a dark-brown eye ring,
also a dark streak from the corner of the eye to the nose. Cheeks, sides of
head, and shoulders are reddish brown, which changes into buff on the sides
of the body. ‘The tail is dark brown above, much paler below.
Skull.—In the skull the sides of the frontals are expanded, but unridged;
in the interorbital region this swelling extends well down into the orbit; nasals
pointed at juncture with the frontals, a portion of frontal coming down wedge
fashion between them; the premolars are spaced closely together, all touching,
the second (pm?) being longer than the first or third.
Measurements.—T ype: Total length, 123; tail, 55; foot, 11; ear (moistened)
from crown, 9; total length of skull, 21.5; condylobasal length, 19.6; zygoma-
tic width, 11.5; interorbital width, 3.5; length of nasals, 8.5; width of brain-
case, 8.5: maxillary tooth row (including incisor), 8.2; mandibular tooth row,
8.5; height of mandible, 6.5.
Remarks.—Marmosa muscula is next smaller than M. bruchi in general
size, but the pale color and much longer tail (89.0 mm) of the latter will
readily separate them. It is very mouse-like in appearance and even smaller
than some specimens of Mus muscula in this collection from Buenos Aires,
thus representing one of the smallest marsupials known. This specimen
was examined by Oldfield Thomas of the British Museum of Natural His-
tory who said, ‘“The Marmosa is a very distinct little species, quite unlike
anything I have seen, , , M. bruchi has a white belly and the body mark-
ing of the M. marmota group.”’
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
THE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY
737TH MEETING
The 737th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club October 19, 1929, with
President WETMorE in the chair and 55 persons present.
The President announced the membership of the standing committees
of the Society as follows: Committee on Communications: W. B. BEL,
Chairman, V. Battey, W. H. Wuitst, Lewis Rapcurre, W. R. Maxon,
W. L. Scumitt; Committee on Zoological Nomenclature: G. S. Mrusr, Jr.,
Chairman, A. C. Baker, Paut Bartscu, E. A. Cuapin, H. C. OBERHOLSER;
Committee on Publications: Cuas. W. Ricumonp, Chairman, J. H. Ritey,
F. C. Lincoun, W. H. Wuite.
A. WETMORE announced that the Pinchot expedition to the South Seas,
although its collections have been received only in part as yet, has already
sent a dozen forms of birds new to the National Museum.
Program: J. M. Aupricu: Notes on the life zones of northern Europe
(illustrated).—The speaker collected flies at Aare, Sweden, last July, and while
there ascended the mountain called Aareskutan, just back of the hamlet.
The railroad station beside the river has an altitude of about 1500 feet,
while the summit of the mountain reaches about 5000 feet. The first 500
MARCH 4, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIBTY 85
feet of ascent is in spruce forests, corresponding to the Canadian Zone in
North America. The spruces end abruptly and are succeeded by a narrower
zone of birches, perhaps 300 feet in vertical width; these begin with a few
large, scattered, old trees, changing into smaller and more crowded growth,
then into dwarfed forms. All tree growth ends within 1000 feet elevation
above the river. The birch zone is thought to represent the Hudsonian of
North America; the rest of the mountain above is Arctic. (Author’s abstract.)
HERBERT FRIEDMANN: Parasitism in birds (illustrated).—Parasitic breed-
ing habits are found in five groups of birds—the cowbirds, cuckoos, honey-
guides, weaver-birds, and ducks. The habit must have arisen independently
in each, and the causative factors were probably different in the different
groups. The cowbirds are the only group in which all the species have been
studied and the evidence put together into a coherent story.
The most primitive cowbird, the bay-winged cowbird of Argentina, is not
parasitic but uses other birds’ nests in preference to building for itself. The
others are all parasitic. The results of a careful survey of the habits of all
of them show that the immediate case of the parasitic habit was the loss of
the territorial protecting instincts of the male, leaving the female in a condi-
tion where it lays eggs in nests which it has not built, and with no great
desire to protect them once they are laid. (Auwthor’s abstract.)
738TH MEETING
The 738th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club November 2, 1929, with
President WrTmMorE in the chair and 100 persons present.
S. F. Buake reported that a freshly dead specimen of Solitary Vireo was
found in Clarendon, Virginia, by H. A. ALLARD on November 1, 1929.
I. Horrman stated that C. F. Drenty, who has a pheasantry near Washing-
ton, had succeeded during the past summer in raising three Elliott Pheasants,
the first to be grown in this country. He also raised about 16 other species of
pheasant.
Program: A. H. Howe: Recent notes on birds and mammals of the Ever-
glades (illustrated).—The speaker described the bird and mammal fauna of
the southern tip of the Florida peninsula, illustrating his talk with specimens
and slides. He prefaced his remarks by a description of the topography and
plant life of the region, showing that the flora of the hammocks along the
southeast and southwest coasts and in the Cape Sable region is composed
mainly of tropical trees and shrubs of West Indian origin. The insect and
land snail faunas are likewise considered by those who have studied them to
have been derived in large part from the West Indies. . Only about 6 species
of birds of this region, however, are of tropical origin, these being confined
mainly to the Florida Keys and to the mangrove forests on the coast of the
mainland. There are no terrestrial mammals of tropical affinities found in
Florida, the only tropical species being the manatee. A number of specimens
of the rarer birds of the region were exhibited and suggestions made regarding
the need for more rigid protection of certain disappearing species. (Author’s
abstract.)
HK. F. Cor, Chairman Tropic Everglades Park Association: America’s own
tropics (illustrated).—The speaker, after referring to the rapid destruction
of wild habitats by man, made an eloquent plea for the preservation of about
2500 square miles of the Cape Sable region of southern Florida, which is still
in a practically unspoiled condition and which represents practically the only
tropical habitat in the United States. The talk was illustrated by numerous
colored slides showing scenery and plant and animal life.
86 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 5
739TH MEETING
The 739th meeting was held November 19, 1929, with Vice-President
JACKSON in the chair and 35 persons present. New members elected:
CLARENCE CoTttTaM, BENJAMIN MILLER.
S. F. Bake reported the observation on October 20, of what seemed to
be a contest between two female English sparrows for possession of a birdbox.
The birds fought vigorously inside the box, while a male sparrow perched
nearby without taking part in the quarrel.
Program: L. V. CoteMANn, American Association of Museums: Museums
in South America.—The speaker described his recent trip to South America
for the purpose of visiting the principal museums there. Besides mentioning
the museums visited, he gave many interesting side lights on the countries
and people visited.
C. W. Stites: Proposals Submitted as Amendments to International Rules
of Zoological Nomenclature.—The speaker presented a paper summarizing
the propositions which have been submitted to the International Commission
on Zoological Nomenclature as amendments to the International Rules.
With each proposition, he discussed the theoretical background. A brief
summary of the proposed amendments will appear in Entomological News,
December, 1929.
S. F. Buaxe, Recording Secretary.
740TH MEETING
The 740th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club November 30, 1929,
with President WETMORE in the chair and 44 persons present. New member
elected: J. W. BULGER.
FRANK THONE called attention to several recent biological publications.
A. WETMORE commented on birds new to the National Museum collections
received from the Pinchot South Sea Expedition.
Pau B. JOHNSON gave a brief review of the life and work of the Rev.
FrANcIS TonporF of Georgetown University, a distinguished seismologist .
and biologist.
VERNON Baitey called attention to the fact that the natural food supply
of squirrels is scanty this year and urged that steps be taken to provide food
forthem. E. P. WALKER suggested a series of letters to newspapers to keep
this need before the public.
P. B. JoHNson reported seeing a black squirrel captured by a red-tailed
hawk in the Zoological Park.
A. WETMORE reported the capture of sharp-tailed sparrows at Ocean
City, Maryland, last year, as well as the recent capture of two more specimens,
one at Ocean City, the other at Cornfield Harbor, Maryland.
Program: E. R. Katmpacu: Notes on waterfowl sickness in 1929 (illus-
trated).—In 1914, 1915, and 1916, Dr. ALExANDER WETMORE made a study
of the malady that had killed many thousands of ducks at Great Salt Lake,
Utah. Certain soluble salts in the “‘alkali,’”’ prevalent in the shallow waters
and on the mud flats of that area, were found to be the causative agents.
Since that time “‘duck sickness’ has been noted in many other areas, some
of which are quite different in character from the Great Salt Lake region.
Although alkali in some form is almost always present at the scene of such
outbreaks, its chemical composition varies greatly, and in some instances,
“duck sickness”’ has occurred in areas in which the salts found to be the cause
at Great Salt Lake are comparatively rare.
MARCH 4, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 87
A study of this ‘‘disease’’ was resumed during the past season in the general
vicinity of Klamath Falls, Oregon, where a number of bodies of water fur-
nished varied environments in which the sickness occurred. In discussing
this work the speaker pointed out some of the unsolved aspects of the trouble,
the progress that had been made, and explained that the study would be con-
tinued next season. (Author’s abstract.)
REMINGTON KutLtoca: The migration of whales (illustrated).—See
Smithsonian TES Report 1928: 467. 1929.
W.B. Betu, Recording Secretary pro tem.
T41ST MEETING
741st meeting was held at the Cosmos Club December 14, 1929, with
President WETMORE in the chair and 120 persons present. New members
elected: HERBERT FRIEDMANN, F. A. WARREN.
President Wetmore was nominated to represent the Biological Society on
the council of the Washington Academy of Sciences.
C. W. Stiuus discussed the nomenclature of the South American fox-tailed
wolves.
Program: O. J. Muri: Elk studies in the Jackson Hole region (illustrated).
The elk is largely a grazing animal but also utilizes browse to a considerable
extent. In some of the so-called waste-land on the winter range are found
certain shrubby plants which are very palatable for elk and help to augment
the winter food supply. One of the most important phases of the study is the
question of disease. Squirreltail grass in the hay and perhaps other rough
feed produce abrasions in the mouth of the elk, resulting in an infection with
necrotic stomatitis. This causes an annual loss of elk which can perhaps be
remedied by suppression of squirreltail hay and scattering the herds. Condi-
tions on the summer range are very favorable for the elk. (Author’s abstract.)
The speaker also showed motion pichaues of elk, moose, and other wild
animals of Jackson Hole region.
Discussed by V. Battry, who stated that he considered the ‘“‘fluting”’ of
the elk to be a sort of song: by M. C. Hatt who considered that ticks and
scabies are probably of real importance under wild conditions, but that inter-
nal parasites are scarcely so; also by L.O. Howarp, C. W. Stites, W. B. BELL,
and EK. A. GOLDMAN.
Maurice C. Hau: Parasites of elk and other wild ruminants.—The para-
sites of wild ruminants are of interest in connection with their actual or
potential transfer from these ruminants to domesticated livestock, especially
sheep, goats and cattle, and as forms which have transferred from domesti-
cated livestock to wild ruminants. The evidence available points definitely
to certain parasitic species as having made these transfers. Thus the common
sheep stomach worm, Haemonchus contortus, has been found in at least 10
species of wild ruminants in North America, whereas such species as Ostertagia
bullosa, first found in sheep and later in the pronghorn antelope, and Cooperia
bzsonzs, first found in the bison and later in domesticated cattle, are evidently
normal parasites of wild ruminants transferring to domesticated ruminants.
The common sheep liver fluke, Fasciola hepatica, has been found occasionally
in wild ruminants, while the large liver fluke, Fasciola magna, normally a
parasite of American deer, has become a rather common parasite of cattle in
some areas. The fringed tapeworm, Thysanosoma actinioides, is evidently a
normal parasite of American wild ruminants which has become accustomed to
sheep as hosts.
88 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 5
Another feature of interest is the fact that parasites in unusual hosts may
behave differently from the way they behave in their usual hosts. Thus
Fasciola magna forms large cysts in the liver of cattle, apparently with no
communication to the exterior whereby the eggs could leave the host and con-
tinue the life cycle; little is known about this parasite in its deer hosts, but
the present assumption is that it occurs in the bile ducts and thus is able to
complete its life cycle in the usual way. The fringed tapeworm has been
reported regularly from the small intestine of deer hosts, except in one instance
where the writer found it in the fourth stomach of an elk, the worm being
coiled in a ball with the head at the center, but in sheep the worm is frequently
present in the bile ducts.
The question as to what can be done to control parasites in wild ruminants
presents several rather interesting and difficult problems. It is probable
that these problems will increase in importance as wild animals are confined in
smaller areas with a resultant concentration of parasitic infection. (Auwthor’s
abstract.)
S. F. Buaxe, Recording Secretary.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
Dr. Louis A. Bauer, Director of the Department of Terrestrial Mag-
netism of the Carnegie Institution of Washington since the establishment of
the Department on April 1, 1904, retired from this position on January 1,
1930, with the title of Director Emeritus. Provision is also made whereby
if his health permit he may carry on studies during the coming year as a
Research Associate of the Institution. Mr. Jon A. FLEMING, associated
with Dr. Bauer as chief assistant in the Department of Terrestrial Mag-
netism since 1904, as Assistant Director for observational and administrative
work during 1922 and 1923, and as Assistant Director in charge of operations
since 1924, continues in charge of the work of the Department with the title
of Acting Director.
@bituary
Dr. WiLu1AM ALLEN OrTOoN, Director and General Manager of the Tropical
Plant Research Foundation, and a member of the AcaDEmy, died on January
7, 1930. He was born at North Fairfax, Vermont, February 28th, 1877,
and studied at the University of that state, receiving the degrees of B.S. in
1897 and M.S., in 1898; and in 1915, the honorary degree of Sc.D. After
spending two years as Assistant Botanist at the Vermont Agricultural
Experiment Station, he was appointed as Plant Pathologist in the Bureau of
Plant Industry, U. S. Department of Agriculture, where he remained until
1924, holding important positions including that of vice-chairman of the
Federal Horticultural Board for 12 years. In 1924 he resigned from the
government service to take up the position he held until the time of his death.
For some years he was also Chairman of the Committee on Tropica] Research
of the National Research Council. He was a member or fellow of numerous
scientific societies, serving as President of the Phytopathological Society in
1927. Besides being an eminent authority on plant diseases and quarantines,
he made a study of diets adapted to use in diabetes, a disease from which he
suffered for many years, and which finally led to his death in his 53rd year.
e
: OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS
THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES —
ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS
Tuesday, March 4 The Botanical Society
Wednesday, March 5 The Engineering Society
ee The Medical Society
Thursday, March 6 The Entomological Society
Friday, March 7 The Geographic Society
Saturday, March8 — The Biological Society
Tuesday, March 11 The Electrical Engineering Society
Wednesday, March 12 The Geological Society
| The Medical Society
Thursday, March 13 ‘The Chemical Society
Friday, March 14 The Geographic Society
Boe eeearay; March 15 The Helminthological Society
aia The Philosophical Society
| Tuesday, March 18 ‘The Anthropological Society
Bee Se The Historical Society
GEES Wednesdey, March 19 The Engineering Society
Fe The Medical Society
ae we The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if sent
to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month.
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY.
‘ Pecdent: Wituiam Bowtie, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Corresponding Secretary; L. B. TucKERMAN, Bureau of Standards.
Recording Secretary: CaarLes THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils.
ee conte Treasurer: Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
ORIGINAL PAPERS |
‘ Geophysics.—Note on a comparison of sunspot nemieee ke ix
aS 3 tivity, and long wave radio signal strength. L. W. AusTIN..... a
: Botany.—The identity of the South American fish poisons, “cube”
j E. P. Kruure and A. C. Sarre. <0... ssa ogee eee ‘
Zoology.—A new raccoon from Lower California. E,W. Nuwson | and
Zoology.—A new murine opossum from “Argentina. foo 3 :
PROCEEDINGS
* *
oes ’ ‘
F . ae
The Biological Society... ccsevecesereeecesececereesnetesssereeean,
Screntiric Norges AND Wabi ea se Sk
_ ©. Wire Cooxe
-§. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
. he
é \. ar
’
“post-office, at Baltimore, Md., under the
t a special rate of postage provided for
Authorized on July 83,1918
* |
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This Jourwat, the official organ of the Washingtad Anatomy of Belden: publishes: the ee
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) pro-
ceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3). notes —
of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourNat is issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each non except during the summer — =
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt _ Mee: Sets
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or a, “4
' the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, i 2 the agen
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. i 2
M anuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should. be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The —
editors cannot undertake to ‘do more than correct obvious minor errors. “References — eet
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate — Bee: 1
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered * pe ied.
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. | SE as
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced x
by zine etchings being preferable. ae
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to anthnne
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors ve
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. erst:
Authors’ Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. ‘Gépece ae
bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive paginas bo or ca:
date of issue, and additional reprints will be furnished at cost when ordered. ae a
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’ s name and address pees f in . ‘ a
eg corner may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional 100, Ras Siem
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his SAS for extra copies or reprints ss oe oe as
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. ~ > SAPS a
apie
a?
The rate of Subscription per volume $5 cok Hite Lind hs Ths Nae
Serni-monthly numbers yo 5 9s 129 Bie at sis wie AUG aly, Wis Eis ois ein. celnie are tin «ewe
Monthly numbers. ws we's Se Vegi. Gee wield x cmt ian kate Nia e ich aot tg a t
Remiitances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Scien
_ addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washing
Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other publications. rs
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided ey cae
within thirty days after date of the nae ir issue. “ioe i
*
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will te sent for $3.00. Special rates.
are given to members of scientific sotieties affiliated with the is emy ' %
Mine hin
JOURNAL
OF THE a
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 20 Marcus 19, 1930 No. 6
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY.—Peat profiles of the Everglades in Florida:
the stratigraphic features of the “‘Upper” Everglades and correlation
with environmental changes.1. ALFRED P. DACHNOWSKI-STOKES,
U. 8S. Bureau of Chemistry and Soils.
INTRODUCTION
In the following an account is given of the structural features of the
Upper Everglades secured through a method of field work described
elsewhere (5). The profile studies were made in the hope of deter-
mining the origin and past history of this vast area of sedge peatland,
probably one of the largest sub-tropical low moors in the world.
The material was for the greater part collected in the winter months
of 1920, 1928, and 1929. The field work in 1920 was made possible by
the codperation and aid of G. V. Scott, engineer in charge of the Ever-
glades State Drainage District, in whose company the more inacces-
sible parts of the Everglades were sounded. In 1928 and 1929 the
studies in the field have been supported by codperation from the Agri-
cultural Experiment Station of the University of Florida. Their prose-
cution was greatly facilitated by R. V. Allison of the Everglades
Experiment Station at Belle Glade. The horizontal and vertical con-
trol data and lines of elevation above sea level are due to assistance in
1929 from engineers of the State Drainage District. The writer wishes
to convey his sense of deep obligation to Dr. Wilmon Newell, Dean
and Director of the State Agricultural Experiment Stations, to Dr. R.
VY. Allison, and to Mr. G. V. Scott for the special facilities provided for
studying in detail many parts of the Everglades.
1 Received February 3, 1930.
89
90 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 6
“eplopy ‘ovo wed
qSoOM ‘JOLIISIC, OSVUIBIC, 0} BIG SOPB[GIOAY OY} JO UOISIAIP Sul1o90UISuO oY} Aq porvdoig ‘§Z6T JO ADAANS ooURSSTBUUODII
oy} Aq pol0A0d BpPILOL] JO Sope[si0Ay oY} UT SSurpunos o[yoid yeoed jo sioquinu puB UOT}ROOT SuTMoYysS deyy—'T] “317
ST7/bV OML = HOM! FINO
DIIb+0IsS
£2L-62-7
$Z-OZ- vr
&F-SZ-7
eee —_—_——_
hee pot Rice
A 1 / \y
Be GU Be
4 %
a & ut ONY 75/ owreh ) N 8
a) VOL LLY
Q
8
MARCH 19, 1980 | DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 91
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS AFFECTING THE STUDY OF EVERGLADES
PEAT PROFILES
The present paper does not pretend to reconstruct conditions in all
parts of this region but aims to present briefly the profile record of the
Everglades south of Lake Okeechobee and a consideration of the con-
sequences of changes in water level and shore lines.
The profiles used are representative of a much larger number ob-
tained by the writer. The locations of the profiles along the several
lines of traverse are indicated on the map Fig. 1 and the general rela-
tions of the peat layers to each other and to the configuration of the
bedrock are shown in Figs. 2 to 7. The large number of soundings
plotted to scale has made it possible to check the several layers of the
SR)
RR
8a 8
EB se066 Pear
Eh SEOIMENTARE PLAT
Fig. 2.—Peat profiles from Lake Okeechobee at Canal Point, Florida, northwest to
southeast along the West Palm Beach canal, showing rock-bottom topography and dia-
grammatic details of the structural features of the Everglades. Surface variations are
due to shrinkage, compression, and fires following drainage. Numbers at top of sec-
tions and distance apart between cross-sections correspond to locations shown on map
of Fig. 1. Elevations are based on one common geodetic datum of sea level.
stratigraphic sections. The data from excavations made along the
face of canals and from pits dug in differently situated parts of the same
region show excellent correspondences wherever the exact location
above sea level of the respective layers was determined.
In Fig. 2 are reproduced in graphic form the results of soundings
made with an American peat-sampling instrument. ‘The cross sec-
tions illustrate a transect profile running from Lake Okeechobee at
Canal Point southeastward along the West Palm Beach Canal to the
eastern border of the Everglades. The contour of the bedrock of lime-
stone is well shown and it is evident, despite the decrease in number
of soundings going eastward, that the structural features of the profiles
show marked uniformity. The same conclusion applies to the profiles
92 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 6
in Figs. 3 to 5 which were taken parallel to the Hillsboro, North New
River, and Miami canals. In the profile transect of Fig. 7 which
combines the results of soundings along canals of two subdivisions of
; §
Sd bs xe
18 I g : " ® 748
q /e ~ Ny
$s — = xh wF
/é- 4 = = = SE
15+ > == 1S
/#> § PS = Sf
=|=
72 == 42
/ = = un
70 = V2)
2 NE : a
3 ‘hg
Fig. 3.—Peat profiles extending from Lake Okeechobee northwest to southeast across
the Everglades along the Hillsboro canal, showing form of the bedrock contour and the
sequence of the major layers of peat, the character of which was influenced by changes
of water level and shore lines. Locations of cross-sections are given on the accompany-
ing map in fig. 1.
9 * a
‘a y 4
/7 ne a
16 = = +16
/s = = 1s
/4 = “t
/s = “3
la = “2
“/ = 4/4
10 = lo
9 = 9
8 = 8
7 7
Fig. 4.—Cross-sections along the North New River canal showing rock-bottom con-
figuration, contrasts in the sequence of peat layers, and transition of stratigraphic fea-
tures from Lake Okeechobee to Okeelanta and southward. Changes in water level and
shore line are recorded by the character and succession of the major layers of peat.
Number and location of each profile are shown on the map of fig. 1.
the Drainage District, the sudden apparent greater simplicity of
profiles near the western as well as the eastern border (Fig. 2), where
they merge into higher land commonly called the rim of the Ever-
glades, is particularly noticeable.
MARCH 19, 1930 |= DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 93
Before drainage began the Everglades presented the appearance of
a broad, level, grass-covered prairie, sloping gently toward the south
at the rate of about three inches per mile. Extensive drainage opera-
tions have caused, however, compression of the canalward edge of the
Everglades, often changing the characteristic position above sea level
of the main layers of peat. ‘The profile sections along the south shore
of Lake Okeechobee and the canals of the Everglades, it will be noted,
show the discrepancy due to settling from drainage and the differences
in the surface contour which now conform partly with the bedrock
topography, but are chiefly the result of fires and oxidation.
A striking and important feature of the Everglades is the raised form
of the southern shore of Lake Okeechobee. In cross section the sur-
face forms a curve, abrupt at the margin of the lake, sloping gently
southward from twenty-one feet just south of Lake Okeechobee to
about six feet above sea level west of Miami. ‘This slope is shown in
the profile diagrams (Figs. 2 to 7) and on the charts of the main canals
which accompany the reports to Congress of the Office of Experiment
Stations, United States Department of Agriculture (7) and of the
Florida Everglades Engineering Commission (8).
The cause of the raised and convex form of many peat deposits and
the presence of lakes and ponds on them has received frequent con-
sideration. It is well known, for example, that Sphagnum mosses
and marsh vegetation by their growth and the clogging up of drainage
channels, raise the water level to considerable heights. The high-
moors in Maine and in Europe, with ponds of standing water on the
elevated surface, the presence of Lake Drummond within the Dismal
Swamp near Norfolk, Va., and the ponded water of the present Lake
Okeechobee are examples of such results. The interlacing net-work of
roots and rhizomes from sedges and herbaceous perennials, constantly
compacting under the increasing weight of accumulating plant remains,
greatly hinders water from flowing out of the matted and felty-fibrous
mass of peat to a lower level. Periodically changing in height under
wet years and shrinking in drier times, the formation of areas of raised
peat is generally attained best in humid climatic belts where the supply
of water is abundant for the growth, of native vegetation and where
layers of peat, more or less impervious, impound drainage water at
varying elevations. Lake Okeechobee represents the height at which
a layer of dense, finely divided sedimentary peat, superimposed upon
a basal layer of fibrous sedge peat can pond a large body of water at
the margin in a hydrostatic condition. Prior to drainage operations
94 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 6
the lake did not rise to a higher stage than 223 feet because the lake
overflowed its banks along the entire south shore. During prolonged
periods of rainfall a sheet of water covered large portions of the Ever-
glades, retarded in its movement by the dense growth of the saw-grass
and the buoyancy of the water-soaked fibrous peat.
For the attempt to reconstruct from the profile soundings some of
the important physical conditions which prevailed in the past of the
Everglades, the clue is taken in the succession of peat layers from the
basejof the bedrock upward. Peat-profile studies carried out with
uniform methods, as described by Lundquist (12), correlate and har-
9d
% ) /9
i 9)
> N SEB
N
y = /7
= = /é
= =
= 5
= Jt
13
/2
YW
/O
3
8
Fig. 5.—Peat-profile traverse along the Miami canal, showing bedrock topography and
cross-sections through the Everglades from north to south. The locations of the peat
profiles are given on the map in fig. 1.
monize results and increase greatly the knowiedge of past vegetations
and the growth of plants. Series of peat profiles furnish not only the
best material for historical studies regarding the character of the
ancient vegetation, but they serve also as a record for the study of
changes in environment. The general profile studies of the Florida
Everglades furnish independent evidence and confirm the same con-
clusion. The position of peat layers above sea level at one locality
with the position of similar layers at other localities identifies them as
the record of the same period and conditions. The profiles record
without doubt geologically recent changes in the water level and shore
line of Lake Okeechobee. :
MARCH 19, 1930 DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 95
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF TYPE PEAT PROFILES
It may at first thought appear undesirable to use the detailed
field records available for representative type profiles. But in order
that the reader may judge conclusions with a fuller knowledge of the
nature of the evidence available, it is believed that the original data
for at least three peat-profile soundings may be pertinent in connec-
tion with later discussions of the origin and history of the Florida
Everglades.
A description is given, in the following, of the profile sections which
were measured on the banks of the West Palm Beach Canal. The
sequence of peat layers obtained along this canal affords as good a
basis as any from the other main diagonal canals, of inferring the en-
vironmental conditions which prevailed during the deposition of the
chief layers of peat.
1. Lake Okeechobee Area
F-29-33. At the lake shore, 300 feet north of the U. 8S. Sugar Cane
Breeding Station at Canal Point, northeast of the entrance to West
Palm Beach Canal. Elevation of ground surface and water in the
lake 15.5 feet and of bedrock 2.9 feet above sea level.
1. Black, compact, sticky, wet sedimentary peat, sandy at the surface
with thin band of shells (species of Planorbis and Physa) at 16 to 17 inches
below the surface. Based upon sea level measurements the marly material
appears to be identical with that in a profile sounding 2,000 feet from Lake
Okeechobee, on the south side of the ridge of dune-like sand which borders
the shore of the lake. The sedimentary material is finely divided, dense, and
more or less colloidal between the 2 and 3-foot level below the surface; at the
4-foot level are 6 to 8 inches of brown, fibrous, laminated, compressed sedge
peat mottled with yellowish, flattened rootstocks from Pontederia and other
herbaceous plants. Below this continues to the 54-foot level a very dark
brown to black sticky sedimentary peat.
2. Dark brown partly sedimentary and fibrous sedge peat, stringy from
coarse rhizomes of Cladium and Scirpus; the material is reddish-brown,
moist, fibrous-matted, and poorly decomposed sedge peat at the 7-foot level
below the surface; it gives off a fairly strong odor of hydrogen sulphide.
Marsh gas is escaping in slight amounts.
Between the levels of 7 and 9 feet from the surface the layer shows two to
three alternating bands of dark brown sedimentary-fibrous sedge peat fol-
lowed by reddish-brown poorly decomposed saw-grass peat. The limits of
the bands are indistinct. Below the 9-foot level the sedge peat is predomi-
nantly reddish to yellow-brown, coarse, partly decomposed, matted to felty
fibered and chiefly the network of roots of Cladium with culms of grass-like
plants. The material is porous, spongy, and wet, and has a distinct odor of
hydrogen sulphide.
96 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 6
At the 12-foot level appears a grayish oozy shell and Chara marl with the
remains of roots and rhizomes from sedges. The marl varies in purity and
thickness; it becomes cream-colored toward the bottom and rests on bedrock
of white limestone.
MUM ~ 23 47
TN A228 - 3.3
Sawa “29 5 7
onal
~~.
———3
———
ae ——a
_--.
-_-—
_—
~
-—
ate
ee
-
—_-+-— to _-_
—_—_— ewe
—_-— ime se
~.
eo
~.
Fig. 6.—Peat profiles in a traverse from west to east across the Everglades along the
Bolles canal, showing the development of peat layers by marsh and aquatic groups of
vegetation in response to changes of water level and shore lines.
A. Miami canal to Hillsboro canal.
B. Cross-State Road canal from Hillsboro canal to West Palm Beach canal.
Location of sections shown on map of fig. 1.
Essentially the same structural features were observed more typi-
cally in the peat sections on Torry Island in Lake Okeechobee, and in
belts of different width bordering the lake shore at the Hillsboro,
North New River, and Miami canals. The Okeechobee peat profiles
are a typically two-layered series.
MARCH 19, 1930 §DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 97
2. Upper Everglades Area
F-20-13. Opposite Lateral A, about 10 miles southeast of Lake
Okeechobee and 50 feet west of West Palm Beach Canal on Conners
highway. The section was first measured in 1920 when saw-grass
vegetation and a high water table extended on all sides to the horizon
line, relieved in a few places by clumps of low shrubs. The surface
elevation at present is 15.10 feet, lower by 11 to 13 inches than
formerly, due partly to fires and drainage. The bedrock stands at
7.3 feet and the water level in the canal is at 12.85 feet above sea level.
The record below refers to the field notes of 1920.
1. Dark brown, wet, fibrous matted sedge peat, darkened by fires in the
upper two inches, ‘contains charred debris; scattered over the surface are thin
lenses of small pond snails, plants of Chara sp., and small calcareous pellets
of blue-green algae. This is followed by brown fibrous crumbly saw-grass
peat, mottled with dark-brown, finely-divided debris; between the 12 and 18-
inch level below the surface the sedge peat is coarser, ‘reddish to yellow-brown
and more firmly matted.
2. Blackish-brown sedimentary-fibrous peat approximately 8 to 10 inches
in thickness; dense, sticky, plastic and rather impermeable at the lower level,
the fibrous components are more abundant at the limits of the layer.
3. Reddish-brown, felty-fibrous, matted sedge peat from about 38 to 50
inches below the surface; the material is firm, tough-fibered and has a moder-
ately strong odor of hydrogen sulphide; at depths of 50 to 74 inches occur al-
ternating bands of dark-colored sedimentary and fibrous mixtures followed by
reddish to yellowish-brown, poorly decomposed, felty-fibrous sedge peat;
the limits of the bands are indistinct and the upper one appears to separate
into two thinner bands. This is followed by reddish to yellowish-brown
fibrous moist saw-grass peat, spongy, poorly decomposed, odorous, in a
compressed condition at the lower level; contains spicules of fresh-water
sponges at the bottom and rootstocks of water-arum with needle-like raphides.
Odor of hydrogen sulphide fairly strong below. At depth of 96 to 102 inches
is found a grayish-white soft marl with rootlets of sedges, oozelike on bedrock.
The individual measurements, which were made in dugout pits and
excavations along the main canals in addition to the soundings with
the peat sampling device, show excellent agreement with each other.
The Everglades series of profiles is distributed over a very large por-
tion of the interior. The peat profiles are uniformly three-layered.
3. Marginal Area of the Upper Everglades
F-29-43. Approximately 22 miles southeast of Lake Okeechobee,
along West Palm Beach canal, and 150 feet from north side of highway.
Large areas in this neighborhood have been burned over severely.
It was formerly a border zone of shrubs such as wax myrtle, swamp
bay, magnolia, willow and a Baccharis. Wooded islands or hammocks
98 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 6
of cypress (Taxodium distichum) occur from 2 to 4 miles farther east,
invading the saw-grass. Surface elevation 15.1 feet, bedrock elevation
8.1 feet above sea level. Water level in canal at 11.49 feet. ©
1. Thin horizon of charred granular debris, chiefly from saw-grass peat,
with yellow ash. Below it the plant remains consist of poorly decomposed
brown, coarse-fibered roots and rhizomes from saw-grass and unidentifiable
grasses and sedges. The material is very compact and firm near the surface
but porous, moist, and felty at the lower level. Toward the bottom, about 36
to 60 inches below the surface, the layer shows a scattered admixture of her-
baceous plant remains and includes lenses of sand probably of windblown
origin. Elongated veins contain black finely divided material, and rest on
ZA
S
W
ZO
bs .
9
8
7
S 61
Fig. 7.—Peat profiles of belts extending from sand bars, bordering the margins of the
Everglades, toward the Miami canal, and showing variations in the sequence of peat
layers near the eastern and western end of the drainage canals. Locations of profile
sections are indicated on the map of fig. 1.
gray sand with rootlets of sedges at the contact; the underlying sand rests on
bedrock of porous limestone.
The peat profiles of the Ridge series are typically one-layered units,
relatively young, and not of very extensive occurrence. They are
abundantly distributed over the eastern and western border of the
Everglades and occur also in some of the sedge marshes of the east and
west coast.
PHYSICAL CONDITIONS DURING THE FORMATION OF THE EVERGLADES
From the sequence of the peat layers in the profile sections described
above it is not difficult to reconstruct the history of the “Upper”
Everglades.
MARCH 19, 19830 DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 99
It may be inferred from the conditions summarized by Sanford
(13) that the lowest coastal plain, the Pensacola terrace within which
the Everglades are included, was formed during comparatively recent
Pleistocene time. Following an uplift of the mainland, the Kissim-
mee River and its tributaries flowed southeastward through a broad
flat valley cut mainly in the bedrock of limestone. It was during this
period of erosion that the major features of the present rock-floor
configuration with its irregular and jagged ridges, deep fissures, hol-
lows, and scattered Keys were produced. Hills of sand were deposited,
probably by a southward drift along the outcrop of bedrock around the
border of the Everglades, and widespread beach sands, driven inland
through the central part of the plain, assumed their present form.
Concerning the geographic extent of the emergence, which may have
been intermittent, there is still some doubt. The details that connect
the geographic character of the country with its Pleistocene geology
and with other natural features, are emphasized in the publications of
the Federal Government (2, 7, 8), and the reports of the Florida State
Geological Survey (10), the State Drainage District (6) and the State
Agricultural Experiment Station (1).
The events which are primarily responsible for the history of the
“Upper” Everglades may be set forth as follows:
Subsequent to the period of erosion a change came in the relative
level of land and water. The change brought the surface of the bed-
rock of the Everglades to or near its present level, and, where formerly
there was an effective drainage, now shallow waters occupied small
blocked depressions, hollows, and potholes in the rock.
Aquatic vegetation began to invade the ponds and deeper axes of
the drainage-valley bottoms where the bedrock sloped off more steeply.
Reference to Forsaith’s (9) microscopic and comparative studies of
the plant remains in the lakes and ponds of Florida shows the charac-
ter of most of this type of vegetation. Submerged aquatics were
represented by cosmopolitan but essentially northern species com-
prising Vallisneria, Navas, Potamogeton, Utricularia and others; the
floating aquatics included Nymphaea, and possibly Pistia and Piaropus,
with detached masses of Scirpus scattered along the shores. - Large
mats of Chara and blue-green algae together with numerous water
snails and bivalves which fed on submerged roots and stems, yielded
gray limey oozes and shell marl.
Bordering them, a fairly uniform saw-grass marsh, very much as to-
day, with gras8es, sedges, ferns, and herbaceous semi-aquatics having
100 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 6
fleshy rcotstocks, slowly encroached upon the exposed rocky floor.
Many northern species, both of plants and animals, had extended their
range southward to this region or were represented in the sedge marsh
by varieties which take the place of northern types. They spread
over sands and muddy oozes, and covered wide expanses of bedrock
including large areas now occupied by the present Lake Okeechobee.
Fig. 8.—Upper portion of a profile section in a lateral canal showing on the face of the
bank a surface horizon of saw-grass muck (the residue derived from decomposition of
saw-grass peat) and a dark band of sedimentary-fibrous sedge peat between layers of
brown fibrous saw-grass peat. Photographed by R. V. Allison, March 29, 1929.
Brown fibrous sedge peat, spongy and watersoaked, formed a continu-
ous layer over the limestone. The fact that no true sedimentary layer
of peat is discovered at the bottom of most of the soundings is sufficient
proof that at no time during this early period of peat formation did the
general water level occupy a high elevation or was it rising rapidly
enough to destroy the growth of the saw-grass and initiate the accumu-
lation of a different type of peat on the rock floor of the Everglades.
MARCH 19, 1930 | DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 101
The effect of sand blown from dunes upon the marsh is shown in the
extremely sandy peat material encountered in those soundings which
are nearest the peat-covered dunes and bars.
That the rock floor of this region was not occupied at first by an
inland sea or body of open water as Matson (13) and Harshberger (11)
contend, is evidenced by F-29-33 which recapitulates the general
history of Ritta and Torry islands in that lake (3). The profiles in
Figs. 2 to 7 also present features incompatible with the interpretation
of them as products of a basin-like depression or of the filling up of an
inland lake; they are too strongly suggestive of their autochthonous
origin. The east-west profiles along the Bolles Canal and its extension
eastward to the West Palm Beach Canal (Fig. 6A and 6B) serve as a
useful check since in places they cross certain of the significant profiles
of the main diagonal canals and confirm the developmental features
shown on the northwest-southeast series of transects. The origin of
Lake Okeechobee did not take place until a later period. It came into
existence probably through springs or the effects of subterranean
drainage and solution. The dense growth of sedges and their matted
network of roots and rhizomes held back the water of heavy rainfalls
and at first a chain of narrow lakes was probably ponded off between
Kreamer and Ritta islands (Fig. 1). The exact position of the original
series of lakes between the islands is not yet known. On the north
side of Lake Okeechobee floodwaters from the mouth of the Kissim-
mee River carried in suspension mineral material and deposited silt
and sand over the bedrock bottom. ‘This deposition may have pro-
ceeded for a considerable length of time, but the mineral sediments do
not appear to be very thick. In contrast to this the evidence col-
lected from profile soundings on the south side of the lake and in the
Everglades proper indicates the presence of a basal layer of fibrous
sedge peat. Minor overflows occurred from time to time, causing the
water to encroach over the saw-grass marsh of that period and to per-
sist for moderately long intervals. The admixtures of sedimentary
peat, aquatic in origin, found embedded in the brown fibrous sedge
peat at various levels, obviously are equivalent to the amount and
length of overflow submergence. LHspecially at depths represented
by tide elevations of 7 and 11 feet above sea level (Fig. 2), quantities
of sedimentary material embedded in poorly decomposed sedge peat,
differing in morphological characteristics from plant remains above
and below these levels, must be credited to the agency of fluctuating
water levels. The formation and deposition of both organic and silty
102 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 6
material at the higher levels are proof of the existence of initial shore
lines of a temporary lake, and an indication that a change to higher
water levels had affected the region.
Subsequent to the minor overflows, and as the water level fell, saw-
grass vegetation again advanced northward beyond the present shore
line of Lake Okeechobee. The plants continued to build up an accu-
mulation of sedge peat, holding water to surface level by capillarity.
In addition to the saw grass, Cladiwm effusum (Mariscus jamaicensis),
the most common component of the fibrous peat layer, the plant re-
mains denote the presence of species of Rhynchospora, Panicum, Andro-
pogon, ferns such as Osmunda regalis, Acrosticum sp., and herbaceous
plants as elements of the ancient marsh community. The only species
found as seemingly pure bands of peat are Peltandra with Sagittaria
and Pontederia which occupied ancient lagoons and sloughs. The
water appears to have oozed slowly southward, on the east side toward
the southeast and on the west side toward the southwest.
The most extensive submergence by overflow, greatest in amount
of sedimentary peat deposition and bringing the layer farthest out
over the interior of the Everglades region, occurred later. All the
measurements strongly affirm the interpretation that a rapid change due
to the release of large masses of water marks the period when the accu-
mulation of fibrous sedge peat had reached elevations between 12 and
13 feet above sea level. In its inundated condition the region was
covered with water, probably to a foot or more in depth, fluctuating in
level from time to time but enduring for a relatively long period. Both
the upper and lower edges of the sedimentary peat of that time are
rather sharply demarked, and the continuity of the layer is traceable
the entire distance from Kreamer Island in Lake Okeechobee to a line
north of the Tamiami Trail, between Miami and the west coast, where
the layer has the form of thin projecting lobes. A preliminary study
of the plant remains seems to indicate a general and great change in
surface vegetation.
The whole aspect of the peat profiles is such as to justify the assump-
tion of fluctuating and long-standing high water conditions. But the
factors are yet to be determined that caused the water level to rise and
stand. The problem is exceedingly complex since some of the factors
such as bedrock topography, rainfall, evaporation, run-off, and perco-
lation in the Everglades are not well understood. The underground
water supply through porous or probably cavernous limestone is also
an unknown and vitally important factor which will require study and
observation.
MARCH 19, 1930 DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 103
When the waters again fell and withdrew to a lower level, the present
Lake Okeechobee came into existence. Lowering of the water table
exposed a narrow zone of sedimentary mud flats on the south shore of
the lake, and was accompanied by the rapid invasion of deciduous
broad-leaved trees and shrubs. A dense growth of custard apple
trees (Anona glabra) became dominant and formed a forest in which
other tree-like vegetation was scant. Many of the older trees had
enlarged bases induced by the influence. of submergence in water.
The location and width of the ‘‘custard-apple belt,’’ previous to its
destruction coincident with drainage and cultural operations, are
shown on the phytogeographic map published by Harshberger (11).
A comparison of the peat profiles in the “‘custard-apple belt’’ between
the shore of the Lake and the interior of the Everglades suggests more
differences than correspondences in the upper and recent layer of peat.
The disagreement, however, is essentially due to fluctuation in water
level. Woody peat is lacking entirely. Readvances of the shore line
are marked by readvances in aquatic vegetation and corresponding
deposition of sedimentary peat; periods, short in duration, of lower
water supply are correlated by the development of saw-grass vegeta-
tion and herbaceous plants which were favored and pushed forward
over the exposed mudflats. Some of the bands of shell marl below
laminated, platy, yellowish-brown, fibrous peat derived from Pon-
tederia and semiaquatic members of the Naiadales and Arales surely
record a wide re-entrance of saw-grass vegetation over sedimentary
peat, and a corresponding drainage of the lake and of the Everglades.
The extent and the number of oscillations in water level seem to have
been small, for the bands are disturbed and alternate irregularly at
several localities. Although thin layers of fibrous and herbaceous
sedge peat extend beyond the present lake margin, they have only
moderate thickness and indicate effects of an unstable shore line. This
supposition is strongly supported also by the fact that in the interior
of the Everglades and in the bays of Lake Okeechobee the correspond-
ing layers of sedge peat record more uniform conditions. As already
noted in another connection (4) they suggest that during the last few
thousand years there has been no major differential submergence and
no appreciable change in the relative positions of water level. The
evidence indicates that custard-apple hammocks established them-
selves only recently upon the mud flats along Lake Okeechobee, and
the record of the peat profiles leads toward the conclusion of an essen-
tially stable coastal plain in historic time.
104 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 6
A ridge of fine silicious sand occupies the northeast and east shores
of Lake Okeechobee. The sand ridge at Canal Point is about six feet
high, varies in width from about 25 to 200 feet and rests on sedimen-
tary peat along the entire southeastern shore of the lake. Prior to
drainage operations it was clothed with bald cypress (Taxodium disti-
chum), maple (Acer carolinianum), ash (Fraxinus caroliniana), holly
(Ilex cassine), strangling fig (Ficus aurea), palmetto (Sabal palmetto),
many shrubs, and herbaceous undergrowth; the stand was almost im-
penetrable in many places. These low dune-like ridges and mounds
of sand are not directly related to the present shore line, although
they occur near the shore of Lake Okeechobee and are not found in-
land on the saw-grass peat of the Everglades. From their position
they may be in part the work of winds and in part due to wave action,
particularly southward-setting currents; they were probably formed
more or less recently, but at a time when water level conditions favored
sand drift.
The present vegetation of the Everglades has been described in great
detail by Harshberger (11). Consultation of the phytogeographic map
which accompanies his monograph will show the limits of the saw-grass
vegetation and diverse plant communities, but not of the actual accu-
mulation of saw-grass peat. Harper (10) has listed the constituent
plants of the principal types of vegetation and has given many sources
of information in his bibliography. To complete the picture it is
necessary to keep in mind that broad-leaved shrubs and trees belong-
ing to types essentially southern in range and characteristic of the
belt of cypress-tupelo-red gum swamps have been invading the
Everglades only recently. As yet layers of woody peat derived from
them are lacking. In the interior of the Everglades are scattered
hammocks or islands of hardwood trees and shrubs with vines, ferns,
and epiphytes. Where fires do not suppress it, this group of vegeta-
tion is displacing the saw-grass more or less rapidly. In a not-distant
future hammock vegetation will be typical where the saw-grass is still
in evidence.
CONCLUSIONS AND NEW PROBLEMS
In the present paper the primary object has been to treat in a pre-
liminary fashion the general origin and nature of the upper portion of
that large stretch of sedge moor, the Everglades of Florida, one of the
largest subtropical peat areas in the world, extending from Lake Okee-
chobee to the Gulf of Mexico.
MARCH 19, 1930 | DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 105
Three distinct but genetically related series of peat profiles are
pointed out. (1) the area of profiles in and bordering Lake Okee-
chobee; (2) the area of profiles in the main interior portion of the Ever-
glades; (3) the area of peat profiles bordering the highland. ‘The general
relations of these three series of profiles to each other are shown dia-
grammatically in Figs. 2 to 7. The morphological features and bo-
tanical composition which characterize representative soundings of
each of these series of profiles have been described and the effects of
oscillations of water level upon the stratigraphic origin and form of the
profiles were considered. It is concluded that the salient features of
the Everglades do not find an explanation in the geologic structure, or
in the configuration of the bedrock as an inland lake; the peat profiles
show a remarkable dependence upon inundations and oscillations of
water level and corresponding changes in shore line during a time rela-
tively recent. The Upper Everglades of Florida present the aspects
of a eutrophic sedge moor characterized by series of one-, two-, and
three-layered telmatogenic profiles.
A number of special problems possess more than ordinary interest.
It is in the wide bearing not only on practical agriculture but also on
fields of science, particularly Pleistocene geology, geography, botany,
climatology and even archaeology that their scientific value and im-
portance are to be found.
If a sufficient number of profile measurements can be secured to-
gether with their elevations above sea level, the successive positions
of ancient Lake Okeechobee, the several stages and forms of the re-
ceding and advancing shore line can be mapped. It is hoped that such
a valuable list of accurate measurements as that obtained through the
cooperation with the Everglades State Drainage office will be made
for a large number of points along lines of traverse in an east-west and
north-south direction. They have a high scientific and practical
value. There is a scarcity of trustworthy data for solving certain
difficult problems in regional peat investigations, or on which to base
reliable estimates of the rate and amount of shrinkage and decomposi-
tion of peat deposits under different climatic conditions and agricultural
practices. |
A closer treatment requires also biochemical analyses of the profile
series, including the mechanical and chemical character of both the
shore peat (littoral gyttja) and lake peat (limnic gyttja) as geographical
types of sedimentary peat. Of considerable interest should be de-
tailed quantitative and stratigraphic studies of pollen and other plant
remains in the succession of peat layers.
106 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 6
It would be pertinent also to inquire into the causes of the inunda-
tions to which the region has been subject and which determined the
primary characteristics of the Everglades peat soils. Determination
of the extent, number, and duration of the overflows and changes in
water level, the amount of fall and rise recorded by the peat profiles,
should be of great interest in problems connected with the control of
intermittent, impounded surface waters. The factors that caused
longstanding high-water-level conditions and changes in the shore of
Lake Okeechobee are yet to be determined. The theory of relatively
recent oscillations of the coast, involving both emergence and subsid-
ence of the Floridian mainland, is apparently disproved by the
character of the Everglades peat layers and the absence of tidal-marsh
peat.
An estimate of the length of time required for the formation of this
interesting peat region with its flooded and ponded lake and shifting,
complicated shore lines should be another aim in studies like this,
especially if correlated with contemporaneous periods in the ice retreat
in North America. Correlation tables already published (8) are only
a beginning of the task of constructing a continuous record. The
complexity and difficulty of the whole problem of possible changes of
level requires contributions from different aspects, and the light of
fuller knowledge than now at our command. Particular attention
should be given to comparisons with northern coastal regions serving
to clarify the relationship between stratigraphic features and environ-
mental changes.
Studies to correlate the effects of drainage and of special chemical
salts, applied to promote the growth of crops, are under way on fields
representing each profile series.-
REFERENCES
(1) Auuison, R. V., Bryan, O. C., and Hunter, J. H. The stimulation of plant re-
sponse on the raw peat soils of the Florida Everglades through the use of copper sul-
phate and other chemicals. Univ. Florida Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 190. 1927.
(2) Batpwin, M. and Hawker, H.W. Soil Survey of the Fort Lauderdale area, Florida.
Field Operations, U. S. Bureau of Soils, 1919.
(3) Dacunowsk1, A. P. The correlation of time units and climatic changes in peat de-
posits of the United States and Europe. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 8: 225-231. 1922.
(4) Dacanowsk1-StToxgs, A. P., and Atuison, R. V. A preliminary note on blue-green
algal marl in southern Florida in relation to the problem of coastal subsidence.
This JouRNAL 18: 476-480. 1928.
(5) Dacunowski-Stoxss, A. P. The botanical composition and morphological features
of ‘“‘highmoor’’ peat profiles in Maine. Soil Sci. 27: 379-388. 1929.
(6) Extiot, F. C. Bienn. Rept. Everglades Drainage District, Tallahassee, Florida.
1925-1926.
MARCH 19, 1930 SHOEMAKER: NEW TALITRIDAE 107
(7) Everglades of Florida. U.S. Senate Doc. 89, 62nd Congress, 1st Session, Washing-
ten. DCs. Ott:
(8) Florida Everglades: U.S. Senate Doc. 379, 63d Congress, 2nd Session, Washington,
D.C. 1914.
(9) Forsaitu, C. C. Report on some allocthonous peat deposite of Florida. Bot. Gaz.
62: 32-52, 1916, 63: 190-208. 1917.
(10) Harper, R. M. Natural resources of Southern Florida. Eighteenth Ann. Rep.
Fla. State Geol. Survey, 27-206. 1927.
(11) Harsupercer, J. W. The vegetation of South Florida, south of 27°30’ north, exclu-
sive of the Florida Keys. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci. 7: 49-189. 1914.
(12) Lunpauist, G. Methoden zur Untersuchung der Entwicklungsgeschichte der
Seen. Abderhalden’s Handbuch der biologischen Arbeitsmethoden. Abt.
9, T. 2, (fig. 173), 427-462. 1925.
(13) Matson, G. C., and Sanrorp, S., Geology and ground waters of Florida. U.S.
Geol. Survey, Water Supply Paper 319. 1913.
ZOOLOGY.—Descriptions of two new amphipod crustaceans (Tali-
tridae) from the United States.1 CLARENCE R. SHOEMAKER,
United States National Museum. (Communicated by Mary
J. RATHBUN.)
While sorting a small collection of crustacea which was sent to the
U. 8. National Museum for identification by the U. 8. Biological Sur-
vey in May, 1929, I noticed a species of Orchestia which was new to
science. The specimens, one male and two females, were collected by
Mr. F. M. Uhler, and in answer to my inquiry as to the exact locality,
he says in his letter, ‘“The specimens were taken on the north side of a
small lake or pond located on the northwest side of Lake Monroe, and
were found under a board on a rather sandy gently sloping margin,
2—4 yards from the water’s edge. This spot apparently is in Volusia
County, Florida, very close to the Seminole County line, and Sanford
is the nearest town of any importance. This pond is located about
1-14 miles from the bridge across the outlet of Lake Monroe, and is
separated from the lake only by a strip of semi-dry marsh covered with
vegetation. The water of the pond is supplied by a large sulphur
spring, a sulphurous artesian well, and by high water from the main
body of Lake Monroe. Lake Monroe is merely a broadened portion of
the St. Johns’ River, and although the water apparently is fresh, it
contains such marine vertebrates as the sting ray (Dasyatis sabina)
which frequently enters fresh water.”
I have designated this new species Orchestia uhleri in honor of its
discoverer.
1 Received February 7, 1930.
108 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 6
In 1905, Dr. James E. Benedict took some specimens of an Orches-
tordea at Pacific Grove, California, which upon examination proved to
be a new species. Mr. E. M. Chase collected further examples of this
species on April 27, 1918 at Anaheim Bay, Seal Beach, California. Dr.
Waldo L. Schmitt, during his investigations of spiny lobsters, procured
additional material from kelp hold-fasts on the beach at La Jolla,
California. Mr. Frank F. Gander has presented the National Museum
with specimens which he took in 1927 at San Diego, California. Mr.
Gander states that he took this species both in the littoral marine and
at Balboa Park, which affords another example of a member of the
family Talvtridae extending from the coast to a considerable distance
inland.
This species I have named Orchestoidea benedictt in honor of its
discoverer.
Orchestia uhleri, n. sp.
Figures 1 and 2
Type-locality—Near Lake Monroe, Volusia County, Florida, collected by
F. M. Uhler, March 22, 1928; 1 male holotype (Cat. No. 62956, U.S. N. M.).
Male.—Kyes black, round, and of moderate size. Antenna 1 extending
slightly beyond the fourth joint of antenna 2, flagellum composed of four
joints and slightly longer than peduncle. Antenna 2 very nearly as long as
the head and first four body segments, fourth joint of peduncle about three-
fourths the length of fifth, flagellum composed of thirteen joints and as long
as the fourth and fifth joints of peduncle combined. Mandible, cutting
edge rather narrow and oblique and armed with two large and three smaller
teeth, secondary plate well developed, two stout plumose spines and one or
two smaller ones in spine-row, molar large and strong, bearing many trans-
verse ridges on its slightly concave surface, and having at its base near the
spine-row a dense brush of plumose setae. Maxilla 1, inner plate long and
narrow and bearing on its distal end three plumose spines, outer plate bearing
9 serrate spine-teeth, palp very small with second joint about one-third the
length of first. Maxilla 2, inner plate very nearly as long as outer and
bearing on its obliquely truncated extremity many plumose spines and setae,
outer plate evenly rounded distally and bearing many curved spines. Maxil-
lipeds, inner plates reaching very nearly to the end of the first joint of palp,
broadened distally, and bearing four short spine-teeth on their truncated
ends, outer plates short and broad, reaching about one-third the distance
along the second joint of palp, palp very short and broad, all the joints being
wider than long. Lower-lip about normal. Gnathopod 1, side-plate very
slightly concave in front and evenly rounded below, fourth joint with shallow
lobe on lower margin, fifth with prominent lobe on lower margin, sixth joint
about two-thirds the length of fifth, lower margin produced distally into a
soft tumid lobe, palm short, transverse and armed with a row of long slender
spines, seventh joint as long as palm, bearing about one-third the distance
from the apex several slender setae, and armed on inner edge with three short
blunt spines. Gnathopod 2 large and powerful, second joint four-fifths as
MARCH 19, 1930 SHOEMAKER: NEW TALITRIDAE 109
Fig. 1.—Orchestia uhleri, new species. Male, a, Entire animal. 6, Right mandible.
c, Maxilla 1. d, Maxilla 2. e, Maxillipeds. jf, Maxilliped with palp flattened out to
show entire width of joints. g, Lower lip. h, Gnathopod 1. 7, End of sixth joint and
seventh joint of gnathopod 2, enlarged.
110 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 6
long as sixth, produced at the lower anterior corner into a rounding lobe, third
joint produced anteriorly into a prominent rounding lobe, sixth joint over half
as wide as long, narrowing distally, with upper margin convex, and the entire
lower margin which is about straight forming the palm, two rounding protu-
berances on palm adjacent to the hinge of seventh joint, palm armed on distal
two-thirds with short spines which are more thickly clustered on the protuber-
ances, seventh joint very long and curving inward toward the end, greatly
overlapping palm and when closed against palm the apex extending nearly to
the upper margin of fourth joint, a large tooth or protuberance on inner sur-
face fitting between those of the palm. Peraeopods 1 and 2 about normal
except that the seventh joints are rather small. Peraeopods 3 to 5 increas-
ing consecutively in length and having all joints normally expanded. Uropod
1 projecting farther backward than uropod 2 which projects considerably
farther than uropod 3. Uropod 1 with peduncle slightly longer than the rami
which are very nearly equal in length. Uropod 2 with peduncle equal in
length to outer ramus which is a little shorter than the inner. Uropod 3 with
peduncle and ramus nearly equal in length, ramus about three times longer
than wide, bearing four long spines on outer margin and a cluster of three
spines on apex. Telson a little longer than wide, with the slightly concave sides
converging toward the apex which is divided into two shallow lobes by a
slight central notch, two long spines on each lateral margin, two extending
backward from each lobe, and two shorter spines on upper surface near apex.
Length.— Male, 14.5 mm.; female, smaller.
Gnathopod 1 of the female is very distinctly subchelate, the palm being
slightly oblique and armed near the defining angle with a row of five or six
long slender spines, and the seventh joint bearing near its apex several setae
and on inside margin two short blunt spines. Gnathopod 2 of female with
second joint moderately expanded, sixth joint produced considerably beyond
the very short seventh joint into an evenly rounded soft tumid lobe.
Although the genus Orchestia is mostly confined to marine beaches, a
number of its members, in widely separated parts of the earth, are known to
occur in moist earth and amongst decaying vegetation, at considerable dis-
tances from the coast and at times at elevations of 2000 to 3000 feet. Fritz
Miller described a species (O. darwiniz) from Brazil, of which he says, ‘“The
animal lives in marshy places in the vicinity of the sea, under decaying
leaves, in the loose earth which the marsh crabs throw up around the en-
trance to their burrows, and even under dry cow dung and horse dung. If
this species removes to a greater distance from the shore than the majority of
its congeners, its male differs still more from all known species by the powerful
chelae of the second pair of feet.’””’ The present record, I believe, is the first
of the occurrence of this genus in North America at any locality removed from
the coast, Lake Monroe being twenty miles from the nearest point on the east
coast of Florida and about 120 miles from the sea by way of the St. Johns
River.
MARCH 19, 1930 SHOEMAKER: NEW TALITRIDAE 111
Fig. 2.—Orchestia uhleri, new species. a, Gnathopod 1, female. 6, Gnathopod 2,
female. c, Palm of sixth joint and seventh joint of gnathopod 2 of male, enlarged. d,
Right mandible, enlarged. e, Telson and third uropods, male.
112 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 6
Orchestoidea benedicti, n. sp.
Figure 3
Type-locality—San Diego, California (littoral marine), collected by Frank
F. Gander, April, 1927; 1 male holotype (Cat. No. 62962, U.S.N.M.).
Male.—Head about as long as first thoracic segment, eye of medium size,
very nearly circular, black and composed of many small elements. Antenna
1 scarcely reaching to the middle of fourth joint of antenna 2, flagellum half the
length of peduncle and composed of four joints the last of which is very small.
Antenna 2 very short and stout, fourth joint about twice as long as wide,
fifth joint twice as long as fourth and only four times as long as wide, flagel-
lum a little over half as long as fifth peduncular joint, first four joints of
flagellum coalesced forming one long joint about equal in length to the re-
maining seven. Mandible, cutting edge with three large stout teeth and
three or four smaller ones, secondary plate well-developed, four plumose
spines, two of which are larger than the others, in spine-row, molar well-
developed, and bearing a brush of plumose setae at base. Maxilla 1, inner
plate long and slender and bearing two plumose spines on apex, outer plate
longer than inner and bearing nine serrate spine-teeth on the obliquely trun-
cated end, palp very small consisting of a slender basal joint and a very
minute terminal joint. Maxilla 2, inner plate narrower and slightly shorter
than outer, distal end very obliquely truncated and bearing a long plumose
seta at lower obtuse angle, outer plate evenly rounded distally and armed
with many long curved spines. Maxillipeds, inner plates long and slender, |
reaching to or a little beyond the middle of the outer plate, and armed on the
transversely truncated end with three short spine-teeth and row of plumose
setae, outer plate small and short, reaching to about the middle of the second
joint of palp, the rounding apex bearing several plumose setae, and the inner
edge bearing a row of closely set short spines, palm short and broad, the inner
distal angle of second joint produced into a broad lobe, lower lip with lateral
lobes short and broad. Gnathopod 1 about normal, fifth joint bearing on
lower margin a short rounding lobe, sixth joint bearing at the lower posterior
angle a low soft lobe which gives the joint the appearance of having a very
short palm. Gnathopod 2, sixth joint very large and powerful and roughly
oval in outline, the oblique palm consisting of a large spinose tooth and a
deep depression adjacent to the hinge of the seventh joint, the palm is de-
fined by a low rounding angle and a short stout spine, the oblique surface
of the large tooth bears several additional stout spines some of which project
forward on either side of the seventh joint when it is closed against the palm,
seventh joint very stout and strongly curved and slightly overlapping palm,
inner edge bearing a row of very short spinules. Peraeopod 1 much longer
than 2. Peraeopod 3 about equal in length to 2, second joint broadly ex-
panded. Peraeopods 4 and 5 subequal in length, second joint of 5 more
widely expanded than that of 4. Abdominal segments 1-3 with lower pos-
terior corners slightly produced into short acute points. Uropod 1 extending
farther back than 2 which is farther produced than 3. Uropod 1, peduncle
longer than the rami, the outer of which is the longer, peduncle and rami
bearing spines on all their edges. Uropod 2, peduncle equal in length to
outer ramus which is slightly shorter than inner, the edges of both peduncle
and rami bearing spines, those of the peduncle being longer than the rest.
Uropod 3, peduncle shorter than ramus. Telson about as wide as long, the
sides converging to a narrowly rounded apex, several spines on the upper sur-
face and a cluster on the rounding apex.
MARCH 19, 1930 SHOEMAKER: NEW TALITRIDAE 113
77
Fig. 3.—Orchestoidea benedicti, new species. Male, a, Entire animal. 06, Antenna l.
c, End of fifth joint and flagellum of antenna 2. d, Right mandible. e, Maxillal. f,
Maxilla 2. g, Maxillipeds. h, Lower lip. 7, End of sixth joint and seventh joint of
gnathopod 2, enlarged. j, Gnathopod1, female. k, Gnathopod 2, female. J, Uropod 3.
n, Telson and third uropods from above.
114 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 6
Length.—Male, 13 mm.; female, somewhat smaller.
Material examined.—
53 specimens; Pacific Grove, California, James E. Benedict, coll., June,
1905.
1 specimen; Entrance to Anaheim Bay, Seal Beach, California, E. M.
Chase, coll., April 27, 1918.
27 specimens; La Jolla, California, from kelp hold-fasts on beach, W. L.
Schmitt, coll., August 17, 1918.
9 specimens; San Diego, California (littoral marine), Frank F, Gander, coll.,
April, 1927.
5 specimens; San Diego, California (Balboa Park), Frank F. Gander, coll.,
May, 1927.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
413TH MEETING
The 413th regular meeting was held October 3d, 1929, in Room 43 of the
National Museum. The president, Mr. J. E. Graf, presided. Mr. Roy E.
CAMPBELL, Alhambra, California, and Mr. A. M. Vancz, Hyéres, France,
were elected to membership.
The Secretary-Treasurer, Mr. Ronwnmr, read a communication from Prof.
EK. N. Cory, of College Park, Md., chairman of the Eastern branch of the
American Association of Economic Entomologists, announcing a meeting of
that organization in New York City beginning on November 21st at 9:30 A.M.
The chair reported the death of Dr. FRANK HuRLBUT CHITTENDEN of the
Bureau of Entomology on September 15th, 1929, in his 71st year, at his home
in Washington, D.C. After a few remarks, by Dr. Howarp, dealing in a
reminiscent way with his associations with the deceased, a committee, con-
sisting of WHITE, QAUINTANCE, and Howarp, was appointed to recommend.
action at the next meeting.
Program: J. M. Atpricu: Recent entomological experiences in Europe.
The speaker spent some three months in Europe the past summer. He
studied the types of American muscoid flies in the British Museum, and the
museums in Stockholm, Copenhagen and Paris. He also collected Diptera
in Northern Sweden (Aare and Oestersund) for the purpose of getting material
to compare with the northern flies of America, in order to get further informa-
tion about the species common to the holarctic region. Lantern slides were
shown to illustrate the life zones of northern Sweden. (Author’s abstract.)
Discussed by Howarp.
F, L. CAMPBELL: How do insects grow?
414TH MEETING
The 414th meeting was held November 7, 1929, in Room 48 of the National
Museum. The President, Mr. J. E. Graf, presided. Mr. James I. HaMBLE-
TON and Dr. J. W. Buutcer, both of the U. 8. Bureau of Entomology, were
elected to membership.
The following communication was read:
MARCH 19, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 115
“Your committee recommends that the following paragraph be inserted
in the minutes of this meeting:
“
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduces bast
by zinc etchings being preferable.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors. :
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. eee:
Authors’ Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers
bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and =
date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, inaccord-
ance with the following schedule of prices: ro oe
Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers ‘
50 ee a eS rar nies $2.00 ‘
100 $ .95 $1.90 $2.38 $3.00 2.50
150 1.50 2.87 3.50 4.33 3.00
200 1.88 3.60 4.31 5.25 3.50
250 2.40 4.24 5.00 | 6.00 4.00 ee ae
An additionalicharge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. Sis (oo
| ae ae
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address puis in See
SE eee al may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; Pees os ges ths
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra aa or ‘reprints ;
should invariably be attached to the first page of his enuser ee ae .
The rate of Subscription per volume is..... ™ a Scie a-e by 6k bee oie Pe $6.00*
Hemi-monthly number<.55 0.05. .c2s. cea oe eas a hoe ee “eoies ol oe ne
Monthly numbers s,s. o/.5's «6 vgs ues Gaudin swan eg pias Sahat ae Be ee
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences, ” and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C.
Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other publications. Pes
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, pee that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue. . ee
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 20 May 4, 1930 ° No. 9
{
CHEMISTRY.—On the equation for the reaction between invertase
and sucrose. JOSEPH BERKSON and FRANKLIN HOLLANDER,
Institute for Biological Research, Johns Hopkins University, and
the Biological Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, Long Island, New
York. (Communicated by RayMonp PEARL.)
The equational representation of the reaction between enzyme and
subtrate is still a problem requiring definitive solution. Among the
many forms of mathematical function that have been attempted, none
has as yet been applied to a sufficient variety of conditions to merit a
good claim to generality, and furthermore most have suffered from an
abundance of statistical constants that have rendered their value
dubious. Under the circumstances any indication that a satisfactory
function has been found seems exceedingly worth probing. Berkson
and Flexner (1) have proposed a form of equation which they tested
exhaustively for the particular case of gelatin and pancreatin with
high success, and presented a certain amount of evidence that the
general equation is applicable to other enzymes and subtrates as well.
In this paper we wish to investigate its applicability to a case for which
they did not present any results; the splitting of sucrose by invertase.
When the hydrolysis of sucrose is followed in time by the polariscopic
method, and the percent of sugar estimated from the angle of rotation
in the usual way, the function takes the following form
poe ee are (1)
1 + Ce
This may also be written
K \
ee ees a ar i Seer berg’ (la
} P
1 Received February 24, 1930.
157
158 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 9
in which
p’ is the percentage of sucrose remaining unhydrolized.
t is the time after the beginning of the reaction when p’ is
observed.
_ K — 100
100
kK is a constant representing the asymptotic limits of the
function.
r is a rate parameter which is characteristic of any particular
series of observations.
e is the Napierian base.
For the cases to be investigated K can be taken as twice the initial
value of p’, and we have resulting the simple form (2)
200
poe
We will not here enter into any discussion of the equation per se,
our immediate problem being only its validity as a quantitative de-
scription of the reactions to be studied, and since also this ground has
been covered elsewhere (1), (2). But it is appropriate to note that
there is only one parameter to be determined from the observations,
ie., the rate parameter 7, so that the number of “‘arbitrary” statistical |
constants is reduced to an absolute minimum.
For any test of the equation to be critical, it is essential that a broad
variety of experimental conditions be included, and that for each con-
dition a representative range of the variables be comprehended. Ex-
periments directed to this end seemed indicated, but in examining the
literature we found in the published data of Nelson and his associates
a series for yeast invertase that would serve the immediate purposes
in hand about as well as any which we could ourselves produce. Ac-
cordingly, it was decided to use these as the basis of our investigation
and our plan is to give, summarized, the results of a systematic appli-
cation of the equation to them.
The method of procedure in each instance which we will examine
will be uniform as follows. From the observations as recorded, log.
200 — p’
/
will be evaluated for each observed value of p’ and this
plotted vs. the corresponding value of t. A straight line fitted to these
points has for its slope r log. e and from this r is determined as ex-
MAY 4, 1930 INVERTASE-SUCROSE EQUATION 159
plained by Reed and Berkson (3). The parameter so evaluated will
be written into equation (2) and the theoretical value of p’ calculated
for each value of ¢ at which an observation was recorded. The good-
ness of fit will be expressed as the standard deviation, i.e., the root
mean square of the deviations of calculated from observed values, and
also as the coefficient of variation, i.e., the ratio of the s.d. to the
mean p’. |
I. A TYPICAL FIT FOR A USUAL REACTION
The fit to a usual case taken from Nelson and Hitchcock (4) is pre-
sented in detail in Table 1 and Figures 1 and 2.
200
450 Slope =f (00.2 =JI//O62 x /0OF
r=/23686 x/0~’
400
Lag 22
O50
200'—
50 100 1/50 200 250 JOC
L-Ptrhulés
200 — p’
Fig. 1. Log. —— vs. t, from Table 1
P
The equation for example I becomes (3)
200
p= ETRE ee ee ae ee (3)
1 +e
As can be seen from Table 1 and the corresponding graphs there is a
satisfactory agreement between the observed values of p’ and those
calculated from the equation. Similar calculations for other experi-
ments some of which are included in subsequent sections of this paper
all show a comparably satisfactory agreement.
160 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 9
II. VARIATION IN ENZYME CONCENTRATION
For a study of the influence of enzyme concentration on the applica-
bility of equation (2), it is obviously sufficient to compare but two
TABLE 1. A Usvat Yeast INVERTASE REACTION
NELSON AND HITCHCOCK (4), PAGE 2633. EXPERIMENTS B9 AND B10.
Sucrose concentration, 10 gm. per 100 c.c. Invertase 1, concentration 6.080 c.c.
per 100 c.c. Temperature 25°C.
a "means observed log. ee p’ p’ menegt >: from (8)
0 0.000 100.000 0.000 100.00
4) 3.056 96.944 0.027 96.91
10 6.291 93.709 0.055 93.82
15 9.347 90.653 0.081 90.75
22 13.709 86.291 0.120 86.48
30 18.516 81.484 0.163 81.66
60 35. 460 64.540 0.322 64.51
90 50.415 49.585 0.482 49.46
120 62.819 37.181 0.641 36.96
180 80.356 19.644 0.963 19.48
300 94.481 5.919 1.547 4.78
2-4 days 100.000 0.000 0.00
S. D! = 0.25%. C. of V. = 0.41%.
1/00
%
S
g
© Observed
— lolculated from Lg (PD
ent Sucrose Lert
s eg e@ a
~ DEC.
w&
Ss
/
Dp
S
!
! | !
oO £0 400 150 200 250 J00
C-PUPLUES
Fig. 2. Graphical presentation of fit for example I
typical experiments, provided these two cases differ sufficiently to in-
clude a wide range in concentration. In experiments B60, 61 and
may 4, 1930 INVERTASE-SUCROSE EQUATION 161
B62 of Nelson and Hitchcock (4), two series are available in which the
concentrations are 6 and 0.5 cc. per 100 cc. respectively. This is as
great a variation in this factor as can be found in the literature. That
equation (2) fits both of these is apparent from Table 2. The relation
between r and concentration will be discussed below.
III. VARIATION IN SUBTRATE CONCENTRATION
Inclusion of the initial sucrose concentration as a variable has been
a major difficulty in every effort to obtain a universal equation de-
TABLE 2. Extremes oF INVERTASE CONCENTRATION
NELSON AND HITCHCOCK (4), PAGE 2641. SUCROSE AND TEMPERATURE AS IN TABLE 1
Experiment number..... B60 and Bél B62
Concentration of inver-
CDSE ch eee ieekae eee ee 6 c.c. per 100 c.c. 0.5 c.c. per 100 c.c.
200 — p’
r, from log. aercT: vs. t 0.0456796 0.00371204
. , p' % : ’ p' %
pen seottel os wv 2 Eval, ebeeed Gee
0 100.00 100.00 0 100.00 | 100.00
5 88. 25 88.62 60 88.55 88.91
10 tients 77.54 120 77.69 78.09
15 66.82 67.01 180 67.60 67.78
Za 55.37 55.39 202 56.32 56.37
28 43.62 43.53 336 44.93 | 44.64
37 31.16 31.13 444 S240 32.27
: 52 16.74 17.00 624 18.46 17.96
70 7.89 7.84 840 9.20 8.47
1-7 days 0.00 0.00 | 11 days 0.00 0.00
So, Wb AS se 0.20% 0.37%
C5 Ol Soe ae ee ie 0.41% 0.75%
scribing the hydrolysis of sucrose by invertase. In order to test the
applicability of the logistic function in this respect a series of experi-
ments were chosen from the investigation of Nelson and Vosburgh (5)
in which the substrate concentration was varied from 0.4 g. to 20 g.
per 100 cc. of solution. The fits of equation (2) to these experiments
are given in Table 3.
The fits for these experiments of Nelson and Vosburgh are seen to be
162 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 9
ZTE '0 ZoL¥ 0 %8S'0 YES ‘0 Y86 "0 ZoTP ‘0 FIEAD ny) eee 7 =o Ny ee.
%Ee ‘0 MPE ‘0 %O0r 0 %9II ‘0 %61 ‘0 %8Z ‘0 %Ee 0 ali i ce A aaa Gt
O20 00: dace 30.0 SOt Orel re 00 |0'0 |
6°22 |P SZ \08Z 12°02 19’ TZ [09¢ |0'0 |0°0 | © \f'ZZ IF'ZZ [OFT |0'0 |I0'0 | & 00 00 | ~
6°92 |IT' LL 1099 |F' SZ |9°S2 |00E |€°ZL 16°22 |S9T |2'FL |E'FL [OST |1°89 |¢°89 | ss jo'o |0'O0 | © |F'OL 19°02 | OF
0'I8 |6°08 |OFS |Z'08 |F'08 [OFS |2°FL |E°SL IOST |1°9L |0'9L |OZT |2Z'TZ |G'TZ | Sz Ib'e€2 |8'eZ | OF 16'ez |e Fz | GE
I°S8 |1°S8 |0ZP |0'S8 |O'S8 JO8T |T°L2Z |G°LL IS&T [6°18 |Z°T8 j06 |I' 22 |6°92 | 09 19°82 16°82 | OF 2°18 |9°08 | Sz
C16 |F 16 |06Z |F 26 |F'26 106 |9'F8 |S'F8 106 16°06 |Z‘ 16 Sh |9'F8 |9'F8 | OF IT'68 [8°88 | 0% |9'°88 |T'68 | ST
0'O0T|O O0OTIO {0° OOT|O'OOTIO |0°OOT/O'OOTIO |0'OOTIO’OOTIO |0'OOT/O'OOT! O |0°OOTIO'OOT] O |0°00TIO'OOT| O
ral aed ip | Gal OB oe IES eR eel ae oe ee te PR Sees. tele San e ee e
Beca- Recele. | Seee]- sQoa ee | Bas [ese We El eee gehen Wise aly Ba eaiee ae AS Bae: als Sigal, aeael | 28.
Bee ee i Fag, eel 2 [ep ee de Aca i cme Wie ace Ae ee aaa a
Be | $ Se | & Se | 8 Se | 8 Sep sfeso Se | 8 es | ¢
a ae a 2 a4 eee Vile er b | 4
5 a ey a. So a iy a cy ro iy a o oo
i A A . ja ‘
850812000 0 €6S29100'0 S8ESFE00 0 6E£90F00 0 ZZ12LL00' 0 ZZ68010'0 9FGZSI0'0 |7 SA ane ‘BOl WOLy
/
are a ie — an Ben ae
OOT 10d ‘wi3 QZ | ONT 49d ‘wi OT | OOT s0d ‘wg | QoT 10d ‘wi F | QOT sod ‘wiS z | QOT sod ‘mS [ | QO, 10d ‘w3 FC **U01}81JU9NU0D os0IONG
—————— | || |] | | |)
GG 92 q1z 8% 266 q0€ qt¢ “***Joquinu yuoudedx |
1-961 SUDVd (G) HDUNASOA GNV NOSTUN
NOILVULNAONOD ASOUING NI NOILVIUVA “E ATAVL
MAY 4, 1930 INVERTASE-SUCROSE EQUATION 163
good and, considering the size of the standard deviation, comparable
with experiments utilizing 10% sucrose. However, while the range
in variation of substrate concentration is fairly wide, the individual
experiments are carried only to a point of about 30% hydrolysis. It.
is desirable to test the equation for comparable cases in which the
hydrolysis has continued more nearly to completion. For this pur-
pose three experiments in the series of Nelson and Vosburgh (5) in
which the observations were continued up to within 95% hydrolysis
are included here and given in Table 4.
TABLE 4. VARIATION IN SUCROSE CONCENTRATION
NELSON AND VOSBURGH (5), PAGE 794
Experiment number..... 3 8 13
Sucrose concentration...| 5 gm. per 100 c.c. | 10 gm. per 100 c.c.| 20 gm. per 100 c.c.
200 — p’
r,from log. — Eye dl = 2000162790 0.003611 000347690
p' % p’ % pn’ % p’ % : p' %
Prt: ja | ERIS ar pb. | caleu- | ¢ min, | 2’ % ob-| caleu-
Se served Res a ve served es i pared ae)
0 |100.00|100.00/ 0 /100.00/100.00 0 /100.00 |100.00
12 | 89.95} 90.26; 20 | 91.69) 91.71; 55 | 90.28 | 90.47
24 | 79.90) 80.71) 45 | 81.31} 81.51} 125 | 78.16 | 78.60
51 | 60.18} 60.72) 105 | 58.83) 58.92) 250 | 58.49 | 59.08
85 | 40.07} 40.08) 175 | 37.89) 37.84) 392 | 40.20 | 40.75
130 | 21.65) 21.50) 265 | 19.91) 19.89) 636 | 19.95 | 19.75
234 4.90} 4.34) 450 | 5.15) 4.63) 1850 | 3.927) 1.81
00 0.00} 0.00; © 0.00; 0.00) © - 0.00 | 0.00
SMM ee 0.42% 0.20% 0.36%
O, of ee eeaeaas 0.85% 0.41% 0.66%
@ Omitted in calculation of S. D.
IV. VARIATION IN TEMPERATURE
Nelson and Hitchcock (4) give data from the experiments of Vos-
burgh and Nelson in which the temparature was varied. The fits of
equation (2) to these are presented in Table 5.
Vv. A SPECIAL CASE OF “ABNORMAL” INVERTASE
Nelson and Hitchcock (4) give data for reactions with invertase
which they call ‘abnormal’ by virtue of a criterion employed by them.
The fit of equation (2) to one of these is given in Table 6.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 9
164
Ye 0 %8G'0 - Zot I %98 0 ZOMMED in = We a Te = Be
%1s'0 %Te'0 %T19'O WFO %ee'o gt PaO ote? S'S Sa
00°0 | 000 | =
LPPL | ST°ST | Ot
00°0 | 00°0 | ~© | S0°SZ | 28°Sz | 028 | 00°0 | 000 | &
6Z'OL | OT IT | O98 | %'se | 80°98 | Hc | 29S | GI FT| 989
96°SZ | 9L'FS | GES | G6 Lh | 09'S | OG6T | IS FZ | 86°F | TH
pO IP | 19°GF | GOT | ZI'9G | ce9G | GST | LOPE | 96°FE | Ose
886 | 08°09 | SOT | 60°S9 | OL'S9 | OZT | 9E°6h | ZS GF | O82
¥0'GL | 02°SL | €9 | 19°08 | 8T'08 | G9 | FE°S9 | 82°99 | COT
€9°G8 | OF'S8 | 9€ | 19°88 | ST'88 | 8 | 86°94 | T9°SL] OTT
98°46 | 09 F6| 8 | 8°96 | 20°96 | 6 | F686 | €8°E6 | ST | FI°S6 | 96°76 | OT | 0°98 | OF'S8) 9
00°O0T) 00°00T} 0 | 00°O0T| 00°00T) O | 00°00T| 00°00T| O | 00°0OT) 00°00T| O | 00°OOT) 00°00T| O
00°0 | 00:0 co | 00°0 | 00°0 on
ZO'ST |-Z0°ST | S6T 8S PL) ZO ST | OF
96°€% | 86°€2 | SST | 19 Fo | 6 Fc | OGT
GE-S8 126,95 |) (OGT el. Pé=|; 99 Pe |- Sot
08 27 | 68 27 | 06 |.€2 67 | 12 0S | ZOT
12°89 | 60 €9 | 09 | 48°79 | S679; TZ
oO'§Z | 17 €L| ch | cL tL) 82 2 )| OS
89°78 | 72 78 | FG | CL G8 | 86 F8 | 6z
a oa Beares : (ee BeAngs i oar ie ; i om PeAgge : oe ee PaAtss ;
-No[Bo 0 re uyar? | -noyeo 0 site mrt?) —noyeo a pe bees -noyBo 0 te Uren? | -noyeo 0 Oe. yee
Tit ia ae ig a Na Odes hale % a | it Of, ellen 4 eo
. a ¢
PLO8ZIO O T9EE0I0'O 61960800 0 ¢8€20900 0 L¥E9PFOO 0 7 “SA d— 00g "BO] WIOI; “A
“DoGE ‘DE "0096 ‘0.06 “‘DOoSGT rn! UCD CIOL CN §
ql reat ST Al "***-qequinu JusWITIedxy
‘0'O QOL Ud “0° T ‘NOILVULNAONOD ‘Q ASVLUTANT ‘0°0 OOT Ud “WO OT ‘NOIMLVULNAONOD ASOUDNS ‘"ZFOZ ADVd ‘(p) HOOOHOLIH GNV NOSTAN
AYUNALVYUdWNAT NI NOWWVINVA “SG H'TAVL
MAY 4, 1930 INVERTASE-SUCROSE EQUATION 165
The sample of invertase used in the above experiment was one which
Nelson and Hollander (7) found to undergo destruction during the
course of the reaction. It is to be noted that the standard deviation of
observed values of p’ from those calculated from (2) isin this instance
significantly greater than in the typical case as exemplified in Table 2.
Other experiments with this sample of invertase are shown in Table 8.
The survey presented above is taken to demonstrate that an equa-
tion of form (2) gives a good quantitative description of the course of
reaction between sucrose and yeast invertase. The deviations of the
TABLE 6. A Case or “‘ABNORMAL”’ INVERTASE
NELSON AND HITCHCOCK (4) PAGE 2643. EXPERIMENTS B12 — 15. SUCROSE AND
TEMPERATURE AS IN TABLE 1
200 — p’
_Invertase 3, conc. 1.905 c.c. per 100 c.c. 1, from log. eater vs. t = 0.0120745
,
t min. p’ % observed p’ % calculated from (2)
0 100.00 100.00
9) 96.80 96.98
10 93.65 93.77
15 90.56 90.97
22 86.395 86.79
30 81.54 82.08
60 65.04 65. 28
90 50.62 50.45
120 38.52 38.03
180 21.19 20.43
300 6.42 5.20
0.00 0.00
S.D. = 0.51%. C. of V. = 0.85%.
quantities observed from those estimated by it are small in all cases,
small enought to warrant the conclusion that basically the reaction
follows this equation. However, there is in the deviations a feature
calling for further comment. Whereas they are nowhere large, there
is in every case a notable progression in their character. This takes
such a form that if the equation be fitted to the early observations,
the later observations expressed as per cent substrate left tend to
overshoot the estimates made from the equation. The deviations at
first increase and then decline, the observed and calculated quantities
166 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 9
approaching each other as the reaction nears completion. In all the
reactions studied this characteristic can be discerned, but it is more
marked in some than in others. We conclude from these facts that the
equation (2) is not the completely correct one for all reactions between
invertase and sucrose, but that subsidiary small corrections varying in
amount with different conditions must be made to render it so. What
mathematical form will best represent these corrections we are not
ourselves decided. Thismuch however may be advanced. The devia-
/
tions in question are manifested in the graphs of log. ont vs.tas a
small but perceptible curvature concave towards the ¢ axis, i.e., the
slope of this function decreases as ¢ increases. ‘To show this we have
\
cay
Stope of log 2B ys ¢ estimated/0*
100 200 300 400 200 J00
C-/717nules 7-7minules
,
200 —
Fig. 3. Slope of log. P vs. tas estimated graphically, vs. t. Example I left,
example VI right.
estimated the slope for different values of t by a graphical method and
in Figure 3 the estimates so obtained are shown as smooth curves
against ¢t for the experiments of examplesI and VI. Nowif the logistic
function (2) held strictly, these slopes should be constant, and, if they
were subject only to random experimental variation, they should vary
normally about some mean value. The fact that they decrease pro-
gressively may be accounted for by a progressive decrease of r. What
the chemical mechanism of the reduction is, one can not say from an
examination of these experimental results alone. But whatever its
cause, quantitatively its effect is small as is shown by the fact that the
values of p’ approximate closely the values calculated from (2) which
assumes 7 constant.
MAY 4, 1930 INVERTASE-SUCROSE EQUATION 167
RELATIONSHIP OF THE RATE PARAMETER 7, AND OTHER VARIABLES
If equation (2) is really definitive of the reaction between yeast in-
vertase and sucrose the one parameter in it which, by hypothesis, can
change, should bear a regular relationship to conditions which affect the
reaction, i.e., r should be a function of the variables which measure
such conditions.
In the experiments available here it is possible to examine the rela-
tionship for concentration of enzyme, concentration of substrate, and
temperature. ‘These will be presented briefly seriatim in graphic form.
I. CONCENTRATION OF INVERTASE
In the series of data given by Nelson and Hitchcock (4) two are
available for testing the relationship of r to concentration of invertase.
SSbBGa
rx/0%-per mir.
“6 ~G FG aN ® Lo
4 J 4
lnvertase - C6 per l00CC.
Fig. 4. r vs. concentration of invertase, from Table 7
In Tables 7 and 8 the fits of equation (2) to these data are presented
in the same way as for the examples given above. In Figures 4 and
5 the r’s obtained from these fits are shown plotted vs. the concentra-
tion of invertase.
It is seen that a relationship of constant proportionality exists be-
tween r and concentration of invertase. This is in agreement with the
findings of Berkson and Flexner for other enzymes (6).
II. CONCENTRATION OF SUCROSE
In the experiments of Nelson and Vosburgh given in Table 4 above,
the conditions were identical except for concentration of sucrose.
Below in Figure 6 is shown graphically the variation of r with concen-
tration of sucrose.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 9
168
%FS'0
%9Z ‘0
eee eee SSSSeSSSeSESeSEeEeEeEeESESEeEeS
%E9'0
%I1E'0
00°0 | 00°0
Gre...) £0°S
GG'6I | IF 61
92 SE | OL'8E
16°09 | ST°09
LT'Z8 | 80°38
19 16 | 89°16
00 OOT| 00° O0T
ae pe : 108
pel bie % id
% ,a
CElOZI 0
oo
06E
G8T
OGT
OL
O&
VI
0
“UrUL 7
00°0
66 ¥
16 61
VI 68
66 9G
08 62
82°88
00°00
(Z) W101
poze]
-noyeo
% ih
00°0
96°F
OL 61
G0 66
62 °9¢
G8 62
G6 88
T} 00° 00T
J poAios
-qo
€L&
GZ
8éT
06
OF
GG
“UL 7
oo
OSP
G9Z
CLT
SOT
cP
02
“ULUL 7
099
9LE
0S
OST
OL
&&
0
“ULUT 7
0
“Uru 7
GCPZOTO 0
%I1PF'0
%0Z 0
00°0 | 00°0
29°F | SI'S
18°61 | 16°61
Z8'LE | 68° LE
06'8¢ | §8°8¢
0OS'I8 | Tg°18
04°16 | 69°16
00° O0T| 00°00T
(Z) ulOd
ee | aan
mia | %4
106TE800 0
%EG ‘0
%9Z "0
00°0 | 00'0
GO'r | 2L'F
81°61 | 1661
ZP'LE | 9G LE
8¢'8¢ | 0G '8¢
22°64 | 19°62
£806 | &F'06
00°00T| 00°00T
(z) ur0ay
Pere, | go.
% i | %
8£928S00 ‘0
%96 ‘0
%9F 0
00°0 | 00°0
8L°0 | $6'T
96°L1 | OF ST
0¢ 68 | 96°68
IS Sh | 06 °&F
68°29 | 16°L¢
96°62 | 98°62
88°68 | 66°68
00°00T| 00° 00T
urlod
“bam Pea
OS MN ak
6EE90F00 0
d
4
2° SA. —_—_—___—
A — 002
‘BO| UO] ‘4
‘0°09 OOT tod *0'0 9
‘0°0 OOT 10d ‘0°90 G
L
‘OO QOL Udd “UD OT ‘NOILVULNAONOO wASONOnS
‘0°D QOOT rod ‘0’ F
8
‘0°09 QOL tod ‘0°90 ¢
‘9°9 OOT riod a yi 3 se eee
ASVLUAANT dO SNOILVULNAONOD DNIAUVA “2 ATAVL
OI
Herter esses eqoTy
-BIJUIDUND YW ISByIOAUT
“****Joquinu yueuTIedxy
‘OF9Z ADVd ‘(F) MOOOHOLIH GNV NOS'IUN
MAY 4, 1930 INVERTASE-SUCROSE EQUATION 169
TABLE 8. VARYING CONCENTRATIONS OF INVERTASE
NELSON AND HITCHCOCK (4), PAGE 2650. SUCROSE CONCENTRATION, 10 GM. PER 100 c.c.
TEMPERATURE 37°
Experiment number... B58 and Bd9 B54 and Bd5 B56 and Bd7
Invertase 3, concen-
NEMUOTOW cic) cg Side si 0.5 c.c. per 100 c.c. 3c.c. per 100 c.c. | 6c¢.c. per 100 c.c.
0-—p’
r, from log. ; Z vs. t 0.00290853 0.0182852 0.0365855
D
¢ min. ie ig calcu ¢ min fe cale ¢ min. ene caleu
served pat served puate oy) served f aie
0 |100.00)100.00 0 |100.00)100.00; 0 |100.00)100.00
60 90.92) 91.30 | 10 | 90.56; 90.88) 6 | 88.72) 89.07
120 82.20} 82.72 | 20 | 81.66) 81.92) 12 | 77.98) 78.39
195 72.05) 72.38 | 30 | 73.12) 73.24) 18 | 67.95} 68.21
270 62.55) 62.64 | 45 | 61.13) 61.03} 26 | 55.73) 55.73
360 52.58} 51.96 | 70 | 44.09) 43.51) 35 | 43.62) 43.49
450 43.44) 42.54 | 100 | 28.31] 27.68) 48 | 29.67) 29.46
540 35.67| 34.43 | 120 | 20.77; 20.05} 65 | 17.03) 16.97
1101 10.92) 7.824) 150 | 12.88) 12.10} 85 | 8.72) 8.54
7-12 days | 0.00) 0.00 co | 0.00) 0.00) 2 | 0.00; 0.00
&, De eee 0.60% 0.45% 0.21%
%. of a rere 1.00% 0.88% 0.44%
* Omitted in lions S.D.
¥0
5
+ x /0°- per rte.
8
S
2 3 ¥ 5
fnvertase -C.C. per /O0CE.
Fig. 5. r vs. concentration of invertase, from Table 8
170 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 9
III. TEMPERATURE
In the experiments of Nelson and Hitchcock presented in Table 5
above, temperature alone was varied. Below in Figure 7 is shown the
variation or r with temperature as indicated by these experiments.
5
r x/0%-per rin.
(7) ST 4/0 IS 2o
Sucrose-git. per 100 Ec.
Fig. 6. r vs. concentration of sucrose, from example III
S
+ x/0%-per 71n
~N BEY D®N ®% & BS
Ss
x i JO 15 20 25 GO IST
Temperature ~Deg. C.
Fig. 7. r vs. temperature, from example IV
SUMMARY
1. The course of the reaction between sucrose and yeast invertase
can be quantitatively described under representative conditions of
MAY 4, 1930 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS Wa!
temperature, concentration of enzyme, and concentration of substrate
200
1 + ert |
maining unhydrolized, ¢t is the time after the beginning of the reaction
when p’ is observed, r is arate parameter which is characteristic of any
particular series of observations, and e is the Napierian base.
2. The relation between the rate parameter r of the above equation
and concentration of invertase is linear; the correlation line passes
through the zero origin, resulting in a constancy of the ratio of con-
centration to r.
3. The parameter r changes regularly with concentration of sucrose;
the correlation is a non-linear.
4. The parameter r changes regularly with temperature; the correla-
tion is non-linear.
by the function p’ = » where p’ is the percentage of sucrose re-
REFERENCES
1. Berxson, J. and Fuexner, L. B. On the rate of reaction between enzyme and sub-
strate. Jour. Gen. Phys., 11: 433-457. 1928.
2. Resp, L. J. and Berkson, J. The application of the logistic function to experimental
data. Jour. Phys. Chem., 33: 760-779. 1929.
3. Reep, L. J.and Berkson, J. Idem, 767.
4. Newtson, J. M. and Hircucocr, D. I. Uniformity in invertase action. Jour. Amer.
Chem. Soc. 48: 2632-55. 1921.
5. Newson, J. M. and VospuraH, W.C. Kinetics of invertase action. Jour. Amer. Chem.
Soc. 39: 790-811. 1917.
6. Berkson, J. and Fiexner, L.B. Idem, Appendix.
7. Neuson, J. M. and Houuanpmr, F. Uniformity in invertase action. Jour. Biol.
Chem. 58: 291-304. 1923.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
Dr. Letanp Ossian Howarp, on the nomination of the Entomological
Society of Washington, has been elected an Honorary Member of the Wasu-
INGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. This action was taken in recognition of his
distinguished contributions to entomology, his intimate connection with
scientists and scientific work in Washington, and especially for his services
to the AcADEMY as member and officer since its foundation.
The First International Congress on Mental Hygiene will convene in
Washington on May 5. Sessions will continue until noon, May 10. Sessions
of general interest will be held in the evenings at Constitution Hall, Eighteenth
and D streets, NW. The President of the Congress is Dr. Wiuutam A.
Wuirte, Superintendent of St. Elizabeths Hospital; the Secretary-General is
CuirrorD W. Beers, founder of the mental-hygiene movement; Dr. FRANK-
woop #. WiuuraMs is Chairman of the Committee on Program; THoMAs W.
Lamont is Treasurer.
At the same time and place as the International Congress will be held the
annual meetings of the American Psychiatric Association and the American
Association for the Study of the Feebleminded.
172 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 9
Prof. W. G. Woo.tnoueH, Geological Adviser to the Commonwealth
Government of Australia, is spending several months in the United States
for the purpose of observing American methods and practices in the pe-
troleum industry and in the administration and technique of official surveys.
An impromptu gathering of geologists at the Geological Survey on April 18
was addressed by Dr. G. 8. HuME, geologist in charge of oil and gas investi-
gations of the Geological Survey of Canada, on The geological structure of
Turner Valley, Alberta; by E. E. L. Drxon, Esq., of the Geological Survey of
Great Britain, on Dolomitization and the development of chert; and by Prof.
W. G. WootnovuaH, Geological Adviser to the Commonwealth Government
of Australia, on Major structural features of Australia.
Obituary
Commander AsapH HALL, Corps of Professors of Mathematics, U.S. Navy,
died, after a brief illness, on January 12, 1930. He was a resident of Upper
Darby, Pennsylvania, at the time of his death and was engaged in post-
retirement astronomical work at the Flower Observatory. Professor Hall
was born in Cambridge, Massachusetts, on October 6, 1859; received his A.B.
at Harvard in 1882, and his Ph.D. at Yale in 1889. Brought up amidst
astronomical surroundings, he began his astronomical career as an assist-
ant at the United States Naval Observatory, whence, after three years,
he proceeded to the Yale Observatory as an assistant, and thence to the
University of Michigan Observatory as Director. In 1908, he was com-
missioned in the Corps of Professors of Mathematics of the United States
Navy and was assigned to the Naval Observatory for duty. There he took -
charge of the great telescope of that institution, the same instrument with
which his distinguished father of the same name discovered the satellites of
Mars. After his formal retirement as an officer on the active list of the Navy
in 1923, he was continued on active duty at the Naval Observatory until
June 30, 1929. Professor Hall was widely known for his work in connection
with the satellites of the planets. His latest published work appears in
Volume XII, Part I, Publications of the U. 8. Naval Observatory, which
contains the results of his observations on the great equatorial from 1908 to
1926.
Bas See: ota Cy See a OR ae
P % * yal < 5S ae a
; nats ; .
Se Bes,
+ y ™
o
«3
ae eee
f 2) Gh. ae ce:
: — e
; oe. =.
5 ty
pout ESO & ie are
tai ee : i Re
wr ir wee & nie ry
+8 i oes 7 Ne
«6 =) -
gee oe Grn a
or ei ee
Les wo ak
pe Sate J
. fs
hy a
ce
aa
¥
>
ie ae OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS
THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND
_ AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
ANNOUNCEMENTS or Mrntines
. Tuesday, Met G> “The Botanical ae 3
_ Wednesday, May 7 The Medical Society
aes _ Thursday, May8 The Chemical Society
ee Saturday, May 10— The Philosophical Society
- Tuesday, May 13 ~—‘ The Electrical Engineers —
Wednesday, May 4 The Geological Society
a The Medical Society
. Saturday, am 17. __—‘ The Biological Society
. i _ The gee eee Society
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
Pp Piswdend: Wa Bowre, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. Tuckerman, Bureau of Standards.
cre Recording Secretary: CHARLES THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils.
OE easurer: HENRY c: Avens, Co and ae: Survey.
-
a »
j me
farts x
a
TSN abe NS (
iy i ragga ; iS Ae ae e. m
Rm dit } yt .
1 PANN wn
ee Vee i= fr
fits : ee
» ‘4 . . P aN
ry ASA, map,
De Bae
ster! peo $
oh { siake Su Scere
a A ae rm a
=k My wien a coe
ine ah
as \ ah,
ct *y a
a. 4 bu .
oh * a W's
oe <_ .
ae ay * .
+
ss a Fie i
Ag rs
ra
,
oe a ie hig isy A
en a ee = SA EAI ys
- a a af i a |
er eas 2 Soeaee Sate
a h —S » 5 ?
7 *® wh Son
7 ee a “ r
« 3 ou = S 4
i vies “et
y 2 :
e a*
» * —-
ioe ey Pe
. te
‘ z
a
~
ri
7
3 : .
a9 . . wT. Ss ~—
Jos ae
< - = et a at 5 rp
. c
- > -
Rests Ae gee,
. Chemistry—On the equation for the, Fone tins eae invertase” and §
2 Josnra Brrxson and FRANKLIN HOULANDER.....2.eeeeces este y s
wt _ ScIENTIFIC Notes AND pale
7 ‘ OBITUARY: ASAPH RAIS ade th ass Sos Sage
Ss re ”
i 3
This Yount. fs indered in th Infarntional index fo Periodicals tobe found in
Bon 20 oe May 19, 1930 No. 10
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
=. . OF SCIENCES
>
BOARD OF EDITORS
___ _Ep@ar W. Woorarp : Epq@ar T. WHERRY C. Wrtus Cooxs
GEORGE WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY . BUREAU OF CHEMISTRY AND SOILS U. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
Ley ASSOCIATE EDITORS
H. BE. Merwin 4 Haroup Morrison
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY __ . ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. Gotpman G. W. Stosz
_ BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
Aanes CuasrE J. R. Swanton
BOTANICAL SOCIETY : ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
Roaer C. WELLS
i CHEMICAL SOCIETY ‘
Te is . PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
_ BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Roya anp GuinrorD AvEs. _
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
“Entered as i Sedo’ Class Matter, Ina 11, 1923, at the post-office, at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for ‘mailing at a special rate o Saher provided for
in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences Ss | *
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: _
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) pro-
ceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes
of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued F
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer 3
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt .
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the JourNnatL for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. |
Manuscripis may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References =~»
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate ;
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered -
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. ae
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced
by zine etchings being preferable. : a
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors —
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors —
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. ae
Authors’ Reprinis.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers
bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and
date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accord-
ance with the following schedule of prices:
Copies 4 DDe 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
50 ae nA jie) can $2.00 ae or
100 $ .95 $1.90 $2.38 $3.00 2.50 ces
150 1.50 2.87 - 3.50 4.33 3.00
200 1.88 3.60 4.31 5.25 3.50
250 2.40 4.24 5.00 6.00 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed eee:
sy corner may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional 100,
As an author wilh not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints”
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. — ‘ ae a
The rate of Subscription per volume is.....++.+ SS Perri re be
Semirmonthly numbers’). ..c sata vo Vee e ae ee ce oly celts aS Sa Sewanee ods car gen ht ome
menthiy numbers. s: Ge ss den dae ce cnet eso ap eee eee reese et a% ans sip (ean: annie
i ee:
Remitiances should be made payable to ‘Washington Academy of Sciences,” and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington,D.C.
Ezchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other publications. = =
_ Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made ~
within thirty days after date of the following issue. my
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy
JOURNAL
OF THE
W ASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 20 May 19, 1930 No. 10
BOTANY .—dHaitian mosses collected by EH. C. Leonard! R. 8S. Wit-
tiams, New York Botanical Garden. (Communicated by WIL- °
LiAM R. Maxon.
The following list enumerates some 75 species of mosses obtained
in the Republic of Haiti by E. C. Leonard in November and December
1925 and January and February 1926, at elevations ranging from near
sea-level to about 1,200 meters, also two species collected in the
Dominican Republic by W. L. Abbott in 1922. About half the speci-
mens were in fruit. A portion were determined by Mrs. E. G. Britton.
FIsSIDENS ACICULARIS C. M. Near Marmelade, 800 m., on limestone
(8085). Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye, 350 m., on soil (7586). This species
has previously been attributed only to Brazil. The specimens are all sterile
but seem to belong here.
FISsSIDENS GARBERI L. & J. Near Dondon, about 400 m., on roots (8690a).
FISSIDENS KEGELIANUS C. M. Near Port au Prince, about sea-level, on
damp soil (10112). This with two exceptions is the only moss collected
near sea-level.
FIssIDENS MOLLIS Mitt, Near Caye-la-Croix, about 700 m., on damp soil
(7934); det. E.G. B. Near Marmelade, about 800 m. (8190).
DICRANELLA HERMINIERI Besch. Near Plaisance, about 400 m., on clay
bank (9367); det E. G. B.
CAMPYLOPUS ANGUSTIRETIS (Aust.) L. & J. Near Marmelade, about 800
m., on rotten stump (8234). This species previously credited only to Florida
and fruiting specimens still unknown.
LEUCOBRYUM ANTILLARUM Schp. Near Marmelade, about 800 m., on
rotten log (8290) and in thicket (8218). Near Plaisance, about 400 m., on
soil(G3so1); det. hi, GiB.
OcTOBLEPHARUM ALBIDUM (L.) Hedw. On rotten log, near St. Michel de
l Atalaye, 350 m. (7486). On tree, near Caye-la-Croix, about 700m. (7885).
On rotten log near Marmelade, about 800 m. (8283).
1 Received March 17, 1930.
173
174 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 10
WEISIA VIRIDULA AMBLYODON (Brid.) Bry. Eur. On damp soil near Plai-
sance, about 400 m. (9704). Appears to be this variety or very near it.
TRICHOSTOMUM JAMAICENSE (Mitt.) Jaeg. On damp walls near Dondon,
about 400 m. (8613 and 8629a). Near Ennery, 825-900 m., on earth and
damp rock (9028 and 9099); det E. G. B.
HyYoPHILA TORTULA (Schwaegr.) Hpe. On limestone soil and rock near
St. Michel de l’Atalaye, about 350 m. (7045 and 8466).
BARBULA AGRARIA (Sw.) Brid. Onlimestone, near St. Michel de ]’Atalaye,
350 m. (7120, 7234, 7783); det. E. G. B. Near Dondon, 400 m. (8716b).
Near Ennery, 325-900 m. (8945, also 9052); det. E.G. B. All on limestone.
BARBULA CRUGERI Sond. On damp lime-soil, near St. Michel de l’Atalaye,
about 350 m. (7042a).
_ BARBULA SUBULIFOLIA Sull. Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye, on wet rocks,
about 350 m. (7805).
TORTELLA CAESPITOSA (Schwaegr.) Limpr. On base of tree near Marme-
lade, about 800 m. (8337). Near Ennery on stumps, 325-900 m. (9451a).
FUNARIA CALVESCENS Schwaegr. Near Ennery on damp soil, 325-900 m.
(9469). On burnt stump, same locality, (9451) and near St. Michel de I’
Atalaye about 350 m., on damp wall of limestone (7138).
SPLACHNOBRYUM OBTUSUM (Brid.) C. M. Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye
on lime-soil, 350 m. (7044).
BryYUM ANDICOLA Hook. Near Ennery on damp soil, 350-900 m. (9017).
BRYUM CORONATUM Schwaegr. Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye, about 350
m., on rotten wood (8023 and 7508). Near Caye-la-Croix, about 700 m.,
erevice in coral rock (7966); det. E. G. B.
Bryum leonardi Williams, sp. nov.
Fig. A, 1-6.
Evidently dioicous: growing in dark green, rather loose tufts with weak
stems 10-12 mm. long, radiculose below and often bearing very short branches;
leaves distant, often decurrent, not imbricate, more or less plicate and much
contorted when dry, when moist widely spreading, often slightly recurved,
the upper stem-leaves about 1.75 mm. long, broadly obovate, bordered all
around and serrulate about one-third the way down; costa in upper leaves
mostly slightly excurrent into a short apiculus; lowest stem-leaves mostly
very small, obtuse, entire, with costa vanishing well below apex; median
leaf-cells more or less hexagonal, from scarcely elongate to about twice longer
than wide, up to 12-16u wide by 25-30u long, with thin walls, the basal cells
becoming rectangular and much longer than those above; leaf-borders slightly
browner than within, of mostly about 3 rows of very narrow, elongate cells
with walls somewhat thickened; archegonial flowers with outer leaves much
like those of upper stem but with longer, narrower base and more numerous
rectangular cells, the inner leaves very small, rather lanceolate, more or less
serrulate and costate; archegonia 8-10, with 12-15 filiform paraphyses;
fruit unknown.
Hartt: Vicinity of Dondon, at about 400 meters, on damp wall, E. C.
Leonard, Jan. 7, 1926 (8629b).
MAY 19, 1930 WILLIAMS: HAITIAN MOSSES
Ses
ia ay
a acs
AL
‘onan!
i ie
= €
S
Figure A.—1-6, Bryum leonardi Williams, sp. nov.
1, Moistened plant, about natural
size.
2, Outer and inner perichaetial leaves, etc., about X 30. 38, Median leaf-cells,
xX 180. 4, Upper stem-leaf, about X 30. 5, Border one-half way down leaf, X 180. 6,
Apex of stem-leaf, X 180. 7-10, Renauldia subpilifera Williams, sp. nov.
about natural size.
10, Alar cells, X 180.
7, Plant,
8, Median leaf-cells, X 280. 9, Upper stem-leaf, about X 180.
176 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 10
This species seems to be nearest the Brazilian B. ocdiloma, but the border
is narrower, the leaves are rather larger and more strongly serrulate, and the
inner perichaetial leaves are lanceolate-acute.
RHODOBRYUM SWARTZIANUM (C. M.) Par. Near Ennery, on damp soil,
325-900 m. (9122 and 9131); det. E. G. B.
PHILONOTIS GRACILLIMA Angstr. Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye, on damp
soil and limestone, about 350 m. (7018).
PHILONOTIS SPHAERICARPA (Sw.) Brid. Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye, on
lime-soil, 350 m. (7043 and 7551). Near Plaisance, about 400 m. (9396);
det. E. G. B.
PHILONOTIS TENELLA (C. M.) Besch. Near Caye-la-Croix, on clay-bank,
700 m. (7884). Near Plaisance, on damp soil, 400 m. (9398a).
ERPODIUM DOMINGENSE (Brid.) C. M. Near Gros Morne, about 235 m.,
on soil and roots of trees (9871, 9883, and 9891).
MACROMITRIUM HUSNOTI Schp. Near Marmelade, on tree, about 800
m. (8372).
MAcROMITRIUM MUCRONIFOLIUM (Hook. & Grev.) Schwaegr. Near En-
nery, 325-900 m., on damp wood (9133); det. E. G. B.
MAcCROMITRIUM SCHWANECKEANUM Hpe. Near Laguna, Dominican Re-
- public, 100 to 500 m., chiefly on Pilén de Azticar (A bbott 23314).
MAcROMITRIUM TUMIDULUM Mitt. Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye, on rotten
log, about 350 m. (7507).
RHACOPILUM TOMENTOSUM (Sw.) Brid. Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye, on
limestone, 350 m. (7487). Near Dondon, on tree and soil, 400 m. (8543 and
8609a). Near Plaisance, on rotten log, 400 m. (9216c). Near Caye-la-Croix,
on rock, about 700 m. (7999); det. E. G. B.
ACROCRYPHAEA COFFEAE (C. M.) Par. Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye, 350
m., on tree (7244a).
PSEUDOCRYPHAEA FLAGELLIFERA (Brid.) E. G. Britton. Near Caye-la-
Croix, about 700 m., on tree (7899a).
Renauldia subpilifera Williams, sp. nov.
Fig. A, 7-10.
Inflorescence unknown: Plants with wiry, trailing stems bearing a few more
or less erect, flexuous, distant, scarcely branching secondary stems, 4-5 em.
long with few or no branches and scattered, often scarcely evident tufts of
radicles; leaves from a heart-shaped base, ratner short-ovate, the blade about
1.5 mm. long and 1 mm. wide, entire or mostly so, concave, ecostate, the
margins above incurved, rather gradually narrowed into a hair-like apiculus
up to about one-fifth of length of entire leaf; cells of leaf very uniform to near
base, the median about 30u long and 4—5u wide, with unequally thickened and
slightly pitted walls, the alar cells forming a very distinct, convex, brownish
cluster.
Dominican RepPuBLic: Polo, Prov. de Barahona, 600-1200 meters, Feb.
26-—March 12, 1922 (Abbott 1879c).
MAY 19, 1930 WILLIAMS: HAITIAN MOSSES 177
Nearest R. cochlearifolia of Mexico, but much less branched, the leaves
with much longer points, the alar cells forming a more distinct cluster and
cells above with much more irregularly thickened walls.
PIREELLA CYMBIFOLIA (Sull.) Card. Near Caye-la-Croix, on shaded rock,
about 700 m. (7991). Near Marmelade, in thicket, about 800 m. (8271).
PTEROBRYUM ANGUSTIFOLIUM (C. M.) Mitt. Near Dondon, on shrub,
about 400 m. (8744).
PAPILLARIA NIGRESCENS (Sw.) Jaeg. The most abundantly collected of
any of the species, growing on both trees and rocks, being represented by 14
packets: Dondon (8544, 8670, 8689); Caye-la-Croix (7871la, 7894); Ennery
(9155); Marmelade (8126a, 8268); Pilate (9603); Plaisance (9212, 9230,
9252a, 9257); St. Michel del’ Atalaye (8463). The elevations run from 325 m.
at Pilate to 800 m. at Marmelade.
METEORIOPSIS PATULA (Sw.) Broth. Near Marmelade, on shrubs, 800 m.
(8383). Near Ennery, 325-900 m. (8994, 9112a); det. E. G. B.
PHYLLOGONIUM FULGENS (Sw.) Brid. Near Ennery, on rock, 325-900 m.
(9140); det. E. G. B.
CALYPTOTHECIUM MORITzII (Hpe.) Broth. Near Marmelade, on rock,
800 m. (8280). Not before credited to the West Indies.
NECKEROPSIS UNDULATA (Palis.) Hedw. Near Caye-la-Croix, on tree,
about 700 m. (7899). Near Plaisance, on tree, about 400 m. (9256).
PINNATELLA MINUTA (Mitt.) Broth. Near Dondon, on rock, about 400
me (8702).
CYCLODICTYON ALBICANS (Sw.) Broth. Near Caye-la-Croix, about 700 m.,.
on rock (7880 and 7881).
CALLICOSTELLA COLOMBICA Williams, Bryologist 28: 61. 1925. Near
Ennery, on limestone, 325-900 m. (9024). Specimen sterile but appar-
ently this.
CALLICOSTELLA DEPRESSA (Sw.) Jaeg. Near Plaisance, on rock, 400 m.
(9187); det. E. G. B.
CALLICOSTELLA SUBFISSIDENTOIDES Broth. Near Port au Prince, on damp
soil, near sea level (10099).
LEPIDOPILUM AMPLIRETE (Sull.) Mitt. Near Marmalade, about 800 m.,
on rock (8385).
CROSSOMITRIUM SINTENISII C. M. Near Ennery, 325-900 m. (9141);
det. E.G. B.
HELICODONTIUM CAPILLARE (Sw.) Jaeg. Near Ennery, 325-900 m., on
tree (9548a). Near Plaisance, about 400 m., on tree (9209); det. E. G. B.
HELICODONTIUM TENUIROSTRE Schwaegr. Near Dondon, on rotten wood,
about 400 m. (8725).
HAPLODONTIUM MICROPHYLLUM (Sw.) Broth. Near Pilate, on rock, about
325 m. (9632).
THUIDIUM ACUMINATUM Mitt. Near Ennery, on damp bank and stump,
325-900 m. (9132 and 9149); det. E. G. B.
THUIDIUM INVOLVENS (Hedw.) Mitt. Near Marmelade, on rock, about
800 m. (8171). Near Dondon, on rock, about 400 m. (8724).
THUIDIUM URCEOLATUM Lorentz. Near Marmelade, on rock and rotten
log, about 800 m. (8274 and 8282).
BRACHYTHECIUM STEREOPOMA (Spruce) Jaeg. Near Dondon, about 400
m., on damp wall (8628). Near Pilate, 325 m., on damp soil (9639).
178 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 10
RHYNCHOSTEGIUM SERRULATUM (Hedw.) Jaeg. Near Ennery, 350-900 m.,
on rotten log (9001b). Near Dondon, about 400 m. (8609). Near Plaisance,
about 400 m. (9253). Near Marmelade, about 800 m. (8091). The last
specimen is perhaps a variety of R. serrulatum, having broader, shorter-
pointed, and more strongly serrulate leaves, with the outer leaves of the flower-
buds broadly rounded or very obtuse. It may prove a distinct species.
OXYRRHYNCHIUM CLINOCARPUM (Tayl.) Broth. Near Ennery, on damp
banks, 325-900 m. (9535a). The first record for the West Indies.
ERYTHRODONTIUM CYLINDRICAULE (C. M.) C. M. Near Caye-la-Croix,
on mango tree, about 700 m. (7894a). Near Ennery 325-900 m. (9523).
ENTODON BEYRICHII (Schwaegr.) C. M. Near Caye-la-Croix, on rock,
about 700 m. (7999a); det. E. G. B. Near Ennery, on rock, 325-900 m.
(9048) ; det. E. G. B.
ENTODON MACROPODUS (Hedw.) Mitt. Another abundantly collected
moss of this list, growing on rocks and wood: Near Dondon (8669); Ennery
(8996); Marmelade (8126, 8174 and 8195); Pilate (9609); Plaisance (9246);
St. Michel de l’Atalaye (8467). The elevations range from 325 to 800 meters.
STEREOPHYLLUM CULTELLIFORME (Sull.) Mitt. Near Plaisance, 400 m.,
on rock (9374); det. E. G. B.
STEREOPHYLLUM LEUCOSTEGUM (Brid.) Mitt. Near St. Michel de I’
Atalaye, on trees and rotten wood, about 350 m. (7240, 7259, 7488, 7748,
7749, 7749a, 8023b, 8488 and 8493).
STEREOPHYLLUM RADICULOSUM (Hook.) Mitt. Near Dondon, on tree
(8546). Near Plaisance, on tree (9256a). Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye, on
rotten wood (7485 and 8023a).
Pilosium serrulatum Williams, sp. nov.
Fig. B
Autoicous, the male flowers with about 4 large antheridia (some 0.35 mm.
long) and a few filiform paraphyses, enclosed by rather broadly lanceolate
leaves minutely serrulate at apex: plants growing in loose, glossy green mats,
the stems (up to 4 em. high) with few radicles, bearing short, irregularly
placed, complanate branches; stem-leaves complanate, ecostate, the lateral
spreading-incurved, about 1. 5 mm. long and 0.65 mm. wide, not quite sym-
metric, rather ovate, the apex broadly acute and minutely serrulate:; leaves
on upper side of stem for the most part slightly smaller and symmetric: leaf-
cells elongate to near base, the median very narrow, about 4u wide by 100u
long or more, the basal cells in lateral leaves broad, 20- —25u wide, more or less
rectangular and usually much more numerous on one side of the base than on
the other, in the leaves on upper side of stem these basal cells often scarcely
present; archegonial flowers with outer leaves short, the rather broadly
lanceolate and serrulate apex slightly spreading, the inner leaves twice longer
or more, with narrowly lanceolate, serrulate apex mostly somewhat recurved,
enclosing 8-10 archegonia with rather few, filiform paraphyses; fruit
not known.
Haiti: Vicinity of St. Michel de l’Atalaye, at about 350 meters, on dead
wood, Nov. 20, 1925 (Leonard 7248).
This species differs from other members of the genus in having the apex
of most of the leaves, both of stems and flowers, minutely but sharply serru-
late; the perichaetial leaves also are unusually slenderly pointed and the
median leaf-cells very narrow.
MAY 19, 1930 WILLIAMS: HAITIAN MOSSES 179
Figure B.—Pilosium serrulatum Williams, sp. nov. 1, Plant, about natural size. 2,
Stem-leaf, about X 30. 3, Inner perigonial leaf, etc., about X 30. 4, Inner perichaetial
leaf, etc., about X 30. 5, Median leaf-cells, X 280. 6, Apex of stem-leaf, X 180. 7,
Partial cross-section of stem, X 180. 8, Basal cells about one-half way across leaf, X 180.
180 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 10
SEMATOPHYLLUM ADMISTUM Sull. Near Ennery, 325-900 m., on rotten log
(9001) and on tree (9510). Near Marmelade, about 800 m., on shrub (8299).
Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye, on palm stumps (8460).
SEMATOPHYLLUM GALIPENSE (C. M.) Mitt. Near Dondon, on rotten wood,
about 400 m. (8686b). Near Marmelade, on rock, about 800 m. (8250).
Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye, about 350 m. (7624a and 7779); det. E. G. B.
Near Plaisance about 400 m. (9381); det. E. G. B.
SEMATOPHYLLUM LOXENSE (Hook.) Mitt. Near Pilate, on trees, about
325 m. (9587 and 9594c). Near Caye-la-Croix, about 700 m. (7974); det.
E.G.B. Near Plaisance, 400 m. (9210 and 9211), on trees and on rock (9341).
SEMATOPHYLLUM SUBPINNATUM (Brid.) E. G. Britton. Near Marmelade
on shrub, about 800 m. (8185). Near Plaisance, on rotten log, about
400 m. (9304).
TAXITHELIUM PLANUM (Brid.) Mitt. Near Dondon, on wood, about 400 m.
(8690 and 8692). Near Marmelade, on shrub, about 800 m. (8164). Near
Plaisance, about 400 m. (9224 and 9216); det. E. G. B.
ISOPTERGIUM MICANS (Sw.) R. & C. Near Plaisance, about 400 m., on
rotton log (9325), and on bamboo (9413).
IsSOPTERYGYIUM TENERUM (Sw.) Mitt. Near Dondon, on wood, about
400 m. (8578, 8685, 8697). Near Marmelade, on tree, about 800 m. (8097).
Near Pilate, on tree, about 325 m. (9594). Near Plaisance, on rotten log,
about 400 m. (9216a and 9333).
TAXIPHYLLUM PLANISSIMUM (Mitt.) Broth. Near Marmelade, on base of
small tree, about 800 m. (8139).
VESICULARIA CRASSICAULIS (Mitt.) Broth. Near Caye-la-Croix, about 700
m., on damp soil (7930); det. E. G. B.
VESICULARIA VESICULARIS (Schwaegr.) Broth. Near Marmelade, on earth,
about 800 m. (8150). Near Port au Prince, on rock, near sea-level (10107
and 10110). Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye, about 350 m. (7279). Near
Plaisance, about 400 m. (9397); det. E. G. B.
MICROTHAMNIUM DIMINUTIVUM (Hpe.) Jaeg. Near Dondon, on rotten
log, 8691 and 8695). Near Ennery, on rotten log, 325-900 m. (9005). Near
Marmelade, on rotten log, 800 m. (8265). Near St. Michel de l’Atalaye,
about 350 m., on rotten wood (7248a and 7778); det. E. G. B. 7
MIcCROTHAMNIUM REPTANS (Sw.) Mitt. Near Dondon, on damp walls,
about 400 m. (8627). Apparently not before collected in Haiti.
MIcROTHAMNIUM THELISTEGUM (C. M.) Mitt. Near Marmelade, about
800 m. (8269a).
POGONATUM TORTILE (Sw.) Brid. Near Plaisance, on clay bank, about
400 m. (9366); det. E. G. B.
PALEONTOLOGY.—Hoploparia westoni Woodward.1 Mary J.
RatuBwun, U.S. National Museum.
A second specimen of this species, found at the Geological Museum,
University of Alberta, by Prof. P. S. Warren, has been referred to the
author for description. It was collected by Dr. J. O. G. Anderson in
Alberta from the Bearpaw shale, 236 feet above the base, L. S. 4,
Section 32, Range 22, Township 6, west of the 4th meridian, Cata-
logue No. 409.
1 Received March 21, 1930.
MAY 19, 1930 RATHBUN: HOPLOPARIA WESTONI 181
Hoploparia westoni Woodward
GS: Neneh
Hoploparia westoni Woodward, Geol. Mag. [ser. 4] 7: 433, pl. 17, fig. 1 a, b,
c. 1900; type-locality, Red Deer River, Alberta, Range 15, Township 23,
west of the 4th principal meridian; Upper Cretaceous.
MEASUREMENTS.—Lateral length of carapace (incomplete) 40.2 mm.,
dorsal length of abdomen 86 mm.
Fig. 1. Hoploparia westoni. Left profile.
Fig. 2. Hoploparia westoni. Dorsal view of posterior end.
182 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 10
A large part of the carapace and abdomen is preserved. The carapace is
rough with abundant, conical, acute or subacute spines (mostly broken off)
of different sizes, well separated and arranged with only a partial bilateral
symmetry. Interspaces smooth or nearly so. The cervical suture is oblique
Fig. 3. Hoploparia westoni. Dorsal view of carapace,
and arcuate forward in profile (Fig. 1); in front of it, the carapace lacks the
rostrum and hinder median part. Hither side of the median line (Fig. 3) there
are two longitudinal rows of spines; outside the anterior part of the second
row there are two short oblique rows of 3 each, converging toward it. A
MAY 19, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 183
slightly elevated ridge seems to terminate in a suborbital spine (Fig. 3 0),
while a much stronger, longer and rougher ridge leads to the antennal spine
(Fig. 3a). The cervical suture at its lowest extremity bends forward in a
curve subparallel to the lower margin of the carapace; from this curve a deep,
irregular nearly transverse groove runs upward to within a short distance of
the median line; it has a shallow branch above, and below a deeper one enclos-
ing a triangular, unispinose area (Fig.1). Behind the cervical suture a broad,
shallow, longitudinal furrow with 2 or more distant spines appears to be
median; it is bordered by a blunt multispinose ridge which is continued a
ways along the posterior margin of the cervical suture. Otherwise the spines
of the surface are irregularly scattered. The hinder end of the carapace
is missing.
The surface of the first five segments of the abdomen is for the most part
smooth (non-tuberculate) and is finely and closely punctate. The fourth and
fifth segments have a low, blunt median carina (Fig. 2). The sixth segment
has an uneven dorsal surface; its median carina is rough with tubercles, per-
haps spine-tipped; on either side just behind the articulation with the preced-
ing segment there is a ridge projecting outward and armed with 5 jointed
spinules; further back and nearer the middle are a number of very fine
spinules. The pleura (Fig. 1) are separated from the tergum by very uneven
ridges; pleura 1, 2, and 6 are longer, in the direction of the axis, than high;
while 3, 4, and 5 are higher than long. All are uneven, and rough with
tuberculated ridges; 1 is small, short, subtriangular, 2 is broadly rounded,
subcircular, 3, 4, and 5 are elongate, subtriangular, more or less falcate, 6 is
produced in a triangle in its anterior half. The telson (Fig. 2) is as broad as
long, sides arcuate, extremity less so, meeting the lateral margins at an obtuse
angle; 5 nearly longitudinal grooves, a deep median one along which the
surface is pitted in addition to the fine punctae; on either side another groove
convex outward and an outer groove subparallel to the margin. Extremity of
telson thin, translucent. The uropods are detached from their base but prob-
ably in life do not reach farther back than the telson; the terminal articles are
broad-oval; the upper surface of the inner one is concave and there is an indica-
tion of a row of spines along the posterior end of the outer half.
Of the appendages a cross-section of perhaps the carpus of the cheliped is
exposed, also portions of two slender legs.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
1002ND.eMEETING
The 1002nd meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, February
15, 1930.
Program: W. F. Ronser: Thermoelectric pyrometry. The International
Temperature Scale adopted in 1927 by the Seventh General Conference of
Weights and Measures was discussed: in detail. The full text of this scale is
given in Bureau of Standards Journal of Research, vol. 1, No. 4, 1928.
The thermoelectric part of the International Temperature Scale is the
fourth such scale used by the Bureau of Standards since 1912. The other
three were each described and differences between each of them and the
International Scale were given. None of these differences exceed 0.3°C.
The suitability of the copper-silver eutectic alloy was discussed and a
value given for it, which is considered good to 0.1°C.
184 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 10
Some difficulties commonly encountered in measuring temperatures were
discussed and the conditions stated under which the indicated emf of a
number of thermocouples connected in parallel will correspond to the average
temperature of the hot junctions.
The general problem of measuring surface temperatures was discussed and
two types of contact pyrometers designed and built at the Bureau of Standards
were described in detail. (Author’s abstract.)
Discussed by Messrs. WHITE, TUCKERMAN, and MUELLER.
H. T. WENSEL: Optical pyrometry.
There is a limit above which we cannot measure temperatures without
employing methods based on the laws of radiation. Various laws available
for this purpose, the Stefan-Boltzman law, the Wien Displacement law, and
the Wien-Planck Distribution law, were briefly discussed.
The International temperature scale above the melting point of gold is
defined by means of the following equation:
if eee 4. Mog R
6 1336 1.432
Where R is the ratio of brightness at wave-length \ em. of the radiation from
a black body at the melting point of gold (1336°) to the radiation of the same
wave-length of a body at the temperature 6°K.
Practical methods of determining R and X were discussed in detail, and
methods of obtaining the value of \ when a filter is used were contrasted with
the use of a spectral pyrometer using a dispersion device.
Examples of the precision attainable with a laboratory form of optical
pyrometer were given. Bearing in mind that at 1000°K and wave-length
0.65 micron, a precision of 0.1% in the measurement of the ratio of brightness
corresponds to a precision of .004% in the absolute temperature, the precision
attainable is 0.1° to 0.2° at 1100°C., 0.5° at 1500°C., 1° at 2000°C. and about
5° at 3000°C. The accuracy, of course, depends on other factors than simply
the precision of photometric matching and is somewhat less than the figures
given. (Author’s abstract.)
Discussed by Messrs. CRITTENDEN, TUCKERMAN, and WHITE.
Two short informal communications were given by Messrs. WHITE and
TUCKERMAN.
1003RD MEETING
The 1003rd meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, March 1,
1930. It was called to order at 8:15 P. M. by Vice President Curtis.
Program: L. 8. Taytor: Standardization of X-ray dosage.
In giving X-ray treatments for cancer, it is very necessary to carefully
control the X-ray dose given the patient just as the doctor must carefully
regulate the amount of a drug that he administers. This is particularly
important where it is necessary to give the greatest possible dose of X-rays
for, should the dose be too great, burns or more serious injuries might result.
Likewise it is necessary for the doctors to use some standard dose so that it
may be easily duplicated in all parts of the country and all over the world to
measure the dose in the same unit, so that their treatments may be reproduced
and repeated. At present many doctors use small portable measuring instru-
ments called dosage meters and it is necessary that these be calibrated accu-
rately in the agreed unit. At the Second International Congress of Radiology,
held in Stockholm, Sweden, July, 1928, an international unit of X-ray in-
MAY 19, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 185
tensity was agreed upon and called the ‘‘r’’ unit. A series of studies at the
Bureau of Standards has led to the establishment of the unit in this country.
The method of measurement consists essentially in allowing an X-ray beam
to pass between two metal plates, one of which is connected to a high voltage
battery and the other to a sensitive measuring instrument. The X-rays cause
the air between the plates to conduct electricity so that a very small electric
current flows through this air and is measured by the sensitive meter. This
small current of electricity is proportional to the intensity of the X-rays.
Thus an accurate knowledge of the X-ray dose may be obtained by measuring
this electric current. Having thus established the standard, the dosage
meters used by all doctors can be calibrated at the Bureau of Standards in
the accepted unit. (Author’s abstract.)
Discussed by Messrs. Curtis, HuMpHREYs, Priest and TUCKERMAN.
L. B. Tuckerman, 8S. N. Perrenxo and C. D. JouHnson: The strength of
metal tubing for structural purposes.
Hooke’s law, “‘ut tensio sic vis,’ states that in an elastic structure the
stress is proportional to the strain. ‘This law is approximately valid for
sufficiently low stresses but for stresses high enough to cause failure in ductile
materials, it ceases to be even a rough approximation.
As a consequence the strength of a structure cannot, in general, be related
to the strength of a test specimen of the material by the theory of elasticity
based on Hooke’s law. It is necessary to resort to experiment, using the
theory of elasticity merely as a qualitative guide.
The necessity of high strength combined with light weight in aircraft
structures has increased the demand for accurate knowledge of the relation
between the strength of structural tubing and the specified strength of
the material.
In codperation with the National Advisory Committee for Aeronautics,
the Bureau of Aeronautics of the Navy and the manufacturers of structural
tubing, the Bureau of Standards has for the past few years, been carrying
out an extended series of experiments on the strength of the tubing under
combined axial and transverse loads.
The test procedure was outlined and the methods of combining the results
into design charts were described.
These methods were partly empirical and partly theoretical, based upon
previous work on columns under pure axial load. A full description of the
work is given in National Advisory Committee for Aeronautics Technical
Note No. 307. (Authors’ abstract.)
Discussed by Messrs. Lirprocxk, L. H. Apams, and HUMPHREYs.
Oscar 8. Apams, Recording Secretary.
ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
417TH MEETING
The 417th regular meeting of the Entomological Society of Washington
was held at 8 p.m. Thursday, February 6, 1930, in Room 48 of the new build-
ing of the U. 8. National Museum. Dr. L. O. Howarp, Honorary President,
presided.
Program: Fuoyp F. Smitu: Studies of the black vine weevil.—The black vine
weevil, Brachyrhinus sulcatus Fabr., is widely distributed and is occasionally
a serious pest of many plants. Although known as a pest of greenhouse plants
and of grapes for many years, very little study of the biology and control of
this weevil was made until Feytaud carefully observed it for three years in
the vineyards of Oleron, France.
186 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 10
The studies reported here by the author extend over a period of three and
one-half years—from 1925 to 1929. Observations were made on the life
cycle in greenhouses as well as in the nurseries and control experiments were
conducted under both situations.
From these studies it is evident that the insect has one annual generation
in Pennsylvania. The winter is passed rarely as adults but usually as pre-
pupae or as immature larvae in the soil. The latter begin feeding in March
and most of them will reach maturity to pupate with the over-wintering
prepupae in May. After about three weeks as pupae the insects transform
to adults in the cells and lie inactive for 5 to 10 days during which time the
skeleton becomes darkened and hardened. The adults then emerge from the
soil in early June and begin to feed on foliage. After four to six weeks, usu-
ally in mid-July, they begin to oviposit. The oviposition period usually ends
rather abruptly in late August or early September but some eggs may be laid
until early October. The eggs laid late in the fall produce larvae which are
overtaken by cold weather before attaining full growth. These continue their
development in the early spring and may produce adults as late as mid-July.
The adults at the end of the oviposition period in the fall seek hibernation
quarters and die during the winter except a very few which may emerge the
following May. These begin to oviposit in about three weeks and continue,
during the second summer, until September. Their early-spring-laid eggs
will produce larvae which form prepupal cells in late August and lie inactive
until the following spring. A few of these larvae maturing in August may
pupate and emerge as adults during the same fall and these will enter hiberna-
tion. Out of doors the adults laid from 0 to 488 eggs during the first season.
The number varied greatly with the host, fewer eggs being laid by adults
confined on strawberry or yellow dock and the greater number by adults
confined on primroses or plantain.
The insect may live continually in the greenhouse but probably, in the
majority of cases, the adults come into the greenhouse from an outside source
and oviposit during July and August. The eggs laid during this period hatch
into larvae which mature in November or December as they cut off the roots
and burrow into the crowns to the destruction of the host plants which are
just coming into bloom for the Christmas market. Should these plants, with
the larvae-infested soil, be left on the bench or thrown beneath it as is some-
times done by the florist, the larvae pupate in January or February and
emerge about one month later. These adults will begin to oviposit during
April or early May on favorable hosts, such as young cyclamen, and continue
to lay eggs until September. The adults have laid as many as 1065 eggs
during the first season. Normally they seek hibernation quarters, probably
outside the greenhouse, and but few emerge in the spring. If confined in
cages in the greenhouse these adults will remain sluggish for two or three
months but become active and begin to oviposit in December or January.
The second period of oviposition usually dwindles during the following mid-
summer but may continue until September. These adults lived for several
weeks after the last eggs were laid and dissection at death showed that no eggs
were present in the ovaries. The largest number of eggs laid by a single caged
adult in the greenhouse was 1681, and the greatest age of a single adult at
death was 816 days. The average number of eggs laid in this series was 1072
and the average age of adults at death was 454 days. The eggs hatch in the
greenhouse at extremes of 11 and 22 days, depending upon the temperature,
the average being 15-16 days both in and out of doors.
MAY 19, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 187
The prepupal stage may be as short as three weeks at warm soil tempera-
tures and has been known to be as long as eight and one-half months at cool
temperatures. Pupation did not take place until the soil temperature
exceeded 55°F. Soil temperature at 55-65°F. is apparently the optimum for
the development of this insect. At higher temperatures the mortality is very
high in the prepupal stage; this is due to the attacks of fungi, Fusarzum sp.
and Isaria sp. The pupal stage is about 18 days in length with extremes
of 16 and 27 days.
The larvae pass through 5 or 6 instars during their period of growth evi-
dently depending upon the abundance of food. Since molting follows a reduc-
tion in the amount of available food the number of instars may be increased
to 7. The larvae mature in 72 to 110 days in the greenhouse. A few adults
were found to emerge in the fall from early-spring-laid eggs. The shortest
period of development, from egg hatching to adult emergence, in the green-
house, was 116 days while out of doors the maximum was 380 days. The
maximum life span may then total 1190 days or three and one-quarter years
according to these studies.
Usually the florist, being economical with soil, discards the infested plants
and dumps both larvae and soil on the compost heap as soon as he notices
the decline of the plants. The larvae have been shown to lie dormant in this
situation and to pupate and emerge as adults at approximately the same time
as do those developing entirely outside. The adults then merely return to the
greenhouse and oviposit during July and August to renew the infestation
without the necessity of some outdoor host.
The adult oviposits by dropping her eggs wherever she may be, but it is
evident that she also occasionally places them in soil or plant crevices.
The larvae during the first 3 or 4 instars feed on the small rootlets and cause
no noticeable harm to the plants, but during the later instars growth is rapid
and the larvae cut and devour the larger roots and crowns or corms. ‘This
accounts for the sudden destruction of the plants which were not suspected
of being infested. On woody-stemmed plants the fine rootlets are attacked
by the younger larvae but the bark and cambium are devoured by the later
stages. Evidence of larval damage to plants in the nursery usually becomes
noticeable in April or May while in the greenhouse plants show injury in
November or December.
The adults prefer flowers to foliage of a given plant species and will eat out
characteristic notches in both. Leaf petioles are also cut and twigs may be
girdled. The adults are nocturnal and hide during the day. Their protec-
tive coloring blends them into almost any background so that they readily
escape observation.
Feytaud found no males in his studies of B. sulcatus, but did not prove, by
isolation, that parthenogenesis actually occurred. In the present studies the
writer has reared, in isolation, 6 generations of this insect and all produced
fertile eggs. No males have been found among the thousands of individuals
examined externally or among the 1200 adults dissected. Economically this
point is important since the reproductive potential is thus increased in geo-
metrical proportions.
Few parasites or predators have been recorded for this insect. The writer
found that skunks, mice, and toads ate the adults. Larvae of a ground beetle
(Harpalus caliginosus) were found attacking the larvae of B. sulcatus and
readily devoured 2 to 4 larvae per day when supplied with them in confine-
ment. The fungi, Fusarium sp. and Isaria sp. attack the larvae in the green-
pouses especially during the summer months when the soil temperature
is high.
188 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 10
Literature contains many notes suggesting materials for control of B.
sulcatus either in the adult or immature stages. These materials were tested
in the present studies and nearly all were found to be ineffective against the
insect at dilutions sublethal to the host plants. From the control studies it
was found that the mixing of powdered acid lead arsenate in the soil was the
only material which proved toxic to the larvae and unharmful to the host
plants—cyclamen and primroses. Other plants were found to be severely
injured by small quantities of lead arsenate in the soil so that the general use
of this material as a soil insecticide can not be advised. To be effective one
ounce of this material to one bushel of potting soil should be used. The
amount was not found harmful to the cyclamens and primroses, the usual
host plants in the United States. ;
A sweetened, poisoned bran bait, previously recommended for related wee-
vils, was found to be effective against the adult B. sulcatus weevils and is
preferable to any other material tested if the staining of foliage is objection-
able. If not objectionable a dust composed of equal parts of calcium arsenate
and of hydrated lime may be used and gives a slightly higher kill than does
the bran bait in tests on Taxus inthe nursery. Probably the bran bait should
be used in the greenhouse and the dust in the nursery.
In these studies tests were made to check on as many host plants as were
available. The results point to the probability that B. sulcatus has sometimes
been confused with other insects, especially the Fuller’s rose beetle (Panto-
morus godmant) and other species of the genus Brachyrhinus. The black vine
weevil is evidently not a grass feeder, as has been previously suggested, but
thrives on several of our grass-infesting weeds such as docks, sorrel (Rumex
spp.), dandelion (Taraxicum spp.), and plaintain (Plantago spp.). These
plants are sufficiently common to be a potential source of an infestation about
any greenhouse and should be eliminated.
The digestive and nervous systems of the larvae and adult, and the repro-
ductive systems of the adult female were discussed. (Author’s abstract.)
A number of slides were shown. This paper was discussed by Howarp,
Bovine, Woop, RoHwer, SPRESSARD, Poos, and CAMPBELL.
Remarks were made on invitation by a visitor, Dr. FRANK E. Lutz, Curator
of Insects of the Division of Zoology and Zodgeography of the American
Museum of Natural History, New York City, who expressed pleasure at
being with us, extended greetings from the New York Entomological Society
and an invitation to our membership to attend its sessions on the first and
third Tuesdays of each month. He also discussed in some detail observations
he had recently made on one of the New York ‘‘movietone”’ production com-
panies in making commercial records of the chirping of crickets, and illustrated
his remarks by blackboard diagrams of methods of calculating the pitch of a
cricket’s tone and making comparative analysis of this with vibrations per
second of an ordinary piano.
Another visitor, Professor H. J. Rernuarp of the A. & M. College of Texas,
also was asked to address the society. He referred briefly to some special
research work he was conducting in the Museum with Doctor ALpRICcH on
the Tachinidae genus, Winthemiza, and discussed some of the variations in
local problems between entomologists in widely separated sections of the
country. He invited all the membership of the society in travel status in
Texas to visit his station.
Professor JOHN GRAY, Professor of Plant Pathology and Economic Ento-
mology of the College of Agriculture and Agricultural Experiment Station of
the University of Florida, a visitor, on invitation addressed the society,
MAY 19, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 189
referred humorously to recent tourist conditions in Florida, and outlined
briefly the organization and work of the various scientific organizations in
his State. He expressed pleasure at the opportunity to visit Washington
and its scientific organizations as he used every opportunity to learn more
about what Government and State men are doing. Many of his students
expect later on to enter upon Government or State work, and unless properly
guided, often have a hard time of it getting started.
L. O. Howarp spoke briefly of the lives of F. W. Hurron, THomas Brown
and W. M. Maske, prominent New Zealand entomologists of the last
century. Their lives, he pointed out, were strangely coincidental in some
respects.
Some remarks were made by Dr. W. V. BaupurF regarding a recent article
by A. HAss, which contains an account of the use of a mite (T'yroglyphus siro)
in manufacture of a cheese, Milbenkdse, in Lautenburg, Germany. The curd
of cow’s milk is shaped into form resembling an O’Henry candy bar; it is
dried in the open air, then placed in a jar containing a culture of the above
mite. The mites consume the surface superficially, leaving a flaky cover
consisting, beside cheese particles, of mite exuviae and mite castings and
bodies. After 6 to 12 weeks the cheese is eaten, with the mites intact or after
jarring some of them off. Sometimes pathogenic effects are produced in
persons eating too much for the first time. Molds do not develop on this
cheese, and it is believed that the mites are in some way responsible for failure
of the mold to grow. The absence of mold where mites occur is believed by
the author to be the reason why mites came to be employed in the manu-
facture of this cheese. (Author’s abstract.)
R. E. SNoperass submitted a brief note regarding certain functions of the
beak of scale insects and compared their mouth parts with those of some other
Hemiptera.
Mr. Rouwenr called attention to the recent infestation of the pink bollworm
in the Salt River Valley in Arizona, stating that since the initial discovery of
the infestation, which was called to the society’s attention at the November
meeting, the infested area had been delimited and arrangements were being
perfected to clean up the fields. In connection with delimiting the infested
area, all the cotton-producing regions in Arizona and California had been
carefully scouted. As a result of this survey, it is believed that the present
infestation is confined to that portion of Salt River Valley east of Tempe and
to a small area on the Indian Reservation near Sacaton. Infestation has
been discovered at twenty-five different points in the Salt River Valley and
is heaviest in the eastern portion of the valley. In this area 45 per cent of
the bolls in some fields were infested.
The non-cotton zone which has been established by the State contains
144,400 acres and extends two miles from the outermost points of infestation.
Within the non-cotton zone there are about 35,000 acres which, for the crop
of 1929, were planted to cotton. The non-cotton zone is surrounded by a
protective, or buffer, zone which extends three miles beyond the non-cotton
zone. In this buffer zone restrictions are placed on the date when cotton can
be planted. For the crop of 1930, pima, or long stable cotton, can not be
planted before April 1. Acala and other of the shorter staple varieties can
not be planted before April 15.
The menace this infestation presents to other cotton-producing regions in
Arizona and California, as well as the danger of infestation to the main
cotton belt of the east, prompted the Department to request funds to under-
take clean-up of the cotton fields throughout the non-cotton zone and in
190 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 10
some parts of the buffer area. A Joint resolution appropriating $587,500 for
such clean-up passed the Senate today. In addition to this appropriation,
the act authorizing Federal participation in compensating farmers, for actual
and necessary losses because of the enforced non-production of cotton, has
been amended by both the House and the Senate. The amendment reduces
the amount of the appropriation authorized and provides full Federal com-
pensation for the crop of 1930, conditioned on the Federal Treasury being
reimbursed for one-half of the amount paid. It is hoped that this appropria-
tion for clean-up and the proposed arrangements for compensation for the
crop of 1930 will enable the Department to carry out its program and eradi-
cate the pink bollworm from the Salt River Valley.
Mr. Rouwer also referred to previous work on this pest, pointing out
that it had been eradicated from considerable areas in eastern Texas and
Louisiana. (Author’s abstract.)
J. S. Wans8, Recording Secretary.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
Dr. ALEXANDER WeErTMoRg, Assistant Secretary of the Smithsonian Institu-
tion, in charge of the National Museum, has been elected an honorary member
of the Deutsche Ornithologische Gesellschaft.
H. G. Fereuson and M. I. GotpMAN have been appointed assistant secre-
taries of the Sixteenth International Geological Congress, which will be held
in the United States in 1932.
Dr. Remineton KeEutuoae, Assistant Curator, Division of Mammals of
the National Museum, is spending two or three months in an examination of
the types of fossil cetaceans in various European museums.
M. W. Strruine, Chief of the Bureau of American Ethnology, recently
returned to Washington from Florida, where he excavated a large shell mound
near Safety Harbor. He obtained a large amount of skeletal material as
well as a good collection of objects representative of the culture of the period.
Miss Frances DrENsMORE, a collaborator of the Bureau of American
Ethnology, is spending several weeks in Washington in connection with her
studies of the music of the indians.
Miss JuLIA GARDNER has resumed field work on the Tertiary formations
of Texas in connection with the proposed geologic map of the State.
Dr. L. W. STEPHENSON, who is working on the Cretaceous formations near
Uvalde, Texas, will return to Washington the latter part of May.
@Obituary
EFS eee
HILBERT A. C. JENISON
Early in the morning of his birthday, February 28, H1nBert A. C. JENISON,
mining geologist and engineer, for some years a member of the U. S. Geo-
logical Survey, died at his apartment in New York.
MAY 19, 1930 OBITUARY: C. E. SIEBENTHAL 191
Of distinguished Irish descent on his mother’s (CAULFIELD) side and of
Danish ancestory on his father’s side, and with high military records in both
families, JENISON was a native of San Francisco. Due to lack of financial
resources, much of his education was received at home under guidance of
intelligent parents. Meager opportunities were, however, compensated by
very unusual precocity and brilliancy of mind. He was far ahead of his
school fellows and was most comprehensive in his early reading, with a distinct
preference for history and biography. After four and one-half years in the
public schools he entered Mount Tamalpais Military School, where he was a
student for three years, during which he made an outstanding record.
In his personnel record he is entered as having studied at the University
of Washington for two years, and in the following two years at the University
of California, where he showed brilliant ability in mathematics and mining
geology, though he left the University without thesis and graduation.
Ardently patriotic, he enlisted as a volunteer when the United States
entered the World War, and at its close he left the Army slightly disabled
and sought a position in the U. 8. Geological Survey, in which he was ap-
pointed Associate Mineral Geographer in the summer of 1919. In 1921
he was appointed geologist.
While a member of the geologic staff of the Survey (September 23, 1919
to November 27, 1923) Captain JENISON was engaged first in gathering infor-
mation regarding the copper resources of the Americas and, with D. F.
HEWETT, in the compilation of the statistics of production of manganese.
Later he took over from B. 8. BuTuER the preparation of the annual mineral
resources reports covering copper, and this opened the way to a compilation
and review of the information regarding world resources of copper, on which
a somewhat extensive manuscript was compiled. For this work he was
especially well fitted, due to his remarkable memory, keenness of mind, and
power of concentration, combined with a marked interest in the economics
of the mineral industry. Due to the latter he was, in 1923, prior to his
resignation, detailed to codperate with the Chairman of the Senate Committee
on Mines and Mining in the study of the cost of production of silver and its
associated metals in the western States.
For a short time after severing his connection with the Survey, Captain
JENISON was occupied with commercial examinations of manganese and other
metalliferous deposits in North America, in the course of which he was ap-
pointed mining specialist on the staff of the Guaranty Trust Company of
New York, for which he examined many mining properties in several coun-
tries of Europe as well as in the United States.
In 1921 Captain JENISON married Miss LorEE O’CoNNELL, a graduate of
the University of Nebraska. She, together with his parents and a sister,
resident in California, survive him. Captain JENISON was buried in Arlington
National Cemetery March 3, 1930.
Davip WHITE.
CLAUDE ELLSWORTH SIEBENTHAL
Dr. CLaupE ELLSwoRTH SIEBENTHAL, specialist on lead and zine for the
U. S. Geological Survey, died at Daytona Beach, Florida on March 1 after
a long illness.
Both as geologist and economist Doctor SIEBENTHAL received wide recogni-
tion as an authority on lead and zine. Born at Vevay, Ind., April 16, 1869, a
descendent of JoHN FRANciIs de SIEBENTHAL, a founder of Vevay and Switzer-
192 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 10
land County, Ind. (1801), he studied at Indiana University (1889-1891),
was graduated from Stanford University in 1892, and received the degree of
A.M. there in 1893. From 1889-1893 he also served as assistant geologist on
the Arkansas Geological Survey under Dr. JoHN C. BRANNER, later President
of Stanford. He then returned to Indiana, serving on the State Geological
Survey until 1897, where with T. C. Hopxrns he prepared a report on the
Indiana oolitic limestone. He was a fellow at the University of Chicago
1897-1901.
He joined the U. 8. Geological Survey in 1901 and after several seasons
devoted to studies of ground waters in Wyoming and Colorado was transferred
to the mineral fields of the Mississippi Valley. In 1907 he was placed in
charge of investigations relating to lead and zine and in 1915 published his
classical report on the origin of the lead and zinc deposits of the Joplin district.
From 1907 until 1924 he was responsible for the Survey’s annual reports on
lead and zine and contributed several articles to the technical press and the
Zinc Institute on the economics of those metals.
He was a member of the Geological Society of America, the American
Institute of Mining and Metallurgical Engineers, local scientific societies, and
the Cosmos Club.
Doctor SIEBENTHAL was an effective influence for the best in human rela-
tions, through the manifestation of his genuine interest in his fellows generally,
and particularly in those afflicted by illness or adversity. He was distin-
guished among his friends for an innate gentleness and courtesy, and a keen
sense of humor which continually enlivened his conversation.
In 1904 he was married to Miss Myrrtite MappeEn of Olney, IIL, who, with
his sister, survives him.
— —— ss OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS
De THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND
3 AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS
Tuesday, May 20 . The Anthropological Society
3 - Wednesday, May 21 The Medical Society
- . Saturday, May 24 The Philosophical Society
- . Wednesday, May 28 The Geological Society
She Sc ee The Medical Society
The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this pageif sent
to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month.
_-——s—s—s OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
“President: WinuaM Bowie, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. Tuckerman, Bureau of Standards.
_ Recording Secretary: Cuartes Tuom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils.
i Treasurer: Henry G. AVERS, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
¥ .
eT
ae
f
¥ :
:
et *
et
ORIGINAL PAPERS
u aa .
Botany—Haitian mosses collected by E C. Sinpard, RS. Wn
Paleontology—Hoploparia westoni Woodward. “Mary J. Ramuvs.,
PROCEEDINGS
The ‘Philosophical Society, ...5<7..:02 +010 «sodden so0esssdes ee
The MUG Eh RT eae s¥
» = >
ob J al
cm
a
VOL. -20 =. JUNE 4, 1930 No. 11
" JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
Ep@ar W. WoouarD EpGAR T. WHERRY C. WrtuE Cooke
% GEORGE WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY BUREAU OF CHEMISTRY AND SOILS U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
H. E. Merwin Haroup Morrison
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. GOLDMAN G. W. Stosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
AGcnres CHASE J. R. SWANTON
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
Roeser C. WELLS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Roya aNnp GuILFoRD AVES.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office, at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for
in section 1108, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918,
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: ss eta. q
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)pro-
ceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes =
of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourNAL is issued ie)
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer ==
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond tocalendar years. Prompt == ©
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifthor = = = —
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the —
issue of the JourNAL for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. Bt
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be ae
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The —
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate i z
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered yee Pe
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. Pea
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced Tote no
by zine etchings being preferable. pee
Proof. —In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors’ Hoes
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors. Sr
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. a tots pe :
Authors’ Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers ean
bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination amd
date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accord- Jace
ance with the following schedule of prices: ; eee Bs i
Copies 4 PP. 8 pp. 12 pp. —S-16 pp. Covers - ; rs nf ais 8
50 A at eet PPE a A ei Mert EN $2.00 eB ST a ot
100 $ .95 $1.90 $2.38 $3.00 2.50 cs
150 1.50 2.87 3.50 4.33 3.00
200 1.88 3.60 4.31 5.25 3.50 see tee st
250 2.40 4.24 5.00 6.00 4.00 ee is |-o
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address priate in $i Pn
ay corner may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional 100,
1.00 de
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or ‘reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. a o 7 Sut
The rate of Subscription per volume 18......c0ecccccvecccensceces ae Sie ciate es $6.00* Saaglas :
Sersi-monthly numbers... 2) 5 3 ae. nd tied 4 he oes) Se 2 090 9 e's yee
Monthly numbers (13, 14, 15: July, August, September)....... base dda edn ae = ¥ ;
Remiitances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,” and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C.
Exchanges.—The JourNAL does not exchange with other publications.
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue. .
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy
‘
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 20 JuNE 4, 1930 NOx eb
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY .—Peat profiles in the Puget Sound Basin
of Washington: ALFRED P. DAcCHNowSsKI-STOKEsS, U. 8. Bureau
of Chemistry and Soils.
1;
The purpose of the present paper is to set forth the relationship
between peat materials, profile features, and certain events recorded in
peatlands of the Puget Sound Basin. The desire to study further the
evidence of recent changes of sea level observed in the Delta peatlands
of California (6) led to a continuation of field work in Washington,
with the view to compare and if possible to connect it with the evidence
obtained from peat deposits in Florida (4), North Carolina (3) and
Maine (5). This paper is chiefly an account of the order of occur-
rence of the different layers of peat in profile sections because a record
of this kind enables codrdination between peatlands and represents
also the history of the succession of past vegetation and of the former
conditions of the region, in part very unlike those now existing.
| Mt. Adams
WASHINGTON
SCALE: STATUTE MILES
(9 20 30 #0 5O
Fig. 1—Map showing the location and numbers of peat-profile soundings in the
Puget Sound Basin of eastern Washington and the principal volcanic peaks that are now
extinct.
196 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 11
sequently the overlapping of northern and southern species is more
extensive in this region than in any other part of the Pacific Coast.
In order to describe the moors or peatlands of the Puget Sound region
and to establish relationships between them, it will be necessary to
state briefly the conspicuous features of general significance which can
be used for grouping areas of peat.
The correlation of the details of different peatlands or moors de-
pends upon the recognition of certain natural geographic relationships
of the region, upon topographic relief and drainage conditions, and
upon the character and sequence of the different layers of peat derived
from corresponding vegetation units. Some of the outstanding
differences between classes of peat material and the structural fea-
tures of profile sections have been described in Bulletin 1419 of the
U. 8. Department of Agriculture.
Conforming with the procedure of the United States Soil Survey,
the separation of peatlands into type units is based on the texture and
botanical composition of the peat materials at the surface, and on
the essentially similar sequence of layers and morphological charac-
teristics in the vertical cross-section from the surface to the under-
lying mineral substratum. These divisions usually bear a geographic
or locality name.
When the stratigraphic and morphological features of similar peat-
land profiles indicate a sequence most closely associated with the layer
of parent peat overlying the mineral substratum, the vertical cross-
sections constitute units of series. The serial units are differentiated
mainly on the basis of the shape and character of the bottom topog-
raphy in intimate relation to the water table, drainage conditions,
and corresponding features in the layers of peat producing variation
in color, and stage of decay. ‘The series are grouped, therefore, into
units beginning as lakes, as marshes, or as forests; they are designated
by the terms limnogenic, telmatogenic, and terrestrogenic, to indicate
the origin and mode of development of the respective profiles as well
as the additional changes which express successions in the vegetation
and the degree and depth of decomposition of the respective peat
layers.
Series of peatland profiles are differentiated also on the basis of
physical, chemical and microbiological characteristics which they have
in common under the influence of environmental processes active in
different regions and climates. ‘The concentrating effect of evapora-
tion in arid climates, the diluting and leaching effect of rainfall in
humid regions, often completely removing certain constituents from
the surface of the profile, the solutes contributed with ground- and
JUNE 4, 1930 DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 197
flood-waters, very different in their saline composition from tellurial
waters, lead to characteristics that can be given a regional expression.
The wide range in cold, temperate, and tropical environment under
which peatlands originate and become transformed from the virgin
condition; the stages marked by profile features associated with de-
composition and the direction in which the process is proceeding, these
require recognition of geographic relationships. No names have yet
been suggested to designate the characteristics of this group of serial
units because they are not clearly enough defined, owing to the lack
of accumulated facts regarding them.
The several units of moors are further grouped on the basis of
relationships associated with differences in the regions dominated by
major divisions of the natural vegetation and by the peat soils sup-
porting them. Although peat profiles show in their past history much
variation in the character of the plant communities that were sup-
ported from time to time and succeeded one another as stages, yet
the natural vegetative cover is generally the expression of interrela-
tions with many factors in the environment. It provides often a
better basis for regional distinctions between moors than any one set of
factors and processes. In their present development the peatlands or
moors of different latitudes are characterized by dominant forms of
vegetation units, vast in extent and of great permanence, such as
tundra, forest, shrub, and marsh. However the corresponding larger
units of peat soils have not yet been defined or correlated because
ecological and pedomorphic data have not been fully worked out and
suitable concepts of vegetation units are not yet well established.
A final grouping is based on the reaction of peatlands in different
regions, regardless of the character of the parent peat layers in the
profile section. The terms eutrophic and oligotrophic have been used
for regional groups of moors to designate more specifically the pres-
ence or absence of certain mineral salts, including carbonate of lime
and essential plant food constituents in the peat soil solution.
Enough is known to indicate that a preliminary scheme of classifica-
tion can be used for moors or peatlands such as that worked out by
Marbut (9) for mineral soils. Categories corresponding in their major
aspects to Marbut’s divisions should be practicable for peat soils if
they are accepted on the same basis of inherent profile characteristics
and general environmental relationships. Regional investigations
along these lines are being continued.’
’ For a map showing regions in which the major groups of peatland occur in the
United States, see Journ. Amer. Soc. Agronomy 22: 352-366. 1930.
198 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 11
With this viewpoint in mind the peatlands in the Puget Sound
Basin may be described separately as follows:
II
PROFILES OF PEATLANDS IN THE VALLEY FLOOR
A number of lakes lie scattered over the valley floor, of which the
largest are Lake Washington and Sammamish Lake, occupying eleva-
tions of 22 and 35 feet above sea level respectively. Lingering tongues
of stagnant Vashon ice probably occupied hollows or valleys of earlier
origin. Subsequent melting of the buried ice left the depressions oc-
cupied by water which was later ponded by alluvial deposits of drift.
Streams and tributaries flow into the lakes, forming a connected drain-
age system which empties into the Puget Sound.
The water supplies from the Duwamish, Puyallup, and Snohomish
Rivers reported by Byers carry only a small amount of mineral matter
in solution (2). Van Winkle (14) states in his account of the average
chemical composition of the river waters, that ‘‘all the waters belong
to the calcium carbonate type,—that is, the alkaline earths calcium
and magnesium, and carbonates or bicarbonates predominate. The
content of sulphate is not large and chlorine is very low. Silica,
though not present in very great quantity, consitutes a large propor-
tion of the mineral matter in such dilute solutions. Iron is generally
so low as to be almost inappreciable.”’
Fine silt from the glaciers of Mount Rainier is occasionally laid down
close to the main river channels. By this means natural dikes are
being built up which in places are bordered by bodies of quiet water,
swamp and marsh. Large areas of the valley floor are subject to
inundation by spring and autumn rains. Although the water carries
salts in solution which serve as plant food constituents, the river beds
being higher than the plain present problems of flood control.
The primeval vegetation in the valleys was a forest of cedar (Thuja
plicata), white fir (Abzes grandis) and deciduous shrubs such as alder,
willow, maple and other associates. The wetter ground was in-
habited by extensive marshes resembling the ‘‘tule’”’ land of southern
Oregon and California. They are of rather uniform floristic character
in which reeds, tule, cat-tail, sedges, buckbean, arrow grass, burr
reed, marshlocks and aquatic plants form the chief components.
The peat soils at the surface may have a loose, gray brown mulch
but the subsurface material varies in texture from a woody-fibrous
sedge peat or a light-brown, coarse, fibrous-matted to a heavier type
of sedimentary-fibrous sedge and reed peat which contains a high
JUNE 4, 1930 DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 199
percentage of diatomaceous earth and silt at a shallow depth below
the surface. ‘Truck gardening has become the important type of
peatland agriculture. Most of the valley land between Seattle and
Tacoma, including large areas of peat, is now generally cleared,
improved, and traversed by railroads.
1. The Mercer Slough type profile
About 7 miles east of Seattle, on the eastern shore of Lake Washing-
ton, is Mercer Slough. The form and area of the peat deposit are
shown on the Seattle topographic sheet of the United States Geological
Survey. It lies in T. 24 .N., R. 5 E., along sections, 5, 8, and 17, and
is reached from Seattle by a circuitous road around the northern end
of Lake Washington. The peat deposit is a grass-sedge lowmoor and
occupies a flat but gently sloping depression, limited by relatively
steep banks. It is about half a mile wide and contains a finger-
shaped, narrow lake extending northward and in turn passing into a
small stream that flows down from the plateau. Southward the peat
area continues along the margin of the lake toward Newcastle Landing.
The stratigraphic features of the peat profile are comparatively
simple. Broadly speaking the cross section consists of two layers.
The upper layer is yellow-brown, poorly decomposed owing to a high
water table, andis composed of matted, fibrous peat from interwoven
rhizomes and roots of tule (Scirpus sp.), sedges (Carex sp.), and reeds
(Phragmites sp.) In thickness the layer is about 8 to 9 feet and lies
superimposed upon a basal layer of. grayish-brown, finely-divided
sedimentary peat. ‘This, in turn, is underlain by gray sand at the
depth of 43 feet below the present surface.
In morphological detail of structure the Mercer Slough peat profile
presents some interesting facts.
The organic material at the bottom is firm, dark-brown, in a com-
pacted and nearly dry condition, and sharply demarked from an over-
lying sheet of cream-colored volcanic ash at the 40 foot level. In its
early postglacial history Lake Washington and vicinity must have
received a large amount of pure volcanic ash which fell directly into the
lake and brought to a close the accumulation of peat from the older
vegetation growing at the shore. Pressed by the accumulation of
later masses of peat above, the ash cover now measures a thickness
from 3 to 8 inches and extends for miles, varying but slightly in thick-
ness in different areas of peat. It was probably ejected from one of the
craters of the Olympic Mountain range.
Three bands of soft, sedimentary peat are encountered with a moder-
ate admixture of fibrous tule and reed material at depths of 14 and 17
200 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 11
feet, and between the 20 to 24 foot level. They alternate with diato-
maceous sedimentary material that probably relates to conditions in
which small forms of plankton life multiplied and developed more
rapidly than the larger semi-aquatic marsh plants.
At a shallow depth of about 8 inches below the surface, the partly
decomposed tule-reed peat is underlain by a thin band of sphagnum-
moss peat. Islands of mosses appear to have followed a shrub stage,
the remnants of which are a black woody debris, charred by fires and
derived from ericaceous heaths such as Ledum sp. The band of moss
peat is not extensive but forms lenses and in places overlies a thin
layer of diatomaceous sedimentary peat. At depths of 7 and 9 feet
below the surface an admixture of darker partly decomposed woody
material is encountered. ‘These variations are probably the result
of local changes in water level. The plant remains are fresh-water
forms, and throughout these changes the waters appear to have
generally remained fresh rather than brackish or salty.
2. The Redmond peat profile
The Redmond record was obtained at the north end of Sammamish
Lake in an area under cultivation in lettuce, located in T. 25 N.,
R. 5 E., section 2. The profile is similar to the one encountered
at Mercer Slough and consists of two layers. The surface layer is
partly fibrous, more or less decomposed reed-sedge peat over a band of
diatomaceous sedimentary material below the surface 14 inches.
Between the 3 and 10 foot levels the material is composed of fibrous
yellowish-brown matted tule-reed peat, which contains at the 6 foot
level a thin band of plant remains from hypnum mosses and at the 7
and 9 foot levels a quantity of partly decomposed woody fragments
from deciduous shrubs, such as alder and birch.
The basal layer of finely divided sedimentary peat extends to a depth
of 14 feet below the surface and corresponds in character to the plant
remains which accumulated in Lake Washington. A_ bluish-gray
find sand forms the underlying mineral substratum. An alternation of
diatomaceous material is lacking and no sheet of volcanic ash was
encountered. Although there is no interruption or change in the
sequence such as that which marked the conditions at Lake Washing-
ton, it is inferred that the sedimentary peat at both localities is the
same and was laid down under corresponding conditions. _However,
during its earlier period the valley floor of the Sammamish was being
covered by deposits of sand and silt which the water carried at times of
overflow. Eventually depressions formed in which water collected
JUNE 4, 1930 DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 201
and stood for long periods. ‘The deeper water was filled with organic
debris from hydrophilous vegetation until the mud flats became ex-
posed, and reed and sedge marshes began to flourish in the drier por-
tions of the basin. The bands of diatomaceous material at the shallow
depth below the present surface as well as the woody material at the
greater depths indicate that during the period of fibrous peat formation
the depth of water changed and was accompanied by well-marked
differences between plant communities, just as at Lake Washington.
3. The Renton type profile
At a point where the Duwamish and Cedar Rivers form a broad
alluvial plain, deltas of sand occur at low levels along the eastern edge
of the valley. They are bordered by an ill-defined swamp of shrubs
and trees much of which is now under cultivation. One of the oldest
agriculturally developed areas of shrub moor les about 3 miles
south of Renton in T. 23 N., R. 5 E., section 30. It may be reached
from Seattle by railroads and electric car lines.
The peat layers of the Renton profile appear in a two-fold sequence
and were observed in exposures along open ditches. Soundings
obtained about 50 feet west of the main highway gave the following
cross-section: The cultivated surface material consists of grayish-
brown, crumbly, somewhat woody and silty sedge-reed muck, grading
sharply into a brown, fibrous, compacted reed and sedge peat which
contains rhizomes of Hquisetum sp. ‘The layer is usually found over-
lying a band of bluish-gray silt in which occur diatoms and root-
channels stained yellow from iron salts. The mineral material rests
upon a layer of brown woody-fibrous sedge-and-reed peat and contains
the plant remains from species of tule and Hquisetum. Irregularly
distributed are logs of timber which may be driftwood or may indi-
cate the occurrence of wooded islands in a wet marsh. The basal
layer is essentially sedimentary peat material derived from aquatic
plants and contains diatoms. The deposit is relatively shallow and
usually about 5 feet thick. It rests on gray compact fine sand.
4. The Auburn peat profile
In the outer portion of the delta formed by White and Green Rivers,
a deposit of peat occupies an isolated shallow water basin. It forms a
divide with two divergent creeks, one flowing northward and the other
southward. The area of peat is under cultivation, producing a variety
of vegetables. It is located in T. 21 N., R. 4 E., section 23, about 1
mile southwest of Auburn near the western bank of the valley floor.
202 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 11
In stratigraphic features the profile resembles the Renton peat.
The upper portion is generally well decomposed grayish-brown dia-
tomaceous tule-reed muck and contains at the lower level woody
fragments from conifers and deciduous shrubs. The basal portion of
the profile consists of sedimentary diatomaceous peat and overlies a
compact gray sand, somewhat clayey, containing occasionally fer-
ruginous minerals. ‘The deposit averages probably between 3 and 4
feet in thickness. ‘The band of silty diatomaceous material corres-
ponding in character to that near the surface at Renton, is missing or
probably worked over and mixed by cultivation.
5. The Monroe type profile
Areas of peat occupy the valley floor along many stretches of the
Snohomish River. ‘The depth of these shrub and tree moors can not be
inferred; it may be considerable. A main excavation in T. 27 N., R.
6 E., section 1 southeast of Monroe, afforded a considerable length of
exposure for measurement indicating a three-fold sequence in the
profile. The area is under cultivation, chiefly head lettuce being
grown for eastern markets. The following features were noted in
exposed cross sections averaging 3 to 4 feet in thickness.
The upper ten inches consist of cultivated dark grayish-brown largely
decomposed woody sedge-and-reed muck. ‘This overlies a yellowish-
brown compacted, coarsely fibrous and matted tule-reed peat containing
flattened root-stocks of water lilies, arrow-grass, seeds of buck bean
and others and a thin seam of sandy clay at the 18-inch level below the
surface. The bed of mineral material usually directly overlies brown
to dark-brown fibrous tule-reed peat, but a sharp separation from the
latter is not always in evidence. A layer of woody peat with cedar
and fir stumps 7n situ attains a thickness of 6 to 10 inches and forms a
well defined stratum between levels of 26 to 32 inches below the
surface. The basal layer is greenish-gray silty and clayey sedimen-
tary peat in which are embedded rhizomes of several species of Hqui-
setum, with roots of marsh plants extending downward into greenish
sand below.
LTT
PROFILES OF PEATLANDS ON THE PLATEAUS
The plateaus comprise the greater part of the Puget Sound region.
They are comparatively level to rolling uplands and contain depres-
sions at irregular intervals which represent former basins of lakes and
JUNE 4, 1930 DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 203
ponds. The natural drainage of the peat areas of kettle-hole topog-
raphy is usually very poor and the water holds as a rule only small
amounts of mineral salts in solution which serve as plant food. The
broader depressions are drained by small streamlets flowing in a
tortuous course.
Although the peat areas are quite disconnected and miles apart,
they have very much the same character of surface vegetation. The
plant communities are northern in range and consist chiefly of a ground
cover of sphagnum mosses with sundew and cranberry, clumps of
ericaceous heaths such as swamp laurel, labrador tea, and a dwarf
birch (Betula glandulosa). A detailed account of this type of vegeta-
tion has been given by Turesson (13) and Rigg (10). A domed
surface or “highmoor’’ contour is only very slightly evident in one or
more places.
The extinction of the small ponds in sphagnum moors is usually
accomplished by filling with fine flocculent organic debris forming
sedimentary peat. The material is made up of ubiquitous forms of
plankton and fragments derived from the encroachment of a floating
margin of semi-aquatic vegetation. The plant communities represent-
ing submerged or floating stages in the open water are dominated by pond
weeds, bladderwort, water lily and water shield. The shore is occupied
by purple marshlock (Comarum palustre) buck bean (Menyanthes
trifoliata) and sedges whose strong fibrous rhizomes afford a frame-work
for the support of mosses growing forward as floating islands. Near the
rolling hills and ridges surrounding these depressions is the wooded
portion of which the characteristic trees are cedar, fir, scrubby hem-
lock (Tsuga heterophylla) and occasionally Sitka spruce between moss-
covered hummocks. They are fore-runners of the evergreen conifer
forest.
The surface peat soils are mainly poorly decomposed spongy-
fibrous sphagnum-moss peat. The results of the analyses reported by
Rigg (11) and Thompson et al. (12) indicate that both the water and
the moss peat of the bogs studied appear to be as leached and acid as
the class of similar peat materials of the northeastern United States.
No agricultural use is made at present of these deposits and little or
no study has been made of the differences of podsol-like characteristics
developed in the underlying mineral substratum.
6. The Ronald type profile
The area occupied by the Ronald bog lies in T. 26 N., R. 4 E.,
section 8, of Snohomish County. This moss moor is not shown on the
204 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 11
Seattle topographic sheet. It is evidently a broad depression occupied
by a three-layered accumulation of peat nearly 26 feet thick on a bed
of drift sand and clay.
Examining the nature of the profile from the bottom upwards it
appears that an outlet of the former lake was established relatively
early. This is confirmed by the thin layer of sedimentary peat which
averages only 3 feet in thickness. Diatomaceous material overlies the
sandy substratum and an olive-brown colloidal detritus is found in the
upper portion of the basal layer.
The course of development continued through a stage of plant suc-
cession no longer represented on the mainland at present. This is
seen from the layer of yellow-brown poorly decomposed hypnum-moss
peat. The plant remains accumulated to a thickness of 4 feet and
overlie the lower layer of amorphous sedimentary peat.
From the stage of predominating hypnum mosses the area became
subsequently a marsh inhabited by reeds, tule, and sedges. The peat
material derived from them is coarsely fibrous, brown, matted to felty,
and only partly decomposed. ‘The thickness of the layer is nearly 16
feet and bears witness to accumulation over a considerable period of
time.
A sheet of volcanic ash several inches thick found about 9 feet
below the surface, denotes a critical stage in the history of the region.
It does not appear, however, that the original flora had been wholly
destroyed by the heavy fall of ash which covered the surface of the
ancient marsh. The plant remains above the bed of volcanic ash
indicate that the vegetation survived under the conditions following
the voleanic activity. The soundings are not sufficient to indicate the
direction of the wind-blown ash but the eruption was situated prob-
ably to the west on the coastal range of mountains.
Following the marsh stage, the course of development culminated in
the invasion of sphagnum mosses. The surface layer of peat consists
of over two feet of reddish-brown fibrous moss peat in which are
embedded roots of heaths. A thin seam of black charred organic
material separates the moss peat from the underlying sedge peat.
The exact cause of the fire is difficult to conjecture. The replacement
of the sedge marsh by the sphagum mosses denotes changes in the
level and character of the ground water. The mosses succeeded in
suppressing the marsh plants and established themselves in relatively
recent times.
JUNE 4, 1930 DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 205
7. The Esperance type profile
The Esperance bog is an area of peat near the boundary line between
Snohomish and King Counties and is located in T. 27 N., R. 4 E.,
section 31, south of the Ronald bog. It surrounds a small pond of
open water.
The most striking feature of the profile is the complete absence of
any layer of sedge or reed and tule peat. Floating mats of sphagnum
mosses, supported by rhizomes of a few sedges and by the branches of
ericaceous shrubs, have reached out to the open water. ‘Test borings
were made near the margin of the pond. They indicate that a nearly
pure growth of sphagnum mosses, sinking down by continual growth,
has filled the water basin with loose, soft and spongy-fibrous moss peat
to a depth of nearly 20 feet. Methane gas was observed to escape
from various levels below the surface. The moss peat grades more or
less sharply into oozelike diatomaceous sedimentary peat 12 feet thick
at the point examined. The mineral substratum varies from bluish-
gray clay to gray sand.
The occurrence of a sheet of voleanic ash at a depth between the 28
and 29-foot level is of interest as indicating the former extent of the
ash cover. The volcanic material is of the same color, composed of
similar fine-grained minerals resembling crushed glass, and is seem-
ingly related to the ejected material in peat profiles north and east of
this locality.
S&. The Hooven peat profile
The Hooven bog is another one of many typical “kettle hole’”’
moss moors in the Puget Sound region. The peat area is shown on the
Seattle topographic sheet, and lies about 2 miles southwest of Maltby
in Snohomish County, in T. 27 N., R. 5 E., section 35. The general
shape of the pond in the bog is circular. It has neither an inlet nor
outlet. In its general aspects the zonal arrangement of the plant
communities is very much like that described above; submerged and
floating stages with many species of aquatic plants merge with the
encroaching shore-line vegetation, and the zone of sphagnum mosses
together with the ericaceous associates and clumps of shrubs continues
into the boggy woodland of evergreens.
The maximum depth of the test borings exceeded 28 feet. The
morphologic features of the two-layered water-logged profile bear the
closest resemblance to the cross section of the Esperance bog. The
upper layer is a relatively pure reddish to yellowish-brown spongy-
206 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 11
fibrous and poorly decomposed sphagnum-moss peat. The lower
layer consists of sedimentary peat which contains numerous diatoms
and a sheet of voleanic ash between the 23 and 24-foot level below the
surface. The underlying mineral substratum is sand and clay.
9. The Cottage Lake type profile
The location, form, and dimensions of this area of peat are shown on
the Seattle topographic sheet in T. 26 N., R. 6 E., section 17 of King
County. It is drained by a small streamlet emptying into Sam-
mamish Lake. A shallow excavation has been dug just west of the
highway, making a section about 2 feet deep and over 50 feet square.
The excavation and additional soundings show that this portion of
of the peat area consists of a four-layered profile. The surface layer
is composed of 6 feet of brown fibrous sphagnum-moss peat pene-
trated by roots and stems of woody perennials. Alternating bands and
thin streaks of dark partly disintegrated moss peat are of frequent
occurrence and the material is somewhat more compact toward the
lower level.
There appear to be no stumps except in a single layer of woody-
fibrous peat which contains partly decayed logs of fallen and sub-
merged timber between 6 and 7 feet below the surface.
Underlying the layer of woody-fibrous peat follows a brown to
yellow-brown fibrous layer of tule-reed peat 8 feet thick which emits
methane gas at different levels. In places the sounding instrument
penetrates thin beds of woody material which represent the remains of
alder thickets and ericaceous shrubs; they indicate temporary drier
stages of the marsh.
A thin sheet of voleanic ash lies near the bottom of the tule-reed
peat, about 15 feet below the surface. |
The underlying basal layer consists of olive-green diatomaceous
sedimentary peat. At a considerable distance below, approximately
at the 25-foot level, appears a second sheet of volcanic ash overlying a
firm olive-brown flocculated organic sediment. The bottom is clay
and is reached at a depth of 41 feet.
10. Lake No. 12 peat profile
atthe typical occurrence of the four-layered sequence in the Cottage
Lake peat profile may be observed also in the peat area bordering Lake
No. 12 east of Auburn in T. 21 N., R. 7 E., section 7 of King County.
JUNE 4, 1930 DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 207
Soundings about 100 feet east of the western border of the peat area
yielded complete sections for detailed comparison.
There are resemblances in the upper layer of sphagnum-moss peat
and in the underlying woody material with its stumps of conifers which
bear evidence of fire, and their later disappearance and burial by the
invasion and establishment of sphagnum mosses.
From the 8 to the 21-foot level of the cross section is a massive layer
of sedge-and-reed peat with beds of hypnum-moss peat near the 15 to
17 and the 18 to 20-foot levels. A thin sheet of ochreous-yellow
mineral occurs in the fibrous sedge peat at the 14-foot level, which
must have been washed in by the action of water. Over the top section
of the mineral material sedimentary organic debris is embedded in
fibrous plant remains derived from sedges.
The basal layer is sedimentary diatomaceous peat and underlying it
is light gray, compact sandy clay.
11. Evans Creek type profile
This area of peat is a heath moor with an open growth of conifers.
It lies southeast of Redmond in T. 25 N., R. 6 E., Section 22 of King
County, and is traversed by Evans Creek which empties into the
northern end of Sammamish Lake.
Test borings made south of the highway show that the cross section
presents a three-fold sequence of peat layers. The upper layer is 6
feet thick. It consists of a thin cover of dark-brown largely decom-
posed sphagnum-moss peat containing dry leaves of heath shrubs,
charred debris from occasional fires, and slender rootlets of the grow-
ing surface vegetation; this grades sharply into brown to yellow-brown,
spongy-fibrous, more or less poorly decomposed moss peat in which
water stands approximately 18 inches below the surface. Below the
moss peat follows a layer of woody-fibrous dark-brown heath peat, 13
to 2 feet thick, in which are embedded coarse fragments of woody
material from conifers, and a large proportion of partly fibrous sedge
peat. Obviously at some time before the sphagnum mosses estab-
lished themselves, heaths such as Ledum, Kalmia, and islands of
scrubby conifers, were growing upon a thin mat of sedges that had
closed by encroachment a senescent lake. ‘The basal layer is diato-
maceous sedimentary peat underlain by coarse gray sand. The total
thickness at the points sounded measures 13 to 15 feet. A close ex-
amination showed no evidence of the presence of seams or sheets of
voleanic ash.
208 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 11
SUMMARY
1. In the Puget Sound region two different groups of peatland
or moors can be distinguished. Both arise and develop from an
initial aquatic vegetation, followed by marsh-plant communities; both
may culminate in the coniferous climax forest of the region. In other
respects, however, there is no parallelism between the two groups.
The first group continues in so far as the marsh stage is concerned
and may be succeeded by a mixed deciduous-shrub and conifer-tree
growth. The second group deviates from the first one by the stage
developing from the spreading of sphagnum mosses which eliminate
and ultimately supplant both the marsh and shrub vegetation units.
2. Pedologically the areas of peat may be broadly divided into two
groups and 7 types. In the first group are the relatively productive
mesotrophic lowmoor peatlands which have fibrous or woody-fibrous
reed-and-sedge peat at the surface. They occupy the broad valleys
of streams in which temporary floods occur during the wet seasons
favorable to a luxuriant growth of herbaceous grasses and sedges and
ligneous deciduous-shrub vegetation. The peatlands are character-
ized by two- and three-layered limnogenic peat profiles. In the second
group are the comparatively unproductive highly acid oligotrophic
areas of peat which contain a surface layer of fibrous sphagnum moss
peat in varying thicknesses. They occupy depressions upon rolling
uplands into which water entered of necessity by rainfall and seepage
and consequently remained deficient in the mineral salts that are so
effective in the flood plain. The peat areas are moss-and-heath
moors characterized by two-, three-, and four-layered, limnogenic peat
profiles, having a high water table.
3. The deeper depressions show evenly distributed sheets of pure
cream-colored volcanic ash which forms a well defined and sharply
separated cover over the plant remains of the remoter period. The
ash cover extends for miles and must have fallen directly upon the
ancient lakes and marshes. It did not bring to a sudden close the
vegetation of that period; the same variety of forms and the same
succession of generations of plants appear to have continued in the
open water basins and marshes.
The layer of volcanic ash seems to diminish in thickness in an east-
ward direction and suggests the presence of active volcanic vents along
the western border of the Puget Sound Basin from which showers of
erupted material were drifted by the action of prevailingly westerly
winds. The data at hand are not sufficient to place in their proper
JUNE 4, 1930 DACHNOWSKI-STOKES: PEAT PROFILES 209
chronological order the sheets of volcanic ash recorded at different
depths in the widely separated peat deposits.
4. No evidence has been obtained in the profile features of the Puget
Sound peat areas to indicate a sinking of the land. The conditions
appear to be favorable for assuming an appreciable re-elevation in
geologically recent time.
—
10.
Jibs
12.
13.
14.
15.
LITERATURE CITED
. Bretz, J. H. Glaciation of the Puget Sound region. Wash. Geol. Surv. Bul. 8.
1913.
. Byers, H.G. The water resources of Washington. Wash. Geol. Surv. Bul. 1, PartV:
ile VOTE
. DacHNowsKI-STOKES, A. P. and Wetts, B. W. The vegetation, stratigraphy and age
of the “Open Land”’ peat area in Carteret County, North Carolina. This JouRNAL
19: 1-11. 1929.
. DacHNOwSKI-STOKES, A. P. Peat profiles of the Everglades in Florida: the strati-
graphic features of the ‘upper’ Everglades and correlations with environmental
changes. This JoURNAL 20: 89-107. 1930.
. DacHNOWSKI-STOKES, A. P. Peat profile studies in Maine: The South Lubec ‘‘heath”’
in relation to sea level. This JouRNAL 20: 124-135. 19380.
. DacHnowsx1-Stoxkss, A. P. Peat profiles of the Delta Land of California. Proe.
and Papers Second Internat. Congress Soil Sci., U.S. S. R. 1930. In press.
. Krupatu, J. P. Physiographic geology of the Puget Sound Basin. Am. Geol. 19:
225-237, 304-322. 1897.
. Maneum, A. W. Reconnaissance soil survey of the eastern part of the Puget Sound
Basin, Washington. Field Operations of the Bureau of Soils, U. 8S. Dept. of Agric.
Eleventh Report (1909): 1517-1600. 1912.
. Marpot, C. F. A scheme for soil classification. Proc. and Papers First Internat.
Congress Soil Sci. 4: 1-31. 1927.
Riee, G. B. Some Sphagnum bogs of the north Pacifie coast of America. Ecology
6: 260-278, 1925.
Riee, G. B., Toomerson, T. G., Loran, J. R., and Wituiams, K.T. Dissolved gases
in waters of some Puget Sound bogs. Bot. Gaz. 84: 264-278. 1927.
Tuomeson, T. G., Loran, J. R., and Riec, G. B. The acidity of the waters of some
Puget Sound bogs. Journ. Am. Chem. Soc. 49: 2981-2988. 1927.
Turesson, G. Lysichiton camtschatcense (L) Schott, and its behavior in sphag-
num bogs. Am. Journ. Bot. 41: 189-209. 1916.
VAN WINKLE, W. Quality of the surface waters of Washington. U.S. Geol. Survey
Water-supply Paper 339: 1914.
Wiuuis, B., and Smitu, G.O. Tacoma Folio 54, U.S. Geol. Survey, Geologic Atlas
of the United States, 1899.
210 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 11
PALEONTOLOGY.—Trophocrinus, a new Carboniferous crinoid
genus... Epwin Kirk, U. 8. Geological Survey.
Carboniferous crinoids of minute size have long been known but
have not attracted the attention they deserve. It is hoped that with
the present intensive study of micro-faunas a special effort will be
made to discover and study these forms. In material kindly placed
in my hands for study by Dr. G. H. Girty of the United States Geo-
logical Survey was found a crinoid showing unique structural modifica-
tions, which is here described as a new genus. In all 25 or more well-
preserved specimens of the type species are available for study,
comprising an unusually complete ontogenetic series. The specimens
range in height from 0.75 millimeter to approximately 1.3 millimeters.
There are smaller specimens, probably belonging to the species, but
they can not be determined with certainty.
Trophocrinus, new genus
The orientation of the theca is based on the position of the largest, hydro-
pore-bearing oral, which is posterior.
Basal elements three in number, the smallest unfused plate being the left
anterior.
Radials five in number, varying considerably in width and somewhat in
height. But one radial, the left anterior, has an arm facet. The outstanding
structural peculiarity of the type species is an extraordinary hypertrophy
of the left posterior and left anterior radials. The inner portions of these
plates are produced upward, outward, and then inward to form a pouchlike
chamber, opening toward the tegmen. Because of its close association with
the single brachial appendage and by analogy with other echinoderms it is
thought that this chamber may have served as a brood pouch. It will so be
styled in this description. ‘There is an associated crinoid with a single arm
facet on the left anterior radial but without the brood pouch. ‘This suggests
the possibility that we have to deal with a sexually dimorphic type, but as this
is obviously impossible of verification with fossil material the brood pouch is
here held as one of the major distinguishing generic characters.
In common with many of the Carboniferous crinoids the plates of the
theca are minutely pitted. In the case of Trophocrinus and some other
Allagecrinidae these pits seem to have a more or less regular arrangement
on the radials and to be connected with structures within the plates. Whena
radial plate is somewhat eroded a definite pattern is visible within the plate.
In Trophocrinus as seen this is not as well shown as in some related forms,
possibly owing to differences in erosion. In general within the plate may be
seen a median series of vertical light and dark lines, running lengthwise of the
plate. To either side are series of similar lines arranged horizontally and
normal to the common suture between adjacent radials. As seen under
various lighting conditions and immersed in different clearing media it would
appear that there are series of tubules within the body of the plate, possibly
1 Published by permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey. Received
April 30, 1930.
JUNE 4, 1930 KIRK: TROPHOCRINUS | 211
connecting with the external pits. Their general similarity to hydrospire-
folds and pore-rhombs is suggestive. Isolated plates examined on both sides
show no signs of folds in the stereom, and whatever these structures are they
seem to lie within the substance of the plate proper.
Of the five orals the posterior is the largest and has a sharply defined
pimple near the apex, which is undoubtedly the site of the hydropore. The
posterior oral as in Allagecrinus meets only the right and left anterior orals
at the center of the tegmen. The right and left posterior orals are much
smaller and do not reach the center.
Trophocrinus is referred to the family Allagecrinidae.
The genotype is Trophocrinus tumidus, new species, from the Sycamore
limestone (Mississippian) of Oklahoma.
Trophocrinus tumidus, n. gen., n. sp.
Figure 1. X 20. Viewed from left posterior interradius.
Figure 2. X 18. Same specimen. Anterior view.
Figure 3. X 18. Same specimen. Tegminal view.
Figure 4. X 18. Same specimen. Basal view.
Trophocrinus tumidus, new species
Figs. 1-4
Owing to the small size of the crinoids, details of structure can only be
worked out and verified by the examination of a number of specimens. The
individual here illustrated, one of the cotypes, is one of the largest and the
only one in which the remarkable pouchlike structure is completely preserved.
The magnification of Figure 1 is approximately 20 x, while that of the other
three figures is approximately 18 x. The drawings were made by using a
camera lucida attached to a binocular microscope and although semi-diagram-
matic give an excellent idea of the crinoid.
212 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 11
The specimen here figured has a height to the apex of the orals of slightly
more than 1 millimeter and to the crest of the brood pouch of 1.2 millimeters.
The posterior-anterior diameter is 0.6 millimeter, and the maximum diameter
from the right anterior radius to the left posterior interradius is 0.9 millimeter.
This specimen would appear to be of average adult size, comparing it with a
dozen of the largest specimens found.
The theca is subpyriform in shape and usually is somewhat asymmetrical
in outline, not considering the great asymmetry introduced by the brood
pouch. The relative proportions of the cup and tegmen may readily be seen
in the figures.
All the interbasal sutures are seldom shown in a single specimen. Ex-
amination of a number of specimens, however, proves that there are three
basal elements and the small unfused basal is the left anterior.
The radials vary widely in size. The left anterior and left posterior
radials are by far the largest. The anterior is usually the smallest. The only
arm facet is on the left anterior radial, lying to the left of and at the base of
the brood pouch. The brood pouch itself lies in the left posterior inter-
radius and is formed by an upward extension of the left posterior and left
anterior radials. The suture between the plates can clearly be fol!owed to
the free margin of the pouch. The shape and size of the pouch may readily
be seen in the figures. As preserved in this specimen the free margin appears
smooth and unbroken, and apparently the complete structure is preserved.
The wall of the pouch is of about the same thickness as the remainder of the
radials. It constitutes then a chamber of considerable size opening toward
the tegmen. In specimens where the pouch has been broken off the sub-
triangular area is exposed which lies within the pouch and at the intersection
of the radials and the left posterior oral. This space is filled with suberystal-
line calcite. It appears that this space was not a simple opening into the
theca. The imbedded horizontal tubules of the radials extend out into this
calcite, and it is probable the space was filled with stereom but not as dense as
that of. the thecal plates proper.
The median portion of each oral shows as a subtriangular depression
raising the areas along the sutures into rounded ridges. This is not well
shown in the specimen figured, the tegmen of which is somewhat eroded.
Near the apex of the largest oral is a well defined round protuberance, which
undoubtedly marks the site of the hydropore.
Horizon and locality—The specimens of Trophocrinus tumidus, together
with other Allagecrinus-like crinoids and a minute Catillocrinus, were found
in material collected by G. H. Girry, C. L. Cooprr, and others in ashale
immediately below the main limestone ledge of the Sycamore limestone in a
railroad cut south of Ada, Okla., in sec. 27, T. 3 N., R. 6 E.
eV A
r Th
se MPN
be
F
eo
;
~
5
i
é
J“
yh Sg
a
c
eo ne ee.
i.
7 :
Ji
"
‘
wa
ne -
7 _ :
¥
y
: i
e a
. 4
y ,
. *
7 ‘of
ny
? -
:
i ; i p
A t ts
m~ oa:
J a
od
.
nt ; pres
‘ “ ih x.
?’ Shes
, f fa
?
« a5 >
—
yh b J
; hee
OnicinaL Parzes eS ve
Physical geography.—Peat profiles in the Puget Sound Basin of
ALFRED - DACHNOWSKI-STOKES, occcccsccccccscccvcccasessssces
Paleontology.—Trophoerinus, a new Carboniferous crinoid genus. _ EDV
This Journat is indexed in the International Index to Periodicals to be found in publ
.
ss
;
;
s +
:
. 6
/ Set
3
° »
, - © F
~ ,* ‘ ¥ «
» 7 a¢ ‘
P 4 > ’
ae
Y Per
- Latte nae ys ‘3
1, OF) as
vl tee *
OE et a eee
VoL. 20 JUNE 19, 1930 No. 12
fone san eA as —
— aa
Ha WSONT. AN iss
e
i es
Nee. ~¥ 1939 1?)
JOURNAL ‘AL usEv
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
EpGar W. WooLarRD en Epg@ar T. WHERRY C. Wyte Cooxz
GEORGE WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY BUREAU OF CHEMISTRY AND SOILS U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
H. E. Merwin Haroup Morrison
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ; ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. GoLpMAN G. W, Stoss
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY : ‘GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
AGNEs CHASE J. R. SWANTON
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICALISOCIET Y
Roger C, WELLS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY ;
“
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
eh ea ae BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mt. Roya aNp GuiLrorp AVEs.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, ha at the post-office, at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for
in section 1108, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918.
¢
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) pro-
ceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes
of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only, Volumes corres ond to sulaatiar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered _
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. _
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced
by zine etchings being preferable. |
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors —
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
ill exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Authors’ Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers ee
bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and —
date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accord- —
ance with the following schedule of prices:
Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
50 eae anes oe aes $2.00
100 $ .95 $1.90 $2.38 $3.00 2.50
150 1.50 2.87 3.50 4.33 3.00
200 1.88.0 is. 3.60 4.31 6.25 3.50
250 2.40 4.24 5.00 6.00 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in
$1.00..,
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. : 052
The rate of Subscription per volume-tS..ccccoccceccceucceecs woh we Sk abe $6.00*
Semi-monthiy MumMbers. 6:4 ~ . 6 STAs ow ble Seeeew ale tel p aes cae Sh ta a . eae
Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and 15)...... .50
Remitiances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sciences,” and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C.
?
Exchanges.—The JOURNAL does not exchange with other publications.
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made ;
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy .
a ;
"ha! te ee
nd Py
: “4
the corner may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional 100, ae
nd %,
* os*
eT
a. S. _— a ee
&
fi
4
r.
4
,
ro ,ot. ie
y- »
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Von. 20 June 19, 1930 | No. 12
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY.—The compressibility of rubber... L. H.
Apams and R. EK. Gipson, Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie
Institution of Washington.
Although many of the elastic properties of rubber have been investi-
gated with very interesting results, no measurements have been made,
so far as we know, of its cubic compressibility at high pressures. Those
measurements which have been made at low pressures yield results
varying from 93 x 10-* obtained by CLAPEYRON? to an estimate of
the order of the compressibility of bronze (about 1 x 10-*) given by
AmaGaT.? As the compressibility of rubber enters as a minor correc-
tion into most compressibility measurements at high pressures, it is
very desirable to have a reliable estimate of its value. In this com-
munication we propose to give the results of experimental determina-
tions of the compressibility at 25° of three samples of rubber which were
furnished to us by Messrs. H. L. Curtis and A. H. Scort of the U.S.
Bureau of Standards.
The samples are described as follows:
Sample A. Hard rubber from panel made by the Goodrich Com-
pany. It is a rubber-sulfur compound containing no inorganic fillers.
The total sulfur amounts to 27.4 per cent of which 0.21 per cent is free
sulfur. The density is 1.149 at 27°C.
Sample B. A rubber-sulfur compound containing 90 per cent
smoked rubber and 10 per cent sulfur and vulcanized 105 minutes at
300°F. Density = 0.990 at 25°.
Sample C consists of pale crepe rubber 90.75 per cent, zine oxide 5
per cent, sulfur 4 per cent, tetramethylthiuram disulfide 0.25 per cent.
It was vulcanized for 30 minutes at 260°F. Density = 0.990 at 27°
1 Received March 26, 1930.
2 Compt. rend. 46: 208. 1858.
3 See Lunpat, Ann. Physik 66: 741. 1898.
213
214 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 12
Samples B and C were called soft rubber.
The samples of rubber were cut into discs and built up to form
cylinders approximately 20 cc. in volume. On such specimens were
the compressibility measurements made. The technique employed
for such measurements in this Laboratory has already been described
in detail,t and may be summarized as follows. The rubber was placed
in a heavy-walled steel cylinder and completely surrounded by a suit-
able liquid. The volume of the liquid was then diminished by forcing
a special piston into the cylinder and the pressure so generated read to
one bar® by an electrical resistance gauge. The travel of the piston
which was a function of the decrease in volume was measured by a
dial micrometer gauge. The apparatus was calibrated at frequent
intervals with a substance whose compressibility is accurately known—
viz. cold rolled steel.6 In this way adequate corrections for the com-
pressibility of the pressure-transmitting liquid, for the stretching of the
bomb, and for the distortion of the packings were made.
All readings were made by adhering rigorously to a definite pro-
cedure. The pressure was first raised to 12,400 bars and then
lowered to about 50 b. below 12,000. A pause was made for tem-
perature readjustment and then the pressure slowly raised to as near
12,000 b. as possible. After the piston displacement had been
read, the pressure was lowered to 10,950 b. and after a pause brought
back to 11,000 b. A reading was made and the process repeated
for successively lower pressures at intervals of 1000 b. Unless a
definite procedure is followed in all the experiments, serious errors
from hysteresis in the bomb and packings are apt to be introduced.
Especially necessary is it that the runs with the specimen under inves-
tigation be made exactly like those with the standard steel.
Results. The experimental observations which consist of two series
of pressure and piston displacements, one for the rubber and one for the
steel, are converted by a calculation which has already been described’
to a single table of pressures (Table 1) and the corresponding values
* ADAMS, WILLIAMSON and JOHNSTON. Journ. Am. Chem. Soc. 41: 12. 1919; ADams
and WILLIAMSON. Journ. Franklin Inst. 195: 475. 1923.
51 bar (b.) = 106 dynes/em.? = 0.987 atmosphere. According to the International
Critical Tables this is the only internationally accepted use of the word “bar,” although
it has been used to mean 1 dyne per sq. cm. We advocate the more general use of the
word bar instead of megabarye, which we have hitherto employed, to indicate 10° dynes/
em.?, particularly because of the convenience of the term “‘kilobar’’ which denotes one
thousand bars (approximately 1000 atm.) and is the logical high-pressure unit.
6 P.W. Bripeman. Proc. Am. Acad. Arts Sci. 58: 166. 1923.
7 ADAMS and WILLIAMSON. Journ. Franklin Inst. 195: 475. 1923.
Apams and Gipson. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 12: 275. 1926.
—
, a
a
JUNE 19, 1930 ADAMS AND GIBSON: COMPRESSIBILITY OF RUBBER 215
of — =e fractional change in volume of the rubber, — is being
0
0
zero at 2000 b. Column A refers to the hard rubber, Column B to the
rubber containing 10 per cent sulfur, and Column C to rubber with 4
per cent sulfur.
In order to smooth the results and to determine the volume change
and compressibility at any pressure it is our custom to express — au
0
as a function of pressure—usually as a function of (p — 2000). With
most solids this is comparatively simple, as a linear or quadratic equa-
tion fitted to the data by the method of least squares represents the
observations very exactly.
TABLE 1.—EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS
AV i
naa x 10? (Obs.)
Pressure in bars (p) A B C
12000 10.085 10. 463 222
11000 9.442 9.864 10.608
10000 8.733 9.217 9.922
9000 7.994 8.528 9.200
8000 Phe ee 7.780 8.410
7000 6.267 6.967 23355
6000 5.255 6.010 6.498
5000 4.129 4.925 5.233
4000 2.903 3.566 3.779
3000 1.514 1.940 2.056
2000 0.000 0.000 0.000
1000 —1.692 —2.442 — 2.682
The volume changes produced when rubber is compressed hydro-
statically can not be represented by a quadratic equation. Indeed,
the compressibility of rubber is more like that of a liquid than of a solid.
At low pressures the compressibility is very high but it falls off rapidly
at the higher pressures, the behavior being closely akin to that of a
liquid. Up to the present no satisfactory equation has been devised
for expressing — ou for liquids as a function of the pressure over any
0
considerable range of pressures.
Among others,’ three equations involving four constants each were
tried: (a) a cubic, (b) anhyperbola, (c) anexponential function. These
three equations will now be discussed.
’ Several other types of equations, based on the published equations of state, were
tried but the results were not as good as those for the three equations which are discussed
here.
216 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 12
(a) Cubic Equations. The first equation tried was of the form:
y =at ba + cx? + dz (1)
where, as throughout this paper, y = — a < 10° and x 22a :
Vo 1000
It was fitted to the three sets of results by the method of least squares.
The results are summarized in Table 2 where the figures in the column
labeled ‘‘obs.-calc.”’ refer to the difference between the observed value
of y (Table 1) and those calculated by the following equations:
y = —4 + 1603.42 — 80.672? + 2.1212? (1A)
y = 18 + 2075.02 — 169.5222 + 6.67723 (1B)
y= 8+ 2199.32 — 170.152? + 6.253523 (1C)
TABLE 2.—REPRESENTATION OF RESULTS BY MEANS oF CuBIC EQUATIONS
| Sample A Sample B Sample C
if _ = 00
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000
PRESSURE
Fig. 2. Change of compressibility of rubber with pressure as compared with that of
liquids and solids.
JUNE 19, 1930 NELSON AND GOLDMAN: NEW POCKET MOUSE 223
the lower pressures and keeping the value large at the high pressures.
In fact, curve A might well be regarded as composed of two curves, the
first similar to curve B and the second a straight line cutting the y-axis
at 13.1 and of slightly negative slope. The compressibility of sulfur is
13.1 at 1 mb.” and it probably exhibits the normal diminution with
pressure. Fig. 1 shows that if the volume of a piece of hard rubber is
100 cc. at atmospheric pressure, its volume at 12,000 b. is only 85.4
ec. and that under a similar pressure change the volume of a piece of
soft rubber containing 10 per cent of sulfur would decrease from 100 ce.
to 82.8 cc. These figures emphasize in a striking way the very large
changes in volume which are produced when a solid like rubber is sub-
jected to large hydrostatic pressure.
ZOOLOGY .—A new pocket mouse from southern Lower Calzfornia.!
K. W. Neuson and E. A. GoLpMAN, Biological Survey.
The occurrence of the large pocket mouse, Perognathus baileyt,
in Lower California was first made known by Elliot (Field Columb.
Mus., Publ. 74, Zool. Ser., vol. 3, April, 1903, p. 167) who described
P. 6. rudinoris a dark form from San Quintin. Perognathus knekus
Elliot, from Rosarito, San Pedro Martir Mountains, which was pub-
lished at the same time (l.c. p. 169) was based, as comparison shows,
on an unusually large specimen of rudinoris. A pallid subspecies was
described from San Felipe, northeastern Lower California by Nelson
and Goldman (Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, vol. 42, March 25, 1929, p.
104). Specimens from localities in the central and southern part of the
peninsula had been referred to rudinoris, but more critical comparisons
indicate the desirability of segregating the subspecies described as
follows:
Perognathus baileyi extimus subsp. nov.
Southern Peninsular Pocket Mouse
Type.—From Tres Pachitas, 36 miles south of La Paz, Lower California,
Mexico (altitude 700 feet). No. 146672, 2 adult, U. 8S. National Museum
(Biological Survey collection), collected by Nelson and Goldman, December
25, 1905. Original number 18785.
Geographic distribution.—Low elevations in Lower California from the type
locality south of La Paz north to near Latitude 30°, intergrading to the north-
ward with Perognathus baileyi rudinoris and P. b. hueyi.
2 'T. W. Ricwarps. Journ. Am. Chem. Soe. 37: 1646. 1915.
1 Received April 28, 1980.
224 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 12
General characters.—A light, buffy subspecies with nearly pure white fore-
arms and grayish ears. Similar to P.b. rudinoris, but lighter, more buffy, the
upper parts in general less heavily overlaid with black, and the sides decidedly
lighter; outersides of forearms white, or nearly pure white, instead of distinctly
suffused with plumbeous; ears clothed with grayish, instead of dusky hairs,
and tail grayer above near base; skull slightly different. Darker and more
buffy than P. b. hueyz, and skull differing in minor details.
Color.—Type: Upper parts near pinkish buff (Ridgway, 1912), the top of
head and dorsum moderately overlaid with black-tipped hairs, becoming
thinner and less conspicuous on sides; a narrow, buffy lateral line present;
under parts, fore limbs and hind feet white; ears thinly clothed with fine gray-
ish hairs; tail above grayish brown near base, becoming purer brown toward tip,
dull white below.
Skull.—Closely resembling that of P. b. rudinoris, but braincase narrower,
the narrowing mainly in the parietals and interparietal; mastoids and audi-
tory bullae rather small, but closely approaching those of rudjznoris. Very
similar to that of P. b. hueyz, but braincase and interparietal narrower; mas-
toid and auditory bullae slightly smaller.
Measurements.—Type: Total length, 198; tail vertebrae, 107; hind foot, 25.
Average and extremes of three adult male topotypes: 194 (183-203); 108
(99-114); 25 (24-27). Skull (type): Greatest length, 29; greatest mastoid
breadth, 14.3; zygomatic breadth, 15.5; interorbital breadth, 6.9; length of
nasals, 10.2; width of nasals (in front of incisors), 2.9; interparietal, 6.1 X 3.4;
maxillary toothrow (alveolar length), 4.5.
Remarks.—The range of P. b. extimus, embracing the lower elevations in the
central and southern part of the peninsula, marks the extreme southern limit
of the distribution area of the species asa whole. The new form differs mainly
in light, buffy color from the distinctly darker subspecies rudinoris of the
northwest coast region, and from the grayer race huey2, inhabiting the desert
region east of the San Pedro Martir Mountains. The cranial characters are
slight and comparatively unimportant. Specimens from as far north as the
Vizcaino Desert west of San Ignacio may be regarded as nearly typical.
Those from farther north grade, along the eastern and western sides of the
peninsula respectively, toward the more northern forms. Specimens from
Punta Prieta on the western side near latitude 29° are rather dark and indicate
an approach to rudinoris, but seem more properly assignable to the present
form. Specimens from Calamahue and Onyx on the eastern side of the penin-
sular are near typical extimus in general color, but in somewhat broader skulls
tend toward huey.
Specimens examined.—Total number, 54, all from Lower California as
follows: Calamahue, 11; Calmalli, 3;: Comondt, 1; Matancita, 1; Onyx, 1;°
Punta Prieta, 5; San Bruno, 2; San Francisquito, 1; San Ignacio, 18;° San
Ignacio (20 miles west), 4; San Jorge, 1; Santa Rosalia (10 miles west), 1;°
Tres Pachitas (type locality), 5.
® Two in collection San Diego Society of Natural History.
> Collection San Diego Society of Natural History.
¢ Thirteen in collection Museum of Vertebrate Zoology; two in San Diego Society of
Natural History.
JUNE 19, 1930 COBB: DEMANIAN VESSELS IN NEMAS 225
ZOOLOGY .—The demanian vessels 1n nemas of the genus Oncho-
laimus; with notes on four new Oncholaims.: N. A. Coss,
Bureau of Plant Industry.
Continuing the work of deMan, 1884, and zur Strassen, 1896, observations
have been made on Adoncholaimus fuscus (Bastian), Metoncholaimus pris-
tiurus (zur Strassen) and other Oncholaims (listed on p. 227) with particular
reference to the system of tubular organs discovered by deMan. Building
on the foundation laid by these eminent observers, it has been possible to
define the demanian system, and, within limits, assign it a function. The
following definition and table of homologous terms, together with the accom-
panying text appreciably advance our knowledge of this remarkable system
of organs.
DEFINITION
Demanian Vessels:—In adult female nemas (Oncholaims) a complicated
double system of efferent tubes; connecting, (1), with the middle or posterior
part of the intestine through an osmosium (see p. 230), and (2), with the
uterus (or uteri); these two efferents being confluent at a special glandular
“gateway,” the uvette (see p. 229), and emptying thence backward and
outward, through one or two ducts having more or less moniliform affluent
glands (see p. 228, Fig. 1). Normally, the ducts lead to exit pores in the
body wall, usually laterad, one or more on each side, near the base of the tail.
In certain cases at least, apparently homologous tubular organs connect
with the gonad of the male near the beginning of the vas deferens. For
example, in Metoncholaimus pristiurus, Adoncholaimus fuscus and Oncho-
1 Investigations carried on in part at the U. 8. Fisheries Biological Station, Woods
Hole, Mass. The abbreviations used are mostly self-explanatory; e.g. onch dsl, (on-
chium dorsale), dorsaltooth. Received May 15, 1930.
226 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 12
laimium appendiculatum I observe a tubular glandular vessel, outstretched
forward and emptying backward into the vas deferens, that appears homol-
ogous with parts of the better known demanian system of the females. See
Higy 2.
In female nemas the functioning demanian vessels (e.g. pristiurus) elabo-
rate a copious, elastic, sticky, non-water-soluble, nearly colorless secretion,
possibly utilized (‘‘spun’’?) during agglomeration and copulation, and also
presumably to protect and preserve the batches of eggs after deposition and
during segmentation.
The demanian organs seem to prevail in mud-inhabiting, and sand-inhabit-
ing oncholaims,—i.e. those of stagnant habitat; and to be absent or less
prevalent in oncholaims living in more thoroughly oxygenated water,—on the
surface of eelgrass, and among algae, e.g. in Prooncholaimus Micoletzky,
1924. |
Origin. As to the primitive nemic tissue from which the demanian vessels
may have originated, we seem driven to accept the primitive gonadic tissue as
the probable source. The histology of the demanian system reminds one
most strongly of the structure of nemic gonads; most of the histological
elements known in the demanian system have homologues in the gonadic
system of nemas;—while on the contrary there is no such tunic, and there
are no such forms of nuclei, known in connection with the enteron.
Equivalent terms of various authors
Author, de Man Author, zur Strassen Author, present
Roéhrenférmiges Organ Rohrenférmiges Organ Demanian System
Organe tubiform
Hauptrohr (fuscus) Stammrohr Enteric efferent
Canal principal (albidus)
Verbindung zur Stiitze Offene Verbindung Osmosium, or Selective demanian
Blindes Vorderende Miindungsorgan intake (enteric)
Verbindungsréhrchen zwischen No mention Uterine efferent
Warze und Uterus
Tube de communication
Ausfiihrungsgang in den Uterus Blindgeschlossener Sack Demanian intake (uterine)
Warze Rosette Uvette
Papille ovulaire
Rothbraune driisen (fuscus) Endschlauch des Rohrorgans Moniliform Glands
Tubes latereaux (albidus)
DIAGNOSES OF THE GENERA AND SPECIES MENTIONED HEREIN
ONCHOLAIMINAE Filipjev, 1918 and 1925
(but without Anoncholaimus, Pelagonema, Anoplostoma, Trilepta, Krampia,
Filipjevia. )
JUNE 19, 1930 COBB: DEMANIAN VESSELS IN NEMAS 220
ONCHOLAIMIUM, n. gen.
Monodelphie Oncholaiminae with demanian system, whose males have a
versatile, preanal, ventral appendicule. See Figs. 2 and 3.
at 15 66 16. 25°74,
Oncholaimrum appendiculatum, te BE ges Beeeterenses P32 73.3mm
n.sp. Oncholaimium with appar- 15)00% 46.00. BORA 1. 98-T 9 9
1.50057 B41. 24 Big a ae
ently deteriorated moniliform
glands without exit pores, and with very simple ampulliform uvette. Appen-
dicule ‘‘hinged” and mobile. Figs. 2, 3, 8, 9. Moniliform glands 24-fold,
(8+ 16). Exceptionally 32-fold.
Oncholaimus mnigrocephalatus 98......7:4....16...... ean 97.
_ nigrocep fitch Merce cn gua dance 2 ae ty eee
n. sp. Oncholaimus with very 14 09 16 = 2M 96.2...
slightly compound, non-refrac- 17 7 19 22 2.3 i~ 1.3
tive uvette, pigmented head, and hemispheroid, immobile, preanal, ventral
male supplement; demanian system with two rather inconspicuous exit pores,
each laterad; cells of the rouleaux (moniliform glands) oblique, little flattened.
; - 7 5.1 fi. 25 FQ. .
Oncholaimus Serpens, 0.Sp._ On es ane a ee naeeeeuce: 282. >4.5mm
cholaimus whose moniliformoz 7 12. som 97.6. 44
iB oN reason HORA AE Obra Ripa PORE ee cos «ir 8
glands are vaguely seriated but not Merb ite Le 1.1 are
in rouleaux. Compound uvette not condensed and refractive.
Metoncholaimus pristiurus (z. 9-8....59... 13.0000, SHG.) Sh We 96-24 sgmm |
5 08/7 1.35 1.4 1.5 0.7 aS
Str.). Specimens from Woods o8 53,.4......,.,.88Mx...... B61 yale
Hole gave the opposite measure- %8/ 12 15 SEC
ments. Moniliform glands 64-fold.
; : 1.4 C.E 17. ose 95.3
RMONCHOLOLNUS PAnICUsS,N. SP. {2732 25° 7 ane poop Sasceens > Adem
Adoncholaimus having a transverse row of seven demanian exit pores on each
side. See Fig. 7.
Adoncholaimus fuscus (Bast.). Moniliform glands 8- or 16-fold,—see Fig. 1.
One soon appreciates the weight of zur Strassen’s words where he says,
in speaking of the demanian system of various oncholaims,—‘‘In fact, the
differences are such that, were they equally pronounced in any other system
of organs, they would lead to the proposal of separate genera, or even families.”’
In this connection the present studies lead to the belief that the demanian
system not only varies markedly in the different groups of oncholaims, but
that in all probability the system is present but has been wholly overlooked in
many of the forms described. Hence it seems premature to attempt a com-
plete subdivision of the oncholaims into genera and subgenera. It may be
doubtful whether the genera and subgenera so far proposed are natural ones.
In particular, Oncholaimus, the group connected with the type species
attenuatus, seems chaotic; yet no better course appears, at present, than to
leave serpens and nigrocephalatus in this ill defined group.
228 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 12
Pristiurys
OL
ut
Ua
int
of in
Wb
ime: 8S
ow dt!
osmosium
*: uvette
fuscus
wpette ig
Fig. 1. Amended diagrams of the demanian system of
Metoncholaimus pristiurus (dorsal view) and Adoncho-
laimus fuscus (side view), modified from the diagrams
of zur Strassen and deMan respectively. eff int,
enteric or intestinal efferent; eff ut, uterine efferent;
vlv, vulva; ov det, oviduct; gl cdl (3), the three caudal
glands; gl monl, the moniliform glands; porus, exit pores
of the demanian system. Notice that in each case the
uvette empties through a minute pore, the uvette pore.
The moniliform glands in pristiurus are 64-fold; in
fuscus 8- or 16-fold.
Uterine Efferent. An examination of Met-
oncholaimus pristiurus (zur Strassen) furnishes
convincing evidence that the interesting female
organ described by zur Strassen is connected not
only with the intestine, as he discovered, but also
with the uterus by means of a tube (see eff ut,
Fig. 1) extending forward from the uvette,—i.e.
from the “‘rosette”’ of zur Strassen. The evidence
is as follows: In many female specimens it is
possible behind the vulva to follow backward
from near the vulva a long, narrow, apparently
(not really) vacant space, reminiscent of the
uterine efferent of Oncholaimium appendiculatum
(see Fig. 3) which on more careful examination
proves to be a duct. This duct, however, is not
so refractive or of such uniform diameter as in
appendiculatum, and is even more difficult to see.
It varies slightly in diameter. Here and there
throughout its length it can be seen to have a thin,
double-contoured wall containing small but
definite, much elongated nuclei. This tube is
usually in a collapsed condition, more often pre-
senting its edge toward the observer, but some-
times not. When it is presented edgewise, one
may often detect in its thin wall the scattered
elongated nuclei, especially in specimens fixed
and stained in acetic acid methyl green; occa-
sionally nuclei can be seen also in other views
Examining the requisite number of specimens
leads to the conclusion that from the uterus near
the vulva the duct arises dorsad as a broad tube,
directed backward, which narrows rapidly and ex-
tends along the right side of the nema,—approxi-
mately along the right: lateral chord though
not necessarily exactly opposite,—and, expanding,
joins and envelopes the uvette. See Fig. 1.
JUNE 19, 1930 COBB: DEMANIAN VESSELS IN NEMAS 229
Uvette*. The ‘‘warze” of deMan,—i.e. the “rosette” of zur Strassen,—is
the structure to which I apply what seems the more appropriate name
‘““avette.”’? Comparisons show that, notwithstanding the very marked dif-
ferences in form, the various organs herein called uvettes are homologous;
the same is true of those called moniliform glands.
The uvette of Adoncholaimus fuscus (Bastian) as illustrated by deMan
probably presents 32 elements (K6rnchen, deMan’s Fig. 29) as does that of
M. pristiurus; these elements have been outlined by deMan and figured some-
what more in detail by zur Strassen (deMan’s Figs..24, 29; zur Strassen’s
Figs. 13, 14).
In favorable specimens I have seen the uvette of fuscus to be a “‘radial’’
structure made up of about 32 elements surrounding a minute pore, somewhat
as in the uvette of pristiurus, (See Fig. 1) but the elements here are far less
refractive. Rarely can one see the appearance illustrated by deMan in his
figure 29; whereas the appearance he does not satisfactorily illustrate,—a
very complicated one, by the way,—is the usual appearance; and when this
appearance is more pronounced, commonly the minute refractive ‘“‘K6rnchen”’
that deMan figures are not to be seen, or only some of them faintly. DeMan’s
“Kugel,” figured by him as if nearly round, I find seldom round or ball-shaped;
frequently it is so ‘‘collapsed”’ (?) as to be difficult to see at all, and it is more
likely to be elongate or ellipsoidal, or perhaps flattish-ellipsoidal, than to be
equidiametral as shown in deMan’s Fig. 29.
DeMan does not give a thoroughly satisfactory description or figure of
his ‘‘Warze.”’ In one of his figures (Fig. 29) I count 33 minute, circular, dot-
like elements where he makes his ‘“‘Verbindungsréhrchen”’ join the ‘“‘Warze.”’
Occasionally I also see this appearance, and with about the same number of
elements (32?). It is difficult to say as yet what the exact function of the
uvette is, but it seems a regular, doubtless glandular, component of the
demanian system. In Oncholaimium appendiculatum the uterine vessel,
extending backward from the uterus, nearly as described for pristiurus,
finally expands a trifle into a small, often rather indefinite, ampulliform
uvette of the very simplest character, which joins the right subdorsal of the
two longitudinal series of cells,—the moniliform glands,—by means of a
minute refractive pore,—the uvette pore. See wv, Fig. 3. In Oncholaimus
nigrocephalatus the uvette, which in O. appendiculatum appears as a simple
ampulla, becomes somewhat compound; that is to say, two additional or
subordinate elements occur, one on either side of the main ‘‘ampulla,”’ so
that the whole is rather obscurely triplex.
In another oncholaim, Oncholaimus serpens n. sp., the uterine tube extends
backward just as definitely as in Oncholaimium appendiculatum and joins
the rest of the demanian system in the form of an expanded and muchlarger
* Uvette; a diminutive cluster. From latin, wva, a cluster of grapes.
230 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 12
uvette, rather closely resembling one of the uvettes of
Ape el ull
: Adoncholaimus fuscus.
|) on sum,”
5 ....sensill
SSN... nd mre
PX pristiurus.
det ren stan = spect carseat Ss Subtut
if chrd lat
af
Were
| gon, it. =
il Jousx-see nd int. - .
I soxet prin dint N
|
s Fig. 2. Male Oncholaimium appendi-
27, culatum n.g.,n.sp., drawn from a fixed
(tg and stained balsam specimen. The
_locus of the cross section drawing is
shown at locus x-sec. ac gon, accessory
to gonad; al’m’nt, food material;
; appndl, appendicule; chrsm hap 14,
' __, ms haploid number of chromosomes; jnc
re Ot; junction of testes; ncll spmct,
nucleolus; ncl spmtd, nucleus of
set sim? spermatid; org ing, organs of uncertain
function; 0s ac gon, mouth of accessory
SLIM +o gonad; spmct, spermatocyte; tst
«175 ant,—front testis; 7, its cross-section.
a IS CMe
7 eieie
Py
In O. serpens the elements are not
nearly so refractive, and the somewhat pyriform whole is
not so symmetrical; but it is made up of radiating elements
having some resemblance to those composing the uvette of
Osmosium. Moniliform
glands. In addition, I
have established to my
satisfaction that the main
tube of the demanian sys-
tem in Adoncholaimus fus-
cus, which was described by
deMan as probably being
merely fastened anteriorly
to the intestine, and there-
fore regarded by him as
probably merely a holdfast,
is in reality in communica-
tion with the intestine by
means of what I have
called an osmosium.* It
has much the same struc-
ture as that described by
zur Strassen for Metoncho-
laimus pristiurus and M.
deMani (zur Strassen, Figs.
4 to 12),—and which I
have examined in prvs-
tiurus,—except that there 1s
no open communication.
There are no essential differ-
ences in the structure of
the enteric junctions of the
*Osmosium; that part of an
emunctorium or analogous or-
gan through which, mainly by
osmotic action, soluble matter
is transferred from one organto
another. The osmosium is
here not emunctorial. It is
still doubtful whether the os-
motic cells in this particular
case are of enteric or deman-
ian origin. While the staining
of these cells seems to favor de-
manian origin, the structure
seems to favor enteric origin.
JUNE 19, 1930
various oncholaims I
have examined, except
minor ones in the more
or less, but very ob-
scurely, radiating part
that sets into the wall
of the intestine. This
part forms an “os-
motic”’ exit through the
the intestinal wall in
the shape of special,
presumably metabolic
and at least selective,
glandular tissue of the
osmosium.
In the species Oncho-
laamus nigrocephalatus
there are external lat-
eral exit pores in the
anal region much as in
pristiurus but they are
minute. Thus far, how-
ever, I have searched in
vain for these pores in
Oncholaimmum appen-
diculatum.
In this latter species
there are two monili-
form subdorsal series of
24 cells each which I
propose to call monil-
iform glands. These
are rather close homo-
logues of the 64-fold rou-
leaux of zur Strassen;
less obviously, of the 8-
or 16-fold ‘‘Rothbraune
drtisen” of deMan. The
uterine vessel joins the
right hand one of these
moniliform glands, as
is shown near the mid-
dle part of figure 3
on this page, at wv.
COBB: DEMANIAN VESSELS IN NEMAS
Fig. 3. Female of Oncholaimium
appendiculatum n.g., n.sp., drawn
from living specimen under slight
pressure. The uterine efferent is
shown from where it joins the uterus
at ut eff to where it joins the right
moniliform gland at uv, the uvette;
gl monil, moniliform glands; gl
dxt, the right hand moniliform
eland; gl sns, left hand moniliform
gland; crystal, tetrahedroid (?) ecrys-
tals on the outer surface of the enteric
efferent; eff int, the intestinal or
enteric efferent; lum ut, lumen of the
uterus; dct cdl, the three caudal ducts;
chrd lat, borders of the right hand
lateral chord; amph extr, external
amphid; spm, sperm; ncl spm, nucleus
of one of the sperms; trm ov, blind end
of the single ovary; ov tegmt, shell of
the egg; div secnd, second division of
the nucleus of
female gamete; amphatr__
plreyt, polarcyte;
ov in dct, much
elongated eggs sensilla: -
passing through
the oviduct from
the ovary to the
uterus; pst, pus-
tules due to uri- ,
tis; grn bifr bire-
fringent granules
in intestinal cells.
SCUCED ee
Mv ee ee
lim oe.
CU SOM. Mit. UND
MSC Wt.
gl uo
apn (chrsm 142)
.. OD tegmnt
... dv secnd
sym. \\ WZ
nel spi... \
Jumut....
1 re
OOGON. 1. 4°" SS
x175 or" cuesom msc am
set hue)... ondsl_ pl Ib
“subeut
amp SP...
at hy .....-.
SOLE
MSC SOM.
SU tue.
(UGS oa hs cs
dt MS...
NUS... "|
retm.. 5 jon
g/mol? [ol dt
chrd lat \ gl sns
cay Som.\ nt
gl cil a
-- gmord
= gin bifr
gm or
heal ap
hal o
at cr At
232 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 12
In O. appendiculatum at the posterior end of the two 24-cell moniliform
glands, however, a number of the cells of each organ seem loosened from the
series; opposite these I am unable to find any outlet whatever ;—that is to say,
the organs appear as if in a deteriorated condition. See gl dzt, gl snst, Fig. 3.
Perhaps causally connected with this is the extraordinary fact that the
examination of hundreds of females of Oncholaimiwm appendiculatum over
a number of years has failed to disclose a single healthy specimen. Every
female is attacked by a disease that often results in necrosis of the posterior
portion of the nema. (See section Uritis, p. 240). The disease (uritis)
breaks out on the tail in the shape of minute pustules having an internal
radiated, or linear and “parallel-fibered,’ structure, pst, Fig. 3, sometimes
extending forward for a considerable distance into the nema,—in extreme
cases, as far forward as the vulva. There may be one, two, three, or even as
many as a dozen of these pustules irregularly scattered on the posterior part
of the female. The pustules are minute, exude, inter alia, an insoluble
material, and frequently exhibit surface bacteria, though it seems doubtful
if the bacteria thus far seen are connected with the disease. The uniform
occurrence of this disease in females of Oncholaimium appendiculatum may
perhaps be connected with the deteriorated (?) condition of the demanian
system. Ona later page attention will be called to the fact that other on-
cholaims possessing the demanian system have what appear to be similar
diseases of the posterior extremity; but in none of them is there any such
extraordinary condition as in O. appendiculatum, where examination has
failed to disclose a single adult female free from uritis.
Enteric Efferent. Against the idea that in Adoncholaimus -fuscus the
anterior junction of the demanian system with the intestine is merely a hold-
fast, as suggested by deMan, it may be urged that of other elongated organs
known to lie loose in the body cavity of nemas, none are secured in this
particular way to the intestine. Why an exception in this case? If it is
merely a matter of security, it would seem more in harmony with known
nemic anatomy that the attachment be to the body wall rather than to the
intestine, and especially that it be effected along a lateral chord. It is not
unheard of for a nemic organ of this general form to be attached to a lateral
chord.
From a mechanical point of view the idea that the connection of the
demanian system with the intestine is merely a holdfast seems to have all the
less to recommend it in the case of the monodelphic species, such as pristiwrus
and serpens, where this connection is so far caudad that such a holdfast seems
rather needless.
DeMan’s idea that his main tube is simply and only fastened to the intestine
seems not borne out by facts; and his figure 25, if I understand it, admits of a
different interpretation. I find his ‘‘main vessel’ anteriorly to be hollow to
JUNE 19, 1930 COBB: DEMANIAN VESSELS IN NEMAS 233
its very end,—the ‘‘blind end” of deMan,—and that the freely moving con-
tents of the tube are visible clear to what might be called the surface tissue
of the intestine (tissue of the intestine altered, to be sure). DeMan’s figure
25 seems easily to admit of this interpretation. I find the cells of the wall of
the intestine (if they be really intestinal) are altered where the vessel is
attached, and this fact suggests that we have here modified selective tissue ,—
the osmosium,—the function of which is to extract from the intestine and
usher into the demanian system, presumably mainly by osmosis, a product
utilized by the latter.
May not the evidence offered by zur Strassen for an open communication
between the enteric efferent and the intestine in pristzuwrus,—i.e. the evidence
of his microtome sections,—be capable of a different interpretation? Could
zur Strassen’s sections have been deceptive? ‘The published figures of his
“open connection” between the demanian. system and the intestine are not
satisfying, in that they appear to show a large portion of the cell walls missing.
Now pristiurus ingests mud, and, in consequence, its intestine normally
contains much fine grit. Is it not likely that this grit, acting as it naturally
would during the sectioning, would damage, or even destroy, delicate cells
that, before being broken, might have closed the aperture which zur Strassen
shows and describes as anopen connection? The suggestion is that this might
occur, at the time the sections were cut, through the combined abrasive
action of the grit and the coincident dulling of the microtome knife. All
zur Strassen’s figures show the intestinal lumen more or less open; but when
the intestine is entirely empty and free of grit zt 7s collapsed, not open, so that
the lumen, in well made sections, is closed and difficult to see. May not this
indicate that the vacant lumenal spaces shown in zur Strassen’s illustrations
probably ded contain grit at the time of fixation, and hence, no doubt, at the
time of sectioning?
Pristiurus, fuscus and some other mud-inhabiting Oncholaims can be kept
alive in pure running sea water for days, or even weeks, and when so kept
evacuate the intestine very completely. Sections may then be made without
the interference of the grit normally present in the intestine. J have not found
such sections to present the appearance figured by zur Strassen.
In an examination of very many specimens, alive and sectioned, I have
never been able to convince myself of the existence of an open communication
between the intestine and the demanian system.
Any such open connection would seem a grave menace to the well-being
of the organism. For if the enteric intake were of the nature figured and
described by zur Strassen, there would seem to be little or nothing to prevent
the entrance into the demanian system of undigested detritus contained in
the intestine, together with numerous living microorganisms which normally
234 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 12
constitute a very appreciable part of the feces. No such detritus is ever
seen in the demanian system.
Furthermore, on examining living pristzwrus and fuscus, both of which I find
to occur along Cape Cod, U.S. A., I find that when the food in the intestine
is moving rapidly back and forth opposite zur Strassen’s supposed open
connection, no portion of it ever enters the enteric efferent. There is not
even the slightest corresponding disturbance of the contents of the lumen of
the enteric efferent close by, which, as zur Strassen also points out, can be
seen in the end portion of the demanian tube where it joins the surface of the
intestine.
Possibly the analogous connection with the uterus is hardly to be taken as a
very distinctly open one. ‘True, I have seen cases in pristiurus where, when
the diseased uterus was filled with microorganisms (microorganisms causing
the disease*), the continuous mass of them also filled the nearby part of the
corresponding demanian vessel in such a way that there was a direct “tubular”
connection between the uterus and the vessel. Normally, however, the
conditions are as follows:—One traces the uterine demanian vessel directly
forward to the uterus, where its lumen continues for a short distance into a
glandular tissue in the posterior end of the uterus,—zur Strassen’s so-called
“blind end, behind the vulva,’’—and there ceases in the midst of a large
number of uterine cells somewhat similar to many of those constituting the
main portion of the wall, i.e. what seems to be a special collection of glandular
uterine cells. In fuscus this same thing occurs where the oviducts join the
proximal ends of the two uteri, not, as in pristzurus, at the posterior portion
of the single uterus close to the vulva; the histology of this junction, however,
is much the same in these two species. It is asif special uterine cells were
devoted to secreting material to be delivered to the demanian system through
the uterine efferent,—the “tube de communication” of deMan.
In pristiurus the long tubular vessel connecting the uterus with the de-
manian system,—the uterine efferent,—often is difficult to see, especially in
its entirety. No better proof of this could be required than that it escaped so
keen an observer as zur Strassen.
Even in Adoncholaimus fuscus, while the two short uterine efferents can
sometimes be followed from the uteri to the main vessel of the demanian
system, often it is practically impossible in a given specimen to follow them
throughout their course. Knowing their locality and structure, one can
usually determine how they lie and their probable limits, but that is about all.
Of course, in a small minority of favorable svecimens quite the contrary is
true;—the entire tube can be made out satisfactorily as was first done by
deMan.
* This disease appears to have nothing to do with uritis (see p. 240); uritis seems an
entirely distinct disease.
JUNE 19, 1930 COBB: DEMANIAN VESSELS IN NEMAS 235
Direction of Flow in the Demanian System. Evidently a considerable
amount of matter is contributed by the intestine to the demanian system.
Zur Strassen had no difficulty in assuming the entzre amount to be so con-
tributed in pristiurus (for he appears to have been unaware of the connection
in pristeurus of the uterus with the uvette, and hence with the demanian
system).
However, quite frequently in the contents of the enteric efferent of living
Metoncholaimus pristiurus near and in front of the uvette pore, refractive,
curved, wave-like effects are seen such as would be produced by the gradual
mixing of two viscid fluids of unequal refractiveness,—an appearance that
might readily be produced by the flowing of a liquid through the uvette
pore from the uterine efferent into the enteric efferent in such quantity that
some of it passed slightly forward,—perhaps through cover glass pressure.
On various occasions, I have seen a considerable quantity of matter in
the main enteric vessel close to its junction with the intestine. While this
is no proof that this matter was actually derived from the intestine, it is
favorable to that conception. Such matter never contains intestinal debris,—
nor sperms (see F. H. Stewart, 1906), nor pseudo eggs,—“‘balls of finely gran-
ular substance,” (see zur Strassen.)
If the demanian system emptied znto the intestine, it is to be expected that
it would do so through an aperture, pore, similar to those of other affluent
enteric glands,—those emptying into the oesophagus for instance. In nemas
such pores are extremely small, have a definite refractive lining, and are
adapted to check any “backwash” due to movement of the contents of the
enteron,—e.g. just such a structure as occurs in the uvette of pristiurus.
But no such pore has been seen in connection with any enteric demanian vessel.
Moreover, against the flow of any of the demanian fluids being toward the
enteron, it may be urged that in pristiurus a special secretion is at times
actually seen issuing rather copiously from the pores near the tail,—the
external outlets of the demanian system,—and there is not the slightest
reason to suppose that z2n this region the flow is ever anything but backward
and outward. There is no evidence that the demanian system is, for in-
stance, a water-vascular system; or that sea water is taken in through the
antecaudal lateral pores.
Again, there is little if any reason to believe the demanian system accessory
to digestion, because whatever digestive function would be advantageous to
adult females would seem also to be advantageous to the young nemas; yet
there are no such organs in young oncholaims, for they come into existence
at the last moult. The same may be said of any supposable ordinary excre-
tory function.
But if it be supposed that, for some unexplained reason, adult ege-producing
females require to excrete (not secrete) matter peculiar to them, in other words
that the demanian system, or some part of it, be a sort of temporary mal-
236 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 12
pighian system,—a rather violent supposition,—it would seem that the
excretion, as such, if poured into the intestine at all, should be poured in
posteriorly. But in didelphs,—fuscus, panicus,—such a supposition would
pour it in near the anterzor end. Or, if it be supposed that the demanian
system is simply an emunctorium accessory to the intestine and emptying
outward and backward, then why the attachment to the fore part of the
intestine as in fuscus?
If the demanian system is excretory, then it is necessary to assume that
the necessities of adult females in the way of excretion are different from those
of the male or the young female. No reason has been advanced for such an
assumption.
Deduction by Elimination. In the demanian system of O. pristiurus
three ducts come together at a single point, indicated by X in 1 2
figure 4,—ducts in each of which a fluid may conceivably flow
in either direction; i.e., there are six different paths along \\ d
which fluid may be conceived to flow. The assumption is, of : /
course, that, when the organs are functioning normally, fluid
passes constantly in one direction only in each of the three x
tubes, 1, 2, 3, Fig. 4.
Indicating the six possible paths by arrows lettered a, b, c, af
d, e, f (Fig. 4), mathematically, there are twenty possible i
combinations in groups of three as follows: :
aoc, ’abe, acd, “ach aly; bde, cde," *cef!""Cefs. CDeEF.
abd, abf, ace, ade, bcd, bdf, cdf, aef, bceand def;— eng e eee
this is according to the formula for combinations, sible currents.
a
——s
n(n—1) (@m-2)...... (n—r-+1) ‘" TRS see!
r! on Oe ae!
= 20, when n = 6andr = 3.
Fig. 5. Diagram showing the direction of flow of the fluid in the demanian system.
The intestine and the posterior end of the uterus are shown near bde. The backward
flow of the fluid in the enteric and uterine efferents is indicated at b and d, and the
backward flow of their combined products at e. The outward flow of the fully elabo-
yates secretion after it has passed the moniliform glands is shown by the two oblique
ack arrows.
It is evident that a combination containing a and 6 represents a physical
impossibility, i.e. represents opposite currents simultaneously in the same
duct,—duct number 1; and so with combinations containing c and d, and e
JUNE 19, 1930 COBB: DEMANIAN VESSELS IN NEMAS 237
and f. (It is theoretically possible, of course, that the same tube might have
a flow in one direction at one time and in the opposite direction at another
time, but, physiologically speaking, this is an unusual occurrence, and prac-
tically an unheard of thing in a tubular organ “‘open” at both ends). We
may therefore eliminate from the 20 possibilities, 12 of the combinations,
leaving eight ,—acf, adf, bcf, ade, bce, bde, bdf and ace.
But there are also two more combinations that obviously must be left out,
as involving physical and physiological impossibility, namely ace and bdf,
i.e., the cases where the three currents would simultaneously come to, or
radiate from, the point X; bdf,—(no outlet, or reservoir), and ace,—(no
obvious source of supply). This leaves six combinations possibly worthy of
discussion, acf, adf, bcf, ade, bce and bde. These six possibilities are dia-
grammed in figures 5 and 6. Five of these possibilities (Fig. 6) are rendered
I. No exit pore for a; pore of uvette indicates
reverse of c; f doubtful because entrance of
sea water is possibly involved, while outflow
of secretion is known from lateral pores, p.
II. No exit pore for a; f doubtful as in I; monili-
form glands are believed here to empty out-
ward because of their form and location in O.
fuscus; only outlet of d and f would be
through a.
III. c doubtful as in I; f very doubtful as in I
and II; the only outlet for f and b would be
through the uvette and c,—reverse of direc-
tion indicated by structure.
IV. No exit pore for a; the only source of a would
be d and the uvette.
V. c doubtful as in I; c may also be reasoned
against on the basis of homologous structures
1 O. mgrocephalatus and O. appendicu-
atum.
Fig. 6. Five diagrams of supposed currents in a demanian system. Objections to
each supposition are listed opposite its diagram. Compare with Fig. 5.
exceedingly improbable by the physiological and morphological considera-
tions listed opposite their diagrams. We may therefore safely deduce, even
from this single discussion, that the flow is almost certainly as shown in Fig.5.
The significance of seven exit pores on each side in panicus (see Fig. 7) is
an interesting subject for speculation. It can hardly be said that the exist-
ence of seven pores is for the purpose of furnishing a large outlet; it would
seem much simpler to attain such a result by having a larger single pore. Nor
238 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 12
does it seem that the multiple outlet would have anything to do with the
quality of the secretion that is prepared. The most reasonable supposition
is that, in use, the demanian secretion is rendered more effective through a
multiple delivery, and it is not difficult to reason out why this might be so.
Take, as a basis of reasoning, the fact that spiders have multiple spinneret
tubes. This plurality is an advantage in that if some tubes of the spinneret
apparatus do not act, or are restrained from acting, the remaining ones may
continue to act, an economy of a kind often seen in nature. Thus threads
of varying size and composition can be “spun.” It seems not unlikely
that the multiple thread of the spider may have
aut eral - a alt A structural advantages; at any rate it is a fact that,
bai. the ATEN in some cases at least, the thread can be artificially
@é€) split into components harmonizing in number
SS (with the elements of the spinneret apparatus.
s Ta If these be advantages, it is quite conceivable that
drdim dla they may apply in some way to the multiporous
Adoncholaimus. panicus, and this would harmonize
-Z/PPP with the previous conclusions concerning the
‘If function of the demanian system;—for presum-
ably the secretion in panicus is like that of other
oncholaims, i.e. a copious, sticky, non-water-
soluble, elastic material;—at least these are its
properties after it is delivered into sea water by
pristiurus.
The location of the outlets of the demanian
Les. ]| system is always well caudad, and the oncholaims
SS having the system are agile and limber, all of which
X << ]y959 harmonizes with the belief that the system elabor-
ates material used with some degree of “skill.”
pe leigh ae eee All oncholaims having the demanian system
tral and sectional views of have a habit of coiling and uncoiling and can with
the posterior portion of the 1
same female. eff prep, the the greatest ease place the exit pores of the system
principal efferent at the against any part of the body except the tail and
eee a pee ae its immediate vicinity, and this habit, no doubt,
ents, eff dit; the seven-fold jg correlated with the function of the secretion.
delta is shown at delta an i ; :
the seven exit pores at exit. Females of such oncholaims have relatively short
tails,—as if longer ones would perhaps be inthe way.
Conceivably, of course, the demanian secretion might have properties
attractive to the other sex (odor, etc.), but the idea does not seem to appeal
so strongly as that of having something to do with other matters.
In this connection it may be recalled that, opposite the demanian exit
pores of Metoncholaimus albidus (Bastian), deMan described and figured a
persistent girdle of left-over yellowish brown secretion.
Oncholaims having the demanian system, pol. ON Mi
at least most of them, have a way of collecting
together in masses when artificially assembled on et | Be i sul,
in sea water. Conceivably this habit may “HS
have some connection with the demanian emplh Ve =
secretion, but it is not obvious why only adult
females should secrete for this purpose alone.
The demanian system appears more dis-
tended when the uterus is full or nearly full of
eggs. For instance, at this time the uterine
efferent and portions of the uterus of pristiurus
may contain an abundance of colorless, trans-
parent, rather structureless-looking matter,
resembling, under the microscope, partially
dissolved shavings of gelatin.
The question arises as to what becomes of the
.. sensilla
00. . hel mary
secretion of the accessory gland of the male,
which is possibly or probably a homologue ef
the demanian system in the female. No reply
to this question has occurred in connection
with these investigations except the possibility,
which seems remote, that the “‘gum arabic-
like’? mixture sometimes seen in the uterus of
pristiurus might possibly have been derived
Fig. 8. Profile of head end of male
Oncholaimium appendiculatum.
The three onchia are shown; the
left ventral submedian is the
longest,—see on dsl and on subm
(2). The sensilla and amphidial
nerve are shown. Nuclei shown
mostly central nervous system;
the scattered darker ones are
nuclei of the lateral chord, the
width of which is pointed out
at chrd lat.
ee or A part from the male.
7 abt of
_ appnell
. NUS
_.. Set subm
_.. SL Sm
x 350
Fig. 9. Tail, male Oncholaimium
appendiculatum. ppl, single ven-
tral papilla; dct (3), caudal ducts
leading to spinneret; appndl,
ventral, erectile appendicule: an
set, anal setae; set subm (12), sub-
median setae on male only.
_ Cop msc
It should
perhaps be mentioned that in the nemic
genus Fhabditis, glands accessory to the
male gonad are known that secrete a copu-
latory cement; but no such cement is yet
known in connection with any oncholaim.
Of course, the mere presence of this
material in the uterus and in the portion of
the uterine efferent nearby does not of
itself indicate the direction of the flow, but
the structure of the organs distinctly sug-
gests that the flow is caudad, i.e. from the
uterus toward the external openings near
the tail. Were the entire flow of the deman-
ian system toward the uterus, it would
seem strangely circuitous.
While the fact that no external exit
pores have been discovered in Oncholatmiwm
appendiculatum makes conceivable a flow
from its enteric vessel and the moniliform
glands through the uvette to the uterus, yet
the structure of the uvette pore seems as dis-
240 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 12
tinctly adapted to a flow in the opposite direction, i.e. caudad, in this species
as in the others. Moreover a different explanation of this exceptional case
seems more plausible, namely, that in O. appendiculatum the demanian
organs are in a deteriorated condition. The fact that this species is the only
one that almost invariably presents disease in the posterior extremity of
the adult females may harmonize with the supposition that the demanian
system of this species is in a deteriorating and perhaps useless condition.
The nonconsecutiveness of the posterior cells of the moniliform glands in
O. appendiculatum, and the appearance of crystals on the outer surface
of the enteric efferent, (Fig. 3) suggest decadence in this anomalous species.
In O. appendiculatum the uvette is reduced. to a mere ampulla; and is
almost as greatly reduced in nigrocephalatum. In neither of these is it at
all likely that the uvette itself could produce any very appreciable secretion
flowing into the uterus, and yet in both species the uterine tube is better
developed (or at any rate more obvious) than it is, for instance, in iat
where the uvette is strongly developed.
I have not seen sperms, or anything remotely resembling them, in the
demanian system, as reported by Stewart and zur Strassen.
Uritis. It is interesting that the females of a number of oncholaims
shown to possess demanian vessels seem unusually subject to disease.
Among such oncholaims, allusion is made to the following typical cases:
Name Location Lesions Regeneration
? Woods Hole, Mass.,| ‘‘tailless’’ Undoubtedly healed
Ue tS, SAY over
O. appendiculatum Woods Hole, Mass. | From tailend to half} No signs of regenera-
| of nema necrotic tion
M. pristiurus Woods Hole, Mass. | Tail end gone; no | Merely healed over;
anal opening; no no openings
spinneret
A. fuscus 1. Cape Cod, Mass.| Former uritis (?) Terminus regener-
2. Miss E. Horsman | Former uritis (?) ated; no spinneret
Univ. College of
Wales
New Oncholaim Florida, U.S. A. Former uritis (?) Imperfect _spinneret
and anal opening
regenerated
An interesting morphological problem is thus disclosed. As the table
indicates, one not infrequently finds oncholaims, especially females, with
highly peculiar caudal extremities,—sometimes without spinneret or anus,
sometimes with these organs present but apparently abortive, or at least
peculiar in form,—abnormalities probably due to specific disease. Ap-
parently the disease is sometimes combated by the nemic organization, so that
the posterior end of the nema heals over, and in some cases it seems as if a new
JUNE 19, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 241
anus is formed, and possibly even a new spinneret! Just how this occurs is
not yet clear,*but I have seen both deformed anal openings and deformed
spinnerets of female oncholaims that appeared to give evidence of having
been imperfectly regenerated after some accident, or, more likely, after uritis.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
461sT MEETING
The 461st meeting of the Society was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cos-
mos Club, February 26, 1930, President G. R. MANSFIELD presiding.
The Secretary announced the election of Mrs. CHartes D. WauLcorT and
Miss M. D. Fostsr, the latter of the U. 8. Geological Survey, to Active
membership in the Society.
Informal communications: i. F. BuRcHaRD showed lantern slides of a lens
of intraformational conglomerate in the Cambrian Conesauga limestone in
Alabama. This consists of flat plates of limestone, variously oriented in a
matrix of more siliceous limestone. The plates of limestone are sharp edged
and apparently have suffered no abrasion or transportation, but were ce-
mented nearly in situ, soon after they were broken apart. He suggested that
this deposit may have originated as talus filling of a small gully and showed a
lantern slide of the present-day deposition of similarly shaped blocks of sandy
clay at the base of an overhanging cliff in the Ackerman formation of Eocene
age in Mississippi.
- 'T. S$. Lovrerine described the three possible types of surfaces of no distor-
tion and maximum strain obtained by compressing a sphere of reference into a
strain ellipsoid. He pointed out that T. A. Linx in a recent discussion of the
strain ellipsoid used a sphere of reference, the diameter of which shortened
with the compression to equivalence with the intermediate axis of the strain
ellipsoid. With this ‘‘Link” sphere of reference, the surfaces of no distortion
can be at any angle to the applied force. LINK’s treatment seems without
mechanical or geological significance.
Regular Program: T.S. Loverine: The Tertiary history of the Front Range.
Discussed by Messrs. GinLuLY, Mrrtin, Loverine, Rupny, WERNER and
GOLDMAN.
RoBeErtT Bak, Séructural survey of the Adirondack anorthosite. (illustrated).
The pre-Cambrian rocks of the Adirondack Mountains, New York, consist of
an oldest system of marbles and schists—the Grenville formation—and three
igneous rocks—an anorthosite, a gabbro and a syenite series. The anortho-
site forms a central massif which is surrounded by the syenite, and the gab-
bros form hundreds of small round areas in the whole region. The Grenville
formation appears as isolated fragments in the intrusive rocks.
The geologists of the New York State Geological Survey have held that the
three igneous rocks crystallized from three independent molten magmas and
that the order of intrusion was (1) anorthosite, (2) syenite series, (3) gabbro.—
In 1917, N. L. Bowen maintained that anorthosite and syenite are co-mag-
* Regeneration seems to be uncommon in nemas.
Additional articles consulted—see zur Strassen’s bibliographic list, 1896.
242 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 12
matic rocks, the anorthosite representing a residue of solid crystals which had
precipitated in the parental magma, while the syenite was considered the
mother liquor. The resulting controversy in the literature indicates a certain
scarcity of structural data which the speaker has tried to supply through spe-
cial studies in the field. The results of his studies are:.
The anorthosite, the gabbro and the syenite series are all members of one
and the same parental magma. Forty-seven examined gabbros grade into
anorthosite or syenite, and no intrusive contacts have been seen. Gabbros
have developed in the parental magma through clustering and accretion of
solid ferromagnesian minerals, due to frictional forces between the individual
crystal grains. ‘The process begins with small lumps, leads to lenses and
layers, and ends with spherical bodies as large as two miles in diameter. The
larger gabbros have settled with reference to the surrounding magma, the
smaller ones have not.
The anorthosite originated through accumulation of solid labradorite
crystals in the magma chamber, as Bowen has maintained. The syenite is
not, as a rule, intrusive into the anorthosite but grades into it; there is good
evidence that it: is the mother liquor of the parental magma which has been
squeezed out from a central crystal-filled chamber into the surrounding Gren-
ville formation where the syenite forms a multitude of sill-like masses.
The anorthosite is very likely a lens tilted to the northeast at 30°. Both
indirect and direct observations point to this fact.
It is believed that a parental magma of unknown composition, but possibly
resembling that of a quartz diorite, advanced from ‘‘under the edge of the
Canadian Shield” obliquely to the southwest into the Grenville formation.
This magma must have carried considerable quantities of solid labradorite
crystals in suspension, and the following processes are thought to have
occurred at the same time: (1) clustering and gathering of dark silicates form-
ing spherical gabbros; (2) compacting and clustering of solid labradorite
crystals, coalescing finally into a large lenslike mass (the anorthosite massif),
with portions of mother liquor enclosed here and there; (3) ejection of the
syenitic mother liquor into the Grenville formation, possibly as far as 30 miles
away from the anorthosite.
The arrangement of the primary joint systems is in harmony with this
general conception of the origin of the intrusive rocks. (Author’s abstract.)
462ND MEETING
The 462nd meeting of the Society was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cos-
mos Club, March 12, 1930, President G. R. MANSFIELD presiding.
The Council announced with regret the deaths of CLAUDE E. SIEBENTHAL,
former geologist of the U. 8. Geological Survey, and Capt. H. A. C. JENISON,
formerly of the U. 8. Geological Survey, both Active Members of the Society.
Informal Communications: Davip WuitTe exhibited samples of brine from
a bore hole in San Mateo, California, which have been shown to contain living
bacteria, (Micrococcus littoralis) in sufficient abundance to give a brownish-
wine color to the brine. A possible similar organic source is suggested for the
reddish color of some salt deposits. Discussed by M. I. GoLpMAN.
Regular program: G. R. Putnam: Isostasy. Discussed by Messrs. LOVER-
ING, Swick, WHITE, Ruspry, A. C. LANE, and SPENCER, with reply by Mr.
PUTNAM.
JUNE 19, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 243
D. F. Hewett: Genesis of itron-manganese carbonate concretions in Central
South Dakota.—Recent explorations on a zone of iron-manganese carbonate
concretions in Central South Dakota not only indicate the existence of a large
quantity of low-grade manganese-bearing material but throw light on the
chemical processes involved in their genesis. Natural exposures indicate that
the zone persists for at least 40 miles along the Missouri River, but explora-
tions have been confined to about nine townships near Chamberlain, Brule
County. ‘The zone is 38 feet thick and lies in the Pierre shale about 130 feet
above the Niobrara limestone. Within this zone, the nodules range from 1 to
8 inches in diameter and tend to occur in persistent layers. Most of the
nodules have grown around organic remains, largely shells of Inoceramus, but,
in part, fragments of plants and of bones belonging to marine as well as terres-
trial vertebrates. Explorations include 12 shafts that range from 32 to 48
feet deep and one open cut. In excavating these shafts, all of the nodules
were separated from each 5-foot zone of shale, crushed, sampled, and ana-
lyzed. From five shafts, average samples of shale were collected from succes-
sive 10-foot zones and analyzed. On the average, each cubic yard of material
excavated yielded 164 pounds of concretions containing 15.7 per cent man-
ganese and 11.1 per cent iron.
In reviewing this large amount of analytical data, it was found that (1) the
combined percentages of iron and manganese tended to be constant at 28 to
30 per cent and (2) as the weight of nodules recovered per cubic yard of shale
increased, the percentage of iron in the sample of the nodules increased also.
From this relation, it was inferred that the outer zones of the nodules con-
tained more iron than the inner and this was confirmed by analyses of four
carefully selected samples from a nodule. The ratio of the iron to the man-
ganese content was about twice as much in the outer zone as in the inner zone.
Further, for four of the shafts for which analyses of shale were also available,
after calculating the amount of iron and manganese in the combined nodules
and shale for successive zones, it was found that, although the amount of
-manganese per unit section was about half that of iron, the percentage of the
total amount of manganese now found in the nodules was about twice the
per cent of the iron.
In considering the genesis of concretions rich in iron and manganese car-
bonate, it may be assumed that either (1) the concretions grew on the bottoms
of bodies of water by accessions of iron and manganese from salts in solution
or (2) the concretions formed in the sediments after burial by the local reduc-
tion and migration of iron and manganese present as oxides in the sediments.
From the thermal relations of the oxides and carbonates of iron and man-
ganese established many years ago by Dieulafait, it appears that less heat is
absorbed by the reduction of manganic to manganous oxides than of ferric
to ferrous oxides and more heat is evolved by the formation of manganous
carbonate than of ferrous carbonate. The relations described above, when
viewed in the light of these thermal data, indicate that the concretions have
grown after burial by accessions of carbonates formed by reduction of the
higher oxides of iron and manganeses present in sediments. (Author’s
abstract.)
Discussed by Messrs. BuRCHARD, SPENCER, BRADLEY and HEweEttT.
(To be continued)
244 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 12
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
THE Smithsonian Institution announces that a perfect sphere of flawless
crystal, believed to be the largest in the world, is now the property of the
United States National Museum, thanks to the generosity of Mrs. Worcester
Reed Warner. Mrs. Warner made the gift as a memorial to her late husband,
whose own outstanding achievements were largely in the manufacture of astro-
nomical instruments from quartz.
The crystal ball measures 12{ inches in diameter and weighs 1062 pounds.
Perfect spheres of as much as 6 inches in diameter are great rarities, prized
alike by emperors and museums, so that the uniqueness of the National
Museums’s acquisition may be realized.
The block of quartz from which the ball was cut is said to have come from
Burma and must have weighed over 1,000 pounds. It was cut in China
and polished in Japan. Eighteen months were required for this delicate and
laborious task. According to Dr. George F. Kunz, the Japanese workmen
first round the rough mass of crystal by careful chipping with a small steel
hammer, forming a perfect sphere with the aid of thistoolalone. For grinding
they use cylindrical pieces of cast iron, about a foot in length and full of
perforations, in which the ball is kept constantly turning. The abrasive
material used in this first grinding is powdered emery and garnet. The final
polishing is effected with crocus or rouge (finely divided hematite), giving a
splendid lustrous surface.
The ball came to this country in 1925 and was immediately placed on
temporary deposit in the National Museum. The officials of that institution
express their pleasure that Mrs. Warner’s gift makes it the permanent property
of the nation. The late Mr. Warner, to whom the gift is a memorial, was a
member of the firm of Warner and Swasey, instrument makers. Mr. Warner
designed and constructed three of the largest telescopes in use in this hemi-
sphere, including the 36-inch instrument of the Lick Observatory, the 40-inch
telescope of the Yerkes Observatory and the 72-inch telescope for the Domin-
ion of Canada.
Dr. Warp B. Wuirs, for the last eight years director of the bureau of
chemistry, New York State Department of Agriculture and Markets, has ©
accepted an appointment as chief of food control, Food, Drug, and Insecticide
Administration, to fill the vacancy caused by the death of R. W. Batcom.
OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS
THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if
sent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month,
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Wi1LL1AM Bowie, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. TuckERMAN, Bureau of Standards.
Recording Secretary: CHarLes THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils.
Treasurer; HENRY G. AvEers, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
CONTENTS ae
; - ORIGINAL Parars — i
Physical cheusenne _The ‘compressibility ob rubber. ae H.
enn SReREE NY Meme em me LIS, Krk
Fe
Zoology.—A new pocket mouse from southern Lower Californi aa
and E. A. GOSDMAN. VE oaxr 8.2 Syipvin (tiem ea ewee aoe a
Zoology.—The demanian vessels in nemas of the genus bosisitin
on four new ; Oncholaims. ®: ie SLE ere nse eget:
ipiagiors ar Cphoeaba rides
THE GEOLOGICAL Society. eo ES “ apes Ree. tbo
ay be: See ss .. ate, ge
ScrenTIFIC Notes AND Dig ei Saree ee
~ “>
~ fF 9 ee
Se " .
e
~ Von. 20 Juty 19, 1930 No. 13
Bigoevn
JU] oR at “s >
\ h. ket) tae Ce.
| \# 1ISH).
SN nd
AD fy.
JOURNAL Sen,
| ‘sak MyuSED™
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
Epaar W. WoouarpD Epgar T, WHERRY C. Wrtue Cooke
ch GEORGE WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY BUREAU OF CHEMISTRY AND SOILS U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
H. E. Merwin Haroup Morrison
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. GoLpMAN G. W. StTosEe
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
AGNES CHASE J. R. SWANTON
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
RocGsr C. WELLS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Roya AND GUILFORD AVES,
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
my Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office, at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24. 1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for
in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918.
i
os
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) pro- cat ne
ceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes 239
of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued = 3
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt
publieation is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, inthe
ss ue of the JourNnat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate —
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered _
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. ae . ae
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced
by zine etchings being preferable. ahh
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors = ~~
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in finalform; the editors —
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. oe
Authors’ Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers —
bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and ee
date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, inaccord- =—
ance with the following schedule of prices: .
Wt ie
es ae
Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers ra Ss i; Meee
Se ae Rs Conpideea aie (1 bien aerate a | RL lca oe $2.00 2. So. eee .
100 $ .95 - $1.90 $2.38 $3.00 2.50 : |
150 1.50 2.87 3.50 4.33 3.00
200 1.88 3.60 4.31 5.25 3.50
250 2.40 4.24 5.00 6.00 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in ae :
oe I are may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional 100,
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints aes a
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. So Ee 5 aie
The rate of Subscription per volume 18..... cece cevececcncetenvesdeces pokiee $6.00* a re aa
Semi-monthly numbers...............cceeeeeeeee Re Se SERS Ae Pe AS + We ape
Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and 15).... oa ee ss” ‘<
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’and — rec, hl
addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C. oe
Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other publications. _ Hie v ves
__ Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made — 2
within thirty days after date of the following issue. Me
A
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.C0. Special rates has ee : -
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy eS ee
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 20 JuLy 19, 1930 No. 13
GENERAL SCIENCE.—The Philosophical Society of Washington
through a thousand meetings... W. J. HumpHreys, U. 8. Weather
Bureau.
Tonight, the one thousandth on which we have foregathered to
learn of new discoveries in the limitless field of science, we turn aside
from discussions of the outer world to a few minutes of self-contempla-
tion—to recall how, as a society, we came to be, and, lest we forget,
to relate again a little of our own history since that natal day some
o9 years ago.
Before considering ourselves specifically, however, it will be interest-
ing to review briefly our immediate antecedents. From records
kindly examined by our fellow member, Mr. F. E. Brasch, Chief of the
Smithsonian Division of the Library of Congress, and from other
sources, especially Bulletin 101 of the United States National Museum
by the late Richard Rathbun, a former president of this Society, it
appears that the spirit of philosophical inquiry came to the Nation’s
Capital almost with its founding. Washington himself had envisaged
the establishment here of a great National University, and Joel Barlow
writing to Jefferson, then vice president, from Paris on Sept. 15,
1800, urged that Washington’s hope be realized in the establishment of
an adequately endowed institution for both collecting and disseminat-
ing knowledge, and that “the Institution be called the Philosophic
Society.”’ Nothing came immediately of this suggestion. In Feb-
ruary 1806 Jefferson and Barlow collaborated in drafting a bill for
the establishment of a National Academy and University in Washing-
ton, but again there were no tangible results. In this connection
Jefferson, then President of the American Philosophical Society, said
that he wished there might be a Philosophical Society or Academy at
the seat of government with affiliated Academies in each state.
' Address before the Philosophical Society of Washington, January 18, 1930.
245
246 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
Such keen interest in science and philosophy, shared also by Fulton,
Law, Cutbush, Meigs, Adams and others, inevitably led to the forming
of societies holding stated meetings and following announced pro-
grams. ‘The earliest of these, the Columbian Agricultural Society, was
very ephemeral—founded in 1810 and disbanded in 1812—and had
many elements of the County Fair, holding exhibits and awarding
premiums for things raised on the farm or made in the home. The
next in order, and really the first learned society of Washington, the
Metropolitan Society, was formed June 15, 1816, but on the adoption
of its constitution, Aug. 8, 1816, changed its name to the Columbian
Institute for the Promotion of Arts and Sciences. Its activities were
largely agricultural and horticultural together with the collection
and display of museum specimens. In 1817 the Medical Society of
the District of Columbia was formed, as was also (on March 13) the
Washington Botanical Society. The latter, devoted mainly to the
study of the plants of the District of Columbia, became inactive in
three or four years and quietly vanished in 1826. The Columbian
Institute, too, soon became moribund, despite the interest of a few
faithful spirits, and in 1837 ceased entirely to exist as an active
organization. Perhaps its most conspicuous product was the creation
and maintenance for nearly 20 years of a botanic garden, at the very
place where thirteen years later the present United States Botanic
Garden was established.
On May 15, 1840 the National Institution, later changed to National
Institute, was organized in Washington in the expectation, 1t appears,
of controlling and using the Smithsonian bequest, not narrowly and
selfishly, but in a broad and liberal spirit, the spirit the Smithsonian
Institution, though never controlled by this important and influential
organization, was thus enabled more easily to adopt. The National
Institute held meetings for about 20 years and published its proceed-
ings in the form of Transactions and other papers. It was disbanded
near the beginning of the Civil War, and from 1861 to 1871 the only
meetings of scientific men in the city were those of the Saturday Club
and the Potomac Side Naturalists’ Club. Such then, in merest out-
line, were the careers of our worthy predecessors.
At the end of this time the many learned men then living here, where
life again had become normal, were anxious for the benefits to be
derived from the regular meetings of a formal organization, and so it
came to pass that the Philosophical Society of Washington, embracing
all sciences save those, if they be sciences, of speculative thought, had
its origin in the following initiatory letter, dated, it appears, March
12 TSG
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 247
Prof. Joseph Henry, LL.D.
The undersigned respectfully request you to preside at a meeting which
they propose to hold for the purpose of forming a society, having for its
object the free exchange of views on scientific subjects, and the promotion of
scientific inquiry among its members.
M. C. Metres, F. V. HAaypsEn,
BENJAMIN PEIRCE, J. EK. Hitcarp,
TuHeEo. GILL, J. H. Lang,
PETER PARKER, S. F. Batrp,
F. B. M&ExK, WALTER L. NICHOLSON,
GMS Les, Jere Teny, Wo. H. DaAtt,
Wo. B. Taynor, B. FRANKLIN GREENE,
Cuas. A. SCHOTT, S. V. BENET,
1D, 183. ie wicoynay, HORACE CAPRON,
THOMAS ANTISELL, THORNTON A. JENKINS,
J. J. WOODWARD, Grorece H. Eiiot,
J. 5S. BILLinecs, W. T. SHERMAN,
J. K. BARNES, GEORGE C. SCHAEFFER,
C. H. Crang, TuHos. LINCOLN CASEY,
GEORGE A. OTIs, JNO. G. PARKE,
ALBERT J. Myer, B. F. SANpDs,
A. A. HUMPHREYS, A. B. Dykr,
ASAPH HALL, J. B. WHEELER,
SIMON NEWCOMB, Ave LACK OING
Wo. HARKNESS, ELIsHA Foote,
Bele Crane SALMON P. CHASE.
Je Ele ©) Comnmin,
The Signers of this letter represented, we see, every branch of both
the natural and the exact sciences.
The Society was incorporated in the City of Washington, District
of Columbia, in 1901. The letter requesting incorporation was dated
May 15, 1901, and signed as follows:
Wm. H. Datu, Founder, oe
THEO. GILL, Founder, 1c
SIMON Newcoms, Founder, (L.8.)
Cyrus ADLER, (L.8.) JAMES H. Gorg, (L.8.)
Marcus BAKk&R, ars) JoHn G. HAGEN, @EzSs)
Louis A. BAukR, (L.8.) JOHN F. Hay¥Forp, (L.8.)
FrANK H. BicELtow, (L.8.) Gero. W. LITTLEHALES, (L.S.)
F. W. Cuarke, (Ess) CHARLES F. Marvin, _ (L.8.)
Wn. A. Dr CarinpRy, (L.8.) H. M. Paut, (L.8.)
RoBERT FLETCHER, (LiaS.)) J. W. PowE 1, (S*)
G. K. GILBERT, Gress) RIcHARD RATHBUN, (L.8.)
Guo. M. SternserG, (L.8.) J. E. WATKINS, (L.8.)
Orto H. Tirrmann, _ (L..8.) CHARLES K. WEAD, (L.8.)
F. W. True, (L.S.) Isaac WINSTON. (L.8.)
‘S.)
This letter was acknowledged before Henry E. Cooper, Notary
Public, May 18, 1901, and filed May 20, 1901.
CHas. D. WancoTtT, (1.8
248 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
The presidents of the Society, representing various sciences, have
been :—
*JoSsEira HENRY. 40.6205". 1871—78 G. W. LittuEnALES......2 4. 1905
: NE & 187880 *CLEVELAND ABBE........... 1906
SIMON NEWCOMB .....-. , 1909 *Joun F. Hayrorp........... 1907
TT. WOODWARD rise Skint oe 1881 Lb. A. BAgERe. 3 st2 eee
FW. B. TAYLOR: =... :2.2..2.4 S82) 4=CQSKe WEAD. oe = eee
AP Wes OWE lalact: =. ye = ee 1883: *R.S; WoopwARD :.;-2) a .. 19
ES Cx WiHbRING v4... eee 1884 A. lL. Day:. 24:3 eee
FASAPH TAL: 2..0...00.0. 2225 1885 FEOB: ROSAs2. 52.2
yO a GS ee ei ee 1886 C. G. ABpor....). 3.4. 1913
*Wm. HARKNESS.......3..... 1887 “*L. A Fiscuer... >. 1914
*GARRICK MALLERY......:... 1888 W.S. HIcHELBERGER. 7S 1915
*J. R. HASEMAN.-/5...0....22 1889 ~L.J. Bricéss2 See 1916
=(0. he RON. oe tee 1890 E.. BUCKINGHAM... 4. 2a 1917
7a) C, ManpENHADIG so. 22 1891 G, K. BURGESS... 3a 1918
2G 1K, GIEBnR ee wae s beeen 1892 W..J. HUMPHREYS... 2 eee 1919
7G bROWN: GOODE Eee a. hee 1893 R. B. SOSMAN. ....... eee
FROBERTELETCHER: &.. 50h 1894 Ru. Paris: -< . 323 1921
We EL DAtiIie. oo ae re eee K.-C. CRItteNnDEN |e 1922
KW: Cua ich sr a ae 1896 W.P. Waite: ..... eee 1923
7 NPA R CUS BAKER 5.4 ee, Se Oy D, Li: HaAzaARD: . > 1924
7 A BiGRiow sss ee -. 1898 J. A, FamemMinc: 2) > ae 1925
OF Ei. “Riarnwann eee eee 1899 W. Bowtl......:.¢). 32
#(, M.uSTHRNBERG..:....-%:.: 1900. *J-P. Avur:.> .;.2)) =e 1927
2D WALCOTT. 2a eee Oi Pau R. Hey. 2)...
“RIGHARD HRATHRUN eo. 1. lL OO2 L.A OADAMS... .. cs... ae 1929
J: H, GORB2 2.00.) 22.2 oo 1903" Water DD; LAMBERT) =e
Crit INGA VEN, eee ees. 1904
* Deceased.
Returning now to the earliest meetings, we have, quoting from
Volume I of the Society’s Bulletin:
1st Meeting. March 18, 1871.
Prof. Joseph Henry in the Chair.
In response to this call [the letter quoted above of March 12, 1871, to
Joseph Henry] a meeting of the subscribers thereto was convened and held at
the Smithsonian Institution, in the Regent’s room, on Monday, March 13,
1871. The outline of a Constitution was adopted, and under it the following
gentlemen, who collectively should constitute a GENERAL COMMITTEE
for the transaction of the business of the Society, were elected officers :—
PRESIDENT.
Joseph Henry.
VICE-PRESIDENTS:
M. C. Meigs, Horace Capron,
J. E. Hilgard. Wm. B. Taylor.
TREASURER.
Peter Parker.
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 249
SECRETARIES.
Boke -Crais, Theodore Gill.
MEMBERS AT LARGE OF THE GHNERAL COMMITTEE.
Thomas Antisell, EK. B. Elliott,
Jie @. Corin: W. T. Sherman,
S. Newcomb, T. L. Casey,
S. F. Baird, T. A. Jenkins,
J. J. Woodward.
The Constitution was then referred to the General Committee for verbal
expression; and the Committee was also empowered to propose Rules and
By-Laws for the Government of the Society.
2nd Meeting. March 18, 1871.
The President in the Chair.
Professor 8. F. Baird communicated to the Society, on behalf of the author,
a copy of a memoir entitled—
OFFICIAL REPORT OF THE YELLOWSTONE EXPEDITION OF
1870, IBS IWUHW I, Gi, CC. IDOAWNII, AID WW, So (Ga nvaosas Ny
Thus, organized in the city of Washington, District of Columbia,
on March 13, 1871, the Philosophical Society promptly began, March
18, 1871, its scientific career, which it has pursued ever since with
much of that quiet dignity and singleness of purpose that characterized
its founders.
In his anniversary address, November 18, 1871, Professor Henry
spoke on the character and object of this society. Several passages
are here quoted from this address. They give us first hand informa-
tion on our subject, and at the same time reveal to us something of
the personality of this great character, the most scholarly of gentlemen
and the most gentlemanly of scholars. ‘“‘Man,” he says, “is a sympa-
thetic being, and no incentive to mental exertion 1s more powerful than
that which springs from a desire for the approbation of his fellow men;
besides this, frequent interchange of ideas and appreciative encourage-
ment are almost essential to the successful prosecution of labors requir-
ing profound thought and continued mental exertion. Hence, it is
important that those engaged in similar pursuits should have oppor-
tunities for frequent meetings at stated periods.’’—‘‘Furthermore, a
society of this kind becomes a means of instruction to all its members,
the knowledge of each becoming, as it were, the knowledge of the
whole.”’
He then discusses the desirability of publishing a Bulletin. This
was done with the aid of the Smithsonian Institution, to and including
the 378th meeting, Dec. 19, 1891, of the Society as a whole, and the 64th
250 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
meeting, April 1, 1891, of the mathematical Section. The resulting
eleven volumes contain, in addition to lists of members, officers, by-
laws, et cetera, the programs of all meetings, abstracts of many papers,
and a few articles in full. Four additional volumes of the Bulletin
were published by the Society, bringing its records down to and inelud-
ing the year 1910. On April 22, 1911, it was agreed to defer the
further publication of the Bulletin and instead thereof to publish to
the extent of 70 pages per year, if so much be needed, in the JoURNAL
OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES and to subscribe to this
Journal for all members of the Society who may not at the time also
be members of the Academy. ‘This arrangement appears to have
been reasonably satisfactory and still is in force.
Professor Henry also comments in his first address to the Society on
the relatively large number of scientific workers in Washington, and on
the extent of instrumental and library facilities then available.
“With so many facilities,’ he says, ‘‘as exist in the city of Washing-
ton for the pursuit of science, this Society would be derelict of duty
did it fail to materially aid, through communion of thought and
concert of action, the advancement of the great cause of human im-
provement.”
In this recognition of the fact that opportunity implies duty Henry
was right. Many centuries ago the same idea was most forcefully
expressed in the parable of the trees and their fruit, and it is eternally
true. Since that time, more than 58 years ago, when Joseph Henry,
the first president of our Society, spoke so wisely, the scientific facilities
and opportunities in Washington have vastly increased, and with
them have equally grown our imperative duty to produce abundant
and good results. Our tree, the Philosophical Society, still bears
plenteous fruit of the finest quality and in addition to that, it has
furnished many scions that have grown into independent trees, until
where once there was but a single tree now there are twenty, or more,
each sturdy and an annual bearer of copious crops. Indeed the
Society early in its career made the way easy for such a spread and
independent development by adopting the following as a standing
rule—a rule it long retained:
Sections representing special branches of science may be formed by the
General Committee upon the written recommendation of twenty members of
the Society.
Under this authority J. E. Hilgard and nineteen other members of
the Society requested on Jan. 27, 1883, that a Section in Mathematical
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 251
Science be formed, and such a section was organized on March 29,
1883, and for nearly ten years held independent and successful meet-
ings. After a time, however, when the Society had become more and
more mathematical through the loss of the anthropologists, 1879;
the biologists, 1880; the chemists, 1884; the entomologists, 1884;
and the geographers, 1888—when there was left only mathematics and
its more or less immediate dependents, physics, astronomy, geodesy
and geology—the mathematical Section ceased to exist as such, its
last meeting being the 68th, Nov. 30, 1892. In truth the Society
and this Section had become so nearly one and the same that inde-
pendent meetings on their part were no longer desirable. However,
that was by no means the end of the establishment of new scientific
societies in Washington.
Still another scion sprang from this original tree, a scion that grew
mightily and that had something of the properties of all the others as
well as characteristics distinctly its own. It early (1878) came into
being in this fashion. After the formal presentation of scientific
papers had been completed, whether in some office or elsewhere, it
often happened that many of those present fell into pleasant and
profitable discourse on various topics, a discourse that out of regard to
a janitor’s endurance, or for some other reason, had to be broken off
abruptly, or continued on the street or, and often, in some favorite
rathskeller. This was the origin of that other scion, sprung from
the desire for free and friendly discourse between scholars, and known
the world over as the Cosmos Ciub.
And the times have changed. In the earlier days of the Society the
universe was its province and every science a congenial topic. The
knowledge and the interest of the Henrys and the Newcombs was
broad and comprehensive; ours is attenuated. The entomologist’s
father, for instance, knew bugs, he himself knows a bug, while his son
may perhaps, know only a particular flea that lives on that bug!
Nor is the physicist any exception to this involution or devolution
process. Once he knew something of the phenomena about him, and
was happy in that knowledge. Today, well, all too frequently he gets
into a metaphysical muddle over the eighteen hundredth portion of a
hydrogen atom. Of course the electron is a mighty important thing
and is fully worthy of all the attention it is receiving, but one does
wish that there were enough good physicists to give many other things
the attention they also deserve. Often we look at our program, I fear,
and say: “‘Humph, nothing here about the eighteen hundredth portion
of the hydrogen atom. One paper is on the proton, in which I am not
252 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
interested; and the other on the photon, and that bores me. I shall
stay at home.” Well, the proper time to come is every time, and
the most urgent time to come is when the subject under discussion is
the one you know least about.
And the times have changed in another way too. Only a quarter of
a century ago, a mere yesterday it seems, the meetings of the Society
had the air of formal dignity. The presiding officer always, or nearly
always, honored the occasion by appearing in evening dress, and so too
on many, if not most, occasions did the speakers; though of course it
always was what a man said, and not what he wore when he said it,
that really counted. Nor was this the only formality we of the older
generation recall regretfully, or amusedly, as our mood may deter- —
mine. Who, we wonder, when a Woodward was presiding or a New-
comb speaking, would have had the temerity to burn, even for a
moment, incense on the altar of the goddess Nicotine; or in any other
way mar, or ease, again as our mood may suggest, the formal dignity
of the occasion? Why, Sirs, we as lief would have gone to a wedding
in our shirt sleeves, or puffed a pipe in church!
The activity of the Society is well shown by the fact that to cata-
logue only the first 310 of its regular meetings, and the first 35 meetings
of the Mathematical Section, required 61 double-column octavo
pages in fine print. Nor has the Society been any less active latterly
than formerly, though more restricted in its scope. Here, A. B.
Johnson, J. C. Welling, and others, told of the anomalies of sound
signals, in which Joseph Henry, John Tyndall, and Lord Rayleigh
were so greatly interested. Here, Alexander Graham Bell told of his
interesting experiments on the photophone. Here, that fascinating
shibboleth, isostasy, was first given to the world, April 27, 1889, in an
interesting paper on the problems of Physical Geography by C. E.
Dutton. Here, isostasy had much of its development under John F.
Hayford, and still flourishes under the constant care of William Bowie.
Here, in 1896, a decade before there ever was an aeroplane in the sky,
Albert F. Zahm presented a paper on skin friction that is a classic in
the science of aviation. Here, C. G. Abbott has kept us informed of all
the work of himself and others on solar radiation. Here, E. B. Rosa
brought to our knowledge the measurements of extreme accuracy which
he, N. E. Dorsey, and their colleagues, were making of fundamental
electrical units.
Here, too, many another outstanding paper was presented, for these
are only excellent examples to illustrate the sustained activity of the
Society through a thousand meetings, and the earnest of what the
next thousand, and the next and next, will be.
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY DEP
IMPORTANT DATES IN THE SOCIETY’S HISTORY
1871, March 18, Society founded.
1874, June 6, adoption of the rule that in the official records of the Society no
title except ‘‘Mr.”’ shall be used.
1883, January 27, Mathematical Section formed.
1887, March 26, 300th meeting of the Society, and its first in the Assembly
Hall of the Cosmos Club, H. Street and Madison Place, where it has
met ever since, except occasionally, and then usually in conjunction with
some other society and for special reasons. For a number of years
previous to this date the meetings had been in the library of the Surgeon
General’s Office, old Ford’s Theater, east side of 10th Street, between
E and F, N.W.
1893, February 18, 400th meeting of the Society, held at the Corcoran, corner
Fourteenth and K streets Northwest, and consisting of a banquet, with
toasts and reminiscences; reported in Volume 12 of the Bulletin. Eight
founders and 81 other members and guests were present.
1899, April 15, celebration of the 500th meeting by a dinner at Rauscher’s,
Connecticut Ave. and L. Street, with 39 persons present.
1901, May 20, Society incorporated in the city of Washington, District of
Columbia.
1911, April 22, decision adopted to defer the further publication of the Bulle-
_ tin, and to publish in, and subscribe to, the Journal of the Washington
Academy of Sciences.
1925, December 12, 55th annual meeting, at which the last surviving founder,
WiuuiaM H. Dat, spoke on “‘Some Recollections of the Founding of the
Philosophical Society,’ and James H. Gorn and Witiiam H. Hotmes
gave accounts of the early days of the Society. Unfortunately none of
these addresses was preserved.
1930, January 18, 1000th meeting, as per copy of program below, at which
the foregoing historical sketch was read, supplemented by 31 lantern
portraits of deceased prominent members of the Society, and followed
by interesting reminiscences by Messrs J. H. Gorr and C. F. Marvin.
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON
The 1000th Meeting will be held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium at 8.15 P.M.,
Saturday, January 18, 1930.
Program :
W. J. Humphreys—The Philosophical Society of Washington through a
Thousand Meetings. (Illustrated).
J. H. Gore and C. F. Marvin—Reminiscences of the Early Days of the
Philosophical Society of Washington.
Recently elected to membership: James H. Taylor, George Washington Uni-
versity; Bruce L. Wilson, Bureau of Standards; Robert F. Mehl and H. B. Maris,
Naval Research Laboratory.
L. V. JUDSON and O. S. ADAMS, Secretaries.
Committee on Communications: Walter D. Sutcliffe (Coast and Geodetic Survey) ;
W. G. Brombacher (Bureau of Standards); George R. Wait (Department of Ter-
restrial Magnetism).
PORTRAITS
Eight deceased eminent members, typical of the many intellectual giants who
have adorned the society.
The several presidents, in their order of rncumbency.
biog
"
« A
‘
.
-
y
2
i
aed n <
a. ae
J 7 oo
y
A ‘
-
,
: .
a
-
-
4 -
*.
@
s
é
,
as a4
7 7 -
Lb. «ee
~~
a
4 q
T 7<
f - 7
7 7 A
7 @
« _
>
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 207
YOR
SSS
SPENCER FULLERTON BAIRD
1823-1887
258 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL? 20, No. 13
ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL
1847-1922
209
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
HUMPHREYS
JULY 19, 1930
ee:
ILLIAM FERREL
W
1817-1891
260 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
THEODORE NICHOLAS GILL
1837-1914
261
SOCIETY
: PHILOSOPHICAL
HUMPHREYS
fumyY 1951930
RD
A
JULIUS ERAsSMUS HILG
1825-1891
262 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
JONATHAN HoMER LANE
1819-1880
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 263
SAMUEL PIERPONT LANGLEY
1834-1906
voL. 20, No..13
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
264
BENJAMIN PEIRCE
1809-1880
265
SOCIETY
PHILOSOPHICAL
.
e
HUMPHREYS
JULY 19, 1930
PEE LEE EL
ip
HENRY
JOSEPH
1871-1878
266 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
Srimon NEWCOMB
1878-1880
1909
267
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
HUMPHREYS
JULY 19, 1930
J. J. Woopwarp
1881
268 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
W. B. TaYLor
1882
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 269
J. W. PowELu
1883
270 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
J. C. WELLING
: 1884
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 2701
ASAPH HALL
1885
272 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
J. S. BILnInes
1886
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 273
M. HARKNESS
1887
GARRICK MALLERY
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 13
274
1888
275
COO . ssi
OG INKS : ‘ WANN
ARO
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
HUMPHREYS
JULY 19, 1930
oo
it eR ei Oittes elon
x
EASTMAN
1889
.
R
J
276 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
C. E. Dutton
1890
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY Dh
T. C. MENDENHALL
1891
2
~“I
8
JOURNAL
OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
G. K. GILBERT
1892
vou. 20, No. 13
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 279
G. Brown GooDE
1893
VoL. 20, No. 13
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
TON
‘r
X
JOURNAL OF THE WASHING
280
RoBERT FLETCHER
1894
281
SOCIETY
PHILOSOPHICAL
HUMPHREYS
JULY 19, 1930
1895
282 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
F. W. CLARKE
1896
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 283
.
Marcus BAKER
1897
284 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
F. H. BIGELOW
1898
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 285
yy
Uj
Le
Yj tify Ly
jj
Zi
Yj
yyy
O. H. TirtMann
1899
286 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
G. M. STERNBERG
1960
JULY 19, 1930
HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL
C. D. Watcotrt
1901
SOCIETY
87
288 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
RicHaRD RATHBUN
1902
289
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
HUMPHREYS
JuLY 19, 1930
. GORE
1903
H
J
290 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 20, No. 13
C. F. Marvin
1904
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 291
G. W. LitTLEHALES
1905
292 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 13
=
CLEVELAND ABBE
1906
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 293
JOHN F. HAyForD
1907
294 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
L. A. BAUER
1908
295
SOCIETY
PHILOSOPHICAL
.
°
HUMPHREYS
gjuLY 19, 1930
WG
<<
\
\
——
. WEAD
1909
.
C
296 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
R. S. WoopwarbD
1910
JuLY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: FHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 297
A. L. Day
1911
298 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 13
EE. B: Rosa
1912
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 299
300 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
L. A. FIscHER
1914
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 301
W.S. EIcHELBERGER
1915
302 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
i... J. Brieces
1916
303
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
HUMPHREYS
JULY 19, 1930
EK. BucKINGHAM
1917
304. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 2C, No. 13
G. K. BurGEss
1918
305
SOCIETY
PHILOSOPHICAL
HUMPHREYS
JULY 19, 1930
W. J. HUMPHREYS
1919
306 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 13
R. B. SosMAN
1929
JULY 19, 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 307
R. L. Faris
LED
308
JOURNAL
OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 20, No. 13
E. C. CRITTENDEN
1922
JULY 19; 1930 HUMPHREYS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 309
W. P. WHITE
1923
310 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
DY La BazaRp
1924
oll
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
HUMPHREYS
JULY 19, 1930
ye
CHE
J. A. FLEMING
1925
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Wn. Bowl1e
1926
VOL. 20, No. 13
> PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY B13
uy 19, 1980 HUMPHREY
_
J: P.. AULT
1927
314 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
P. Reber
1928
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
HUMPHREYS
JULY 19, 1930
ADAMS
1929
Isl
L
316 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 13
W. D. LAMBERT
1930
OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS
THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page ii
sent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month.
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Witt1aM Bowie, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. TuckeRMAN, Bureau of Standards.
Recording Secretary: CHARLES THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils.
Treasurer: Henry G. Avurs, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
“
E EYS er rr)
‘4
General Seience—The Philosophical Society of
W. J. Ho
meetil
C. WrtuEe Cooxe
U. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
Hushis Morrison
ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
apes fe GW, Ston
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
J. R. Swanton
ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
Roger C, WELLS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
oe ee AND Be Ae AVES.
Baltimore, MARYLAND
Claés Matter, pote 1, 1923, at the Leste at Pca aa Md., under the
t 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate o te ae F provided for
ion | 1108, Act of October 8, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This JOURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, pablishiat he oe
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) pro- —
ceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affliated societies; (3) notes
of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corres ond to calendar years. Pro re
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript pest inge the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the —
ss ue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
gy Py 4
~\ } , *
| .
P , af =" = >. B 8 ;
ee Oe eee ee
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should ey
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The |
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References + =. 4
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate ~
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered —
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be ‘reproduced
by zinc etchings being preferable.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors —
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors —
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Authors’ Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Coven?
bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and
date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in io 5
ance with the following schedule of prices:
Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
Ai) Vin aig pe ST rae oe Sah artikel SERPs Bat WES $2.00
100 $ .50 $ .55 $ .60 $1.10 2.50
150 .90 1.00 1.10 1.60 3.00
200 15 1.50 1.60 2.10 3.50
250 1.65 2.00 2.10 2.60 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in — e
aS corner may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional ig Ses
ioe
eh
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints a isk
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. 5 “yaa a :
The rate of Subscription per volume t8.......002eeee08 AUS be ae iat te ae oe : 5.00% ane
Semi-monthly numbers. ....: 3 ce 6.0 Loe seco ond dew ss win ale duis pot ae ele a 4
al
Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and TS yea
Remittances should be made aed a to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetie Survey, Washington, D.C.
Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other publications. R : a
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue. :
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. "Special rates per ee
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy ; We
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 20 AUGUST 19, 1930 No. 14
EVOLUTION.—The mechanism of organic evolution.! CHARLES B.
DAVENPORT, Department of Genetics, Carnegie Institution of
Washington. (Communicated by W. J. HUMPHREYs).
As we look over the world today we see, as the ancients did, the
marvellous phenomenon of a world populated not only by humans but
also by many hundred thousand so-called species of animals and plants
existing in uncountable individuals whose number can no more be
expressed by the ordinary system of numbering than astronomical
distances can be readily expressed in miles. A cubic millimeter of the
blood of a leucaemic mouse may contain over a million white cor-
puscles; and there may well be 1,000 such cubic millimeters of blood in
amouse. ‘This gives us a billion white corpuscles in one mouse, not to
consider the other cells of the mouse’s body. ‘These white corpuscles
are essentially organisms, with powers of food-gathering, assimilation,
excretion, locomotion, sensation, ete. And this is but one mouse.
Even if we assume so few as 23 house mice to a human being on the
earth (and mice are ubiquitous) we shall have 5 billion billion white
blood corpuscles in house mice alone. But probably the pathologist
might have as many bacteria in one of his test-tubes.
I have sometimes speculated on the number of organisms visible to
the low power of the microscope that are in our Inner Harbor at the
end of August, when it has a creamy, soup-like consistency. Assuming
1 per cubic millimeter, which is certainly far too small, there would be a
quadrillion individuals in this space which would occupy only a
square millimeter in the one-millionth map of the world, which has
over half a billion square millimeters.
1 Presented before the 233rd meeting of the Academy, as one of the series of papers on
Origin and Evolution. Received for publication April 28, 1930.
317
318 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 14
Pardon me for wearying you with figures. IJ have wanted to put you
in a position to grant my first point that the number of individual
organisms on the globe is essentially infinite, though the number of
kinds that naturalists have been able to count and describe in the past
150 years is still finite.
Next, I would call to your attention that most of these individuals
have ashort life and are quickly replaced by others, even if we leave out
of account the unicellular organisms which retain their individuality
only for the few hours or minutes necessary to reorganize and divide
again. Even if we assume that the average length of life of an individ-
ual is a year—and it is probably not over a day—then we have to
consider the remarkable phenomenon of an annual wiping off of the
slate, as it were, of this infinitude of individuals each year and their
re-formation the next year. ‘This is possible owing to the immense
reproductive capacity of certain species. Thus one oyster may lay
50,000,000 eggs during a few days in the summer and one sea urchin
20,000,000 eggs. These are samples, merely, of reproductive capacity
of individuals. Perhaps now we have gained some conception of the
number of individuals that have been produced each year on the earth,
during we do not know how many millions of years.
If now you are willing to admit that the problem of organic evolution
is that of the evolution of an organic mass consisting of an infinitude of
individuals reproduced during an infinitude of generations, that may
serve as a starting point to our inquiry as to the mechanism of organic
evolution. Thank you!
Now, each individual has a certain recognizable form and acquires
it through a certain course of development, be it more or less complex.
The center of control of this form is largely, if not chiefly, in the chromo-
somes of the organic cells,—in its genes, to be more precise. In fact
the soma of organisms, what we see, is just an index of the form-pro-
ducing and maintaining factors of the genes—always, of course,
recognizing that the end result is a sort of reaction between gene and
environment. Now if the world of organisms is composed of an infini-
tude of kinds it is because the germ plasm is of an infinitude of kinds.
The course of organic evolution has been, and is, what it is because the
germ plasm has undergone and is undergong the changes that it has
undergone and is undergoing. ‘This change of the germ plasm is called
mutation. Mutation is one of the great factors in organic evolution.
Now what do we know about mutation? First, we know that it is
wide-spread. ‘This knowledge has first become precise, as organisms
have been studied in successive generations, under controlled conditions.
AuGausT 19, 1930 DAVENPORT: MECHANISM OF EVOLUTION ol9
Such mutations have long been known among domesticated organisms
like potatoes, poultry, guinea pigs and dogs. Mutations have been
so long known among domesticated organisms that it was natural for
Darwin to discuss ‘‘Variation under Domestication” and for him and
others to consider what quality of domestication it is that induces
mutation. During the past 25 years in several species of animals taken
from the wild, many generations have been followed. And in conse-
quence we now know that mutation has not necessary relations to
domestication; but only that domestication enables us to see and
perhaps preserve such mutations. Rather, I should say, the product
of such mutation, for the mutation has occurred in the germ plasm
before it has become visible in the soma of the organism that develops
under the control of the mutated germ plasm.
Let us now consider some of the facts of mutation that experimental
study has revealed.
First, mutation is probably universally occurring in all germ plasms.
Thus, in various mammals that have been reared so that they can be
observed, mutation has occurred in all visible parts, in internal organs,
and in resistance to disease. In man, whichyis the mammal that has
been most thoroughly studied, we have mutations in hairiness, pigmen-
tation, skin growths, appendages and digits, teeth, sense organs, form
of internal organs, like the iliocecal valve, size and functioning of the
endocrines, structure and functioning of the nervous system, of the
blood and of the reproductive system. Finally, we have mutations in
disease-resistance, due to obscurer morphological or bio-chemical idio-
syncrasies.
Among pigeons, mutations in color, form of beak, nervous behavior
have arisen in the Whitman-Riddle series. In poultry, I have in the
course of 10 years got apparently new mutations in toes, wings and
nervous reactions. And any poultry fancier knows of the mutations
that have occurred in the past 75 years in color and pattern, in comb,
in cerebral hernia and crest, in feet, wings and beak, and in egg-laying
capacity.
In the insects which have been bred for rapidity of generations
mutation has been repeatedly found. In Drosophila, Muller computes
that among 500 factors in the X-chromosome of Drosophila each,
in the average, mutates at the rate of | mutation in 4 years. This
would seem to mean that, if you followed a single chromosome and
when it divided considered one of the daughter chromosomes and so
proceeded through the generations, then at the end of 4 years the
320 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 14
expectation is that in this line of chromosomes some one gene will have
mutated and at the end of 4 more years that gene, or some other in the
chromosome line we are following, will have mutated again. But
there is an infinitude of chromosomes in the totality of all Dro-
sophila melanogasters. The number in a single gonad is vast;
the number of gonads in the world of Drosophilas that swarm in the
autumn over every mass of decaying fruit in a million of orchards as
elsewhere is practically infinite. One sees that just Drosophila melano-
gaster is producing an infinitude of mutations each season, and it has
been producing this infinitude annually for a long time; but timedoes
not count for much, for infinity times a finite number remains infinity.
Drosophila throws upon the world each year, a vast number of kinds of
mutations in inconceivably great numbers.
And Drosophila is not exceptional. Let us take a small water crust-
acean, one of the Daphnids. Banta has reared lines of these in captivity
and examined the progeny daily. In one line of Moina macrocopa,
carried parthenogenetically, a dominant mutation has occurred, on the
average, at least once in 50 generations, but many more recessive muta-
tions have occurred and been phaenotypically unexpressed. Now the
number of Daphnids, which crowd any suitable pond in both hemi-
spheres during each spring and autumn, is beyond conception. Fora
single circular pond a hundred feet in diameter may well contain,during
the season many million Daphnids, if 1 is allowed to the cubic centi-
meter. The total of mutations that occur in one year in Moina
macrocopa must be inconceivably great.
Certain of the lower forms are mutating even more strikingly. At
least such would seem to be the case if the remarkable variations shown
by Leonian in the fungus, Fusarvwm, may be regarded (as seems most
probable) as mutations. Here scores of strains arise, in but a few
years, even in a uniform culture medium, and perpetuate themselves.
The strains vary in their rate of growth, pigment formation, type of
fruiting, kind of spores, and reactions toward temperature, acids, dyes,
and toxic substances. Apparently such mutation is going on all the
time in nature.
As we consider these best known cases of mutation and realize that
all of the countless chromosomes and genes are undergoing occasional
change we are appalled by the universality of mutation and are caused
to wonder how any species remains constant in nature to the extent
that it is possible for a second naturalist, 50 years later, to identify in
nature the species already described; we are less surprised that the
august 19, 1980 DAVENPORT: MECHANISM OF EVOLUTION O21
reviser of a genus a generation or two later will find twice as many
species as his predecessor. We gain a lot of sympathy for the much
abused species-splitter who, observing nature without the restriction of
tradition, finds vastly more species than had been previously described
by his predecessors. [Slides of variations in feral species (species-
groups) were shown. ‘These are probably cases of mutations that have
established or may establish biotypes or incipient species. |
Organisms seem to be producing mutations at an inconceivably
rapid rate, in infinite quantity. The wonder is that there are such
things as species. One is led to inquire if, in describing species, taxono-
mists are not merely inventing transient, evanescent categories.
Such a conclusion is unjustified. Every taxonomist will tell you
that the things he describes and others have described before him are
real entities. If I am studying thrips and wish to secure a species
described 50 years ago as living in a certain composite plant in eastern
Russia, then if I go to the designated locality and look in the designated
species of flower I will find the species with all the characters described
50 or 100 thrips generations ago. How is such an experience in con-
stancy to be harmonized with universal mutation? This is perhaps
the heart of the problem of evolution.
In considering the fixity of some species it must first of all be recog-
nized that a species is a complex of morphological and physiological
characters that can not exist alone but is absolutely dependent upon
the external world for its existence. ‘The organism must live in a me-
dium of such and such physical qualities, at such a temperature, in the
midst of such radiant energy, with access to such and such food stuffs
which it is capable of taking in and utilizing for its metabolism.
Every organism is extraordinarily closely fitted to its environment.
And that environment may be very complex.
I will illustrate this principle by reference to the almost microscopic
Collembola that live on the beach at Cold Spring Harbor (Fig. 1).
They live in an area of apparently washed sand and pebbles in a region
that is covered twice a day several feet deep by sea water and then
exposed to the air, in a region swept by strong winds, overlaid by ice
in winter, and exposed to the hot sun’s rays in summer (Fig. 2).
JOHN R. Mouuer.)
It is now more than twenty years ago that Robertson started
developing his autocatalytic theory of growth. His extensive in-
vestigations in this field, stopped only by his very untimely death,
have been a direct stimulus to a large number of workers in biology
and chemistry. At least in part, because of the acceleration he gave
to the study of growth, the amount of work done in this field increased
enormously during the last ten or fifteen years. As more and more
work was done, it became apparent that the symmetric growth curve
was the exception rather than the rule and modifications of the original
autocatalytic equation, developed from different points of view?
were proposed. Along with these proposed modifications some in-
correct statements regarding the properties of the modified equations
crept into the literature. It is the purpose of this paper to call atten-
tion to these statements and to demonstrate, mathematically, that
they are incorrect.
A rather general form of the autocatalytic equation‘ is
x +b
In i UA a] by) al i sean iety inner eee (1)
JB 2s 58
un es a gt a a (1")
Gx
1 Received June 28, 1930.
* Ropertson, T. B. Journ. Gen. Physiol. 8: 463. 1926; 12: 329. 1929.
$ Crozier, W. J. Journ. Gen. Physiol. 10: 53. 1926.
4 The more general form is:
x tb
In =wKCA = athe th),
307
358 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 15
When b = 0, we have
x
may eaa = KA(t = Hii )icis vt e s ow 2 en
which is the form originally used by Robertson® and later by Brody*
and others for describing the phenomenon of growth. More recently
equation (1’) has been used by Robertson,? Crozier,? and others for
the same purpose.’
All possible modifications of the general equation, (1), are symmetric
about the point of inflection in the sense that either branch of its
eurve may be rotated about the point of inflection until it exactly
coincides with the other branch. For all positive values of t,, the
point of inflection occurs to the right of the x-axis (here, the axis of
ordinates) and when t, = 0, it occurs on the x-axis; it occurs above the
t-axis (here, the axis of abscissas) when b A, and
at the origin when b = A andt,=0. (See Fig. 1.)
Robertson, on several occasions,” has referred to the curve of equa-
tion (1’) as being asymmetric in type. In the summary of his paper
on the growth of normal white mice (1926) he says,
‘3. The first and most extensive autocatalytic process is asymmetrical, being defined
by an equation of the type:
Sern K(t — ti)”
] =
oe ae
the sign preceding b being always the same in both terms in which b occurs. By the
proper selection of the magnitude and sign of b and ti, the point of inflection may be
made to occur in any one of the four quadrants, or at the origin.
5 ROBERTSON, T. B. The chemical bases of growth and senescence. 1923.
6 Bropy, S. Journ. Gen. Physiol. 3: 765. 1921; Bropy, S., and Ragspats, A. C.
Journ. Gen. Physiol. 3: 623. 1921.
7 That the equations used by Robertson and Crozier are essentially the same, al-
though the methods of developing them are different, is clear from the following:
If the differential form of Crozier’s equation,
d
= = (Ki + Kox) (A — x)
be written:
dx Ne Ky, am Ki
ie Ko eG +x) (A — x) = Ke (« ey 2),
the differential form of Robertson’s equation,
dx
qe EF &tH A»,
K
may be obtained from it by substituting k for K2 and b for =
2
SEPTEMBER 19, 1930 TITUS: SYMMETRY OF AUTOCATALYTIC CURVE 309
And in a more recent paper, on sequence of growth cycles (1929), he
Says,
“Tt (equation (1’)) also has the effect of rendering the cycle on either side of the
moment of maximum growth velocity, unequal in slope and amplitude.”’
Snell,® in a foot-note to his paper on defects in the theory that
growth rate is controlled by an autocatalytic process, says,
“Tn a later paper (Robertson, 1926) a different equation is used to permit a slightly
asymmetrical curve, but it does not remedy this defect, or any of the other defects here
discussed.”’ .
in %2 =«(t-t)
ae = k(t-t,)
in X2 =x (t-t)
Be POINTS OF —
INFLECT/ON—~
|
S
| oh lvl
|
|
Fig. 1—Graphs of the autocatalytic equation,
x + 8B
In = k(t — ti).
fe 3K ( ’
N.B. The passing of one of the plotted curves through the origin is merely accidental;
by proper selection of the magnitude of b, the curve may be made to cut the axis of
ordinates above, or below, the origin.
As a matter of fact, are the two halves of the cycle on either side of
the moment of maximum growth velocity unequal in slope and ampli-
tude? Does equation (1’), or (1), define an asymmetric curve? A
negative answer must be made.
§SneuL, G. D. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 15: 274. 1929.
360 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 20, No. 15
Let us consider the differential form of equation (1), 1.e.,
dx
a +b) A — ») kate 5 Aeon (3)
If we let yt ee eg (4)
then dx = dx’ ea Ra eon! ea (5)
and on substituting (4) and (5) in (3) we get
= KG) (A +b) ede (6)
Thus, by a simple linear transformation, we may obtain a differential
equation which is precisely of the same type as the differential form
of equation (2), that is, it is of the same type as
dx it
oF ou K(x) (A =3x) Sees...) (7)
Since the curve of equation (2) is symmetric, it follows that the curve
of equation (1) is also symmetric and that the two halves of the cycle
on either side of the moment of maximum growth velocity are not
unequal in slope and amplitude.
That the curve of equation (1), or (1’), is symmetric may be demon-
strated, in another manner, as follows:
In the case of the equation,
in 2+? kt t) Se a (1")
it may be shown readily that the point of inflection is at
| (ts) G ; “Ail Now, if equal increments of abscissa (t) to the
right and to the left of t, define values of x which are equidistant from
the ordinate a alll
) the curve is symmetric about the point of in-
flection. Such is the case, for when
t=. t on ee a
wets ae
ee 9
x 1 OR te (9)
°n being any real number.
SEPTEMBER 19, 1930 TITUS: SYMMETRY OF AUTOCATALYTIC CURVE ob61
and when (ee ria da 8k: ea pee cP aE (10)
Se cee cee 11
1 ue was b) ( )
and the distance between the ordinates of the curve at
form GS] ace [os]
Aes eee be a Pa GAu = i yer ye lb) (a)
ree, 1 oF ° eer eae rss eae ha
and the distance between the ordinates of the curve at
nk
pean) paren [om |
A ss | Ae See CAM SEE (ena)
eet nk Ie Tih pea Conk ne eel)
2 1+e 2 (1 + &)
The quantities (a) and (8) are identical and thus it has been demon-
strated that the curve is symmetric, since equal increments, to the
right and to the left of t:, define values of x which are equidistant from
the ordinate (* A .)
By suitable algebraic treatment we may also demonstrate, inde-
pendently of the above, that the slope of the two branches of the curve
A —b a m)" and
is the same. If we substitute the ordinates (
oe — m) in the equation for the slope of the curve defined by
equation (1), that is, in
dx
— b aoe Kee cat Ranaee Cees 12
a -~ + Cr) (12)
we get, in the first case:
Om of pede A—b A —b
ae Se ls le | etek A es eee cs
dt aut 2 +m +b)( neato m)
ie k (A) — m*| (oy
nay 5 Rake aks Catia BUS 7
10m being any real number.
362 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 15
and in the second case:
ge 2 ok ee ee
Ge ea
eee eee ]
- > (( ; TA Vk, ogc ote (6)
The expressions (vy) and (6) are identical and thus it has been shown
that the slope of the curve at any two points, which are equidistant
from the point of inflection, is the same; and hence the slope of. the
two branches of the curve is the same.
SUMMARY
Several incorrect statements regarding the curve defined by the
autocatalytic equation,
x +b x +b
ae (A z
ae (A + b) (t t:),0r In 7
In
=k (t — t)
have been made in the literature. These statements are to the effect
that:
(1) the curve described by the above equations is asymmetric, and
(2) the two halves of the curve have unequal slopes.
It has been demonstrated in this paper that these statements are
incorrect.
MICROBIOLOGY .—Myzxzamoebae in soil and decomposing crop
residues.|. CHARLES THOM and KENNETH B. Raper, Bureau of
Chemistry and Soils.
Amoebae are regularly observed and reported by students of soil
organisms. Sandon in his book on Soil Protozoa and Waksman in his
“Principles” reviewed the information available to 1927. Sandon
supplemented the literature by summarizing the studies made at the
Rothamsted Station. He made no reference to the amoeboid phase
of the Myxomycetes and the Acrasieae as members of the soil popula-
tion with characters sufficiently suggestive of protozoa to open the
possibility of confusion. Brierley (1928 p. 16) listed five genera of
Myxomycetes as occurring in soil with ‘“‘evidence that they may live
vegetatively in this habitat.’”’ Waksman in his ‘‘Principles’’, p. 236
refers to the Myxomycetes as including species which are plant para-
1 Received June 17, 1930.
SEPTEMBER 19, 1930 THOM AND RAPER: MYXAMOEBAE IN SOIL 363
sites with the comment that they appear able to maintain themselves
independently in the soil. Krzemieniewski reported that by proper
culture methods many Myxomycetes may be obtained in culture from
the soil. Harper, following Krzemieniewski’s method, isolated Poly-
sphondylium from soil collected in New York City parks. The ex-
tensive cultural studies reported by Olive and others have been prima-
rily concerned with obtaining and identifying the fruiting bodies of
this group of organisms. Very little has been reported to indicate
the distribution and significance of the amoeboid phase or even the
plasmodium phase of these organisms in the soil or in the decaying
vegetation of the meadow or the cultivated field. We were surprised,
therefore, to encounter these organisms in great numbers in the
course of studies begun for entirely other purposes.
In December 1929, samples of decaying grasses and weeds were
collected in an experimental field on the Arlington Farm of the United
States Department of Agriculture. When brought to the laboratory,
selected leaves and stems were cut into convenient lengths and dropped
upon the surface of solidified mannite agar in petri dishes to permit
certain saprophytic organisms present to develop. The nutrient
medium used was free from nitrogen or nearly so, hence considered
only as furnishing a-moist substratum to favor the further develop-
ment of organisms already present upon the grass.
Within a week several myxomycete plasmodia developed and
moved about upon the agar in these plates. Thousands of amoebae or
myxamoebae also spread upon the agar from pieces of decaying grasses
and weeds. Masses of bacteria and mold mycelium covered and
spread outward from every piece of decaying vegetation. Since we
could find no record of observations of Myxomycetes under such
conditions several series of such cultures were made to extend our
knowledge of the presence and abundance of these forms under winter
conditions in Washington and vicinity.
The first of these samples consisted of a few leaves of crab grass
collected on February 6th from a roadside. Prior to this, the grass
had been covered by snow for several days, and was quite wet when
brought to the laboratory. The leaves were cut into convenient
lengths and placed upon mannite agar in petri dishes and the dishes
were held at room temperature. In the course of a few days, plas-
modia were observed in all the plates. Large “‘amoebae”’ and small
amoeboid cells, possibly myxamoebae, were present in considerable
numbers; the latter were particularly numerous. Using a small
sterile pipet, a part of one of the plasmodia was transferred on Febru-
364 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 20, No. 15
ary 12 toa fresh mannite agar plate. To this culture was added from
time to time a suspension of dead bacteria belonging to the B. aerogenes
group. The plasmodium grew slowly but consistently until March
8th when it was transferred to hay infusion agar medium. By fre-
quent transfers it is still in actively growing condition on this medium
after four months. After the snow melted, samples of decaying grass
were again collected from the field on February 8th. These samples
were plated and incubated as before, and again in the course of a
week plasmodia developed in all the plates. Two plates contained
particularly well developed grayish-white plasmodia. These were
more or less fan shape, measuring 4 cm. across the ‘‘fan,’’ with stream
of protoplasm extending back for several centimeters along the path,
which the main portion of the plasmodium had recently traversed.
One of these fruited on February 17th, producing about 150 sporangia
which belonged to the genus Didymiwm. On February 18th a part of
the other plasmodium was transferred to hay infusion agar and is still
active in culture in May. The portion not transferred fruited two
days later as a Didymium.
On February 17 wide mouth bottles of approximately one liter
capacity were half filled with wet sand and sterilized. Samples of
decaying grass from the field were placed on the sand in a rather com-
pact mat three fourths of an inch in depth. By the end of the first
week one of the twelve bottles thus prepared contained a visible plas-
modium which climbed up on the side of the bottle. It was grayish-
white in color and measured 1.5-2 centimeters in diameter. During
the following week plasmodia were observed in two additional bottles.
On February 27th, a few leaves from three of the bottles not containing
visible plasmodia were dropped on mannite agar. Plasmodia de-
veloped in three-fourths of the plates. (See numbers 9, 12 & 13 in
table 2). It was evident that the agar medium was not necessary for
the development of plasmodia.
On February 20 (a warm period in 1930) the tobacco fields of the
Bureau of Plant Industry and the University of Maryland, situated
near Marlboro, Maryland, were visited. Various samples were
collected. One mass of decaying annual grasses and the soft soil
down to about 10 em. and totalling perhaps 1 liter was placed in a
bag and brought to the laboratory where it was transferred to a covered
dish about 25 em. in diameter and 10 cm. deep without adding any
water. In approximately one week a plasmodium moved up from this
mass out upon the glass and spread over about half of the inside of the
SEPTEMBER 19, 1930 THOM AND RAPER: MYXAMOEBAE IN SOIL 365
glass cover. During the following night the fruit bodies of a species of
Didymium were produced.
In other dishes numerous small plasmodia were produced and
spread outward from pieces of grass, ragweed stems and stems of
Erigeron collected from various tobacco plots, and scattered over
mannite agar. In some dishes millions of small myxamoebae were
seen and later fruited abundantly as Dictyostelium.
In these various plates, microscopic examination regularly showed
many encysted as well as active myxamoebae. Microscopic mounts
from the dry stems and leaves as brought to the laboratory showed
many such cysts which appeared to be similar to those which developed
from time to time in the cultures. From these observations it was
evident that myxomycetes and allied forms are well represented in the
tobacco fields of Marlboro.
In the samples collected and plated thus far, no attempt had been
made to separate the standing leaves and culms from those lying on
the soil. The question now arose as to whether the myxomycetes
were present only in the basal portion of standing grass leaves andin
leaves lying on the soil, hence protected against extremes of tempera-
ture and desiccation, or if they were also present in leaves standing
several inches above the soil. And if present in both, what was their
relative abundance in the two? ‘To determine this point a series of
samples were collected; the uppermost portion of standing leaves and
those lying on the soil were collected and plated separately, the
former type being designated by ‘‘A’”’ following the sample number,
the latter type by ‘‘B” following the same sample number. The first
of these were collected on February 21st; other samples being taken
at later dates. Plasmodia appeared in 70% of all plates prepared
from ‘‘A’’ samples and in 67.7% of those prepared from ‘‘B”’ samples.
A full account of these platings is given in table 1.
During the same period some additional ‘‘composite’’ samples were
collected and plated. Plasmodia appeared in 71% of all plates pre-
pared from these samples.
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 20 OcToBER 4, 1930 No. 16
GEOLOGY .—Pleistocene seashores.! C. WytTHE Cooke, U.S. Geologi-
cal Survey.
The Pleistocene terraces of the Atlantic seaboard have excited the
interest of many geologists. The name Columbia was applied to
some of them by McGee in 1887. Darton described them in the
Washington Folio. Shattuck, who was the first to study them in
detail, published on the Maryland terraces in 1901. 3B. L. Johnson
and Stephenson worked out the series in North Carolina; Matson, in
Florida; Cooke, in Georgia; and Wentworth, whose results are still
unpublished, in Virginia. All of these students reached the conclu-
sion that some or all of the terraces are due wholly or in part to in-
vasions of the sea or tidal waters upon the land. Shattuck proved
that the terraces in Maryland were not produced by simple intermit-
tent emergence from the sea but by alternating emergence and sub-
mergence, which he ascribed to oscillations of the land.
If the invasions and retreats of the sea are really due to oscillations
of the land, the terraces ought to be warped or tilted, for it seems very
unlikely that two thousand miles of sea coast should have been rigidly
upheaved and depressed not once, but several times, without warping
or tilting.
My work in 1924 on the physical geography of Georgia convinced
me that the terraces there are not warped, but maintain their horizon-
tality within the State of Georgia. In that investigation I applied a
method, frequently neglected, of defining marine terraces by refer-
ence to the abandoned shore lines which bound them. The method of
1 Received May 26, 1930. Read before the Geological Society of Washington May
14,1930. Published by permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey. The
subject matter of the first part of this paper is discussed more fully and with references
in a manuscript entitled Correlation of coastal terraces, to be published in the Journal
of Geology.
389
390 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 16
correlating terraces by means of the altitude of the terrace itself is un-
reliable, for altitudes of points on a terrace vary considerably, like
soundings in the sea; but the abandoned shore line is a definite plane
of reference, like modern sea level. Slopes due to warping of a ter-
race cannot with certainty be distinguished from the original slopes
of the old sea bottom; but sloping shore lines usually indicate warp-
ing. It is obvious, however, that considerable discrimination is neces-
sary in deciding what part of an abandoned beach represents the former
stand of mean sea level, for tidal range, strength of winds and waves,
and many other factors affect the profiles of beaches.
I have recently traced on topographic maps the shore lines of the
coastal terraces both north and south of Georgia but have detected no
evidence of warping. ‘The shore lines maintain their horizontality
from Florida at least as far north as New Jersey, and appear to con-
tinue unchanged in altitude, but doubtless veneered with glacial de-
posits, up the Hudson and Connecticut valleys. The few maps avail-
able along the Gulf coast show terraces at the same altitudes as far as
Texas. As the terraces appear to be unwarped for a distance of 2000
miles, I infer that the horizontal shore lines of the Pleistocene terraces
record high stages of the sea on a stable land and not upheavals of the
continent.
If the sea once stood high on the Atlantic coast of North America,
it must have stood equally high on every coast, and traces of its marks,
where not obliterated, should stand at the same altitudes on every
stable land. ‘The shore lines of the Pleistocene terraces stand approxi-
mately 25, 65, 95, 160, 215, and 265 feet above sea level. Although I
have not attempted an exhaustive survey of the literature, evidence
that terraces stand at approximately these same altitudes in many
countries is accumulating. Daly has shown that the 25-foot level is
world wide. Depéret assigns terraces on all three coasts of France
to horizontal shore lines at very nearly the same altitudes as ours, and
Dubois has ventured to correlate the French terraces with the Ameri-
can on the basis of their altitudes. The correspondence with South
Africa is remarkably close, for Krige reports well-developed marine
terraces 20 and 60 feet above sea level, a beach about 100 feet, a 170-
foot shelf at Cape of Good Hope, another at 200 feet, and another
about 250 feet above sea level. Four of these levels in South Africa
differ by only 5 feet from the altitudes that I have assigned to shore
lines in the United States, one is ten feet higher, and two are 15 feet
lower than mine. These differences fall well within the range of
possible error of the method of work. The 10 and 15-foot differences
OCTOBER 4, 1930 COOKE: PLEISTOCENE SEASHORES 391
are between shore lines in America and shelves in South Africa. The
correspondence of the actual shore lines may be closer, for P. A.
Wagner reports marine gravel 210 feet above sea level at the mouth
of the Buffels River.?
What made the sea fall and rise at least six times, as recorded by the
shore lines of the terraces? Glacial control of sea level seems to be the
most effective cause of this periodic shifting of the strand during the
Pleistocene. When the great ice caps accumulated on the land during
each glacial stage, there was less water in the sea than when the ice
caps were melted and the water restored to the sea during each inter-
glacial stage. It has been estimated that if the ice caps on Greenland
and on Antarctica were melted, the sea would be raised 200 feet above
its present level. This estimated height falls short by less than 25
per cent of the actual rise of the sea needed to submerge the land to
the 265-foot shore line. It is quite possible that crustal movements as
well as glaciation caused changes in sea level during the Pleistocene.
If the change due to crustal movements was downward, we need not
resort to the hypothesis of unequal deglaciation to explain the step-
like arrangement of the terraces. But in any event the changes of
sea level due to glaciation alone are of too great magnitude to be
ignored.
Geologists recognize five times of conspicuous Pleistocene glacia-
tion in North America. These are called the Nebraskan, Kansan,
Illinoian, Iowan, and Wisconsin glacial stages. The Wisconsin glacial
stage was interrupted by at least one temporary retreat of the ice.
These six glacial stages (counting the Wisconsin as two) alternate
with six warmer periods, namely, the preglacial stage, and the Afton-
ian, the Yarmouth, the Sangamon, and the Peorian interglacial stages,
and an inter-Wisconsin interglacial substage.
Let us assume that glacial control was the dominant cause of changes
of sea level. ‘Then each interglacial stage, being a time of high sea
water, should have a corresponding high shore line, but the deposits
that accumulated in the sea during each glacial stage should now be
submerged. Let usfurther assume that these terraces stand in regular
sequence as to age, the highest being the oldest, and the lowest the
youngest. ‘Then it may be possible to assign each of the six Pleisto-
cene terraces to a definite stage of the glacial chronology. The 265-
foot shore line, corresponding to the typical Brandywine terrace, falls
into the pre-glacial stage; the 215-foot Coharie level into the Aftonian;
2 Trans. Geol. Soc. South Africa 31: 11. 1928.
392 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 16
the 160-foot Sunderland into the Yarmouth; the 95-foot Wicomico
into the Sangamon; the 65-foot Chowan into the Peorian; and the 25-
foot Pamlico into the inter-Wisconsin.
The discovery of any more Pleistocene shore lines or the recognition
of any more stages in the glacial chronology would throw this ten-
tative correlation of the Pleistocene marine terraces with the inter-
glacial stages out of step, and the correlation would need readjustment.
That there may be more shore lines than the six already mentioned is
not improbable; Wentworth, in manuscript, reports one in Virginia
about 15 feet above sea level; in the District of Columbia there are at
least 2 levels higher than 265 feet, and the lower of the two seems to
be wide spread. But there may also be more interglacial stages than
are now formally recognized, for the Wisconsin glacial deposits record
4 separate advances of the ice which were interrupted by retreats of
greater or less magnitude. As a tie point between the two shifting
scales is the discovery by Leverett that a gravel train derived from the
Illinoian drift can be traced down the Susquehanna River to the head
of Chesapeake Bay, where it ends in the marine Wicomico formation.
If the Wicomico is Sangamon, as postulated here, it is the oldest ma-
rine formation now above sea level in which debris from the Illinois
drift could possibly occur.
Although the coastal terraces show no conspicuous signs of warping,
there is abundant evidence that the Atlantic seaboard has been de-
formed in the not-far-distant past. The streams have been unequally
drowned. Every stream has been drowned to some extent, but those
north of Cape Hatteras have been drowned deeper than those farther
south. Examination of hydrographic charts brings out the fact that
Chesapeake Bay and its tributaries have not been drowned as deeply
as the submarine course of Hudson River. Further evidence of rather
late deformation of the eastern part of the United States is given by
the attitude of Pliocene deposits. Shaw found considerable warping
of Pliocene terraces in Mississippi; Florida has been tilted to the west
since the deposition of the Pliocene Citronelle formation; Campbell
reports that the Pliocene (?) Bryn Mawr gravel has been deformed.
The ending of the period of crustal instability which deformed Pliocene
deposits but which did not deform Pleistocene terraces in the same re-
gion is a convenient time at which to date the close of the Pliocene and
the beginning of the Pleistocene.
Let us now apply these principles of correlation to our local con-
ditions and attempt to interpret the geologic history of the District of
Columbia.
OCTOBER 4, 1930 COOKE: PLEISTOCENE SEASHORES 393
During Pliocene time a large alluvial fan or delta accumulated on the
Coastal Plain and lower parts of the Piedmont where the Potomac
emerged from the higher land. Later, the margin of the continent was
uplifted to such an extent that the seashore lay along or below the
edge of the continental shelf. This uplift of the land may have taken
place by stages sufficiently distinct to cut terraces in the Pliocene
delta of the Potomac. During this high stand of the continental mar-
gin, the valleys now occupied by Chesapeake Bay, Delaware Bay,
and the submarine valley of the Hudson were eroded. We may pic-
ture the Potomac River of late Pliocene time as very similar to the pres-
ent river from its headwaters to Little Falls. At Little Falls it prob-
ably dropped as much as 60 feet. From Georgetown to its junction
with the Susquehanna it was a normal Coastal Plain river—deep,
fairly rapid but with no falls—flowing in a broad valley between gravel-
capped uplands.
Then came a time of widespread crustal instability. The conti-
nental margin between Cape Cod and Cape Hatteras was depressed,
the greatest depression being near the submarine channel of the Hud-
son. When this movement ceased the Pleistocene epoch had begun.
Since the beginning of the Pleistocene the land has remained sta-
tionary but the sea has fallen and risen upon it. The opening of the
Pleistocene finds the sea at a height of 265 feet above its present level.
Nearly all the Coastal Plain in this vicinity was submerged except an
island covered with Pliocene gravel which rose 40 feet above the water
southeast of Washington. Tides extended up the Potomac almost to
Harpers Ferry. The Brandywine terrace was formed at this time.
The flat-topped ridge southeast of Baileys Crossroads is a remnant of
the Brandywine terrace.
Then came the Nebraskan glaciation; the tidal waters receded and ©
the Potomac reoccupied its Pliocene channel.
After the Nebraskan ice had melted the Aftonian sea stood 215
feet above modern sea level. Tide probably extended up the Potomac
to Point of Rocks. At Georgetown the river broadened and emptied
into a bay about 7 miles wide with a prolongation extending north-
eastward towards Laurel. The Coharie terrace was formed at this
time. Mt. Pleasant and Meridian Hill Park are on the Coharie
terrace.
The waters receded during the Kansan glacial stage but readvanced
during Yarmouth time to the 160-foot level. Tide reached above the
dam at Great Falls. All of Washington below Florida Avenue was
again under water, but the northeastern prolongation of Potomac
394 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 16
Bay was considerably smaller than its earlier stage. The Sunderland
terrace was formed at this time. The shore line of the Sunderland
terrace follows the bluff north of Florida Avenue between Eleventh
Street and Connecticut Avenue.
During the Illinoian glacial stage the seas were again depleted and
tidal waters drained away down the Pliocene course of the Potomac.
When the ice had melted during the Sangamon interglacial stage, tides
rose only about 95 feet above present sea level and extended up the
Potomac only to the foot of Great Falls. Down-town Washington was
again under water and Potomac Bay was not greatly altered. The
terrace corresponding to the 95-foot stage is the Wicomico. Capitol
Hill is an outlier of the Wicomico, and Dupont Circle, Scott Circle,
Thomas Circle, and Iowa Circle are on the same terrace.
After the low water of the Iowan glacial stage, the water rose in
Peorian time to an altitude of only 65 feet. Tides extended to the
head of Stubblefield Falls and up the Eastern Branch to Berwyn.
Capitol Hill made an island in Potomac Bay. The Chowan terrace
was formed at this time. F and G streets, Lafayette Square, and
Union Station Plaza are on the Chowan terrace.
Sea level fell in early Wisconsin time, but during the inter-Wisconsin
retreat of the ice it rose again to an altitude of about 25 feet. At this
time the Pamlico terrace was formed. ‘Tides were stopped by Little
Falls. Pennsylvania Avenue between Peace Monument and Fifteenth
Street was flooded, and most of Southwest Washington except an island
at the Department of Agriculture site was under water.
Late Wisconsin glaciation again lowered sea level, but at the be-
ginning of the Recent epoch the water attained its present stage.
Tides now extend to Little Falls and up the Eastern Branch to
Bladensburg.
SUMMARY
The important conclusions of this paper are as follows:
The shore lines of the six Pleistocene terraces are horizontal as far
as they have been traced. Horizontal terraces at the same altitudes
have been noted in France and in South Africa. The shore lines are
therefore interpreted as high-water marks made by a fluctuating sea
upon stationary continents rather than as marks of a stationary sea
made upon oscillating continents.
Glacial control of sea level is regarded as the dominant cause of the
fluctuations of sea level during the Pleistocene epoch. Sea level
was high during interglacial stages and low during glacial stages. The
OCTOBER 4, 1930 CUSHMAN: FORAMINIFERA AND ALGAE 395
shore lines of the terraces therefore represent the high-water marks of
the preglacial and interglacial stages.
The warping of the continent which brought about the unequal
drowning of the Atlantic coast deformed Pliocene deposits but did not
deform Pleistocene shore lines. It is therefore regarded as the closing
episode of Pliocene time.
BIOLOGY .—The interrelation of Foraminifera and Algae! JosmpH A.
CusHMAN, Sharon, Massachusetts.
The relationship of the Foraminifera and Algae has already been
noted.2 It has been well known for some time, too, that there is an
association of Algae with Corals. In tropical, warm, shallow waters,
such as give the right conditions for the development of coral reefs,
there are found several groups of larger Foraminifera. For the most
part these are limited to such conditions, and are known only from
the tropics, most of them from the Indo-Pacific. These include
particularly the families Camerinidae, Peneropliidae, and Alveolinel-
lidae. Just what the relationship is between the two forms of the
Foraminifera and the Algae is not yet clear. It may be due to food
relations, or to the development of oxygen by the Algae. ‘That the
relationship is a very definite one is shown by the fact that distribution
of these larger Foraminifera is limited to a depth of about 30 fathoms.
This depth is approximately that to which Algae are limited by the
amount of sunlight that penetrates the sea-water. It is probable that
when the relationships between Algae and Corals are fully known the
same factors will apply to the Algae and the Foraminifera.
In the fossil series larger Foraminifera of the families already men-
tioned and those belonging to the extinct group of the Orbitoids are
very prominent from the later Cretaceous, and representatives of the
earlier groups except the Orbitoids are still living under the conditions
already noted. A map of the distribution of the Orbitoids, for ex-
ample, in the Eocene will show that they are very largely limited to
areas which at that time from the occurrence of Corals and other
forms are known to have been warm shallow areas. During this
period great masses of limestone many thousands of feet thick were
developed across the tropical regions of the world in large part built
1 Received June 23, 1930.
2 CusHMaN, Shallow water Foraminifera of the Tortugas Region, Publication Carnegie
Institution, Washington, 311: 10. 1922; Observation onliving specimens of Iridia diaphana,
a species of Foraminifera, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 57: 154, 1920.
396 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 16
up of such Foraminifera. ‘These same areas parallel very closely the
distribution of Tertiary oil fields, and it is at least suggestive that
there may be a relationship between the two.
This relationship of the Algae and the Foraminifera might well
furnish an interesting problem for research, either from an economic
or purely scientific point of view. So far as observations have been
made, both green and brown Algae can assume this relationship with
the Foraminifera, usually unicellular forms showing this relationship.
These often give a definite color to the living Foraminifera which is
not seen at all in the dried material.
BOTAN Y.—A new cannon-ball tree from Panama. By C. V. Morton,
National Museum. (Communicated by Witu1am R. Maxon).
Included among the plants of a recent collection made by Dr. A. F.
Skutch in the vicinity of Almirante, Panama, and generously presented
by him to the U.S. National Museum is a specimen of cannon-ball tree
(Couroupita), which critical study shows to represent a new species,
as suspected by Doctor Skutch in the field. It is described herewith,
the specific name being in honor of Mr. Victor M. Cutter, President of
the United Fruit Company, in recognition of generous support of many
projects relating to tropical American botany.
Couroupita cutteri Morton & Skutch, sp. nov.
Very tall tree with widely spreading branches; branchlets glabrous, con-
spicuously marked with leaf scars; leaves clustered at the ends of the branch-
lets, alternate, nonpunctate, deciduous at flowering time; petiole short, about
10-12 mm. long, pubescent; lamina oblanceolate, 13-21 cm. long, very ob-
tuse at apex, cuneate at base, minutely denticulate, glabrous, except in the
axils of the veins beneath; secondary veins 16-18, conspicuously raised be-
neath; inflorescence paniculate, arising from the trunk and main branches,
up to 50 cm. long; calyx of 6 sepals, 6 mm. long, 7.5 mm. broad, broadly
rounded at apex, fleshy, thinner at margin, ciliolate; petals oblong, very fleshy,
4-4.5 em. long, 3-3.5 em. broad, greenish white outside, cream color within,
ciliolate; androphore cream color, basal ring 17-18 mm. in diameter, the ring
and the inner surface of the hood completely covered with fertile stamens;
filaments of the basal ring clavate, 1 mm. long, those of the hood more elon-
gate (about 3.5 mm.); anther cells divaricate at base; ovary 6-celled; fruit _
not seen.
Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,409,624, collected in a pasture
near base line, 15 miles from Almirante, Panama, in May, 1929, by A. F.
Skutch (no. 19). Alcoholic specimens of the flowers are also preserved.
1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received
June 16, 1930.
397
NEW CANNON-BALL TREE
MORTON
OCTOBER 4, 1930
Fig. 1. Couroupita cutteri, sp. nov.
398 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 16
The cannon-ball trees are apparently very rare in Central America. The
present species and the recently described C. parviflora Standl. bring the
known number up to five, all represented by very few collections. Of these
C. cutteri is the largest-flowered and probably also the tallest. It is most
closely related to C. darienensis Pittier, which has short racemes arising from
the smaller branches, instead of panicles arising from the trunk. C. darienen-
sts has, moreover, pinkish rather than cream colored flowers, which also are
rather smaller.
The illustration is from a photograph of the tree from which the specimens
were later taken. When photographed (March 8, 1929) it was not in flower.
BOTANY.—Some new species of Pythium.! CHARLES DRECHSLER,
U. 8. Department of Agriculture.
Although the fungi to be described herein are all referable to Pyth-
ium in the broader sense in which that genus has generally been
understood, they include members of groups rather diverse in their
more intimately distinctive morphological tendencies. Pythiwm dts-
sotocum in its small degree of outward sporangial differentiation, ap-
proximates more closely than any of the others the condition described
by Pringsheim (9) for P. monospermum Pringsh., which with the sub-
sequent transfer of his P. entophytum to Lagenidium, remains as the
obvious type of the genus. It therefore also comes closer than any
of the others in conforming to the requirements for Schréter’s (10)
definition of his genus Nematosporangium which stipulates filamentous
sporangia not wider than the mycelial hyphae. That in the choice
of the generic name the one introduced in its present meaning by
Pringsheim (9) was adopted, is to be attributed, however, less to the
production by the fungus of slightly swollen dactyloid elements evi-
dently essentially sporangial in nature, than to the unsoundness of
Schroter’s dispositions historically. For whatever may have been
the propriety of Pringsheim’s followers in bringing forms differing
considerably from P. monospermum into the same fold, and whatever
the utility of Fischer’s (5) subdivision of the enlarged genus into three
subgenera, there can be little doubt that SchrGter’s elevation to generic
rank of the one of these subgenera to which had been assigned the
very species that had originally formed the basis of the genus Pythium, ©
was flagrantly in contravention of nomenclatorial stability. Nor ap-
parently have the ill-advised dispositions of Schréter been sanctioned
by use, as most authors of the past four decades have continued to
1 Received July 15, 1930.
OCTOBER 4, 1930 DRECHSLER: NEW SPECIES OF PYTHIUM 399
include species having other than subspherical sporangia among the
members of the older genus.
In Pythium perulum and P. myriotylum are represented departures
from the outwardly completely undifferentiated filamentous form of
sporangium demanded by Schréter’s definition of Nematosporangium
wider than in P. dissotocum, as in these two fungi swollen lobulate
elements occur more freely and constitute a larger proportion of the
volume of the parts concerned in asexual reproduction. In P. peri-
plocum the sporangia consist very largely of moriform aggregations of
lobulate elements in comparison with which the undifferentiated myce-
lial parts are often altogether insignificant in volume. Assignment of
a fungus having a sporangium consisting of distended elements in
intricate arrangement to a genus of which the chief distinctive feature
is by definition a filamentous sporangium not wider than the mycelial
hyphae would seem rather obviously out of question.
The sporangia of Pythiwm paroecandrum and of P. salpingophorum
are of typically subspherical form, those of the former species resem-
bling in general the sporangia of P.debaryanum Hesse, while those of the
latter are noteworthy mainly because of the conspicuous distal widen-
ing of their individual evacuation tubes. ‘The sporangia of P. acan-
thicum and P. oligandrum likewise are often simply subspherical, but
frequently, again, a filamentous part of varying length is included, or
more especially in P. oligandrum, several subspherical elements com-
municate by connecting portions of filament, so that structures more
or less transitional between subspherical and filamentous sporangia .
and between subspherical and lobulate sporangia, respectively, are
brought about.
The sexual apparatus of Pythium dissotocum invites comparison with
that of P. debaryanum inasmuch as it exhibits monoclinous antheridia
both in proximate and in more distant mycelial relationship to the
oogonium, while the regularly proximate origin of the monoclinous
antheridia of P. paroecandrum provides a parallelism with P. ultimwm
Trow. In P. periilum the antheridia and the branching filaments
supporting them are wrapped extensively and intimately about the
oogonium in a manner suggestive of various species of Aphanomyces.
Envelopment of the oogonium is effected also in P. myriotylum,
though usually less extensively than in P. periilum, and never quite as
intimately. However, the oogonia of P. periplocum are invested often
fully as extensively as those of P. pervilum, owing here, to be sure, more
to the rangy lobate antheridia spreading over the female organ as
closely as the spiny configuration permits, than to the rather moder-
400 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 16
ately developed antheridial branches creeping closely between the
spines.
The frequently somewhat lobate shape of the antheridium, the longi-
tudinal application of the male organ to the oogonium, and the creep-
ing of the antheridial stalk between the spiny protuberances of the
female organ, prevalent in P. oligandrum, are indicative of a somewhat
close relationship to P. periplocum, which, it may be admitted, the
frequent parthenogenesis and the simpler construction of sporangium
distinctive of the former species do little to sustain. A certain degree .
of relationship to P. periplocum is evidenced also by P. acanthicum
in the production of a frequently lobate antheridium and its applica-
tion lengthwise to the spiny oogonium. Accordingly, P. periplocum,
P. oligandrum and P. acanthicum might perhaps well be regarded as
members of a group articulating with P. artotrogus de Bary. It must
be mentioned, however, that the very usual origin of the antheridial
branch in P. acanihicum from the hypha bearing the oogonium and at
a variable but mostly small distance from the female organ, provides
a similarity with the arrangement of the sex organs in P. debaryanum
and its allies, P. mamillatum Meurs and P. spinosum Sawada, which
especially in the case of the latter two forms, would seem to be further
sustained by the presence of numerous protuberances on the oogonium.
However in P. acanthicum as in P. periplocum and P. oligandrum,
the more delicate hyphae are much more extensively developed rela-
tive to the stouter hyphae than in members of the debaryanum series,
and the oogonial protuberances usually taper noticeably from base to-
ward apex instead of maintaining approximately the same diameter.
The sexual stage of Pythium salpingophorum is noteworthy chiefly
because of the frequency of parthenogenetic development manifested
byit. Inregard to such development as well as.to the frequent monili- —
form arrangement of its oogonia and the usual complete filling of the
latter structures by their individual oospores, the species shows a
striking resemblance to P. papillatum Mathews (7).
Although the fungus now to be described under the binomial Py-
thium anandrum was cited in an earlier note (3) as apparently having
an intercalary antheridium in the frequently contorted distal portion
of the oogonial stalk, it is now evident that the oogonial stalk serves no
direct sexual function, and that the development of the oospore is
consistently parthenogenetic. ‘The spiny oogonial protuberances of
this fungus are longer and more acutely pointed than those of any
congeneric form hitherto described. In some instances an individual
spine has been observed to have developed into a process measuring
OCTOBER 4, 1980 DRECHSLER: NEW SPECIES OF PYTHIUM 401
30 to 40u in length and widening midway to the tip into an expansion
provided with secondary spiny protuberances and bearing internally
a secondary oospore approximately 10 to 1lu in diameter. The com-
bination of a sexual stage so unusual with a sporangium resembling
that of a proliferous species of Phytophthora in all details except in
that the zoospores are fashioned entirely in accordance with the asex-
ual development characteristic of Pythium, makes P. anandrum one
of the most anomalous members of the genus.
Pythium mastophorum and P. polymastum, in spite of the absence of
any indication of a proliferous sporangial habit, represent species ap-
parently most directly related to P. megalacanthum De Bary. In both
fungi the mycelium is conspicuous for its haphazard disposition, and
the sporangia are unusually tardy of development. The large oogon-
ial protuberances that have suggested the specific terms submitted
are perhaps even more distinctive because of the thickness of wall they
exhibit and because of the mammiform shape they frequently assume
than because of their extraordinary size.
Pythium helicoides, P. oedochilum, P. polytylum and P. palingenes
are representatives of the group of species to which reference was made
earlier in a brief abstract (4). The terminally borne, subspherical,
proliferous sporangium with mostly apical evacuation tube which is
characteristic of each of these representatives, corresponds well to
that described and figured by various authors for Pythiwm proliferum
De Bary. However in De Bary’s account (1) of the sexual apparatus
of the latter species, the antheridia were set forth in text and in figures
as essentially similar to those of his P. debaryanum (1.e., P. ultimum)
in shape as well as in relationship to mycelium and oogonium. In
the four species under consideration the antheridium is a terminal,
long, curved cylindrical structure applied lengthwise very tightly to
the oogonium, and producing an evacuation tube from a navel rather
than from an apical position. And the oospore is distinguished not
only by an unusually thick wall, but also by an organization of contents
different from that of the oospores of the generality of forms assigned
to Pythium, a half dozen to a score of reserve globules and a few to a
dozen of refringent bodies being distributed with some uniformity
through a densely granular matrix. Protrusion of the oogonium where
in contact with antheridia, involvement of hyphal elements supporting
the oogonium by those supporting an antheridium, occurrence of
granular residues between ripe oospore and oospore wall, and pro-
nounced yellow coloration of oogonium and oospore, are among the
402 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 16
additional features displayed in varying measure by one or another of
the species.
In the literature only Dissmann’s (2) figures of the elongated anther-
idium of his Pythiwm proliferum shows unmistakable evidence of
affinity with the group of proliferous forms under consideration.
Examination of the fungus investigated by Kanouse (6) under the
name Pythiomorpha gonapodioides Petersen reveals it as similarly a
member of the same series, although her publication, except for its
description of the clasping antheridium, gives the impression of hay-
ing been based on a proliferous species of Phytophthora. It is to be
noted that the illustrated description of the sexual stage given by
Minden (8) for his Pythtomorpha gonapodioides sets forth a clavate or
ellipsoidal antheridium making apical contact with the base of the
oogonium—a relationship unlike that found in members of the heli-
coides series as well as unlike that mentioned by Kanouse. Indeed
Minden’s account of the sexual apparatus of Pythiomorpha gonapodto-
ides rather supports the conclusion to be drawn from his statement of
mycelial characters and his description of sporangial development,
that under the binomial mentioned, he, like Petersen before him, dealt
with a proliferous species of Phytophthora.
Of the species herein described, three at least are definitely known
to be of economic importance as parasites of cultivated plants. Py-
thium periplocum is responsible for some very small loss in destroying
watermelon fruits. P. acanthicum is often energetically destructive
of watermelon fruits, causing on the whole several times as much dam-
age to this particular product than all other species of Pythium com-
bined. P. myriotylum though apparently not closely related to P.
butler: Subr. exhibits the same sort of aerial parasitism, and like the
latter species is to be reckoned among the most destructive members of
the genus. During periods of high humidity it similarly puts forth a
profuse growth of aerial mycelium that through the production of an
extraordinary number of appressoria, fastens upon and penetrates into
any host structures it may chance to encounter. The fungus would
seem however to have a more limited range than P. butleri, in the
United States being encountered frequently only in the more southern
latitudes.
Pythium dissotocum sp. nov.
Intramatrical mycelium somewhat lustrous, capable of approximately
18 mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C., the relatively straight axial
hyphae mostly 3.5 to 6u, more rarely up to 7y in diameter, the branching
elements of more irregular course, mostly 2 to 4u in diameter; under aquatic
OCTOBER 4, 1980 DRECHSLER: NEW SPECIES OF PYTHIUM 403
conditions extramatrical mycelium meager, the hyphae sometimes as narrow
as 1.5u. Appressoria borne terminally on more delicate intramatrical
branches in moderate number, often curved clavate, the distal part about 7u
in diameter. Aerial mycelium usually absent though sometimes very spar-
ingly present.
Sporangia usually consisting entirely of undifferentiated mycelial filaments,
but at times including somewhat swollen dactyloid lateral elements, simple
or sparingly branched, 5 to 8u in diameter. Evacuation tube sometimes more
than 1 mm. in length, 1.5 to 4u in diameter, widening at the refringent tip to
a diameter of 2.5 to 9u. Zoospores usually 10 to 75 in a vesicle, but some-
‘times in excess of 100, after rounding up usually 8 to 9u in diameter, germinat-
ing usually by a single germ tube 1.5 to 2y in diameter, or diplanetic through
production of an evacuation tube 1 to 1.5u in diameter, and up to 12y in
length.
Oogonia terminal, intercalary or laterally intercalary, provided with a
smooth sturdy wall approximately 0.8u in thickness, subspherical, measuring
12 to 32u, usually 17 to 25u (average 20.74) in diameter, the delimiting sep-
tum or septa frequently inserted somewhat beyond the spherical contour,
so as to include at either or both ends a cylindrical part up to 8u in length.
Antheridia usually crook-necked, mostly 5 to 8u in diameter near apex,
measuring individually 6 to 16u along curved axis from apex to basal septum,
the apical end often somewhat flattened and thus making broad contact with
oogonium about a short fertilization tube approximately 1.4u in diameter;
varying in number usually from 1 to 3, 4 or 5 rarely present; when plural,
each usually autonomous in origin; often sessile on the oogonial filament im-
mediately adjacent to oogonium, or borne terminally on branches arising
from a neighboring filament or from the oogonial filament often in immediate
proximity to oogonium or at a variable distance from it. Oospore smooth,
colorless or slightly yellowish, usually very largely though not completely
filling oogonium, 11 to 27y, mostly 15 to 2lyu (average 17.64) in diameter,
with a wall 1.0 to 2.2u, mostly 1.3 to 1.8u (average 1.5u) in thickness, a re-
serve globule 5 to 17u, mostly 7 to 10u (average 8.4u) in diameter, and a
refringent body oblate ellipsoidal or subspherical in shape, in latter case
mostly 3.5 to 5u in diameter.
Type culture isolated from diseased rootlets of Saccharum officinarum L.
collected near Thibodaux, La., April, 1927.
Pythium periilum sp. nov.
Intramatrical mycelium often of lustrous, cumulous appearance, capable of
approximately 18 mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C., the relatively
straight axial hyphae mostly 3.5 to 5u, rarely up to 6u in diameter, the branch-
ing elements of more irregular course mostly 2 to 3.5u in diameter; extrama-
trical mycelium under aquatic conditions meager, the hyphae sometimes as
narrow as 1.54. Appressoria knob-like, borne terminally on finer intramatri-
cal branches in moderate number or more abundantly, often 7u in width and
7 to 10u in length. Aerial mycelium absent, or on richer substrata present in
small quantity as a shallow felty layer that collapses with age.
Sporangium consisting sometimes entirely of undifferentiated mycelial
elements, but generally composed in part of sparingly distributed inflated
dactyloid elements usually 6 to 8u, rarely 8 to 12u in diameter, and some-
times constituted in larger part of such inflated elements, which then are
often concentrated in closely arranged branching systems though not in
intricate complexes. Evacuation tube often 0.1 to 0.5 mm. in length, mostly
404 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 16
about 3u in diameter, but in the distal part widening to a diameter of 5 to 6.
Zoospores up to 75 in a vesicle, after rounding up usually 8 to 9u in diameter,
germinating usually by a single germ tube 1.5 to 2u in diameter.
Oogonium terminal or more often intercalary, provided with a smooth
wall approximately 0.5u in thickness, subspherical, measuring usually 16 to
22u (average 18.8u) in diameter, the delimiting septum or septa frequently
inserted somewhat beyond the spherical contour, so as to include at either
or both poles a cylindrical part up to 4u in length. Antheridia crook-necked,
mostly 4 to 5u in diameter in median or distal part, measuring individually
7 to 14u along curved axis from apex to basal septum, the bluntly rounded
apical end making narrow contact with oogonium about a very short fertili-°
zation tube approximately ly in diameter, the proximal part usually tapering
somewhat more gradually toward delimiting septum to diameter of support-
ing filament; varying in number usually from 2 to 5, borne terminally or
less frequently laterally, all on branching prolongations of a single hypha
originating sometimes from the oogonial hypha at some distance, rarely less
than 50u, from the oogonium, or more frequently from a neighboring fila-
ment; the branching prolongations bearing the antheridia together usually
with several similar vegetative prolongations being wrapped rather exten-
sively and rather closely about the oogonium, and very frequently though
not always as closely, about the adjacent portions of the oogonial filament.
Oospore colorless or somewhat yellowish, smooth, completely or nearly com-
pletely filling the oogonium, 14 to 20u (average 17.3) in diameter, with a
wall 1.1 to 1.8u (average 1.5u) in thickness, a reserve globule usually 7 to 1lu
(average 8.9u) in diameter, and a refringent body oblate ellipsoidal or sub-
spherical in shape, in latter case measuring on the average 4.2u in diameter.
Isolated from diseased rootlets of Saccharum officinarum L. collected near
Thibodaux, La., April, 1927.
Pythium myriotylum sp. nov. —
Intramatrical mycelium somewhat diffuse in appearance, capable of ap-
proximately 34 mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C., the younger ac-
tively growing hyphae 2.5 to 4u, mostly 3 to 4u in diameter, the older axial
hyphae often up to 7y in diameter, and occasionally attaining a diameter of
8.54 previous to degeneration; provided with numerous appressoria in the
form of swollen clavate or knob-like terminations 7 to 1lu in diameter at the
adhering apex. Under aquatic conditions extramatrical mycelium copious,
often with numerous appressoria. Aerial mycelium under humid conditions
very copious, adhering to solid bodies through the production of very numer-
ous appressoria usually in large densely branching clusters or brush-like
groups, each cluster or group including frequently 10 to 75 or more appressoria.
Sporangia terminal or intercalary, consisting sometimes of portions of
outwardly undifferentiated filaments, delimited by septa or more massive
plugs, the portions measuring 0.1 to 0.38 mm. in length and 3 to 7y in diameter;
but more often including a number of swollen lobulate or digitate elements
attached laterally in open arrangement, or sometimes consisting for the most
part of swollen elements which then are usually present in denser branching
arrangements; the swollen elements highly variable in size, measuring 10 to
175p in length and 7 to 17y in diameter, though mostly not exceeding 50yu in
length and 12u in diameter. Evacuation tube often a prolongation of un-
differentiated sporangial filament, but frequently arising as a special structure
from swollen element or laterally from filamentous part; measuring 10 to
100u or more in length and 2 to 3.5u in diameter at base, widening usually
OCTOBER 4, 1930 DRECHSLER: NEW SPECIES OF PYTHIUM 405
only slightly to a diameter of 4 to 6u below somewhat expanded refringent
apex; often failing to function effectively, then becoming set off in whole or
in part by septum or plug, followed by production of another tube. Zoo-
spores formed 3 to 40 in a vesicle, longitudinally grooved, broadly reniform,
biciliate, 9 to 16u, mostly 10 to 12u (average 11u) in diameter, germinating
usually by a single germ tube, 2.5 to 3u in diameter.
Oogonia terminal or intercalary, smooth, provided with a wall 0.5 to 1p,
mostly 0.7 to 0.8u in thickness, subspherical, 15 to 44u in diameter, when
most abundantly and normally developed 15 to 33u, mostly 23 to 30u (aver-
age 26.5u) in diameter. Antheridia up to 10, usually 3 to 6 to an oogonium;
terminally expanded, clavate, often crook-necked or arched, the proximal
end of the individual male organ frequently in contact with oogonium, the
middle part upcurved, the broadened rounded apex rather narrowly applied
and bearing the usually short (1 to 3u long), narrow (1 to 1.5u wide) fertili-
zation tube; measuring 4 to 8u in diameter and 8 to 30yu in length, but more
normally mostly 4.5 to 7u in diameter and 8 to 16u in length, borne terminally
or somewhat laterally on branches often loosely or more intimately envelop-
ing the oogonium, and supplied from 1 to 3 parent hyphae not demonstrably
connected with the oogonial filament or connected with the latter at a dis-
tance usually in excess of 100u from the oogonium. Oospore colorless or
yellowish; subspherical, 12 to 37u in diameter with a wall up to 2u in thick-
ness and a reserve globule up to 18u in diameter, but when most abundantly
and normally developed, 12 to 26u, mostly 18 to 24u (average 20.8u) in diame-
ter, provided with a wall 1.3 to 1.9u (average 1.6u) in thickness, and contain-
ing a reserve globule 6 to 12u (average 9.8u) in diameter, and a refringent
body, subspherical or sometimes strongly flattened, measuring when sub-
spherical mostly 3.5 to 5u in diameter.
Causing a decay of fruits of Cucumis sativus L. in South Carolina, of fruits
of Crtrullus vulgaris Schrad. in Florida and Georgia, of fruits of Solanum
melongena L. in Florida; and isolated from discolored rootlets of Lycopersicum
esculentum Mill. in South Carolina. -
Pythium periplocum sp. nov.
Intramatrical mycelium somewhat lustrous, capable of approximately
25 mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C., consisting while in active growth
of filaments 1.2 to 4.8u, mostly 1.8 to 4.2u in diameter, later including some-
what larger hyphae with thicker walls, measuring up to 8.5 or 94 in diameter;
the more delicate ramifications very irregular in course, often present as
luxuriantly and densely branching systems. Under aquatic conditions ex-
tramatrical development rather meager. Aerial mycelium usually scanty,
though on rich substrata present in some quantity.
Zoosporangia appearing promptly and in moderate abundance; mostly
intercalary though often terminal or lateral; consisting usually very largely
of branching digitate or lobulate elements, measuring 10 to 30u in iength and
8 to 20u, mostly 10 to 15u, in diameter,—these elements frequently assembled
in numbers up to 20 or 25 in an intricate moriform arrangement together with
1 or several contiguous filamentous parts usually not exceeding 75u in com-
bined length; larger moriform complexes composed of more than 30 or 40
swollen elements, frequently becoming evacuated through 2 or 3 tubes, con-
stituting compound or plural sporangia. Evacuation tube 50 to 500u in
length, arising from inflated element or less frequently from undifferentiated
filamentous part, measuring 2 to 4.5u in diameter at the base, widening usually
to a diameter of 3 to 8u below the refringent apex; after discharge the tip
406 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 16
sometimes reflexed. Zoospores formed usually up to 125 in a vesicle, longi-
tudinally grooved, broadly reniform, biciliate, briskly active, measuring 8 to
1lu, mostly 9 to 10u in diameter after rounding up.
Oogonia terminal or intercalary; subspherical, measuring 13 to 32u, mostly
22 to 28u (average 24.6u) in diameter, not including the spiny protuberances
of which 25 to 65 are usually visible in upper and equatorial aspects and which
measure 2 to 4u (average 2.8u) in length and 1.4 to 3u (average 1.8u) at the
base from which they taper somewhat toward the rounded apex; provided
with a wall approximately 0 6u in thickness that becomes attentuated to
approximately 0.3u in the protuberances. Antheridia usually 1 to 4 in num-
ber, usually supplied from 1 or from 2 hyphae not closely connected with the
oogonial hypha; sometimes consisting of a simple clavate part, but more regu-
larly longer, measuring 15 to 30u or more in length, markedly lobed. the sev-
eral lobes mostly 5 to 10u in length and 5 to 8u in diameter, disposed either in
series or in branching arrangement, but in any case each making contact
ventrally with the oogonium, the rangy male organs together frequently with
distal portions of the branching hyphal elements supporting them thus rather
intricately and extensively wrapped about the oogonium,—each antheridium
giving rise usually to only a single, narrow, rather short, inconspicuous fer-
tilization tube. Ospores smooth, colorless or yellowish, not filling oogo-
nium completely; subspherical, measuring 11.5 to 27u mostly 18 to 24y (aver-
age 21.2u) in diameter; provided with a wall 0.7 to 1.94 (average 1.4y) in
thickness, and containing a reserve globule 6.2 to 13.6u (average 10.7)
in diameter and a refringent body, subspherical or somewhat flattened,
measuring when subspherical usually 4 to 5u in diameter.
Causing occasional instances of blossom-end decay of fruits of Citrullus
vulgaris L., manifested outwardly by a dark brown or bluish brown discolora-
tion, in Virginia and Maryland.
Pythium paroecandrum sp. nov.
Intramatrical myeelium somewhat lustrous, of radiating aspect, capable
of approximately 15 mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C., composed —
of hyphae 2.7 to 9u in diameter, the relatively straight axial ones well supplied
with sturdy branches, which may bear appressoria in moderate or more con-
siderable number as curved clavate terminations 8 to lly in diameter, often
developing into systems of connected sickle-shaped structures. Aerial my-
celium often absent or present only in moderate or in meager quantity; under
aquatic conditions, extramatrical growth rather scanty.
Sporangia formed promptly, mostly intercalary though occasionally lateral
or terminal, subspherical or often prolate ellipsoidal 12 to 30u in transverse
diameter. Evacuation tube arising indiscriminately from any part, gener-
ally 3 to 30u in length, and 2 to 5u in diameter at the base, frequently widen-
ing toward the apex and thus attaining a diameter of 2.5 to 7u below re-
fringent tip. Zoospores usually 3 to 25 in a vesicle, biciliate, reniform,
measuring 9 to lly in diameter after rounding up.
Oogonia usually intercalary, smooth; subspherical, though often prolonged
at either end or both ends; measuring 11 to 28u, mostly 18 to 25u (average
21.4u) in transverse diameter; with a wall 0.4 to 0.94, mostly 0.6 to 0.7y
thick, not readily collapsing after maturity. Antheridia 1 to 5 to an oogo-
nium, of monoclinous or diclinous origin: When of monoclinous origin some-
times consisting of an outwardly undifferentiated segment of hypha adjacent
to the oogonium, mostly 7 to 15u in length and 4 to 7u in diameter; sometimes
of a somewhat swollen adjacent segment; sometimes of an adjacent segment
OCTOBER 4, 1930 DRECHSLER: NEW SPECIES OF PYTHIUM 407
together with a bulbous lateral outgrowth from which the fertilization tube
is produced; sometimes of a sessile pouch-like or crook-necked structure,
measuring mostly 7 to 15y in length and 6 to 8y in diameter, arising proximate
to the oogonium; sometimes of an inflated and often crook-necked terminal
structure borne on a branch arising in proximate relation to the oogonium,
together often with a proximal or distal cylindrical part; sometimes of an
intercalary portion of an antheridial process arising in such proximate rela-
tionship, and including generally a cylindrical part in addition to an inflated
part; a sessile antheridium or antheridial branch or antheridial process oc-
easionally arising from a functional adjacent antheridium; an antheridial
process occasionally composed of two antheridia in series; and when two or
more oogonia are formed adjacent to one another on the same hypha, the
sessile antheridium or antheridial stalk or antheridial process supplying one
oogonium often coming to have origin from the juxtaposed (and presumably
younger) oogonium. Antheridia of diclinous origin mostly terminal expanded
structures, often crook-necked, resembling branch antheridia of monoclin-
ous origin, measuring mostly 6 to 8u in diameter at the distal expanded part,
and 10 to 20u in length; rarely consisting of an intercalary portion of hypha
bearing a broad protuberant part. Contact of antheridium with oogonial
wall other than at delimiting septum usually moderately narrow, the oogonial
membrane often lipped about the fertilization tube, which latter measures
mostly 1 to 4u in length and 1.2 to 3u in diameter. Oospores colorless or
yellowish, smooth, subspherical, 10 to 22u, mostly 16 to 21u (average 18.3).
in diameter, provided with a wall 0.6 to 1.6u, mostly 1.1 to 1.5u (average 1.3)
in thickness, containing a reserve globule 6 to 14u, mostly 10 to 13 (average
11.5u) in diameter, and a refringent body, subspherical, with a diameter of
3.5 to 4.5u, or often more or less flattened.
Isolated from discolored root of Allium vineale L. collected near McLean,
Va., May, 1925.
Pythium salpingophorum sp. nov.
Intramatrical mycelium somewhat lustrous, of pronounced radial appear-
ance, capable of approximately 22 mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C.,
composed of hyphae 1.5 to 7u, mostly 2 to 5.5u in diameter, bearing appres-
soria in moderate number as clavate terminations mostly 7 to 8.5u at the
adhering apex, often developing into systems of connected sickle-shaped ele-
ments. Under aquatic conditions extramatrical mycelium meager or of
moderate quantity. Aerial mycelium usually absent.
Sporangia formed promptly and in great numbers; sometimes terminal
but mostly intercalary often only a short distance from the tip of the support-
ing filament, the short distal element of the latter, often 5 to 15yu in length,
thus frequently borne as an apical appendage; subspherical, 17 to 33u, mostly
21 to 29u (average about 24u) in diameter; occasionally though not regularly
proliferous, the secondary sporangium being borne within the primary one.
Evacuation tube arising from any part of sporangium but especially frequently
in proximate relation to one or the other of the delimiting septa; generally
3 to 45yu in length and 1.5 to 3u in diameter at base, but widening often up toa
diameter of 1lu toward the apex, the membrane of the frequently pestle-
like apical enlargement often flaring backward after discharge. Zoospores
formed usually 15 to 40 in a vesicle; longitudinally grooved, broadly reniform,
biciliate; often very sluggish in movement and soon coming to rest; after
rounding up, measuring usually 7.5 to 9.2u (average 8.5u) in diameter.
Oogonia borne on hyphae usually 2 to 3u, rarely up to 4u in diameter;
408 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 16
terminal or intercalary, often laterally or tangentially intercalary; subspheri-
cal, measuring 11 to 22u, mostly 13 to 19u (average 15.8) in transverse di-
ameter, delimited by septa or irregular plugs inserted sometimes at a distance
from juncture of subspherical part with cylindrical filament and thus often
including a portion of latter at one or two ends up to 15yu, usually 2 to 5u,
in length; often occurring adjacent to one another in series of 2 to 5 individuals,
then sometimes without separating partitions; developing parthenogenetically
in most (approximately 3 out of 4) instances, in other instances supplied with
1 or more rarely 2 antheridia. Antheridia arising sometimes from a filament
not closely related to the oogonial hypha, then often lateral, sessile and
straight; but more often arising from the oogonial hypha proximate to the
oogonium, then usually strongly crook-necked; in either case measuring
mostly 10 to 20u in length and 3.5 to 6u in diameter, individually usually
producing a short, narrow fertilization tube, though sometimes without de-
limiting septum, without fertilization tube, non-functional. Oospore color-
less or yellowish, subspherical, usually filling completely the spherical part
of oogonium and fusing indistinguishably with the portion of oogonial wall
in contact with it, measuring 10 to 19u, mostly 12 to 18u (average 14.6)
in diameter, provided with a wall mostly 0.8 to 1.5u (average 1.2u) in thick-
ness, a reserve globule 4.5 to 10u (average 6.3u) in diameter and a refringent
body subspherical or somewhat flattened which when subspherical measures
mostly 3 to 4u in -diameter.
Isolated from decaying roots of Piswm sativum L. collected near Eden,
N. Y., June, 1924.
Pythium acanthicum sp. nov.
Intramatrical mycelium lustrous, often of cumulous appearance, though
frequently highly diaphanous and therefore inconspicuous, capable of approxi-
mately 14mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C., composed of hyphae 1.3 to
5.6u in diameter, mostly 2 to 4.5u while in actively growing condition, the
more delicate of the filamentous elements of irregular course and abundantly
developed. Extramatrical mycelium under aquatic conditions meager.
Aerial mycelium usually absent, sometimes occurring in very small quantity.
Sporangia produced fairly promptly; sometimes terminal but more often
intercalary in position; sometimes subspherical, 12 to 43u in diameter, but
as frequently consisting individually of a subspherical part together with a
contiguous portion of filament that may be relatively short or up to 75y or
more in length, in latter case often including one or more branches; or con-
sisting of 2 or more subspherical or irregularly swollen parts communicating
by a filamentous part or parts. Evacuation tube arising from subspherical
parts or from filamentous part, but especially frequently from near the junc-
tion of the two; measuring 10 to nearly 200u (mostly 20 to 60u) in length,
2.5 to 4u in diameter at the base, often widening somewhat toward the apex,
the open termination after evacuation mostly 4 to 6u in diameter, rarely as
much as 9u; often marked by numerous irregularities in course. Zoospores
produced 5 to 50, usually 15 to 30 in a vesicle, biciliate, longitudinally grooved,
broadly reniform, decidedly active, after rounding up measuring usually 8
to 9.5u in diameter.
Oogonium sometimes terminal especially on shorter branches, but much
more frequently intercalary, often laterally or tangentially intercalary; pro-
vided with a wall usually 0.4 to 0.6u in thickness; subspherical, 13 to 30u,
mostly 19 to 28u (average 23.7u) in diameter, not including the spiny pro-
tuberances of which 20 to 55 are usually visible in upper and equatorial
OCTOBER 4, 1930 DRECHSLER: NEW SPECIES OF PYTHIUM ! 409
aspects; the protuberances with a wall approximately 0.3u thick, measuring
1.5 to 5u (average 2.7u) in length and 1 to 3y (average 1.9u) in diameter at
the base from which they usually taper rather slightly toward the bluntly
rounded apex. Antheridium, except in occasional cases when 2 male organs
are present, occurring singly; borne terminally on a branch occasionally
arising from a hypha other than the oogonial hypha and without close mycelial
connection with the latter, but much more frequently arising from the oogo-
nial hypha at variable distances usually not exceeding 25u and mostly not
exceeding 10 or 15u from the septum delimiting the oogonium, the stalk
then frequently of somewhat irregular course, measuring mostly 0.5 to 3yu
in diameter and 6 to 33y in length; inflated clavate, straight or crook-necked,
measuring mostly 8 to 17u in length and 5 to 9u in diameter; the longer ones
often with 1 or 2 transverse constrictions and therefore somewhat lobate;
sometimes applied rather broadly by the apex, but more often, especially the
longer ones applied frequently together with a short distal portion of the
supporting stalk lengthwise to the oogonium. Oospore smooth, colorless or
often yellowish; usually occupying the oogonial cavity almost completely,
though without adhering to oogonial wall; subspherical, measuring 12 to 27y,
mostly 17 to 26u (average 21.7u) in diameter; provided with a wall 1.3 to 2u
(average 1.6u) in thickness; often remaining for extended period with 6 to
12 reserve globules, but in more fully matured condition revealing a single
reserve globule, 5.5 to 12u (average 9u) in diameter, and a single refringent
body, subspherical or flattened, when subspherical measuring 3.5 to 5y in
diameter; germinating by the production of several germ tubes, or often
without extended resting period developing as a sporangium by discharge of
contents through an evacuation tube.
Causing a blossom-end rot of the fruit of Cotrullus vulgaris L. manifested
outwardly by a dark brown or bluish brown discoloration, in Florida, Georgia,
Missouri, Indiana, and with greater destructiveness in Maryland and Virginia.
Pythium oligandrum sp. nov.
Intramatrical mycelium somewhat lustrous, sometimes of somewhat cumu-
lous appearance, capable of approximately 27 mm. radial extension in 24 hours
at 24°C.; composed of hyphae 1.5 to 6.8u in diameter, the more delicate ele-
ments ramifying freely and developing extensively though not usually oc-
curring in excessively compact branching systems. Under aquatic conditions
extramatrical development rather profuse. Aerial mycelium usually present
in some quantity, on richer substrata in moderate abundance.
Sporangia formed promptly and abundantly; terminal or more often inter-
calary; mostly subspherical, 25 to 45u in diameter, but often consisting of a
subspherical element together with a variable length usually up to 50 or 75u,
of filament modified little if at all, or consisting of 2 to 5 subspherical elements
sometimes fused into a somewhat irregular structure, and sometimes con-
nected by undifferentiated filamentous portions either in a series or in branch-
ing arrangement. Evacuation tube arising from any part of sporangium
but especially frequently from near juncture of subspherical part with fila-
mentous part, usually up to 35u or more in length, mostly 2 to 4u in diameter
at base, generally widening to a diameter of 3.5 to 6.5u toward the expanded
apex. Zoospores formed mostly 20 to 50 in a vesicle, longitudinally grooved,
broadly reniform, biciliate, moderately active, measuring usually 9 to 10u
(average 9.4u) after rounding up.
Oogonia terminal or intercalary, often intercalary close to tip of the sup-
porting filament, and often laterally or tangentially intercalary; provided
410 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 16
with a wall approximately 0.5 to 0.7u in thickness; subspherical, measuring
17 to 35u, mostly 22 to 3lu (average 26.44) in diameter, not including the
spiny protuberances of which from 15 to 125, mostly 35 to 75, are visible in
upper and equatorial aspects,—the spiny protuberances mostly 3 to 7u
(average 3.9u) in length and 1.5 to 3.5u (average 2.2u) in diameter at base,
tapering usually markedly toward the rather sharply pointed apex, sometimes
somewhat irregular and jagged in profile, with membrane usually approxi-
mately 0.3u in thickness; in most (approximately 4 out of 5) cases developing
parthenogenetically, in other cases supplied with 1 or less often 2 antheridia.
Antheridium borne terminally on branch arising usually from a hypha other
than the one bearing oogonium, the branch in distal portion for length of
5 to 25u usually closely applied to oogonium; measuring 12 to 25u (usually
approximately 18) in length and 5.5 to 8y in diameter in the more inflated
distal part; when relatively short usually clavate and somewhat crook-
necked, when longer often divided into 2 or 3 lobes by transverse constric-
tions; in any case applied lengthwise closely to the oogonium, the short fer-
tilization tube produced from near the apex. Oospore colorless or yellowish;
subspherical, 15 to 30u, mostly 19 to 27u (average 23.1u) in diameter; pro-
vided with a wall 0.9 to 2.2u (average 1.5u) in thickness and containing a
reserve globule 6 to 14.5y (average 9.6u) in diameter; refringent body often
not clearly in evidence, when visible often subspherical, 3 to 4.5u in diameter.
Isolated from discolored rootlet of Piswm sativum L. collected near Eden,
N. Y., June, 1924.
Pythium anandrum sp. nov.
Intramatrical mycelium of radiating aspect, only slightly lustrous, capable
of approximately 22 mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C., composed of
relatively straight axial hyphae mostly 5 to 8.3u in diameter, bearing shorter,
more irregularly disposed ramifying branches usually 3.5 to 5u in diameter.
Extramatrical mycelium under aquatic conditions rather meager, delicate,
the hyphae often as narrow as 2u. Aerial mycelium absent or when present,
scanty and loosely arachnoid.
Sporangia borne terminally on simple or sparingly branched filaments
which measure, except in the frequently expanding distal portion, 2 to 3u in
diameter and often up to 2 or 3 mm. in length, or later through continuation
of growth by the supporting filament from immediately below the delimiting
septum, sometimes occupying a lateral position; elongated,prolate ellipsoidal,
measuring 18 to 40u (average 25.3u) in diameter by 32 to 85u (average 50.4)
in length exclusive of the usually sessile papilla of dehiscence mostly 6 to 8u
in basal diameter and 3 to 5u in length; occasionally proliferous, mostly by
the sporangiophore growing through the empty sporangium to produce
another sporangium farther on. Vesicle usually sessile on the sporangium,
developing 8 to 30 zoospores; the latter biciliate, reniform, somewhat sluggish
in movement, measuring mostly 12 to 14y (average 13u) in diameter on
rounding up.
Oogonia borne terminally on branches often somewhat irregular or con-
torted and frequently widening toward the rather broad, usually convexly
protruding delimiting septum; subspherical 12 to 33u, mostly 23 to 32u
(average 28.3u) in diameter exclusive of the conically spiny protuberances,
of which 35 to 65 are usually visible in upper and equatorial aspects, and
which on firm substrata measure mostly 2 to 4u (average 2.8u) in basal diame-
ter and 3 to lly (average 7.1u) in length, though under aquatic conditions
often not exceeding ly in basal diameter and 2 in length; provided with a
OCTOBER 4, 1930 DRECHSLER: NEW SPECIES OF PYTHIUM 411
wall of moderate thickness, this thickness usually between 0.5 and 0.8u be-
coming reduced somewhat in the spiny protuberances; constantly partheno-
genetic, developing in the absence of any recognizable antheridia. Oospore
colorless or yellowish, largely filling oogonium, smooth, subspherical, 11 to
28u, mostly 21 to 27u (average 24.4u) in diameter, provided with a wall 0.8
to 2.1u, mostly 1.2 to 1.8u (average 1.6u) in thickness, the reserve globule
measuring 7 to 16u, mostly 10 to 14y (average 12.8) in diameter, and the re-
fringent body when subspherical measuring mostly 4 to 5u in diameter,
though frequently somewhat flattened.
Isolated from softened underground bud of Rheum rhaponticum L. col-
lected near Brentwood, Md., June 13, 1924.
Pythium mastophorum sp. nov.
Intramatrical mycelium without pronounced luster or radiating aspect,
capable of approximately 20 mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C.,
consisting of hyphae 2 to 7.8u in diameter, often somewhat contorted and
typically disposed in haphazard, irregular course, bearing in moderate number
appressoria mostly knob-shaped, 8 to 12u in diameter, or less often sickle-
shaped. Extramatrical growth under aquatic conditions sparse. Aerial
mycelium absent or scantily developed.
Sporangia not known to be proliferous, subspherical, usually 17 to 38u
(average 29.3u) in diameter, somewhat darkly opaque, terminal or intercal-
ary, in latter case often near tip of supporting hypha. Evacuation tube aris-
ing indiscriminately from any portion of sporangium, mostly 15 to 125y in
length and 2.5 to 8u in diameter, often more or less contorted, sometimes bear-
ing 1 or several short diverticulations, the apical portion below refringent
tip widening little, if at all; frequently ineffective for discharge and then often
0.2 or 0.3 mm. in length. Zoospores formed 3 to 14 or sometimes more in a
vesicle, biciliate, broadly reniform, usually somewhat sluggish in movement,
after rounding up measuring 12 to 14 in diameter.
Oogonium when primary in origin borne usually terminally on a branch
commonly 5 to 25u long, subspherical, 24 to 48u, mostly 30 to 41u (average
35u) in diameter exclusive of the spiny protuberances that number usually
25 to 75 in upper and equatorial aspects; the spiny protuberance conical or
often mammiform, measuring on firm substrata 2 to 8u (average 5.2u) in
length and 2 to 6u (average 4.3u) in diameter at the base, where its wall is
often approximately lu in thickness to become usually noticeably attenuated
toward the frequently papillate apex at which the lumen yet often becomes
very narrow; under aquatic conditions protuberances more minute, often
not exceeding 2u in length and lu in diameter. Antheridium usually single;
borne usually terminally or more rarely in intercalary position on a hypha
without close connection with the oogonial branch; variously shaped, often
somewhat lobate, 7 to 15u (usually approximately 12.) in diameter and 16
to 28u (usually approximately 20u) in length; making broad apical contact
with the oogonium about the origin of a fertilization tube generally measuring
1.5 to 4u in diameter and 1.5 to 3u in length; the antheridium and the distal
part of its supporting hypha often though not always closely engaging the
oogonial stalk and the basal portion of the oogonium, the engagement some-
times made more intimate through the presence of diverticulations. Oospore
colorless or somewhat yellowish; smooth, subspherical, when primary in
origin measuring 20 to 44u, mostly 24 to 36u (average 28.9u) in diameter,
provided with a wall 1.4 to 2.34 (average 1.8u) in thickness, containing a re-
412 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 16
serve globule 12 to 18u (average 15.54) in diameter, and a refringent body
subspherical or oblate ellipsoidal in shape, measuring when subspherical
usually 4 to 6u in diameter, germinating by the production of a germ tube,
or under aquatic conditions, often developing as a sporangium with the dis-
charge of contents through an evacuation tube.
Primary oogonium under some conditions frequently producing instead
of an oospore, an endogenous secondary oogonium which is often similarly
though usually more sparingly provided with protuberances, but is of infe-
rior size, the smaller ones often little more than 20y in diameter, and produces
a proportionately smaller oospore, the diameter of the latter sometimes little
exceeding 15u, or occasionally gives rise to an endogenous tertiary oogonium
within which the small oospore is produced.
Tsolated from discolored root of Bellis perennis L. collected in Washington,
DC: ;. June, #927.
Pythium polymastum sp. nov.
Intramatrical mycelium of diffuse appearance, capable of approximately
19 mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C., consisting of hyphae 2.5 to
9.5u in diameter, haphazard in disposition and branching habit, usually de-
void of recognizable appressoria. Under aquatic conditions extramatrical
mycelium sparse or nearly moderate in quantity. Aerial mycelium absent,
or if present, rather scanty and floccose.
Sporangia not known to be proliferous; somewhat darkly opaque; borne
on extramatrical hyphae, sometimes formed terminally, though then later
often coming to have a lateral position through continuation of growth of the
supporting filament, or somewhat more often originating in intercalary posi-
tion frequently a short distance from tip of supporting hypha, the distal ele-
ment of latter then present as an apical appendage; usually subspherical,
often noticeably oblate measuring 20 to 36u (average approximately 30u)
in diameter, but sometimes of rather irregular shape through presence of
1 or more dome-shaped protuberances, or even composed of 2 or 3 subspheri-
cal parts fused into a lobate structure. Evacuation tube arising indiscrimi-
nately from any portion of sporangium, measuring mostly 14 to 55u (average
approximately 30u) in length and 4.5 to 7.5u in diameter. Zoospores formed
2 to 12 or sometimes more in a vesicle, longitudinally grooved, biciliate,
broadly bean-shaped, usually somewhat sluggish in movement, often 18y
in length and 13u in diameter, after rounding up measuring usually 14 to
17 in diameter.
Oogonia usually borne terminally on branches infrequently more than 100u,
usually less than 50y and often less than 10u long, though sometimes lateral
and sessile on the parent filament; subspherical, measuring 29 to 67u, mostly
29 to 58u (average 45.6u) in diameter, exclusive of the spiny protuberances
of which usually from 10 to 125 (average approximately 55) are visible in
upper and equatorial aspects; the spiny protuberance conical or often charac-
teristically mammiform, measuring 1 to 10y (average 5.5u) in length and 2.5
to 6.5u (average 4.5u) in diameter at the base, where its wall is 0.8 to 1.4u
in thickness to become usually noticeably attenuated toward the frequently
narrowed papillate apex at which the lumen yet often becomes very narrow.
Antheridia 1 to 4 in number; usually terminal on branches without close
mycelial connection with the oogonium, or sometimes intercalary, then
mostly intercalary a short distance from tip of supporting hypha, or sometimes
lateral and sessile on the parent filament; variously shaped, broadly saccate
OCTOBER 4, 1930 DRECHSLER: NEW SPECIES OF PYTHIUM 413
or cylindrica! or barrel-shaped, often with diverticulate or cupulate protuber-
ances, or sometimes markedly lobate; measuring mostly 20 to 43u (average
approximately 27u) in length and 12 to 2ly (average approxiamtely 15y)
in diameter; making broad apical contact with the oogonium about the origin
of a fertilization tube sometimes approximately 4u long and 2.5 to 3.5y in
diameter; 1 antheridium and the distal part of its supporting stalk sometimes
closely engaging the oogonial stalk and the basal part of the oogonium.
Oospore nearly colorless or somewhat yellowish, smooth, subspherical,
mostly 25 to 42u (average 35.3u) in diameter, provided with a wall 1.2 to
2.2u (average 1.6u) in thickness, containing a reserve globule 16 to 28y (aver-
age 21.3u) in diameter, and a refringent body, subspherical or strongly
flattened, when subspherical measuring usually 4.5 to 5.5u in diameter.
Isolated from Lactuca sativa L. in Connecticut, April, 1921.
Pythium helicoides sp. nov.
Intramatrical mycelium diffuse in appearance, capable of approximately
29 mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C., consisting of axial hyphae
measuring in actively vegetative condition 4 to 8u in diameter, later sometimes
attaining a diameter of 9.5u, and of branching elements mostly 2 to 4y in
diameter usually very extensively developed and bearing a moderately abund-
ant supply of appressoria as clavate or knob-like terminations measuring 6
to 8u toward the adhering apex. Under aquatic conditions intramatrical
mycelium of moderately copious development, the most delicate elements
sometimes only 1.5u in diameter. Aerial mycelium usually well and often
profusely developed, under conditions not too humid persisting without
collapsing.
Sporangia regularly formed terminally, generally on long extramatrical
hyphae and on branches borne mostly on the distal portions of such hyphae
often in racemose or cymoid arrangement; individually later often coming
into a lateral position through continued elongation of the supporting fila-
ment from immediately below the delimiting septum; subspherical or more
often obovoid; measuring mostly 9 to 40u (average approximately 28x)
in transverse diameter and 17 to 45u (average approximately 31) in length,
not including an apical papillary protuberance, approximately 6y in basal
diameter and 4y in length, often present during prolonged resting periods;
regularly discharging through an evacuation tube mostly 3 to 40u longand
3 to 9.5u in diameter arising from the apex, or sometimes especially following
frustration of an apical tube, from an equatorial or a basal position; very
often once and sometimes twice proliferous, the secondary or tertiary sporan-
gium being formed usually within the empty envelope of its predecessor,
though sometimes borne externally on a prolongation of the sporangiophore
passing out through the evacuation tube. Zoospores formed usually 2 to 40
in a vesicle, longitudinally grooved, bean-shaped, biciliate, after rounding
up measuring 10 to 15u (average 12.3) in diameter; occasionally giving rise
to a secondary swimming spore through the production of an evacuation tube
measuring approximately 2.8u in diameter and 8u or more in length.
Oogonium borne terminally sometimes on longer branch and sometimes
on branch less than 5yu in length, but especially often through further shorten-
ing of such branches, borne laterally as a structure sessile on the parent fila-
ment; subspherical, often broadly protruding toward the antheridium;
measuring mostly 26 to 40u (average approximately 33u) in diameter; pro-
414 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 16
vided with a sturdy wall approximately 0.7 in thickness; and often retaining
at maturity considerable granular residues outside of the oospore. Anth-
eridia 1 to 4 in number; when plural, sometimes each of origin independent
of the other or others, and sometimes 2, rarely more, supplied by the same
branching filamentous element; in any case borne terminally on branches not
closely connected with oogonial hypha, one of the branches, or its parent fila-
ment or a short vegetative branch from the parent filament or two of such
elements collectively regularly winding about the oogonial hypha or the parent
filament of the latter in 2 to 4 close helical turns, and occasionally, in addition,
a filament closely connected with a second antheridium similarly involving a
hyphal element having close mycelial relationship to oogonium; elongated,
curved, cylindrical; measuring 20 to 42u in length and 6 to 9u in diameter;
very intimately applied lengthwise to oogonium for entire length; producing
a fertilization tube from navel position measuring usually 3 to 7y in length
and 2 to 3u in diameter, occasionally widening to a diameter of 5u. Oospore
nearly colorless or more often decidedly yellowish; subspherical, measuring
mostly 21 to 32u (average approximately 27.5u) in diameter; provided with
a wall mostly 2.5 to 3.2u in thickness, and containing at maturity 6 to 20 re-
serve globules, mostly 4 to 6u in diameter, and 2 to 4 refringent bodies,
approximately 3u in diameter.
Isolated from decaying roots of Phaseolus vulgaris L. collected near Pom-
pano, Fla., March and April, 1926.
Pythium oedochilum sp. nov.
Intramatrical mycelium diffuse in appearance, capable of approximately
20 mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C., consisting of hyphae 1.8 to 6.5u
in diameter, bearing appressoria rather sparingly or often in moderate abun-
dance as swollen clavate terminations usually curved and measuring 5 to 7u
at the adhering apex. Under aquatic conditions extramatrical mycelium of
meager or sometimes of nearly moderate development. Aerial mycelium
sparse, or moderately profuse, though even in latter case somewhat arach-
noid; under conditions not too humid persisting without collapsing.
Sporangia regularly formed terminally on long, slender, extramatrical
hyphae that measure 2 to 4.5u, mostly about 3u, in diameter, or terminally on
branches from the distal portion of such hyphae, in either case individually
later often coming to a lateral position through continued growth of the sup-
porting hypha; in exceptional instances intercalary; subspherical, obovoid or
more often ovoid, measuring mostly 17 to 42u (average approximately 30z)
in transverse diameter and 25 to 48u (average approximately 35y ) in length
not including a papillary apical protuberance 6 to 8u in basal diameter and in
length, often present during resting periods; becoming discharged individually
by means of an evacuation tube mostly 3 to 32u (average approximately 16)
and 3.5 to 8u (average approximately 6u) in diameter, arising usually from the
apex but sometimes especially after functional frustration of apical tube from
an equatorial or a basal position; sometimes proliferous though not abun-
dantly so, most often once, somewhat rarely twice, usually by continuation of
growth of the supporting hypha through the orifice of the evacuated mem-
brane, and formation of another sporangium externally. Zoospores formed
usually 10 to 35 in a vesicle, longitudinally grooved, bean-shaped, biciliate,
after rounding up measuring 11 to 15u in diameter.
Oogonium occasionally intercalary, but usually borne terminally on longer
branch or less frequently terminally on branch less than 5y in length, and
OCTOBER 4, 1930 DRECHSLER: NEW SPECIES OF PYTHIUM 415
sometimes attached laterally to the parent filament as a sessile structure;
subspherical, often with prominent protrusion directed toward antheridium
and pierced centrally by the evacuation tube to yield a thick-lipped profile;
measuring 19 to 39u, mostly 27 to 36u (average 31.5u) in diameter; provided
with a sturdy wall0.4 to 1.1u (often 0.7) in thickness; sometimes retaining at
maturity rather meager granular residues outside of the oospore. Antheridia
1 to 4, mostly 1 or 2, in number; borne terminally usually on branches not often
exceeding 50u in length and generally arising from a filament not closely con-
nected with the oogonial filament, yet occasionally arising from the oogonial
hypha though at distances usually more than 40u from the oogonium, or
sometimes sessile and borne laterally on the parent filament,—in any case
involvement of a filamentous part supporting the oogonium by a filamentous
part supporting an antheridium associated with that oogonium, of decidedly
rare occurrence; curved, elongated cylindrical, often somewhat wavy in con-
tour, measuring 13 to 30u in length and 4.5 to 8u in diameter; applied in-
timately to the oogonium lengthwise along its entire length; producing a
fertilization tube usually 2 to 4u in length and 1.2 to 2.5 in diameter from a
somethat forward navel position. Oospore usually distinctly yellowish;
subspherical, measuring 16 to 34u, mostly 23 to 32u (average 28.1u) in diame-
ter; provided with a wall 1.8 to 3.6u, mostly 2.1 to 3.2u (average 2.5u) in
thickness, and containing 5 to 20 reserve globules, mostly 4 to 6.5u in diameter,
and refringent bodies 2.5 to 3.5u in diameter, numbering usually 3 to 4 at
early maturity and 10 to 20 at later maturity.
Isolated from decaying roots of Dahha sp. in Washington, D. C., August,
1926.
Pythium polytylum sp. nov.
Intramatrical mycelium diffuse in appearance, capable of approximately
25 mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C., consisting of hyphae measuring
1.9 to 7.54 in actively vegetative condition, later sometimes attaining a
diameter of 8u; the more delicate elements abundantly developed and bearing
abundant appressoria as curved, swollen, clavate terminations, 6 to 8u in
diameter at the adhering apex. Under aquatic conditions extramatrical
mycelium of moderately abundant development. Aerial mycelium usually
produced in moderate quantity or sometimes more copiously, and often per-
sisting long without collapsing.
Sporangium appearing somewhat tardily; sometimes intercalary, especi-
ally laterally intercalary but usually formed terminally on long, slender ex-
tramatrical filament little given to branching, though later often coming to
occupy a lateral position through continuation of growth of the supporting
filament from immediately below the delimiting septum; subspherical, in
case of larger examples often 28 to 33u in diameter not including the papillary
protuberance of variable size sometimes present during resting periods; regu-
larly discharging through an evacuation tube measuring mostly 8 to 20u in
length and 7 to 9u in diameter and arising often from apex but sometimes from
other positions, especially after functional frustration of apical tube; pro-
liferous development infrequent and often absent. Zoospores formed usually
10 to 35 in a vesicle, longitudinally grooved, bean-shaped, biciliate, after
rounding up measuring mostly 9.5 to 11.5u in diameter.
Oogonium sometimes terminal on branch generally less than 50u, rather
often less than 5y in length, sometimes lateral and sessile on parent filament;
subspherical, though frequently protruding broadly toward antheridia;
416 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, NO. 16
measuring 26 to 40u, mostly 29 to 37u (average 32.6u) in diameter; provided
with a wall 0.5 to lu (average 0.7u) in thickness. Antheridia 1 to 4,
mostly 1 or 2 in number; sometimes lateral and sessile, but usually borne
terminally on branches rarely more than 80u, mostly less than 50u and some-
times less than 5u (average approximately 25y) in length, the branches aris-
ing mostly from hyphae not closely connected with oogonial filament, though
sometimes arising from parent filament oogonial branch or its mycelial con-
nections, the length of hypha intervening between the septa delimiting oogon-
jum and antheridium usually exceeding 60u,—in any case the filamentous
elements supplying the sex organs only infrequently exhibiting helicoid in-
volvement; curved, elongated cylindrical, often somewhat wavy in profile;
measuring usually 15 to 40u (average approximately 30u) in length, and 5
to 7.5u (average approximately 6) in diameter; intimately applied lengthwise
to the oogonium, and except sometimes.for a short proximal portion, applied
throughout its length; producing from a navel position a fertilization tube
often 3 to 4u in length and 2u in diameter. Oospore usually distinctly yel-
-lowish. subspherical, 23 to 35u, mostly 25 to 33u (average 28.8u) in diameter,
provided with a wall 2.1 to 3.4u (average 2.6u) in thickness, and containing 6
to 20 reserve globules, mostly 4 to 6u in diameter, and 4 to 8 or more refrin-
gent bodies mostly 2.5 to 3.2u in diameter.
Isolated from decaying root of Prunella vulgaris L. collected near Dela-
plane, Va., August, 1926.
Pythium palingenes sp. nov.
Intramatrical mycelium diffuse in appearance, capable of approximately 26
mm. radial extension in 24 hours at 24°C., consisting of hyphae 2 to 7u in
diameter, bearing appressoria in moderate abundance as distended, clavate
or knob-like terminations mostly 5.5 to 7.5u in diameter toward adhering
apex. Under aquatic conditions extramatrical mycelium of meager, some-
times of nearly moderate development. Aerial mycelium sometimes scanty,
but more often of moderate or copious development; under conditions not
too humid persisting long without collapsing.
Sporangia formed promptly and in large number; regularly formed ter-
minally on long simple extramatrical filaments mostly 2 to 4u in diameter and
mostly devoid of branches in the distal part, but often continuing growth from
immediately below one sporangium to produce another farther on, the older
one then coming to occupy a lateral position; subspherical or often somewhat
ovoid, individually measuring mostly 24 to 42u (average approximately 33y)
in length and 18 to 36u (average approximately 29u) in transverse diameter,
the former dimension not including a sessile apical papilla often present dur-
ing resting periods and measuring often approximately 6u in basal diameter
and 4y in length; individually discharging often by means of the sessile apical
papilla, but more frequently through an evacuation tube measuring exclu-
sive of refringent tip usually 2 to 35u (average 8u) in length and 5.5 to 10u
(average 6.64) in diameter,—the tube arising usually from the apex, but occa-
sionally, especially after failure of apical tube, from other positions; abund-
antly proliferous, both by formation of sessile or nearly sessile secondary and
often tertiary sporangia within primary ones, and by growth of the support-
ing filaments through the orifices of the empty sporangial envelopes to pro-
duce sporangia externally,—the latter type of development frequently re-
peated 2 or 3 times, usually in conjunction with the former at any or all of
OCTOBER 4, 19830 DRECHSLER: NEW SPECIES OF PYTHIUM 417
the serial sporangia. Zoospores produced 6 to 30 in a vesicle; longitudinally
grooved, bean-shaped, biciliate, after rounding up measuring 11 to 17y (aver-
age 14u) in diameter; individually germinating vegetatively by a germ tube
usually 2 to 3u in diameter, or often giving rise without interposition of a
vegetative phase to a secondary zoospore,—the repetitional development
taking place either by direct discharge of contents through an evacuation
tube 3 to 6u in diameter and 5 to 15u in length, or by the production termi-
nally of an elongated miniature sporangium often 16 to 32y in length and 7 to
13u in transverse diameter on a germ sporangiophore mostly 2u in diameter
and 40 to 285u in length. Conidia often borne in large numbers on aerial
hyphae on dry substrata, generally similar to sporangia formed under aqua-
tie conditions, though usually somewhat smaller, often intercalary as well as
terminal, and usually germinating by the production of one or more germ
tubes rather than giving rise to zoospores.
Oogonia sometimes borne terminally on branches up to 75y ormorein length,
more often on short stalks less than 5y in length, or frequently sessile on the
parent filament, or intercalary, especially laterally or tangentially inter-
ealary; nearly colorless or sometimes decidedly yellowish; subspherical,
though often protruding toward antheridia; measuring 19 to 41u, mostly 28
to 40u (average 34u) in diameter; provided individually with a wall 0.4 to
lu, mostly approximately 0.6 in thickness. Antheridia 1 to 4 (average 2)
in number, sometimes borne laterally on hyphae as sessile structures, but
more often borne terminally on branches sometimes less than 5y, and usually
not more than 50y in length,—these supporting branches usually not closely
connected with the oogonial filament though sometimes, like often also
certain vegetative branches, wrapped about the latter in 2 or 3 close helical
turns; curved cylindrical, often wavy or more markedly irregular in contour;
measuring mostly 20 to 28u in length and 6 to 8u in diameter; intimately
applied lengthwise to the oogonium, sometimes for entire length and some-
times only along anterior portion; producing individually an evacuation tube
measuring often 2 to 4y in length and 2y in diameter, from a navel or often
more forward position. Oospore usually yellowish; subspherical, measuring
18 to 37u, mostly 26 to 36u (average 31.34) in diameter; provided with a wall
1.5 to 3.5u (average 2.6u) in thickness, and containing 5 to 30 reserve globules
3 to 6u in diameter, and 2 to 5 refringent bodies mostly 2.5 to 4u in diameter.
Isolated from roots of Ambrosia trifida L. collected near Delaplane, Va.,
August, 1926.
LITERATURE CITED
1. Bary, A. de. Untersuchungen tiber die Peronosporeen und Saprolegnieen und die
Grundlagen eines nattirlichen Systems der Pilze. Abhand. Senckenb. Naturf.
Gesell. 12: 225-370. 1881.
2. Dissmann, E. Vergleichende Studien zur Biologie und Systematik zweier Pythium-
Arten. Archiv fiir Protistenkunde 60: 142-192. 1927.
3. Drechsler, C. The cottony leak of cucumbers caused by Pythium aphanidermatum.
Jour. Agr. Research 30: 1035-1042. 1925.
4. Drechsler, C. A peculiar type of Pythium. (Abstract.) Phytopathology 17: 55.
1927.
5. Fischer, A. Phycomyceten. In: Rabenhorst, L. Kryptogamen-Flora von Deutsch-
land, Oesterreich und der Schweiz. Aufl. 2, Bd. 1, Abt. 4. 505 p. 1892.
6. Kanouse, B. B. Physiology and morphology of Pythiomorpha gonapodioides. Bot.
Gaz. 79: 196-206. 1925.
418 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 16
7. Mathews, V. D. Nowakowskiella and a new species of Pythium. Jour. Elisha
Mitchell Sei. Soc. 43: 229-232. 1928.
8. Minden, M. von. Bevtrége zur Biologie und Systematik einheimischer submerser
Phycomyceten. Mykologische Untersuchungen und Berichte von Dr. Richard
Falck 1: 146-225. 1916.
9. Pringsheim, N. Beitrdge zur Morphologie und Systematik der Algen. II. Die Sapro-
legnieen. Jahrb. Wissensch. Bot. 1: 284-306. 1858.
10. Schréter, J. Saprolegniineae. In: Engler, A., and Prantl, K. Die Naturlichen
Pflanzenfamilien. Lfg. 93, Teil. 1, Abt. 1: 93-105. 1893.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
THE ACADEMY
Dr. FRANK WIGGLESWORTH CLARKE, on the nomination of the Geologica
Society of Washington, has been elected an Honorary Member of the Acad-
emy. This action has been taken in recognition of his contributions to geo-
chemistry, particularly the chemistry of the silicates. He has also done
notable work in the development of methods of analysis, in the computation
of atomic weights and in the philosophical discussion of the evolution and
disintegration of matter. He has for many years been intimately connected
with scientific activities in Washington and has served the Academy as mem-
ber and officer since its foundation.
Dr. Wi1tu1aAm Henry Hormes, in recognition of his distinguished contribu-
tions to geology and ethnology, his high place in the scientific life of Wash-
ington, and his long service as member and officer, has been elected an Honor-
ary Member of the Academy.
The following have recently been elected to membership in the Academy:
William Dunford Appel, Chief, Textile Section, Bureau of Standards.
Dr. Arthur Charles Bevan, State Geologist of Virginia.
Dr. Burt H. Carroll, Photographic Chemist, Bureau of Standards.
Dr. Fred O. Coe, Medical Specialist.
Carle Hamilton Dane, Associate Geologist, Geological Survey.
Dr. Herbert Friedmann, Curator, Division of Birds, National Museum.
Dr. James H. Hibben, Physical Chemist, Geophysical Laboratory.
Henry Freeborn Johnston, Physicist, Department of Terrestrial Magnetism,
Carnegie Institution.
Louis Jordan, Chief of Chemical-Metallurgical Section, Bureau of Standards.
Arthur Remington Kellogg, Assistant Curator, Division of Mammals,
National Museum.
James H. Kempton, Botanist in Biophysical Laboratory, Bureau of Plant
Industry.
Herbert W. Krieger, Curator, Division of Ethnology, National Museum.
Dr. William M. Mann, Director, National Zoological Park.
Dr. Wendell C. Mansfield, Associate Geologist, Geological Survey.
Dr. Archibald Turner McPherson, Associate Chemist, Bureau of Standards.
Dr. Charles Moon, Physicist, Bureau of Standards.
OCTOBER 4, 1930 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 419
William J. Rooney, Physicist, Department of Terrestrial Magnetism, Car-
negie Institution.
Howard 8. Rappleye, Associate Mathematician, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Dr. Frank H. H. Roberts, Jr., Archeologist, Bureau of American Ethnology.
Rufus Harvey Sargent, Topographic Engineer, Geological Survey.
Waldo La Salle Schmitt, Curator, Division of Marine Invertebrates, National
Museum.
Dr. Edgar Reynolds Smith, Chemist, Bureau of Standards.
John Albert Stevenson, Senior Mycologist, Bureau of Plant Industry.
Dr. Harold F. Stimson, Physicist, Bureau of Standards.
William H. Swanger, Chief of Mechanical Metallurgy Section, Bureau of
Standards.
David G. Thompson, Geologist, U. S. Geological Survey.
Joseph S. Wade, Entomologist, Bureau of Entomology.
Dr. George Ray Wait, Physicist, Department of Terrestrial Magnetism,
Carnegie Institution.
Dr. Henry Theodore Wensel, Senior Physicist, Bureau of Standards.
RESOLUTION ON THE DEATH OF FRIDTJOF NANSEN
WHEREAS, The members of the Washington Academy of Sciences have
learned, with profound regret, of the death on May 18, 1930, of their honored
and beloved fellow member, FrRiptsor NANsgEN, therefore be it
Resolved, That the Academy hereby records its sorrow over this grievous
loss to itself and to all the world of a scientist who contributed abundantly
to our knowledge, a statesman of high and steadfast purpose and a humani-
tarian who labored for the good of nations and of peoples—a man of highest
character, unmindful of hardships, fearless in danger, deaf to plaudits and
blind to pomp and circumstance, and be it further
: ee That a copy of this resolution be sent to Dr. Nansen’s immediate
amily.
The following members of the AcapEMy were elected to membership in
the National Academy of Sciences in April, 1930: Dr. Eucenr T. ALLEN,
Geophysical Laboratory; Dr. Witt1am W. CosBLentz, Bureau of Standards;
Dr. Vernon Keutoce, National Research Council; and Dr. SamuE. C.
Linn, University of Minnesota.
The corresponding list for the American Philosophical Society is: Dr.
Norman L. Bowen, Geophysical Laboratory, Dr. Harvey W. CusHING,
Harvard Medical School, and Dr. ALExanpER WetTMorR:, Smithsonian
Institution.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
Dr. Epcar T. WuHeErrRy, one of the Editors of this journal, has resigned
from the position of Principal Chemist in charge, Crop Chemistry Labora-
tory, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils, to become Associate Professor of Plant
Ecology in the Department of Botany of the University of Pennsylvania,
Philadelphia, Pa.
420 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 16
WENDELL P. WooprinG, for the past few years on the staff of the Cali-
fornia Institute of Technology, resumed full time service with the U. S.
Geological Survey on July 1, 1930.
STANLY CATHCART, formerly connected with the Geological Survey, was
reinstated as geologist in the Conservation Branch but has recently joined |
the Pennsylvania Geological Survey staff.
RicHarD C. Capy and Stantey W. LonMAN have been appointed junior
geologists; and Victor T. STRINGFIELD and CHARLES V. THEIs, assistant
geologists, in the Water Resources Branch.
W. D. JoHnson and F. G. Wetts have been transferred from the Water
Resources Branch to the Geologic branch and assigned to field work.
Obituary
Professor WILLIAM SUDDARDS FRANKLIN, a member of the ACADEMY, was
killed in an automobile accident on June 6th, 1930. He was born at Geary
City, Kansas, in 1863, and was educated at the University of Kansas. In
1901 he received the degree of Se.D. from Cornell University. He taught
physics and electrical engineering successively at Kansas, Iowa, Lehigh,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, and Rollins College.
Dr. Jesse WALTER FEwKEs, for ten years chief of the Bureau of American
Ethnology, a member of the AcaprEmy, died on May 31, 1930. He was born
at Newton, Massachusetts, in 1850, and studied at Harvard and Leipzig
Universities, and at various zoological stations. While engaged in work on
marine zoology in California in 1887 he became interested in the American
Indians, and in subsequent years devoted his attention to their ethnology
and archeology. He was appointed ethnologist in the Bureau of American
Ethnology in 1895, and Chief of the Bureau in 1918.
Dr. Harvey WasuHineton Witny, Chief Chemist of the Department of
Agriculture from 1883 to 1912, died on June 30, 1930. He was born at Kent,
Indiana, in 1844, and educated at Hanover College, the Indiana Medical
School, and Harvard University. He early realized the need of legislation
to protect the public against adulteration and misbranding of foods and
drugs, and succeeded in bringing about the enactment of the Federal Food
and Drugs Act in 1906. To the end of his life he continued his efforts to keep
our foods and drugs pure, and to furnish sound advice on diet and health
matters.
Ta
Ek UCKERMAN Bureau of
ES fae Bureau of nate and Sells. :
is
Co st: and Geodetic Survey.
) . fh Ae No. 17
ee Ro. COR He
VASHINGTON ACADEMY
- BOARD OF ED ITORS |
7 -Epgar T. WHERRY C. Wrtur Cooke
= UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA . U.&. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
‘aed ASSOCIATE EDITORS
as E Munwin aie a ane eae at Haroutp Morrison
% PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ny - 2 Hea ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
Pa A Gornmin es GW. Stosz
‘BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY | ny ; GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
- Agnes Gaiam Gee TR. Swalreon 3
BOTANICAL SOCIETY nh hat Cr eo! z ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
on aeritie et Oem ta) WW EELS
i CHEMICAL SOCIETY
25 me! PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
\
3 BY THE '
_ WASHIN GTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Ma, Roya AND Gurtrorp AVES,
. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
nd Class Matter, Tyne 11, 1923, at the post-office, at Baltimore, Md., under (he
t 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of pore provided tor
u
ue a | oad of Aue
pie be ok 1108, Ae of October 3, 1917. Authorised sate 3, 1918.
‘
_ a
4 S.%
$5 2m
fa aa
reyes Ss cio
el ae Pisce
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: _
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; °) pro-
ceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes
of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, ee during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or —
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from*the author, in the —
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate —
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes he numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. - | "ES
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced
by zinc etchings being preferable. :
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors —
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors —
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. ih o>
Authors’ Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers
bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and —
date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accord-
ance with the following schedule of prices: .
Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
OO ook Reies pea CM, a hee tee hb Sino end Widnes oles $2.00 .
100 $ .50 $ .55 $ .60 $1.10 2.50 efi
150 -90 1.00 1.10 1.60 3.00 e
200 1.15 1.50 1.60 2.10 3.50
250 1.65 2.00 2.10 2.60 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. ee
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in
ee may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional 100,
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints Dm ‘ £5
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. pict ae
be oa pores
The rate of Subscription per volume 78........ccecccccvcccccces FRY AO SRS . BOO% a A
pemu-monthiy numbers secs. 5c. ews otk oh a eis 8 do we ie nd espee SE was
Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and 15)..... .50
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’'and _ Ri ae
. addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington,D.C.
Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other publications. = ~~
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made | ae
within thirty days after date of the following issue. “Ree
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates — an oe
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy x es
ney? 4
eee ~ oe
: JOURNAL
OF THE
W ASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 20 Ocrozer 19, 1930 No. 17
GEOLOGY.—Paleozoic formations in the Gold Hill quadrangle, Utah.‘
Tuomas B. Nouan, U. 8. Geological Survey. (Communicated
by R. C. WELLS.)
Within the Gold Hill Quadrangle in western Utah, there is exposed a
section of Paleozoic rocks that is comparable in thickness and in the
time intervals represented to that at Eureka, Nevada.? The situation
of the quadrangle (just east of the Nevada-Utah line and at the 40th
parallel) about midway between the classic Nevada section and the
well-known sections in the Wasatch’ and in the Tintic district makes
this stratigraphic column of particular interest. In the present paper
the Paleozoic formations that have been distinguished in the quad-
rangle are named and very briefly described, in advance of a more
extended discussion which is to be publeled by the Geological Survey.®
Table 1 summarizes the section.
CAMBRIAN SYSTEM
Prospect Mountain quartzite-——The oldest formation exposed is a
massively bedded quartzite that is identified with the Prospect
1 Published by permission of the Director, U. 8S. Geological Survey. Received July
3, 1930.
* Arnold Hague. Geology of the Eureka district, Nevada. U.S. Geol. Survey Mono-
graph 20. 1892.
3 F.F. Hintze. Sih Ss Mis one univie w NER ae om Ears Beata
Paleontology.—Contributions to the paleontology of Peru, IV: “0:
(Discocyclina) meroensis W. Berry, n.sp. W1LLaRD BERRY.....5. aa
Ornithology.—The geographic variations of Neocichla gutturalis (B
BERT FRIEDMANN eer
'
*- a
PRoceEpInas ihe
The Geologidal Sooiaty..j cy sq-sedinfeseseccsestetne eae
The Entomological Society tepeeseeecaceeeeseececeecnseeecenenes
mils Jcfuscgas: ined 4A tae atesptsonl Takes Ve Peiiocinanibs bn foul
- NOVEMBER 4, 1930 | Li SIN Os 18
OF * SCIENCES»
‘BOARD OF EDITORS
_ Epaar W. WoonarD _ Ep@ar T, WHERRY C, Wrtue Cooxz
GEORGE WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY — UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA U. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
¥ ; ASSOCIATE EDITORS
H. E. Merwin» : anbeo Morrison
PHILOSOPHICAL ‘SOCIETY ; } ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
Bove Goreuin: Bate ke GW. Stross -
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY i : < GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
AagnesCHaszE : J. R. Swanton
ROTAMG ey ‘ 3) ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
Roger C, Nae
| CHEMICAL SOCIETY
"PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY |
EXCEPT IN J ULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE .
_ WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr, Roya AND GurLrorD AvEs,
BALTiMOR; Mariano
Entered ; as esa Class Adtran: January 11, 1023, at ns eciamen. at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing ata special rate of postage provided for
in pipnetion 1103, Act of October 3, 1917, Authorized on July 3, 1918.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishisa &: Rig,
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)pro-
ceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes
of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corres ond to calendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or —
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the ~
issue of the JourNAL for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. :
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. r
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References ‘
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. el
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced _ 7 Sie
by zinc etchings being preferable. » spit
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof. will be sent to authors 4
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors eee
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Es
Authors’ Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Cavers <= Mis
bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and ee
date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in rsenpe : Le
ance with the following schedule of prices: ae
Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
50 Pp LA Bele eh Sent ketene ek $2 .00
100 $ .50 $ .55 $ .60 $1.10 2.50
150 .90 1.00 1.10 1.60 3.00
200 1.15 1.50 1.60 2.10 3.50 E
250 1.65 © 2.00 2.10 2.60 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address iia ih: & ee:
sy eid may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4. 00; aden oe, Beh:
an .
ne Ry ig
As an author will not ordinarily see ar: his request for extra one or reprints Sp ‘a
should invariably be attached to the first page ‘of his manuscript. ; | ea aa
The rate of Subscription per volume is...... SOE EE wens testa. Sete
Semi-monthly mumibers. oj.dic.c 2s sc salen d lca e toate Gk backienbesb oa ee .
addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, ‘Wachinetaay We Cc Li
Exchanges.—The JourNAL does not exchange with other publications, ees
Breer
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made 4 a
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to‘ December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates —
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Sysedin d E
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 20 NovEeMBER 4, 1930 No. 18
GEOLOGY .—Abstracts of papers on isostasy and related topics given
before the Geological Society of Washington during the spring of
1930.
I. SOME PROBLEMS OF MOUNTAIN STRUCTURE AND MOUNTAIN HISTORY.!
Chester R. Longwell
Attempts to establish some of the principles of tectonics call for
critical examination of the concepts, old and new, which have gained
a prominent place in this field. JI propose to consider briefly three
questions: (1) Is diastrophism periodic? (2) Do folding and thrust-
ing result directly in mountain uplift? (3) What is the role of isostasy
in relation to mountain making?
(1) Many geologists believe firmly that diastrophism is periodic
and several modern textbooks offer this doctrine to the student without
reservation or qualification. At best, the doctrine involves a loose
definition of the word periodicity, which to the mathematician and
physicist denotes a relationship that can be expressed by a rigid formula
or represented by a regular curve. Events that seem to recur approxi-
mately with each geologic period can hardly meet the requirements of
this definition, since the geologic periods probably differ greatly in
length. Moreover the intensity of diastrophism appears to be dis-
tributed irregularly. A composite curve prepared by Holmes?
has the required regularity, but the time period assumed is highly
speculative, and to this is added the uncertainty as to the exact position
in the geologic scale of many diastrophic events. Stille, after a com-
1 Abstract of Some problems of mountain structure and mountain history, Am. Jour.
Sci., 19: 419-434, 1980.
2 Houmes, A., The Age of the Earth, p.49. Ernest Benn, Ltd., London, 1927.
441
442 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 18
prehensive tectonic study,’ describes diastrophism as periodic; but he
groups all post-Cambrian disturbances into three ‘‘orogenies,”’ in
each of which the separate events are disposed with some irregularity
about a culminating point. This conclusion is expressed in graphic
form by Lotze,4 who attempts to represent the relative intensities of
deformation. If anything approximating a periodic relationship of
diastrophic events ever is established, probably it will be between a
few widely-spaced high points, and not between events in successive
geologic periods. At present, the most we can say is that diastrophism
has been recurrent, and that a few episodes, widely-spaced, seem to
have been of unusual severity. Periodicity may be entertained as a
promising hypothesis, but the common assumption that this relation-
ship is established is wholly unwarranted.
(2) Are genuine mountains made by folding and thrusting? Berry
expresses the belief that the present Appalachians are the only con-
siderable mountains that ever existed on their site. Probably his
reasoning is by analogy, since elsewhere in the same paper he points
out that the present height of the Rockies, Andes, and other mountain
units has been produced by vertical uplift much later than the folding.
We should keep in mind, however, that the Appalachian folding is
much older than the Rocky Mountain deformation, and that the Ter-
tiary arching in the Appalachians occurred after a vast quantity of
rock had been removed by erosion. Possibly this arching is merely
the latest and weakest of several vertical uplifts that succeeded the
Appalachian folding; and considerable initial elevation may have
resulted from the folding directly.
For deductive study, consider the section in central Pennsylvania,
where the folds are relatively simple. The Nittany Arch and other
great folds, if reconstructed in any reasonable form, would rise nearly
five miles above the truncated limbs. Assume that the land was at
sea level when the folding began, and that isostatic equilibrium was
maintained throughout the deformation. This would require that
anticlines like the Nittany Arch rise to mountain heights, unless
erosion proceeded as fast as uplift. But if the competent formations
had been cut through at an early stage of the folding, then with further
$STitute, H., Grundfragen der vergleichenden Tektonik. ee peides Borntraeger,
Berlin, 1924,
4LorzE, F., Die Joly’sche Radioactivitétshypothese zur Erkldrung der Gebirgesbil-
dungen. RMaehmehion der Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Gottingen, Math.-Phys.
Klasse, p. 102, 1927.
6 Berry, E, W., Shall we return to cataclysmal geology? Am. Jour. Sci., 17: 1-12.
1929.
NOV. 4, 1930 LONGWELL: MOUNTAIN STRUCTURE 443
compression it seems that these stiff units would have been pushed
over the eroded crests to form erosion thrusts. In central Pennsyl-
vania, however, no such thrusts were formed. ‘This argument favors
the idea of considerable initial uplift, and is strengthened by the point
that folding would concentrate rock of low density at the top of the
zone, requiring a rise of the surface to maintain equilibrium.
The limited sedimentary evidence that has been preserved indicates
high topography along the Appalachian axis in Triassic time. In the
Rocky Mountain region the character and structure of early Tertiary
sediments constitute strong evidence of high topography while folding
and thrusting were in progress.
One of the most hopeful methods of attacking the problem consists
in comparison of the older folded zones with those in which similar
structure has been formed in late geologic and recent time. The
Timor-Ceram island arc, in the East Indies, represents a large anticline
which is being crowded against the Sahul shelf.6 This fold is almost
uneroded, and obviously its vertical growth has progressed with
horizontal movement. ‘The Alps may be taken to represent a later
stage in the development of similar mountains. Apparently in the
early stages the Alps were similar to the Timor and neighboring ares.
In the Miocene, after the greatest piling up of the thrust sheets, the
present Alpine area was a range of considerable height, shedding
coarse debris into the Molasse synclinal trough. The last pulse of
compressive deformation, in the later Tertiary, was followed by general
vertical uplift which completed the mountain growth.
Taken together, the evidence from the East Indies, the Alps, the
Rockies, and the Appalachians suggests that folding and thrusting
are attended by considerable direct uplift, but only a fractional part
of that indicated by the crustal shortening, because approximate
isostatic balance is maintained. Later there is strong vertical move-
ment, carrying the mountain region to far greater height. Other
pulses of uplift rejuvenate the wasting mountains, even after almost
complete planation. In the Appalachians the latest vertical movement
was by regional arching; in the Sierra Nevada area it was by tilting
uplift of a great fault block. The existence of Cretaceous and early
Tertiary highlands on the site of late Jurassic folding in the Sierra
Nevada area is attested by vast quantities of sediments furnished
by this belt during those periods.
6’ Brouw_Er, H. A., The geology of the Netherlands East Indies, Chap. 3. The Macmillan
Co., New York. .
444 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 18
(3) The relation of isostasy to mountain making has already been
referred to in some of its aspects. Bowie and others have performed
valuable service in persistent emphasis of the isostatic principle, but
have failed to consider much of the geologic evidence bearing on the
subject. Bowie represents the crust as too weak to bear even moder-
ate vertical stresses, and incapable of transmitting horizontal thrust.
The geologist sees overwhelming evidence of repeated deformation by
horizontal movement, and bases his estimate of crustal strength chiefly
on this geologic evidence. Some of the geodetic data also, interpreted
from the geologic viewpoint, appear to support the conclusion of great
crustal strength. One example is sufficient for illustration.
The work of Hayford and Bowie reduced the gravity anomalies in
the United States to a small average value. However, isolated
stations, and even some groups of stations covering large areas, still -
show anomalies of considerable size. Bowie has pointed out that
many of these outstanding anomalies appear to be related to the
local geology; positive values being explained by rocks of high density,
and negative values by light rocks, near the station. We are familiar
with David White’s study of this question.’ He found that all of the
stations in the “Appalachian Valley’? show pronounced negative
anomalies, whereas most of the stations on the crystalline rocks just
to the east show positive values. This distribution is striking, and
the suggestion of control by the Appalachian structure is obvious.
White concluded that part of the explanation for the negative group
lies in the great depth of folded sediments; but since these formations
are highly indurated and only slightly deficient in density, there must
be another important factor also. He suggested that the crystalline
basement under the sediments is also abnormally light as compared
with the rocks in the Piedmont, because it has not been subject to
erosion since the beginning of the Paleozoic, and therefore the denser
rocks are still at great depth in the valley belt. This explanation
assumes perfect isostasy, and seeks only a special local cause for the
anomalies. ‘The conclusion is heartily indorsed by Bowie.
Let us compare this case with another. In his study entitled “The
strength of the earth’s crust,” Barrell attempted to show that great
modern deltas are loads borne by the crust. A few years later Bowie
studied the same problem, with the advantage of several gravity
values recently determined on the Mississippi delta. There are eight
7 Gravity observations from the standpoint of the local geology: Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer.
35: 207-278. 1924.
Nov. 4, 1930 LONGWELL: MOUNTAIN STRUCTURE 445
of the stations of which four show positive and the other four negative
anomalies. Taking the group as a unit, the gravity anomaly is
essentially zero; precisely, it is negative by only 0.007 dyne. Bowie
closes his discussion of the group as follows: ‘“We are evidently
justified in concluding that the block of the isostatic shell directly
under the Delta of the Mississippi is very nearly in isostatic equilib-
rium and that the delta material has been compensated for by a
movement of material from the base of the block.’’® |
The geologist, approaching the subject fresh from the discussion of
local geology and its influence on gravity, naturally looks for some
evaluation of this factor for the delta stations; but the subject is not
even mentioned in Bowie’s discussion. If there is any one area in
which the influence of the underlying rock on gravity values should be
carefully considered, surely that area is the Mississippi delta. On any
reasonable premises, the depth of abnormally light sediments must be
large. It is estimated that the thickness of the post-Paleozoic section
in the Gulf region is of the order of 15,000 feet; it may be much thicker
under the delta, depending on the amount of subsidence that has
accompanied delta building.
Let us start with the assumption that the delta is in equilibrium.
Taking the thickness of the sedimentary section as 15,000 feet and the
deficiency in density as 0.4, and using the method of computation
given by Bowie,? the average negative anomaly ought to be at least
0.060 dyne. Since this negative anomaly does not exist, the measured
gravity is abnormally large, and therefore the delta area is overloaded.
According to the table of ratios proposed by Barrell,!° this anomaly
corresponds to a thickness of 3,000 feet of rock. This estimate could
be reduced considerably and still allow the conclusion that the crust is
very strong even under vertical bending stresses.
This reconsideration of the delta anomalies suggests further exami-
nation of abnormal groups elsewhere. We do not feel justified in
starting, as did White, with an assumption of perfect isostasy. Re-
turning to the Appalachian trough, it seems more probable that a con-
siderable part of the negative values indicates lack of adjustment in
this area. As a result of the latest uplifts erosion has attacked the
belts of weak sediments, and a large quantity of rock has been re-
8 W. Bowtis, Isostatic investigations and data for gravity stations in the United States
established since 1915: U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey Special Pub. No. 99, 1924, pp.
49-50. Also in Isostasy, pp. 89-91.
J ICO. ODay 5 Olle
10 BARRELL, J., The strength of the earth’s crust: Jour. Geol., 22: 309. 1914.
446 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 18
removed. ‘The stations in the valley belt are located in these areas
of maximum erosion. The physiography of the region indicates
that uplift has occurred in a succession of pulses, with intervals of quiet
between. It is highly improbable, therefore, that perfect adjustment
has been maintained; and the large negative anomalies are in accord
with this view.
Both the geologic and the geodetic evidence, then, lead us squarely
back to the conclusion of Barrell that the crust is strong enough to
bear loads of considerable size. This is the only ground on which all
of the facts taken together will harmonize.
II. Isosrasy: WHAT GRAVITY MEASUREMENTS REVEAL. G. R. Putnam
The results of gravity measurements afford abundant evidence that
the crust of the earth is in some sort of equilibrium, but the inter-
pretation of these results presents some difficulties because of the
elaborate mathematics involved. A large part of the available data
has been derived on an assumption of complete local isostasy, with the
assertion that any error resulting from this assumption is negligible.
This has been a source of perplexity to geologists. It has now been
proved that gravity results derived on an assumption of complete
local isostasy may be materially in error, as is rather clearly shown
by the results in extremely mountainous or uneven regions. An
assumption of a moderate degree of regional isostasy makes the gravity
results more consistent within themselves, and also makes them more
harmonious with reasonable geological theories and evidence.
The theory of isostasy holds true whether equilibrium exists between
large surface blocks, as is probably the fact, or between very small
areas. ‘Thus far the only gravity reduction method which eliminates
the excessive residuals for very high summits is a method based on an
assumption that blocks of about 100 miles radius are in approximate
equilibrium. ‘This indicates that features of moderate extent, such as
single mountains, are not separately compensated, but are supported,
in part at least, by the strength of the earth’s crust.
Regional isostasy is a conception of the earth’s crust wholly different
from that of perfect, or nearly complete localisostasy. It isin harmony
with the known strength of the crustal materials, and with reasonable
density distributions, with which local isostasy can not be fitted in.
It permits the application of ideas of crustal action under loading and
unloading, bending or breaking of the crust, difficult to conceive of
with local isostasy.
Nov. 4, 1930 GORANSON: ISOSTASY 447
The gravity results clearly prove the existence of a state of equilib-
rium in the earth’s crust, and strongly indicate that this isostasy
falls within limits which are not unreasonable from the geologist’s
point of view.
III. SomE PROBLEMS IN IsosTrasy. Rk. W. Goranson
In view of the many recent rather eulogistic discussions on the subject
of isostasy I shall limit myself to a few questions that still await
clarification. Isostasy can be made an important tool of geophysics—
viz., as a criterion of crustal equilibrium in the continuous process of
deposition and erosion with its consequent shifting of loads, but to do
this our gravity anomalies must be reliable.
Now we have considerable evidence to show that the upper part of
the crust tends to approach equilibrium discontinuously by faulting—
e.g., the uplift resulting from the unloading of the Pleistocene ice caps
is taking place by step-faulting, subsidence in the Hawaiian and
Fijian Islands is accompanied by faulting; furthermore, discontinuity
of subsidence is indicated by deposition cycles of geosynclines, which
is just what we would be led to expect in a material of finite strength.
Hence, if we knew the deviation of a region from equilibrium—.e.,
could evaluate the stresses and knew the strength of the crust—we
might be able to supply answers, in some cases at least, to two out-
standing questions: Are earthquakes apt to occur or continue in a
certain region? If so, what will be their periodicity and intensity?
Karthquake periodicities resulting from statistical studies do not answer
these questions but, on the other hand, may be likened to the firing
pin of a semi-diesel engine which although kept continually hot yet
will not fire the charge until it attains a certain pressure. |
The first question to arise is: How reliable are the gravity anomalies?
If we assume the measured values to be good—i.e., within 0.003 dynes
per cm?, this question can be phrased as—What is the possible error
in the computed value of gravity? It lies in the corrections for com-
pensation and topography. |
It is necessary, in calculating the amount of compensation, to assume
a standard column as a comparison. In order to do this intelligently
one must examine the data on variation of density with depth and
again on how this varies with latitude and longitude.
Let us merely recapitulate what is generally conceded to be the
situation, since time does not permit us to examine critically the reasons
for these conclusions.
448 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 18
First, seismological data tell us that lateral heterogeneity seems to
be limited to a depth of 60 km or less. Seismology has also given us
a general picture of widespread lateral heterogeneities, as for instance
between oceanic and continental columns. We know that a conti-
nental column to an average depth of 30 + 10 kmis of a “‘granitic”’
type and below this to a depth of 45 + 10 km, of a “‘basaltic”’ type of
rock. These depths vary with locality and seemingly bear a relation
to topographic elevation. Under the Pacific, on the other hand, the
upper granitic shell is apparently non-existent. Lying below 45 +
10 km in both regions is a ‘“‘peridotitic shell” in which density is
apparently a function of depth only.
TABLE I
Anomalies for different types of compensation
Station elevation 787.5 m. av. for circle 170 km. radius
POMBE EG) hc Ree « ok Score weers cere e a eee teat tener eens 980 . 404
Year tts Pee eh AAO ee . oe eens, Ried Fae I ee Re ale eer: 980.618
leye rcorrection: <& 7/4. 25 tans Ree ie ee ne ee — .243
RONOS SCOTIE CIO NY: 4 92 Step ele Lie NS Sean ee beeen: +.087 (to 170 km)
Column. correction and distant Zones. ©. ...<652.6¢0--
\
i ia . J (
p<) ° Hei tals t
Pal 7“ ' ball J ve iw
ye th. vy Gre etipad magae A
fot tS ee eb ib siheenaetl
wil oy ovhtitie® Wonca d. endok
™ 51 } vaddany wi ALS ; ’ Lae’ | H ‘
od oo ans Sve t 7 . the { ;
f ‘ote ie Aer Sift O
He ee i ey neat
) eet iyi ae tes & atty e yet erie
Omak. 1 Mec
iraith nei | b ni) dere ma Th a “ial
Tie te ice} Seset iy
eget dylan | mith pita
FOS. SO iH lm eel 1 a
fos phat teas ut it i,
Iwi kine § a thts WF. si aera
SM
Wie 2 Sha act aiVeaws§ aytnth Sia
aT ih
P es ey
ve - ‘ : *
OP) tn a fa
~ wo, v4 a, oe i oy
a on d
7 ey" (= af 7 ’ . ve
ee Sy ae eee Oe .
ma ane
F ae : }
*Sitenine ‘.: i os i
a 7 4 ~ vs vv
\ Ad w 7 oes le Ps! ,
. eae een
~ ; ie “ee
ery ULES ae oe
ghee (LQG at sgl ‘er a’
uid toad. Seieaares ea el
* es
wa
ud between
oh) eth ete Freie ‘ythide:- ¥
due qaotet al ech gt tee gan
pga sapiens, le wie é
peeved) huey > rl (hits vii
ae ee
Hihovtybiecrar ip a rai ft
i mes it “hte ae Trioeve cet i me
. : dwocvttlt iebeiea
ae
i ie ST Ae
call qpehh ays i.) wih to 4
gt eae yi
“el
‘ion? joe
‘ioe ee a
1g ian E igs
Loclt Fea
wmurent da a} i
Heart | . t aiid + rine rt
Stel Raw rts i
aire ve
al ew.
bol
asd wat Wieas
ce Tae tank
pealAalt ty stir wit ‘and maul ae
Whi Tiy Armen ha al ‘tive NE
( i intel eee
(one
‘iy aes tai
Veer rue ir
i lei il
1 ARES Green citah
fue Guise.
OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS
‘ THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND
ids Oe | : AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
ES Philosophical Society
a The address by W. J. Humphreys, The Philosophical Society of Washington
through a thousand meetings, which appeared in the issue of this JoURNAL
_ for July 19, 1930, has been published in pamphlet form by the Philosophical
Society. Copies, bound in stiff covers, may be obtained for forty cents
: each, postpaid, from the Treasurer, Capt. N. H. Heck, U. S. Coast and
Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C.
4 ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS
3 Friday, November 4 The Geographic Society
7 Saturday, November 5 The Philosophical Society
; Tuesday, November 8 The Electrical Engineers
_ Wednesday, November9 The Geological Society
:. : _ The Medical Society
Thursday, November 10 The Chemical Society
Friday, November 11 The Geographic Society
Saturday, November 12 The Biological Society
ay Tuesday, November 15 The Anthropological Society
ee: The Historical Society
Boe: Welinesday, November 16 The Washington Engineers
pho ete ee The Medical Society —
Thursday, November17 The Acapremy
Friday, November 18 .- The Geographic Society
Saturday, N Siac 19 The Philosophical Society
| : The Helminthological Society
a The programs of the tibetives of the affiliated Societies will appear on this page if
‘e sent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month.
ae OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
- President: Witi1am Bowis, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
ts _ Corresponding Secretary: L. B. TuckERMAN, Bureau of Standards.
aba Secretary: CHARLES THOM, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils.
Treasurer: ped G. Avrrs, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
EET wanes Shee ae SAS yor,
e a 3 - eg ore 4 vt heady
vf aoe st ae)
wes, iy i”? aeek
. Rt x i
» ~ ay
* 1
-
;
r
i Pass
=
Py
\ oe
Pe
=
in
oo
CONTENTS
ORIGINAL PAPERS
iy. Veh
I, Some problems of mountain ETS and Eieanies sna
R. meses Sdn eS eo. = rf
eats:
Geotherms. A. c. oe tees es
on»
ma ‘tr
he “Sa
-
te in
Fe?
SclENTIFIC Notes nd Bho ae l
This JourNat lia a ae Oe ere
©
Vox. 20 ee : NOVEMBER 19, 1930 No. 19
F a
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
= «= OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
¥ : yg oo
Epe@ar W. WooLaRrp EpGAR T. WHERRY C. WrtHE Cooke
| GEORGE WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA U. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
ae te | ASSOCIATE EDITORS
- H.E. Merwin Haroitp Morrison
os PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIZTY
¥ E. A. GOLDMAN G. W. Stosz
* BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
. Aangs Coase J. R. Swanton
pire _ BOTANICAL SOCIETY f ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
. | ae Roger C. Weis
; CHEMICAL SOCIETY
pea fy | PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
| EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
a BS ii 4 oe : BY THE ie
OS a ane WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF,SCIENCES
Mr, Royau anp GUILFORD AVES,
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
‘
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office, at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for
in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918.
PL 2s :
he
ct
4
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: —
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) pro-- ma
ceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes fe tay
of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The Journan is issued ~~
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer ae
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt _ OR Re ;
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or =~
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the | ie. we >
issue of the JourNnat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. — Berit
Manuscripts may be sent to ‘any member of the Board of Editors: they shotiate is
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The —
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References —
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate |
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered — od
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. far oy
z llustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced pee z
by zine etchings being preferable.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors © * .
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; Iii editors =~
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. a. ae
Authors’ Reprints —Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers bah Re i iol
bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and >
date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accord- j
cant 4
~ ance with the following schedule of prices: Ni wa ve
Copies 4 pp. _ 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
5 | RR Rg tae lee aa aed RO De BPO or ade SORE ol Ae . $2.00 ‘
100 $ .50 $ .55 $ .60 $1.10 2.50 9
150 i880 1.00 1.10 z 1.60 3.00 \ c
200 £35 1.50 1.60 2.10 3.50
250 1.65 2.00 2.10 2.60 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed ine oF
ee corner may be obtained at the ne prices. First 100, ane 00; additaee: Wa fs a
_ ae 5 4 f
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints oy
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. Rae:
The rate of Subscription per volume is...... i RA res 4) cS ha 2 chat a Q Sean Sy . $6. 0
Semi-monthly npher er il en er a8 3)
Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and ro de! Mere!
Remittances should be made payable to ‘Washington Academy of Sciences”’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D
Exchanges. —The Journau does not exchange with other publications. gd, 2 on ae
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following i issue. -
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates: oh.
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy. yA
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 20 NovEeMBER 19, 1930 No. 19
BOTANY .—Mosses collected in Brazil and Argentina by J. N. Rose in
1915.1 R. S. Wiiurams, New York Botanical Garden. (Com-
municated by WiLL1AM R. Maxon)
The mosses reported upon in the present paper are part of a large
botanical collection made in Brazil and Argentina in 1915, upon an
expedition conducted by Dr. J. N. Rose under the auspices of the
Carnegie Institution of Washington and the New York Botanical
Garden, the principal object of the exploration having been to collect
cacti. Dr. Rose was accompanied by Paul G. Russell, detailed by the
U.S. National Museum as assistant. The mosses listed are in the U.S.
National Herbarium and the herbarium of the New York Botanical
Garden.
SPHAGNUM MAGELLANICUM Brid.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20486). This species, largely
under the name of S. medium, is known from Alaska southward, also from
Europe, Asia, and Africa.
SPHAGNUM SUBSECUNDUM Nees
Locality and date of preceding (20508). Largely known as S. platyphyllum,
and of about as wide distribution as the preceding. (I am indebted to Dr.
A. LeRoy Andrews for the determination of these Sphagnums.)
DITRICHUM RUFESCENS Hampe
Locality and date of preceding (20544). Not before credited to Brazil, I
believe, but found on the west coast southward to Chile.
CERATODON STENOCARPUS Br. & Sch.
_Loeality and date of preceding (20527, 20544). Common in tropical re-
gions of the Old World also.
1 Received September 3, 1930.
466 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 19
AONGSTROEMIA VAGINATA (Hook.) C. M.
Locality and date of preceding (20449a). No. 60 of E. Ule’s mosses of
Brazil, called A. julaceo-divaricata C. M., does not seem to be distinct from
this species.
DICRANELLA EXIGUA (Schwaegr.) Mitt.
Itacurussa, State of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 24 (20423, 20426).
DICRANELLA GUILLEMINIANA (Mont.) Hampe
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20576).
DICRANELLA H1ILARIANA (Mont.) Mitt.
Vicinity of Bahia, Brazil, May 29 (19689). Monte Serrat, vicinity of
Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20443, 20446). Near Milo Pecanna, State of
Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 9 (20734); very poor specimens but probably
belonging here. This species occurs commonly from the southern United
States to southern Brazil and has been described under a great variety of
names.
DIcRANELLA PasstTraNna (C. M.) Mitt.
On Corcovado, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 12; marked ‘“‘h.”
DICRANELLA SUBSULCATA Hampe
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20578; 20450, immature but prob-
ably belonging here). ‘Tijuca, vicinity of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 1
(20629).
CAMPYLOPODIUM PUSILLUM (Schpr.) Williams
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20545a). Ule’s no. 102 from this
region, called C. ztatzazense, does not seem to me distinct.
HOLOMITRIUM ARBOREUM Mitt. 7
Vicinity of Toca de Onca, Brazil, June 27-29 (20122). Vicinity of Itatiaya,
Brazil, July 26-30 (20548).
HOLOMITRIUM CRISPULUM Mart.
Forests of Jabaquara, Brazil, Aug. 15 (20860, 20864).
HOLOMITRIUM OLFERSIANUM Hsch.
Ilha Grande, Distrito Federal, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 22-24 (20391).
CAMPYLOPUS ARCTOCARPUS (Hsch.) Mitt.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20509).
CAMPYLOPUS DETONSUS (Hampe) Par.
Vicinity of Bahia, Brazil, May 30 (19696). Sterile.
CAMPYLOPUS INTROFLEXUS (Hedw.) Mitt.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20474).
NOVEMBER 19, 1930 WILLIAMS: MOSSES FROM BRAZIL AND ARGENTINA 467
CAMPYLOPUS PENICILLATUS (Hsch.) Jaeg.
Locality and date of preceding (20434). —
CAMPYLOPUS SUBARCTOCARPUS (Hampe) Jaeg.
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20811). On Papagaya,
Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 1 (20698b).
CAMPYLOPUS SP.?
Near Santos, Brazil, Sept. 20 (2/111). Sterile.
CAMPYLOPUS SP.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20548a). Sterile.
PILOPOGON sUBJULACEUS Hampe
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20545, 204774).
LEUCOBRYUM ALBICANS (Schwaegr.) Lindb.
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20858).
OcTOBLEPHARUM ALBIDUM (L.) Hedw.
Vicinity of Bahia, Brazil, May 26 (19633, 19642). Ilha Grande, Distrito
Federal, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 22-24 (20388).
FIsSIDENS OBTUSATUS Hampe
Ilha Grande, Distrito Federal, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 22-24 (20389).
FISSIDENS PSEUDOBRYOIDES Schlph.
Vicinity of Bahia, Brazil, May 30 (19704) and June 3 (20139a). Sao
Miguel, State of Bahia, Brazil, June 26 (20055). This determination as F.
pseudobryoides appears to be correct, but on further study it would seem that
the species is not sufficiently distinct from the older F. Kegelianus.
CALYMPERES RicHarpi C. M.
Vicinity of Bahia, Brazil, May 26 (19632).
HYMENOSTOMUM MicAcEUM (Schlecht.) Hampe
Vicinity of Bom Finn, Bahia, Brazil, June 8, 9 (19830). Vicinity of Cabo
Frio, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 8 (20730). This species is distinguished
by having the costa quite papillose on the upper surface from near the apex
about two-thirds of the way down, the back of the leaf and costa being smooth
or slightly papillose, and the upper surface of leaf mostly mamillose. Known
only from Brazil until collected at Frederiksted, St. Croix, West Indies, by
Rose, Fitch and Russell, in Feb. 1913, no. 4448.
TIMMIELLA UMBROSA (C. M.) Broth.
Near Cassaffousth, Cordoba, Argentina, Sept. 9 (21068).
468 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 19
DipyMopon ScuimPeERI (Mont.) Broth.
Portrerillos, Mendoza, Argentina, Sept. 2 (20998). Apparently not known
previously outside of Chile.
TORTELLA CAESPITOSA (Schwaegr.) Limpr.
Vicinity of Toca de Onca, Bahia, Brazil, June 27-29 (20118). Ilha
Grande, Distrito Federal, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 22-24 (20386, 20387,
20392). Monte Serrat, vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20444).
Near Iguaba Grande, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 7-9 (20715). Petropolis,
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20829). Near Cassaf-
fousth, Cordoba, Argentina, Sept. 9 (21066). On Corcovado,'Rio de Janeiro,
Brazil, July 19, marked ‘‘a.”’
HYOPHILA MICROCARPA (Besch.) Broth.
Salgada, State of Bahia, Brazil, June 1 (19712). Queimadas, Bahia,
Brazil, June 9-17 (19861, 19882). Vicinity of Machado Portello, Bahia,
Brazil, June 19-23 (19934, 19997).
HYOPHILA TORTULA (Schwaegr.) Hampe
State of Bahia, Brazil, May 31 (19707). Alagoinhas, State of Bahia,
Brazil, June 12 (19883).
BARBULA UNCINICOMA C. M.
Near Cassaffousth, Cérdoba, Argentina, Sept. 9 (21067).
DESMATODON STOMATODONTUS (Card.) Williams
Vicinity of Bahia, Brazil, May 25 (19620), mixed with Tortula agraria
Sw. Same locality, June 15 (19892).
; TORTULA AGRARIA Sw.
Vicinity of Bahia, Brazil, May 25 (19620a).
Tortula perrufula (C. M.) Williams, comb. nov.
Barbula perrufula C. M. Hedwigia36: 103. 1897. Thisseems to belong
rather to Tortula, inasmuch as there is no stereid band on the upper side of
the costa. It has leaf margins of a double thickness of cells, 32 twisted
teeth from a rather high basal membrane, and an annulus of 2 or 3 rows of
cells.
GLYPHOMITRIUM BALANSAE (Besch.) Broth.
Near Cassaffousth, Cordoba, Argentina, Sept. 9 (21/064). Here must be
referred G. brevifolium C. M., which apparently is not distinct in any way
from G. Balansae.
ZYGODON SUBDENTICULATUS Hampe
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20512). Not previously credited
to Brazil.
MACROMITRIUM FRAGILE Mitt.
On orchids in market, Bahia, Brazil, May 26 (19643).
NOVEMBER 19, 1930 WILLIAMS: MOSSES FROM BRAZIL AND ARGENTINA 469
MAcCROMITRIUM MUCRONIFOLIUM (Hook. & Grev.) Schwaegr.
Ilha Grande, Distrito Federal, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 22-24 (20380).
Near Santos, Brazil, Sept. 20 (21115).
SCHLOTHEIMIA NITIDA Schwaegr.
Tijuca, vicinity of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 1 (20632).
SCHLOTHEIMIA RUGIFOLIA (Hook.) Brid.
Vicinity of Toca de Onca, Bahia, Brazil, June 27-29 (20122a). North
of Caldeirao, State of Bahia, Brazil, June 30 (20134). |
TETRAPLODON I[TaTIAIAE C. M.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20475).
FUNARIA APIAHYENSIS (C. M.) Broth.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20558, mixed with Pszlopilu
ler). i
FUNARIA CALVESCENS Schwaegr.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20451, 20466, 20467, 20468,
20595).
FUNARIA HYGROMETRICA (L.) Sibth.
Vicinity of Buenos Aires, Argentina, Aug. 28 (20960).
| FUNARIA SERRICOLA (C. M.) Broth.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20465). Tijuca, vicinity of Rio de
Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 1 (20626).
MiELICHHOFERIA MANCA (C. M.) Broth.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20539, 20546).
BRYUM ARGENTEUM L.
Aramary, State of Bahia, Brazil, May 31 (19708). Sao Miguel, State
of Bahia, Brazil, June 26 (20054). Vicinity of Toca de Onca, Bahia, Brazil,
June 27-29 (20121). Jha Grande, Distrito Federal, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil,
July 22-24 (20355). Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20547, mixed
with a sterile Campylopus).
Bryum CrucEeri Hampe; C. M.
Vicinity of Toca de Onca, Bahia, Brazil, June 27-29 (20119). Near
Santos, Brazil, Sept. 20 (21112). Apparently not before reported for Brazil.
BRYUM DENSIFOLIUM Brid.
Near Santos, Brazil, Sept. 20 (21113). Vicinity of Toca de Onca, Bahia,
Brazil, June 27-29 (20120). Alta Boa Vista, vicinity of Rio de Janeiro,
Brazil, July 18 (20306).
470 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 19
BryuM GARDNERI Mitt.
Near Santos, Brazil, Sept. 20 (21114).
RHODOBRYUM GRANDIFOLIUM (Tayl.) Par.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20575).
MNIUM LIGULATUM C. M.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20577). Organ Mountains, Rio
de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20776, 20806).
RHIZOGONIUM SPINIFORME (L.) Bruch
On Papagaya, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 1 (20647). Organ Mountains,
Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20810, 20822).
. PHILONOTIS CURVATA (Hampe) Jaeg.
Nazareth, vicinity of Bahia, Brazil, June 30 (20139).
PHILONOTIS UNCINATA (Schwaegr.) Brid.
Tijuca, vicinity of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 1 (20637).
OLIGOTRICHUM RIEDELIANUM (Mont.) Mitt.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July. 26-30 (20449, 20556a).
PsILoPituM ULeEI Broth.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20465a, 20555, 20558a).
POLYTRICHADELPHUS UMBROsUS Mitt.
On Corcovado, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 11, marked “‘f.”’
POGONATUM ABBREVIATUM Mitt.
Monte Serrat, vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20447).
PoGONATUM GARDNERI (C. M.) Mitt.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20556).
POLYTRICHUM ANGUSTIFOLIUM Mitt.
Vicinity of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 26-30 (20436).
POLYTRICHUM ANTILLARUM Rich.
Vicinity of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 26-30 (20436a). Vicinity of Ita-
tiaya, Brazil, July 26-380 (20448, 20452, 20530, and “‘k’’). Petropolis,
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20827).
ERPODIUM CORONATUM (Hook. f. & Wils.) Mitt.
Vicinity of Machado Portello, Bahia, Brazil, June 19-23 (19996).
Erpopium Guaziovir Hampe
On Corcovado, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 17 (20875).
NOVEMBER 19, 1930 WILLIAMS: MOSSES FROM BRAZIL AND ARGENTINA 471
RuacocarPpus HumBoupti (Hook.) Lindb.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20508a, 20521).
ORTHOSTICHOPSIS TENUIS (C. M.) Broth.
On Corcovado, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 11, marked “‘j.”’
SQUAMIDIUM NITIDUM (Sull.) Broth.
North of Caldeirao, State of Bahia, Brazil, June 30 (20133).
LINDIGIA CAPILLACEA (Hornsch.) Hampe
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20781b). No. 70 of
EK. Ule’s Brazilian mosses, issued as L. paupera C. M., apparently an un-
published name, evidently belongs here.
LINDIGIA TRIcHOMITRIA C. M.
Collected with the last preceding (20781a).
> PHYLLOGONIUM IMMERSUM Mitt.
On Papagaya, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 5 (20648).
NECKERA ARGENTINICA Lor.
Tucum§én, vicinity of Buenos Aires, Argentina, Aug. 29 (without number),
PorotTrRicHUM KoRTHALSIANUM (Dz. & Mb.) Mitt.
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20821). Previously
collected only in Venezuela and Surinam.
POROTHAMNIUM STRIATUM (Mitt.) Fleisch.
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20772).
STEREOPHYLLUM LEUCOSTEGUM (Brid.) Mitt.
Rio Branco, State of Bahia, Brazil, June 12 (19877).
Fasronia Lorentzit C. M.
Vicinity of Cérdoba, Argentina, Sept. 8 (21039).
FABRONIA POLYCARPA Hook.
Bahia, Brazil, May 28 (19660). Vinicity of Bom Finn, Bahia, Brazil,
June 8, 9 (19829, 19831). On Corcovado, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 17
(20875, 20876).
HELICODONTIUM TENUIROSTRE Schwaegr.
Tijuca, vicinity of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 1 (20631).
HooxkeEriopsis BEYRICHIANA (Hampe) Broth.
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20808a).
HooxkERIoPsis GLAzIovil (Hampe) Jaeg.
Tijuca, vicinity of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 1 (20633).
472 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 19
LEPIDOPILUM SUBULATUM Mitt.
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janiero, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20781).
HYPOPTERYGIUM MONOICUM Hampe
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20775).
HELICOPHYLLUM TORQUATUM (Hook.) Brid.
Itumirim, State of Bahia, Brazil, June 5 (19815).
HAPLOCLADIUM RIOGRANDENSE C. M.
Jardim Botanico, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 10 (20745).
THUIDIUM DELICATULUM (L.) Mitt.
Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, July 26-30 (20472a, 20557). T. brasiliense
Mitt. is near this species, but has larger leaf cells and larger, higher papillae.
THUIDIUM PSEUDORECOGNITUM (Hampe) Broth.
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 20 (20772a). This species
appears to come nearest to T. Antillarum, from which it is distinguished by
the cells of the branch leaves having several papillae to each cell-surface
instead of only one. The inner perichaetial leaves are long-ciliate. Small,
often scarcely elongate cells extend almost to the leaf-base in both stem and
branch leaves, and in the branch leaves the costa is very prominent and
rough on the back.
AMBLYSTEGIUM VARIUM (Hedw.) Lindb.
La Plata, Argentina, Sept. 14 (21106). KE. Ule’s no. 73, A. pulchellum C.
M., apparently an unpublished name, seems to belong here.
Microthamnium Russellii R. S. Williams, sp. nov.
Figs. 1-13
Dioicous, o flowers, about midway on the branches, rather narrowly
ovate-acute, a little over 1 mm. high, the inner perigonial leaves with ovate
base rather gradually narrowed to a lanceolate, serrulate point, enclosing 5-6
antheridia about .33 mm. long and a few slender paraphyses; plants growing
in pale yellowish-brown mats with more or less trailing and branching stems
mostly 3 or 4 em. long, bearing scattered clusters of radicles and rather short,
mostly .5-1 cm. long, often divided branches hardly complanate and tapering
to apex; leaves not complanate, those of the upper stem shortly bicostate,
about 1.5 mm. long, from a broadly ovate base gradually tapering to a very
acute point, the borders more or less recurved and serrulate to near base;
leaves of lower stem mostly shorter and broader than above and ecostate and
entire; branch-leaves narrower and smaller than upper stem leaves, serrulate
and bicostate except the much smaller apical leaves, these ecostate; cells
of the branch-leaves mostly distinctly papillose on back at upper end, the
median about 5yu wide by 35-50u long, the alar cells sometimes forming a
rather distinct group of wider, shorter cells; seta 2-2.5 em. long; inner peri-
chaetial leaves longer than stem-leaves, ecostate, from an ovate or lanceolate
base gradually narrowed to a very slender, entire or nearly entire point; cap-
NOVEMBER 19, 1930 WILLIAMS: MOSSES FROM BRAZIL AND ARGENTINA 473
\
Np MG
Microthamnium Russellii: 1. Plant about natural size. 2. Middle stem-leaf X35.
3. Middle branch-leaf X35. 4. Terminal branch-leaf X35. 5. Perigonial leaf, an-
theridium and paraphyses X35. 6 and 7. Inner perichaetial leaves X35. 8. Apex of
branch leaf X210. 9. Median cells of leaf X210. 10. Dried deoperculate capsule X14.
11. Moistened capsule X14. 12. Group of alar cells from upper stem leaf X210. 13.
Part of peristome and annulus <150.
474 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 19
sule nodding or pendant, oblong or often unsymmetrical, about 2 mm. long
with the acutely pointed lid, when dry contracted below the rim; annulus of
two rows of cells; peristome-teeth finely cross-striate about three fourths up,
the slender apex papillose; segments a little shorter than teeth, from high
basal membrane, finely papillose, slightly or not split along median line, with
2 or 3 slender, papillose cilia a little shorter than the segments; calyptra
smooth; spores minutely roughened, 10-12y in diameter.
Type locality: Vicinity of Itatiaya, Brazil, collected by J. N. Rose and
P. G. Russell, July 26-30, 1915, No. 20469 (type in herbarium of the New
York Botanical Garden).
Plants much like M. reptans but perichaetial leaves more entire, with
eee hair-point, capsules rather larger and not so narrowed at the base and
ioicous.
ISOPTERYGIUM BRACHYNEURON (C. M.) :Mitt.
Ilha Grande, Distrito Federal, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 22-24 (20382).
ISOPTERYGIUM TENERUM (Sw.) Mitt.
Locality and date of the last preceding (20384).
TRICHOSTELEUM PAPILLOSISSIMUM (Hampe) Broth.
Itacurussa, State of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 24 (20425). Determined
from description only.
Trichosteleum Schlimii (C. M.) Williams, comb. nov.
Hypnum Schlimi C. M. Bot. Zeit. 6: 781. 1848. This species has been
placed under both Sematophyllum and Rhaphidostegium and. doubtless
specimens that have been called Schlzmiz belong under those genera; Miiller,
however, in his description cites only one number, 356, collected by Funck &
Schlim in Venezuela. The specimens under this number show the back of
the leaf often with more or less numerous, single papillae over the center of
the cells, which are very long and narrow (about 4u wide by 50-60y long)
with the exception of the inflated alar group. This type specimen has peri-
chaetial leaves with long, slender, recurved points, serrulate with often widely
spreading, almost recurved teeth; the stem leaves are ecostate; the capsule is
nodding, mostly not quite symmetrical, on a smooth pedicel about 1 em.
long. Organ Mountains, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20812).
Sematophyllum cyparissoides (Hornsch.) Williams, comb. noy.
Hypnum cyparissoides Hornsch. in Mart. Fl. Bras 17: 88. 1840. This
species has the peristome teeth not furrowed along the median line.
SEMATOPHYLLUM GALIPENSE (C. M.) Mitt.
Tijuca, vicinity of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 1 (20625). On Papagaya,
Rio de Janeiro, Aug. 1 (20650). Jardim Botanico, Rio de Janeiro, Aug. 11
(20836). On Corcovado, Rio de Janeiro, Aug. 19, marked “‘c.”” Garden of
Museo Paulista, SAo Paulo, Brazil, Aug. 14, 15 (20842). Near Santos, Brazil,
Sept. 20 (21110).
NOVEMBER 19, 1930 EVANS: ANTIQUITY OF MAN IN OKLAHOMA 475
SemaTopHynium Mariusian C. M.
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20780).
SEMATOPHYLLUM SUBPINNATUM (Brid.) E. G. Britt.
Tijuca, vicinity of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 1 (20630 in part). Near
Iguaba Grande, Rio de Janeiro, Aug. 7-9 (20749). Petropolis, Organ Moun-
tains, Rio de Janeiro, Aug. 12 (20826, 20831). Jardim Botanico, Rio de
Janeiro, Aug. 11 (20835). Garden of Museo Paulista, Sao Paulo, Brazil,
Aug. 14, 15 (20869). Near Santos, Brazil, Sept. 20 (20899).
RHYNCHOSTEGIUM BrEsKEANUM (C. M.) Jaeg.
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20777). Petropolis,
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Aug. 12 (20828).
RHYNCHOSTEGIUM SELLOW1I (Hornsch.) Jaeg.
On Corcovado, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, July 14, marked “‘d.”’
RHYNCHOSTEGIUM SUBROTUNDUM (Hampe) Jaeg.
Organ Mountains, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Aug. 12 (20778).
ANTHROPOLOGY .—The antiquity of man as shown at Frederick,
Oklahoma: A criticism... O. F. Evans, University of Oklahoma.
(Communicated by A. HRDLICKA)
The Holloman gravel pit at Frederick, Okla., has yielded fossils and
artifacts which are thought by some persons to indicate a great an-
tiquity for man in America. In the light of my rather extensive expe-
rience in that region, I wish to point out what I believe to be some
serious mistakes which have been made in the interpretation of the
evidence.
The deposits rest on Red Beds which are probably of Permian age.
The lower four or five feet consists of consolidated cross-bedded sand,
clean pebbles, and boulders up to five or six inches in diameter. The
coarse material is found in the lower part and except for being consoli-
dated is the same as that found in the bottom of most streams in the
region at the present time. ‘These streams have the coarser material
at the bottom of the sand and boulder beds, not only because the streams
come nearer and nearer to grade as the material in the bottom is
deposited but also because rapid changes in velocity, resulting from
the numerous floods, keep the loose material of the stream beds agi-
tated and hence the larger materials work toward the bottom as in a
miner’s pan. ;
1 Received September 25, 1930.
476 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 19
This cross-bedded sandstone and conglomerate represents the early
normal period of the old stream’s history. In the Frederick pit it is
more tightly cemented than the material higher up because it lies at
about the top of the ground-water level and has been subjected to more
wetting and drying by the rising and falling of the ground-water table
than has the material of the upper layers.
Above this old river bottom is a middle layer, ten to twelve feet
thick, of water-deposited material, consisting of sand, gravel and small
boulders. The materials are in great variety. Some can be recognized
as having come from the Wichita mountains a few miles to the north,
but much has the same source as other numerous gravel and sand
deposits in that part of southwestern Oklahoma, west of the Wichita,
whose source was somewhere to the west toward the Rocky mountains.
It contains in particular the same varieties of igneous rocks and
schists that are found in other deposits all along the present North
Fork of the Red River at elevations of about 70 to 80 feet above the
present stream bed. These other deposits also contain numerous
animal remains similar to those of the Holloman pit, such as tusks, thigh
bones, ete., which on casual examination appear to be what are gener-
ally referred to as of Pleistocene age. Gravel deposits containing such
animal remains, but of course varying as to the nature of the rock
materials, are found lying 60 to 100 feet above the present stream beds
along nearly all the streams in the whole of western Oklahoma.
' This would seem to be fairly good evidence of a post-Pleistocene uplift
over this region. All we can say at present as to the time of this uplift
is that it occurred long enough ago so that the streams have since had
time to cut down to their present level. Unfortunately there is so
little known by geologists about the actual rate of erosion for any
particular area that to try to fix the length of a period of time in years
on any such basis is no better than a guess. Neither do we know the
rate of the uplift nor how long it continued. Like most such uplifts
it was probably gradual and any streams that may have been aggrad-
ing or in equilibrium, were slowly changed to degrading streams.
Above this layer of water-deposited sands and gravels is an upper
layer of several feet of material that appears to be partly water- and
partly wind-deposited, taking on more and more of the character of
wind-deposited material higher up. The middle part of this layer
contains some aggregates of calcareous material whose origin so far
has not been satisfactorily explained.
NOVEMBER 19, 1930 EVANS: ANTIQUITY OF MAN IN OKLAHOMA 477
The ridge on which the gravel pit is located extends to the northwest
to about where Otter creek appears to have once joined the North
Fork of Red River, and contains at several places stream gravels similar
to those of the Holloman pit. A study of the region suggests very
strongly to anyone familiar with the work of streams of Oklahoma and
the southwest that the present lower course of the North Fork of the
Red, a few miles west of Frederick, is in the course of a stream that
committed piracy on the stream that laid down the gravels of the
Holloman pit. If this is the case, the Holloman pit is in the bed of
what was formerly the North Fork of the Red. We have no way of
knowing how long ago this act of piracy was completed and any at-
tempt to determine it from rate of erosion would be idle speculation,
since we do not know how large a valley the more westerly stream had
eroded before the piracy was committed, nor do we know anything
about the rate of erosion in this particular area either before or after
the piracy.
The coarse, water-deposited material of the middle layer above the
old stream bed means a quickening of the stream velocity and this
might easily have occurred at the time of the post-Pleistocene uplift
which would have also been a favorable time for the committing of the
piracy by the rapid cutting headward of the more westerly stream.
The lower part of the upper beds were apparently deposited in that
period of the stream’s history when the river had not completely left
its old channel and was still depositing during periods of high water.
The uppermost part is wind-deposited material dropped there after
the channel no longer contained a running stream.
Arrowheads, metates and bones of Pleistocene animals, at least some
of which have been identified by Hay as of Aftonian age, have been
found in the middle layer and a few arrowheadlike artifacts have been
found in the lower beds. So far no articulated skeletons have been
found. The nearly complete carapace of a glyptodon was found and is
now in the University of Oklahoma museum, but no part of its skeleton
wasfound. ‘This fact indicates some disturbance of the animal remains
since they were first buried. A few of the Pleistocene bones show much
wear as though they had been transported a considerable distance, but
most of them show but little wear.
Metates are considered by anthropologists to have appeared rather
late in the history of the human race, and the arrowheads found in the
pit are also of a late type. In fact some of them look the same as those
now frequently picked up on the surface in this region.
478 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 19
The presence of the bones of Pleistocene animals mixed with metates
and arrowheads is apparently considered by Cook, Figgins and some
others as prima facie evidence of the existence of man on the earth at
the same time as the animals which furnished the bones. It seems to
be a case of trying to apply to land deposits a line of reasoning which
is excellent for marine deposits, but which does not apply at all in the
case of stream deposits. With rocks of marine origin we are quite
justified in assuming that the animal remains found in them are of the
same age as the sediments and that bones and shells once deposited
with sediments on the bottom of the ocean were not disturbed before
consolidation. ‘The general rule for marine deposits may be said to
be continued stability after deposition.
However any geologist after a little thought on the subject will be
convinced that, in general, stream deposits are unstable. Any stream
deposit is subject to disturbance at any time as long as a stream con-
tinues to flow in the valley of the deposit.
This being the case the line of reasoning regarding the Holloman
gravel pit and the remains found in it is evident.
1. It is a stream deposit.
2. As a stream deposit it was subject to disturbance at any time
up to the time the stream left the valley.
3. There is no reliable evidence as to the time the stream which
deposited the gravels left its valley, since calculations based on rate
of erosion have no value.
4. The coarser material of the middle layer shows an increase of
velocity must have occurred. This might have been at the time of the
post-Pleistocene uplift, but not necessarily.
5. Since no articulated skeletons have been found in the pit it is
probable that the skeletons have been disturbed since the original
deposition. This disturbance may easily have been post-Pleistocene.
6. If there has been a disturbance, the finding of metates and arrow-
heads mixed with Pleistocene bones does not mean that the metates
and arrowheads are of Pleistocene age. On the contrary the metates
and arrowheads are just as good evidence of the age of the pit as are
the bones.
7. Since anthropologists have good reason to believe that the kind
of arrowheads and the metates found here are of rather recent age, we
are not justified in saying that the deposit indicates great antiquity of
man in the region.
NOVEMBER 19, 1930 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 479
The geological history of the pit may have been about as follows.
Piracy was committed by the stream to the west soon after the post-
Pleistocene uplift, thus causing the old stream to leave the bed in
which the gravel pit is found. The surrounding region had been
considerably eroded before this occurred. Soon after the uplift and at
about the time the piracy occurred, when the waters of the old stream
were at flood stage and flowing rapidly, a gravel deposit, a little farther
up the stream than the present one, was undercut and redeposited.
This contained the bones now found in the Holloman pit, while the
arrow heads and metates were on the surface where they had been left
a comparatively short time before, and all went into the river and were
redeposited together in what is now the Holloman gravel pit.
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF FREDERICK GRAVEL PIT
Haroip J. Coox, New Trails of Early Man in America, Scientific Amer-
ean, 1927: 114.
J. D. Fiacins, The Antiquity of Manin America, Natural History, 27: 229,
1927.
Haroip J. Coox, New Geological and Paleontological Evidence Bearing
on the Antiquity of Mankindin America. Natural History, 27: 240, 1927.
J. D. Ficeins, Early Manin America. Science News Letter, 12: 215, 1927.
Lestig Sprer, A Note on Reputed Ancient Artifacts from Frederick,
Oklahoma. Science, 68: 184, 1928.
Oxtver P. Hay, On the Antiquity of Relics of Man at Frederick, Okla-
homa. Science, 67: 442, 1928.
Haro.wp J. Coox, Further Evidence Concerning Man’s Antiquity at Fred-
erick, Oklahoma. Science, 67: 371, 1928.
Lesuige Sprer, Concerning Man’s Antiquity at Frederick, Oklahoma.
Science News Letter, 67: 160-161, 1928.
Cuas. N. Gouup, On the Recent Finding of Another Flint Arrowhead in
the Pleistocene Deposit at Frederick, Oklahoma. This Jour., 19: 66-68,
1929.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
An aquarium section in the new reptile house at the National Zoological
Park has been endowed by Maj. LuicH Zmurszsz, U.S. A., in memory of his
wife, FRaNcES BrINCKLE ZERBEE. Mrs. Zerbee was a great lover of
aquaria, and the memorial is for the purpose of encouraging interest in home
aquaria. ‘The income of the endowment is to be used to keep stocked with
interesting specimens this section of the new reptile house.
PauL W. Oman has been appointed by the Bureau of Entomology as a
specialist in the order Homoptera, which includes principally the insects
commonly known as leaf-hoppers. Mr. Oman, who studied these insects
under Professor P. B. Lawson at the University of Kansas, will take charge of
the collection of Homoptera at the National Museum.
480 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 19
Dr. B. PrasHap of the Zoological Survey of India at Calcutta recently
examined the types of mollusks in the Lea Collection at the National Museum.
JOHN OLIVER LA Gorce was the guest of honor at a dinner given Novem-
ber 5 at the Willard Hotel by the trustees of the National Geographic Society
in celebration of the twenty-fifth anniversary of his association with the
organization.
G. A. Cooper has been appointed Assistant Curator in the Division of
Stratigraphic Paleontology of the National Museum. For several years past,
Dr. Cooper has been studying Paleozoic brachiopods at Yale University.
Obituary
FRANK JAMES Katz, a member of the AcapEmy, died on August 21, 1930.
He was born at New York City January 27, 1883, received the degree of
bachelor of arts from the University of Wisconsin in 1905, and held a fellow-
ship in the department of geology at the University of Chicago in 1906-07.
He was on the staff of the U. S. Geological Survey from 1907 until 1925, when
he became Chief Engineer of the Division of Mineral Resources and Statistics
of the U. 8. Bureau of Mines. |
GEORGE McLane Woop, editor of the United States Geological Survey
from 1908 to 1925, died in Washington October 26, in his 81st year. His ser-
vice of nearly 40 years in the Geological Survey, as editorial clerk, assistant
editor, and editor, left an enduring monument in the wide reputation for clear,
terse expression attained by the published reports of that organization and
exerted a far-reaching influence on scientific writing everywhere through
his Suggestions to authors. This pamphlet, prepared primarily for use in
the Geological Survey, proved to contain so much wise counsel of general
application that it rapidly became a “best seller’? among Government pub-
lications. It was first published in 1909 and was revised and enlarged twice.
The third edition, issued in 1916, has been reprinted seven times—the latest
printing of 1,000 copies in July, 1930—and sent to all parts of the world on
request from writers of many classes, teachers of English in universities and
colleges, research organizations, and business executives. After his retire-
ment from the Government service Mr. Wood continued to do editorial
work, and the demand for his assistance was so great that he worked longer
hours than ever. At the time of his death he was editorial reader for the
Bulletin of the Geological Society of America and the Arkansas Geological
Survey. He wrote most of the articles on the geology of North and South
America for the new Encyclopoedia Britannica. He died practically “in
harness,” having been ill only three days.
-. OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS
THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Philosophical Society
The address by W. J. Humphreys, The Philosophical Society of Washington
through a thousand meetings, which appeared in the issue of this JOURNAL
for July 19, 1930, has been published in pamphlet form by the Philosophical
Society. Copies, bound in stiff covers, may be obtained for forty cents
each, postpaid, from the Treasurer, Capt. N. H. Heck, U. 8S. Coast and
Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C.
ANNOUNCEMENTS or MEETINGS
Wednesday, November 19 The Engineering Society
\
The Medical Society
Bs Thursday, November 20 ‘The Academy
- Friday, November 21 The Geographie Society
Saturday, November 22 The Philosophical Society
Wednesday, November 26 The Geological Society
The Medical Society
Friday, November 28 The Geographic Society
Saturday, November 29 The Biological Society
Tuesday, December 2 The Botanical Society
Wednesday, December3 The Engineering Society
, The Medical Society
Thursday, December 4 The Entomological Society
The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if sent
h.
_ to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each mont
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
ie President: WitLii1AM Bowisz, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. Tuckerman, Bureau of Standards.
Recording Secretary: CuHartes THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils.
Treasurer: Henry G. Avrers, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
CONTENTS
ORIGINAL PAPERS | arts
Botany.—Mosses collected in Brazil and Argentina be 3: N. |
sore te eneeey? ecsoe Sad Ae 5
cism. O. F, Bron. gn eee ee
ScIENTIFIC Notes aND NWA aides vets oe po Soo ee
Oxsituary: F. J. Katz, G. M. iro ee Sa ee
This Jovnwat is indexed in the International Index to Periodicals to be found -
ic. Wrrae CooxkE
ate Oy 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
ee Miiisnikon
ae ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
ae W. ‘Srosz
GHOLOGICAL SOCIETY cs Nik
~
¥
ae R. Swanton car eg
_ ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
dit bition, ‘af Baltimore, Md., under the
pecial ra of postage provided for
“ia ed onda Jul 3, 1918.
This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington pee of Bhioncsat pu
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; Mi
ceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated eles (3)
of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The J
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except du ng
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond foemendaty
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from ]
issue of the JourNAL for the following fourth or nineteenth, Tespe
M anuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Edite I
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essen
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publicatio
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes b D
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. ~ ae
Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be re
by zine etchings being preferable. Bre seen
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be Se p
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form t
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. % me = -
Authors’ Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished g1
bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pag
date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost waee ord
ance with the following schedule of prices: tego
Coplos Trg Sars PRS i2pp. 16pp. _ - Covers.
50 oe Ani ike bie Arriaga
100 $ .50 $85) 38.260 $t-10 2a ee
150 .90 1.00 1.10 1.60.9 23 OO Fe
200 sR bec se ese ae eam a a 8 .B0 Ae
250. 1.65 2.00 2.10 2.60 4 n
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for eich split page.
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’ s name and sddeesis |
ee corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, Boe a di
Re an author will not aadinantty see proof, his Set for oe
should invariably be attached to the first page of his ame
: ae
The rate of Subscription per volume is.....+.0..eeeeeenecuce aes
Semi-monthly HUMpPOrs has 2k. Suet kee sae es ee
Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, nee 13 14,
Remitiances should be made payable to ‘Washington Acade )
addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Gerdes Surve
Missing Numbers will be replaced without: tan a ovis
within thirty days after date of the rca “a issue.
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to Kedenabee 19, 191
are given to members of scientific societies affili
oat
“ye cme
* aS es | pel ey
ee ee
ete OCs 4
wile at for 8. 00. ‘Spee
i, with ane
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 20 DECEMBER 4, 1930 No. 20
MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS.—A ppell’s equations.1 R. J. SEEGER,
The George Washington University. (Communicated by EpGar
W. Woo.Lapb. )
Appell’s equations? describe the motion of a dynamic system.
Their use involves two advantages of theoretical importance: The
mathematical one of applicability to both holonomic and nonholonomic
systems (such as do or do not have integrable relations connecting the
coordinate-velocities) ; the physical one of immediate expressibility in
terms of accelerations (cf. the methods of Lagrange and of Hamilton
which start with codrdinates and velocites). However, the signifi-
eance of the latter seems to be wholly superficial upon closer examina-
tion of the usual derivation of the equations. For the basis is La-
gerange’s formulation of D’Alembert’s principle—virtually a reduction
of the dynamical problem to a statical one. Although this is a virtue in
the light of practicability, it is logically vicious. Gibbs‘ has remedied
this defect of the standard equations of motion by the postulation of a
formula involving ‘“‘geometric’”’ accelerations instead of the ordinary
“‘seometric”’ displacements. (It is to be remembered that all such vari-
ations are mathematical inventions—not physical ones.) Moreover,
he has shown his expression to be a more complete and a more accurate
description of the laws of motion than the previous one. The question
arises as to whether Appell’s equations can be derived on such a basis.
‘We shall now consider this point. And, incidentally, the relativistic
form of the equations on the Special Theory will be given.
1 Received September 20, 1930.
2P. APPELL. Sur une forme général des équations de la dynamique. (Memorial des
sciences mathematiques). Paris, 1925.
$J.S. Ames and F.D.Murnacuan. Theoretical mechanics, page 329. 1929.
4J. W. Gress. On the fundamental formulae of dynamics. Am. Jour. Math. 1879: 49.
481
482 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 20
Suppose we have a dynamic system composed of m particles and
possessing » degrees of freedom. Also, in addition to the r distinct
generalized codrdinates there are s superfluous ones. All these are
bound together by & relations of the following form:
r+s
Og We + 2s Pay = Op dO Ba ee (1)
1 +1
ar -+
t t4 >
Q
where d,s and bs are functions of the codrdinates g, and the time ¢
and where pag represent linear, differential functions of the same.
Hence,n = 7 +s —k. This equation indicates the type of the sys-
tem: holonomic if s can be made equal to k, non-holonomic if s must
be less than k, (unsolvable for s > k)
First we set up Gibbs’ equation in relativistic form for the Cartesian
coordinates of the particles:
m 3 d ; i”
> a |X = (M,; ws) | 6 AS == 0 (2)
i=17=1 dt
where the symbols have their usual meanings. In order to transform
this expression into one involving the generalized codrdinates only,
we make use of certain relations (that must be given) of the following
type:
Pa eer ee, Oe
Hence,
5: need ay), Ree Ba ies bat eae ee
“yO = a ad : = >> ve ie re
: 20 -G d Ono d pe Ons q ay
But the validity of equation (2) is conditioned by the vanishing of
both 6g, and 6g, at a given instant. Thus we obtain
: ies Bde, Liz :
6 Ly = jt ys 3
Me ere oe (3)
not all the 6g, are independent. Therefore we must consider the
modification in (3) due to equations (1). The independence of the
latter and their linearity enable us to solve for k of the codrdinate-
differentials, which can then be expressed linearly in terms of the
remaining ones. Denoting the codrdinates by Q, after such a pro-
cedure, we have
DEC. 4, 1930 SEEGER: APPELL’S EQUATIONS 483
Ogee A dO Bet er ne.
y=1
Subjecting the variations to the same conditions as above, we obtain
5Q, = E Apy Qh +, Biese if 1.O0
YS
We now substitute these 5Q, in (3). Hence,
Sts re 50). be (4)
y=1
and equation (2) becomes
3 d } n ei
p> D> = lan (M,; wi) | » Ci, 50,41 = 0 (5)
=1j=1 dt y=1
or
n m 3 ad s a8
y \ DD, 9) (| x, aaa (M,; i) | on, dQ), a oe 0
But the 6Q, ., are arbitrary. Therefore
m 3 d ‘
p> (Es = di (M,; iu) | =) =a) Y= | Rey (6)
j=l
7=1
These are the equations of motion.
As a matter of secondary interest, we shall now express these rela-
tions in a more compact—but less convenient—form. For
M..
[-@T
CHG
where M.,, is the rest-mass and c is the velocity of light.
But z;; can be written
m 3 d : 3 ae
yy > E (M,; Li; ) on = D Ci, Xj.
nese a j
=
ty = 2 Cin Ope eaO8 (7)
pw
where C;; represents the terms due to the explicit dependence on the
time. :
484 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 20
Likewise
102 n ee -
a 2 oer Quay ae Ce, Q, +¥ ta Ci (8)
Y= 1 i 1
M,,
1- al.
Re
And from (8) we note that C;;, can be regarded as = (the de-
kty
From (7) we conclude that is not a function of Os 3
rivative being purely formal). Let
>|
Il
'Ms
M
ps
s
7 iy
t=1j=1
and
m 3 129
M,, HOS
he 2 ene AY 3/2
(2) |
C
Then
fee Se ke? (9)
OQ, + »
These equations can be identified with those of Appell for the non-
relativistic case by a consideration of codrdinate-velocities small with
respect to the velocity of light. For, our A then reduces to his ‘‘energy
of the accelerations.”’
BOTANY.—The genus Trichanthera.1 Emmpry C. Lronarp, U. 8.
National Museum. (Communicated by E. P. KiLx1P.)
Until recently the genus Trichanthera of the Acanthaceae family
was known from a single species, 7’. gigantea. It was fully described
and finely illustrated by Humboldt and Bonpland as early as 1809? but
was placed by them in the genus Ruellia. Their uncertainty as to the
correctness of this course of action is shown by their remarks—“‘La
plante que je viens d’écrire se trouve bien placée parmi les Acanthes;
1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received
September 3, 1930.
2 Pl. Aequin 2: 68. 1807.
pDEc. 4, 1930 LEONARD: TRICHANTHERA 485
mais il n’est pas facil de la rapporter 4 un des genéres connus de cet
ordre, ou d’en établir un nouveau qui offre des charactéres bien tran-
chés. Dans cette incertitude, j’ai préferé la rapporter au genére
Ruellia, plutot que d’en établir un nouveau. Je donne 4 cette nouvelle
plant le nom de Ruellia gigantea, parce que c’est un arbre trés élevé.”’
The name T'richanthera was introduced ten years later when Kunth
redescribed? this well-marked species and added the following observa-
tion, “‘Certe distincti generis ob stamina exserta, antheras pilosas et
capsulae loculos dispermos. Fortasse Trichanthera nominandum.”
In the present paper two species and one variety are described.
These consist of attractive large-leaved shrubs or trees with silky
reddish flowers crowded in terminal racemes or corymbs.
KEY TO THE SPECIES
Calyx lobes rounded; inflorescence racemose, secund; lower surface of leaf
blades inconspicuously pubescent. ..........2..0.2..5 04. 1. T. gigantea.
Calyx lobes acute; inflorescence corymbose; lower surface of leaf blades
AMS wIEUOUShVya PUDESCEIG bu ml ote ee are ee ahi las ca 2. T. corymbosa.
1. TRICHANTHERA GIGANTEA (Humb. & Bonpl.) Nees in DC. Prodr. 11: 218.
1847.
Ruellia gigantea Humb. & Bonpl. Pl. Aequin. 2:68. pl. 102. 1807.
Trixanthera angularis Raf. Fl. Tellur. 146. 1838.
Shrub or tree up to 5 meters high (sometimes bushy and bearing adventi-
tious roots); top round; twigs quadrate, the angles rounded, the tips minutely
‘brown-tomentose; lenticels prominent, round, about 1 mm. in diameter;
petioles 1 to 5 em. long, channeled, glabrous or minutely pubescent; leaf blades
ovate to oblong, the largest seen 26 cm. long and 14 cm. broad, acuminate at
apex, narrowed at base, entire or undulate, glabrous except the veins and mid-
rib, these prominent and more or less pubescent; inflorescence a terminal
campact, secund panicle 5 to 15 cm. long and 4 to 5 cm. broad, brown-tomen-
tose; bracts triangular, 3-mm. long; calyx 10 to 12 mm. long, brown-tomen-
tose, the lobes erect, oblong, 7 to 10 mm. long, 5 mm. broad, rounded at
apex; corolla 3 to 4 cm. long, red and glabrous proximally, yellowish and silky
tomentose distally, red and glabrous within, the tube 1 to 1.5 cm. long, 6 mm.
broad, sometimes slightly swollen or curved, the throat campanulate, the limb
2 to 3 cm. broad, the lobes oblong to oblong-ovate, 10 mm. long, 3 to 5mm.
broad; stamens exserted, the filaments 3 to 3.5 mm. long, pilose below, glab-
rous above, the anthers 6 mm. long, 3 mm. broad, bluntly apiculate at apex,
bearded along the sutures, the hairs white and about 2 mm. long; ovary
tomentose, 8-ovuled; style 4 to 5 em. long, glabrous; stigma 2-lobed, one lobe
vestigial, the other subulate, 2 mm. long; capsule oblong, 1.5 to 2 em. long,
0.5 cm. broad, obtuse at apex, silky pubescent with closely appressed hairs,
retinacula 3 mm. long, curved, truncate and erose at tip; mature seeds 1 to 4
-in each capsule, lenticular, glabrous, 3 to 4 mm. in diameter.
Type locality: ‘‘In sylvis fluvii magdalenae prope Badillas,’’ Colombia.
Specimens examined:
7H. B.K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 2: 248. 1817.
486 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 20
Fig. 1.—Trichanthera gigantea. In cultivation at Bucaramanga, Colombia. (Killip
and Smith 15452.)
Costa Rica: Moist forest of Tilarain, Province of Guanacaste, alt. 500 to
650 meters, Standley and Valerio 46569 (N).4 Dry forests of Nicoya, Tonduz
in 1900 (N).
4N = U.S. National Museum; Y = Herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden;
G = Gray Herbarium.
DEC. 4, 1930 LEONARD: TRICHANTHERA 487
Panama: Vicinity of Gatuncillo, Canal Zone, Piper 5606 (N). Along
the Sambu River, southern Darien, above tide limit, Prtizer 5541 (N, Y).
Forests around Pinogana, southern Darien, Pittcer 6544 (N, G). Wet forest,
Rio Tapia, Province of Panama, Standley 26149 (N), 30662 (N). Juan Diaz,
Province of Panama Standley 30542 (N). Narraganti, Willzams 1007 (N, Y).
CotomBiA: Lehmann 3040 (N). Antioquia: vicinity of Medellin, Toro
78 (Y). Fredonia, Archer 523 (N). Bolivar: Open forest, Sahagun, alt.
150 to 200 meters, Pennell 4101 (N, G, Y), San Martin de Loba, Lands of
Loba, Curran 54 (N). Tolima: Ibagué, Holton in 1853 (Y). Santander: In
yard, Bucaramanga, alt. 1000 meters, Killip and Smith 15452 (N). Dry hill-
side, Rio Surata valley, between El Jaboncillo and Suratd, alt. 1,500 to 1,800
meters, Killip and Smith 16426 (N). Norte de Santander: Roadside thicket,
Culaga Valley, near Tapata, alt. 1,500 to 2,100 meters, Killip and Smith
20504 (N, Y); Western side of Culagd Valley, alt. 1,480 to 1,550 meters,
Killip and Smith 20534 (N, G, Y). In open along trail between Chindcota
and La Esmeralda, alt. 1,000 to 1,300 meters, Killip and Smith 20891 (N).
Cundinamarca: El Colegio, Ariste-Joseph 1061 (N); Between La Mesa and
Magdalena, Bogota, alt. 600 to 1,400 meters, Triana in 1851-57 (N, Y).
El Valle: Thicket, “La Manuelita,” Palmira, alt. 1,090 to 1,110 meters,
Pennell and Killip 6193 (Y).
VENEZUELA: Between Valera and Monte Carmelo, Trujillo, alt. 535 to
1,830 meters, Bellard in 1923 (N). Near Rio Cito, Mell in 1923 (Y). In
hedge, Paso de Guanare, Portuguesa, Pittier 3951 (N, Y).
Ecuapor: Provincia Manabi, Eggers 14823 (N).
Peru: Near Tarapoto, Dept. of San Martin, Spruce 3951 (G).
As in the case of many attractive plants this species bears several common
names. In Costa Rica and Panama it is known as ‘‘palo de agua;” in Vene-
zuela, “‘naranjillo;” in Colombia, ‘‘aro-blanco”’ and ‘‘rompebarringa.”’
TRICHANTHERA GIGANTEA GUIANENSIS Gleason, Bull. Torrey Club 54: 617.
1927.
Inflorescence 3 to 8 cm. long, 2 to 3 em. broad; corolla 3 to 4 em. long, yel-
low and scarlet; filaments pilose throughout.
BritisH GuraNna: Anabisi River, Northwest District, De La Cruz 1348
(N, Hs Canaan, Demerara River, Jenman 5356 (Y). Barina River, Jenman
7037 (Y). 3
SURINAM: Paramaribo, Reyne in 1922 (N).
Braziu: Parad: Breves, Killip and Smith 30230 (N, Y).
Reyne found this tree planted as a windbreak in Surinam, where it is called
“watra-hoedoe.” It differs from the typical form in much smaller inflores-
cence and in the filaments being pilose throughout.
2. Trichanthera corymbosa Leonard, sp. nov.
Tree up to 3 m. high; twigs quadrangular, brownish tomentose, becoming
gray and glabrous with age, the angles rounded, the nodes somewhat swollen,
the lenticels prominent, round, about 0.5 mm. in diameter; petioles 1 to 5 em.
long, brown-tomentose ; leaf blades ovate, 10 to 22 cm. long, 5 to 15 em. broad,
acuminate, blunt at tip, rounded at base or abruptly narrowed and slightly
decurrent on the petiole, somewhat oblique, firm, shallowly crenate, the
upper surface bearing numerous cystoliths and a few scattered hairs, the
488 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 20
lower surface tomentose, the veins (about 10 pairs) and midrib prominent
and strongly tomentose; inflorescence corymbose, 10 to 20 cm. broad, the
branches subquadrate and minutely brown-tomentose, the lenticels promi-
nent; bracts small, leaflike, deciduous, those subtending the flowers triangular,
2 to 3 mm. long, 1 to 2 mm. broad; pedicel 2 to 5 mm. long, velvety brown-
tomentose; calyx irregular (anterior lobe appreciably longer then the others),
1.5 to 2.5 em. long, velvety brown-tomentose, the lobes oblong, 10 to 20 mm.
long, 3 to 5 mm. broad, obtuse or acute, 5-nerved, the middle nerve more pro-
nounced than the 4 lateral ones; corolla 3 em. long, the tube 5 to 6mm. broad,
glabrous, the throat and lobes whitish or brown and densely tomentose with-
out, purple and sparingly pubescent within, the limb 2.5 em. broad, the lobes
erect or spreading, ovate, 12 mm. long, 8 to 10 mm. broad, obtuse; stamens
4, in pairs, which are inserted on the upper portion of the corolla tube, ex-
serted, the filaments 15 mm. long, united at base, the united portion 5 to 6
mm. long and pilose, the free portions glabrous; anthers 7 mm. long, 2 mm.
broad, the lobes 2 to 3 mm. long, obtuse, sparingly pilose along the sutures;
ovary densely yellowish tomentose, 8-ovuled; style 3 to 4 em. long, pilosulous
below, glabrous above, stigma 2-parted, one lobe rudimentary, the other
subulate, about 4 mm. long, usually curved at tip; capsule oblong, 1.5 to 2 cm.
long, 5 to 7 mm. broad, acute or obtuse at apex, densely tomentose with
brownish, more or less spreading hairs; mature seed not seen but probably
glabrous and lenticular.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,355,268, collected in the
Culaga Valley, near Tapata, Dept. Norte de Santander, Colombia, altitude
1500 to 2100 meters, March 4, 1927, by E. P. Killip and Albert C. Smith
(no. 20140). Also deposited in the Gray Herbarium and herbarium of the
New York Botanical Garden.
Additional specimens examined:
VENEZUELA: Vicinity of Tovar, Mérida, along the Rio Macoties, alt. 900
meters, Pittzer 12828 (N, Y).
This species is very distinct and easily recognized by the cordate leaf blades
which are densely brown-tomentose on the lower surface, the unequal calyx
lobes with narrow, pointed tips, and the loosely-flowered corymbose inflores-
cence.
ENTOMOLOGY .—WNew Coccinellidae from the West Indies.1. EDWARD
A. CHAPIN, Bureau of Entomology, United States Department of
Agriculture. (Communicated by Harotp Morrison.)
The material described below has been received from several sources
but by far the most important part has come for study and description
from Mr. 8. C. BrunzrR, of the Estacion Experimental Agronémica
de Cuba, at Santiago de las Vegas. In studying Mr. Bruner’s Scymnil-
lodes it was found necessary to work over all specimens of that genus
from the West Indies. Unfortunately, there is at hand no material
1 Received September 17, 1930.
DEC. 4, 1930 CHAPIN: WEST INDIAN COCCINELLIDAE | 489
from Jamaica, from which island there have been described three
species. This has prevented a monographic treatment of the genus.
Geodimmockius, new genus? -
Head prognathous; front slightly convex; epistoma not covering and not
conspicuously raised above labrum; labrum transverse; antenna long, reaching
to base of pronotum, inserted near eye at side of front, base free, ten-seg-
mented, first segment the largest, somewhat bent, second as broad as first and
little more than half as long, third about half as broad and slightly longer
than second, fourth similar to third but slightly shorter, fifth, sixth and
seventh of equal length, each slightly shorter than fourth, sixth and seventh
noticeably wider than fifth, eighth to tenth forming a fusiform club, ninth
and tenth of equal length; mandible with apex undivided, subapical tooth
large and prominent, ventral submedian tooth obsolete, dorsal submedian
tooth reduced to a small knob, median notch on inner edge large, deep, quad-
rate; inner margin of mandible above notch cut away; maxilla with three-
segmented palpus, apical segment very large, hatchet-shaped, second segment
not prolonged at inner apical angle, galea and lacinia each with a cluster of
long setae at tips; labium poorly chitinized, quadrate, with a few long setaeon
external surface, internal surface closely studded with short spines, apical
segment of palpus conical, slightly attenuate near tip which is squarely trun-
cate, mentum trapezoidal, broadest in front, bearing eight long setae, sub-
mentum very short and transverse. Pronotum moderately convex, trans-
verse, lateral margins broadly explanate, not excavate below for reception of
antennae, prosternum moderate, not concealing trophi, tumid, median paired
carinae absent. Mesosternum with the median, anterior, crescent-shaped
portion deeply sunk and bounded behind by a prominent arcuate carina,
intercoxal portion trapezoidal, mesepisternum feebly chitinized and not well
defined as to limits, mesepimeron roughly triangular, its inner point reaching
and partially bounding coxal cavity. Metasternum broad, anterior lateral
portions separated from posterior portion by a prominent transverse carina
which is broken at median line, metepisternum not chitinized, metepimeron
long and narrow, not excavate for reception of part of leg II. Elytron with
epipleura horizontal, lateral margin strongly explanate, epipleura not excavate
for reception of legs. Wing venation reduced, only costal, cubitus and fourth
median veins visible. Legs essentially similar, femora not notably expanded,
tibiae slender, parallel-sided, without grooves for reception of tarsi, without
apical spurs but with the usual row of apical setae, tarsi four-segmented, third
segment small and inconspicuous, claw with prominent basal tooth. Abdo-
men with sternites III—VIII visible, metacoxal ares short and incomplete.
Genotype.—Geodimmockius explanatus, new species
This genus is closely allied in structure, though not in appearance, to the
following West Indian genera: Psorolyma Sicard, Bura Mulsant, Botynella
Weise, all of which the writer has been able to dissect and study. This well
defined group shares the following characters: four-segmented tarsi, tarsal
claws toothed at base, tibial spurs absent, mandible with subapical tooth
*'To George Dimmock (1852-1930) for his extensive investigations in entomology and
especially for his Algunas Coccinellidae de Cuba, Primer Informe Annual dela Estacion
Central Agronémica de Cuba, pp. 287-392, June 1, 1906.
e
490 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 20
large and remote from apex and with median quadrate notch, antennae ten-
segmented with three-segmented fusiform club, metacoxal ares incomplete.
The following key, based on external characters only, will serve to separate
the species of these genera which are known to me.
1. Body strongly convex, outline from above nearly cirecular.............. 2
Body not strongly convex, outline from above elongate............... 3
2. Length 2.8 mm., bronze with metallic luster, epipleurae descending extern-
ally, lateral margin of pronotum not explanate..Bura cuprea Muls.
Length 1.7 mm., head, thorax and humeri black, elytra light castaneous,
epipleurae horizontal, lateral margins of pronotum explanate
Geodimmockius explanatus, new species.
3. Length 2.0-2.5 mm., metallic blue above, epistoma of male produced in
two multiangulate lateral processes. . .Psorolyma maxillosa Sic.
Length 1.8-2.0 mm., testaceous spotted with black, epistoma not a
in either sex. (Botynella) ve uscekie Wad MURS Ne ee rrr
4. Elytra with a median spot common to both... ..Botynella 5-punctata Ws
Hlyicra without suvuralispotu.. oc... ae Botynella 4-punctata Ws.
Geodimmockius explanatus, new species
Nearly circular, strongly convex, lateral margins of pronotum and elytra
with broad, transparent, testaceous, explanate margins; head, last three seg-
ments of antenna, pronotum, humeri and under surface of body black, elytra
(except humeri) castaneous, basal segments of antenna, trophi and legs testa-
ceous. Head finely sparsely punctured, eyes convex and prominent, labrum
nearly quadrate; pronotum convex, more coarsely and much more densely
punctured than head, twice as broad as long (by measurement), elytra with
punctation similar to that of pronotum, greatest width at basal third where
their combined width is one and one-half times that of pronotum; under parts
finely alutaceous, very finely and sparsely punctured; legs moderately long,
not received in cavities beneath body. Length: 1.7 mm., width: 1.5 mm.,
altitude: 0.85 mm.
Type and paratypes.—Cat. No. 48129, U.S. N. M.
Type a male, paratypes two females, all from 8. Nicolas, Oriente Prov.,
Cuba, July 20-27, 1927, 8. C. Bruner, collector, taken on Coffea arabica, E. E.
A. de Cuba, No. 9338. One paratype, female, same data, in collection of 8. C.
Bruner. One paratype, female, same data, in collection of the British
Museum.
Scymnillodes bruneri, new species
Oval, convex, shining, brassy with rose-red reflections, under parts. black.
Head with reflexed epistoma, front sparsely and moderately coarsely punc-
tured, sparsely hairy. Antennae brownish, palpi and mandibles black. Pro-
notum about twice as broad as long (length-width ratio = 20:39), marginal
bead very fine, sides rather broadly and strongly reflexed. Punctation ex-
tremely fine, hardly visible under magnification of 64. Elytra punctured
like pronotum, lateral margin beaded and slightly reflexed, basal and sutural
margins not beaded. Epipleurae with very slight excavations for legs, broad
before middle, disappearing shortly behind middle. Prosternum and meso-
sternum with a few very coarse punctures, metasternum sparsely and rather
DEC. 4, 1930 CHAPIN: WEST INDIAN COCCINELLIDAE 491
finely punctured. First visible abdominal sternite very sparsely punctured
outside of the strongly raised metacoxal area, areas enclosed by arcs strongly
alutaceous and more finely and densely punctured. Second to fourth sternites
alutaceous laterally, shining medianly, each with one complete transverse row
of rather coarse punctures and with other punctures near lateral margins.
Legs and tarsi black. Length: 1.5mm., width: 1 mm., altitude: 0.7 mm.
Type.—Cat. No. 43130, U. 8. N. M., from Santiago de las Vegas, Cuba,
April 1, 1930, 8. C. Bruner, collector. Paratype, same place, April 8, 1930,
S. C. Bruner, collector, in collection of S. C. Bruner.
Easily separated from the other species of the genus by the black legs and
almost invisible punctation of the pronotum and elytra.
Scymnillodes iris, new species
Oval, convex, shining, head bluish green, pronotum brassy-green, elytra
rosy purple margined with brassy green, all parts with strong metallic reflec-
tions, under parts black. Head with reflexed epistoma, front moderately
densely set with deep and distinct punctures, sparsely but rather conspic-
uously clothed with white hairs. Antennae not noticeably paler than palpi
or mandibles. Pronotum twice as wide as long, marginal bead strong, side
margins narrowly but sharply reflexed. Punctation of pronotum finer and
slightly denser than that of head, pubescence not evident. Elytra with
punctures of two sizes; however, the difference in the sizes is not so well
marked as in S. splendidus. The density of punctation is about the same on
pronotum and elytra. Marginal bead fine, noticeable both on lateral and
sutural margins, basal margin not beaded. Epipleurae without defined exca-
vations for reception of legs, broad anteriorly, rapidly disappearing behind.
Prosternum very coarsely punctured, meso- and metasternum less coarsely
and rather sparsely punctured. First abdominal sternite sparsely but coarsely
punctured, other sternites as in S. splendidus. Legs and tarsi black.
Length: 1.5 mm., width: 1.1 mm., altitude: 0.7 mm.
Type.—Cat. No. 48131, U. 8. N. M. from Havana, Cuba, W. M. Mann,
collector.
Scymnillodes splendidus, new species
Broadly oval, strongly convex, shining, greenish-blue to purplish blue, lus-
ter strongly metallic, under parts black. Head strongly and moderately
densely punctured, very inconspicuously hairy, epistoma strongly margined.
Antennae brownish, palpi and mandibles black. Pronotum more than twice
as broad as long (length-width ratio = 14:30), marginal bead complete,
punctures of uniform size, rather coarse and not densely placed. Scutellum
small, triangular, impunctate. Elytra with mixed punctation of large and
small punctures, the large punctures and also the punctures of the pronotum
umbilicate. Lateral marginal bead very strong, basal and sutural margins
not beaded. EHpipleurae broad basally, excavate for reception of middle and
hind legs but not sharply so, narrowing rapidly behind middle and disappear-
ing in the latitude of the second visible abdominal segment. Prosternum and
mesosternum very coarsely and closely punctured, metasternum less coarsely
and quite sparsely punctured, especially in the median area. First visible
abdominal sternite very sparsely punctured outside of the strongly raised
metacoxal ares, areas enclosed by arcs strongly alutaceous and more finely
492 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 20
and densely punctured. Second to fourth sternites alutaceous laterally,
shining medianly, each with one complete transverse row of rather coarse
punctures and with other punctures near lateral margins. Fifth sternite
broadly rounded behind, slightly tumid in female, flat in male, evenly and
rather coarsely punctured. Legs black, tarsi slightly paler. Length: 1.6-1.8
mm., width: 1.3-1.4 mm., altitude: 0.90-0.96 mm.
Types and paratypes.—Cat. No. 43132, U.S. N. M.
Types and two paratypes from Baragua, 8.3.27, on citrus, L. C. Seara-
muzza, collector, T. P. R. F. No. 3237; eight paratypes from Guantanamo,
1918, W. M. Mann; one paratype from Cayamas, 8.6., E. A. Schwarz; one
paratype from Central Jaronu, Aug. 10, C. F. Stahl, T. P. R. F. No. 2246; six
paratypes from Paso Estancia, May 2, 1916, preying on Lepidosaphes sp.;
six paratypes from Santiago de las Vegas, April 3, 1930, S. C. Bruner, E. E. A.
de Cuba No. 9325; two paratypes from same place, Feb. 18, 1930, P. A. Berry,
on Aleurocanthus woglumi Ashby: three paratypes from same place, July 14,
1930, S. C. Bruner; one paratype from near Santiago de Cuba, Oct. 4, 1928,
Silvestri and Bruner; six paratypes from Camaguey, July 19, 1923, J. Acufia;
four paratypes from Isle of Pines, on grapefruit, intercepted at Cincinnati,
Ohio, U.S. A. by R.S. McKay. Paratypes in the collection of S. C. Bruner:
one from Santiago de las Vegas, Feb. 18, 1930, P. A. Berry; one from same
place, April 8, 1930, S. C. Bruner; one from Paso Estancia, May 2, 1916; one
from Guantanamo, 1918, W. M. Mann; one from Camaguey, July 19, 1923,
J. Acufia. Paratypes in collection of the British Museum: one from Santiago
de las Vegas, Feb. 18, 1930, P. A. Berry; one from Paso Estancia, May 2,
1916.
The Santiago de las Vegas, Santiago de Cuba, and Isle of Pines specimens
differ from the others in that the elytra are sharply bicolored, the lateral
margins being deep blue while the discal areas are greenish. In a few the
suture is also blue. I have been unable to find the slightest structural differ-
ence between specimens of these forms.
Scymnillodes caseyi, new name
1924. Delphastus violaceus Casey, Memoirs Coleoptera, 11: 170, nec
Scymnillodes cyanescens? var. violaceus Sicard, 1922.
This species was based on one of a series of specimens taken at Cayamas,
Cuba, by the late E. A. Schwarz. Judging from the eight specimens in the
Museum collection, Casey’s type was not fully colored at the time of its cap-
ture and for this reason only the posterior femora are dark. In what appear
to be fully colored specimens all femora are nearly black, the pale yellowish
tibiae in striking contrast with them. In addition to the Schwarz specimens
from Cayamas there are in the collection one specimen from Cayamas col-
lected by George Dimmock, one from Simpatia, Cuba, by W. M. Mann, two
from Cabada, Cuba, by W. M. Mann, and two from Maricao, Porto Rico,
July 2, 1917, by Harold Morrison (his number A-289).
The Dimmock specimen noted above was recorded in his ‘‘Algunas Coc-
cinellidae de Cuba” as Bura sp.
pec. 4, 1930 CHAPIN: WEST INDIAN COCCINELLIDAE 493
Scymnillodes gilvifrons, new species
Oval, convex, shining, head metallic greenish, pronotum and elytra metallic
violaceous, front of head and anterior angles of pronotum densely set with
golden pubescence, under parts black, appendages yellowish to reddish testa-
ceous. Head with epistoma hardly reflexed, punctation moderately dense
and coarse but somewhat obscured by the pubescence. Mandibles castaneous,
darker than labrum, antennae or palpi. Pronotum twice as wide as long,
marginal bead strong at sides and across base, complete but fine across front
margin, side margins narrowly but sharply reflexed. Punctation less dense
but equally coarse to that of head, pubescence restricted to anterior angles.
Elytra coarsely, sparsely and irregularly punctured, fine punctures absent.
Marginal bead fine, present only on lateral margins. Epipleurae without
defined excavations for legs, rather narrow from base to end of first abdominal
sternite, rapidly disappearing behind. Prosternum with a few very coarse
punctures covering most of the surface, meso- and metasternum more sparsely
punctured, the latter punctured only at sides and along median line. Abdom-
inal sternites strongly alutaceous at sides, sparsely and rather finely punc-
tured. Legs and tarsi reddish testaceous. Length: 1.5 mm., width: 1.1
mm., altitude: 0.8 mm.
Type and three paratypes.—Cat. No. 43133, U. 8. N. M., from Maricao,
Porto Rico, July 2, 1917, H. Morrison, collector, original number A-289.
Easily recognized by the brilliant yellow pubescence on head and pronotum.
Scymnillodes subtropicus Casey
1924. Delphastus subtropicus Casey, Memoirs Coleoptera, 11: 170.
Five specimens of this species from Key West, Florida, and one from
Biscayne, Florida, are in the Museum collection. ‘The Biscayne specimen
is rather more violaceous in color than the Key West series but in structure
and punctation there appear to be no differences. A true Scymnillodes and
the only species of this genus to be reported from the mainland of the Americas.
Scymnillodes atrox, new species
Oval, convex, shining, black, head with a greenish metallic luster, pronotum
with bluish metallic luster, appendages reddish testaceous. Head with epi-
stoma slightly reflexed, front rather sparsely and finely punctured, sparsely
pubescent with pale whitish hairs. Pronotum very slightly more than twice
as broad as long (length-width ratio = 19:40), marginal bead fine, side
margins very narrowly reflexed. Punctation of pronotum same as that of
head, pubescence not evident. Elytra rather less densely punctured than
pronotum, punctures of a uniform size which is slightly larger than those of
pronotum. Marginal bead fine, noticeable both on lateral and sutural mar-
gins. Epipleurae not foveolate, moderate in width, rapidly disappearing
behind level of first abdominal sternite. Prosternum coarsely but obsoletely
punctured, mesosternum rather densely set with large ill-defined punctures,
metasternum very sparsely and rather finely punctured. Abdominal sternites
alutaceous laterally, sparsely and finely punctured, the second to fourth with
the usual single transverse row of punctures. Legs and tarsi reddish testa-
ceous. Length: 1.4 mm., width: 1.0 mm., altitude: 0.7 mm.
Type.—Cat. No. 43134, U. S. N. M., from Camp Herrin, La Prise, Haiti,
July 26, 1925, W. A. Hoffman, collector.
494 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 20
The various species of Scymnillodes known to me may be separated one
from another by the following table. It is impossible to place the Sicard
species with any degree of certainty as the original descriptions are rather
incomplete as regards the structural characters. Color and size alone are not
sufficient to define species in this genus.
1. Legs: blacks ese: cutee. dcpeeitee ie ae ae 2
Legs, at least: in part, pale. ».: 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers ;
BOS tah ie Pa a ea career es a : $2.00
100 $ .50 $ .55 $ .60 $1.10 2.50
150 90 1.00 1.10 1.60 3.00
200 1.15 1.50 1.60 2.10 3.50
250 1.65 2.00 2.10 2.60 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed pi ae
og corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, a 00; additional IOS
1.00.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies ¢ or r reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. eae
The rate of Subscription per volume 18........00.cccesceccuceencs Tee See ( ae ite ed, f
Semz-monthly mambers... 5. 505. Pete cs vie me ees hs wie ele ge os ee Be Ae fy
Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and 15)..... 50
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences”. and» ee)
addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D D.C. e g. Lees
Ezxchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other publications. _ $ x ce 2 4
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that elaina: is ; made 2 ae
within thirty days after date of the following issue. __ Nous : : ae
4 Pit é
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates —
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy. .
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 20 DECEMBER 19, 1930 No. 21
PALEONTOLOGY.—On the fossil Mammalia of the first interglacial
stage of the Pleistocene of the United States! Ouiver P. Hay.
The writer accepts the conclusion of most recent geologists that
there have been in North America four, possibly five, distinct glacial,
and three, possibly four, interglacial stages. He holds, with most
geologists, that during each glacial stage there prevailed at and beyond
the border of the ice an arctic climate, which compelled the animals
and plants either to retreat or to perish. Evidently at the beginning
of the Pleistocene there existed an abundant fauna and at its end a
meager one. If we seek the prime cause of the disastrous effects on
the living things it will be found in the successive glacial climates.
I can not accept the view of the Iowa geologists that the fossil
animals found in the western part of the State, except perhaps amusk
ox, existed there during the height of a glacial stage; nor is there sufh-
cient evidence for us to believe that elephants existed there before the
Nebraskan stage.
Unfortunately the fossil remains found in the Aftonian deposits in
Iowa are too often fragmentary; but according to our present knowl-
edge, the following mammals inhabited that region at that time.
Megalonyx jeffersonil Camelops? sp. indet.
Mylodon harlani Alces shimeki
Equus complicatus Aftonius calvini
EK. niobrarensis °Symbos ecavifrons
E. scotti Bison sp. indet.
E. laurentius Stegomastodon mirificus
E. excelsus Mammut progenium
Mylohyus? temerarius M. americanum
Hlephas imperator Castor canadensis
K. columbi Castoroides ohioensis
EK. boreus EKuarctos americanus
* Received Oct, 22, 1930.
502 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 21
These fossils form the corner stone of our knowledge of the succes-
sion of North American Pleistocene vertebrates.”
West of Missouri River the Equus beds of Cope, the Sheridan beds
of Scott, extend from the glaciated region of South Dakota to the
Gulf. They appear to be a continuation of the Aftonian of Iowa and
to contain some of the same species and many in addition. On the
Plains these beds are widely overlain by deposits of loess, sometimes
very deeply.
In Nebraska, about Seneca, have been collected Equus niobrarensis,
E. excelsus, Camelops?, Platygonus, and probably Elephas imperator
and Stegomastodon mirificus.2 Some of these species have been re-
ferred to the Pliocene, but the geologists inform us that, at the close
of the Pliocene, glacial conditions were already approaching in Great
Britain. Migration in higher latitudes must therefore have been
somewhat difficult for large, and more so for small, mammals.
Near Grayson (Peters), Nebraska, a half mile or more from Niobrara
River and from 50 to 100 feet above it, have been collected many
genera and species found in the Aftonian of Iowa. Eighty per cent
are extinct. These include Hlephas imperator, three species of camels,
two of horses and a saber-tooth tiger. Since these animals lived, the
Niobrara has cut down its channel 50 to 100 feet deeper and moved a
mile away.
Afton, Oklahoma, offers us a case in which a first interglacial fauna
occurs near the surface of the Equus beds. A spring there, at which
mammals for thousands of years quenched their thirst, has never been
smothered by a deposit of loess. Besides later fossils, it has furnished
five species of horses, two species of camels and Hlephas vmperator.
Seventy-three per cent are extinct.®
At Frederick, Oklahoma, deep down in an old filled-up river bed on
the top of a ridge 100 feet above the surrounding region, the stream now
flowing ten miles away, have been collected 25 species of mammals,
among them Elephas imperator?, E. haroldcooki, Stegomastodon,
Glyptodon, five or six species of horses, and at least two kinds of camels.
All species are exinct.°
20.P.Hay. Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 322A: 286-301.
$QO7P. Hay.!? Op; ci. 302.
40. P. Hay. Op. cit. 100, 304.
°O. P. Hay. Op. cit. 94, 254.
6O.P. HayandH,J.Coox. Proc. Colorado Mus. Nat. Hist. 9, No. 2.
DEC. 19, 1930 HAY: PLEISTOCENE MAMMALS 903
At Rock Creek, in Tule Canyon, Briscoe County, Texas, has been
collected a large fauna in still other conditions. In late Pliocene or
early Pleistocene times, during an uplift, a stream cut a gorge about
100 feet deep into Miocene deposits. Later there was a depression
during which were laid down four distinct Pleistocene beds amounting
to about 90 feet. Then occurred another change. A quickened
stream cut down through all the Pleistocene, through the Miocene and
into the Triassic. In the Pleistocene of this canyon have been collected
Glyptodon, two elephants (one of them Hlephas imperator), from four
to six horses, and four kinds of camels, twenty or more species, all of
which are extinct.’
Along Brazos River, at Waco, Texas, are three terraces, the highest
standing 100 feet above the river. On this terrace have been found
remains of Hlephas «mperator and of camels.®
At Pittbridge, Brazos County, 13 species of mammals have been
collected, including Chlamytherirum, Megatherium, a horse, a camel,
three species of mastodons, and Hlephas wmperator. All belong to
extinct species. °®
In Austin County, on Brazos River, 80 miles from the Gulf, near
San Felipe, have been collected nine species of extinct mammals,
among them Llephas imperator, a horse, a camel, two species of
mastodons, and a long-horned bison.!°
Along the shores of Galveston Bay skeletons of elephants are fre-
quently found. One at least of these was Elephas imperator.
At Keeran Point, on the Gulf Coast, bones of a large camel have
been collected. With these was associated an elephant, possibly £.
umperator."
A comparison of the lists of fossils cited above as collected in Iowa,
Nebraska, Oklahoma and Texas must convince one that all belong to
an early stage of the Pleistocene and all to the same stage. Some of
the collections cited, and most of those to be cited, contain three groups
of species: (a) Species which do not occur in more recent deposits;
(b) Species becoming extinct in later stages; (c) Species living into
historical times.
_7™0.P. Hay. Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 322A: 85, 222, 232, fig. 2.
80.P.Hay. Op. cit. 88, 127, 161, 227, 243.
90. P. Hay. Op. cit. 244, 245.
TCO Ebay Op. cit. 246.
1Q.P. Hay. Op. cit. 21, 64, 163, 248.
504. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 21
On map 25 of the author’s work, Publication 322A, of the Carnegie
Institution of Washington, are shown the localities in the middle region
of the United States where extinct species of the genus Bison have
been discovered. In Texas are 16 of these. On map 26 are indicated
finds referred to Bison bison. Seven in Texas are thus identified, but
the writer can not be sure that even one of these is at once Bison bison
and older than the late Pleistocene. Had this animal lived in Texas
with the species shown on map 25, it is hard to explain why no skull
or even horn core has been discovered in association with early
Pleistocene species. ‘These extinct species were apparently buried
when Texas was at a higher elevation and since that time the streams
have spent their energy in deepening and widening their valleys.
Satisfactorily identified remains of Bison bison appear to occur in
Texas only on lower river terraces.
I come now to deal with the earliest known Pleistocene mammals
of Florida. In this state are some six localities where such remains
have been collected. Details regarding these and citations of papers
discussing them may be found in the writer’s Publication 322 of the
Carnegie Institution of Washington and in Dr. G. G. Smmpson’s
article in the Twentieth Annual Report of the Florida Geological
Survey, on pages 231 to 279.
There is general agreement that the collections of the six localities
mentioned below are of the same geological age; but there is disagree-
ment as to what that age is.
In “stratum No. 2”? (now denominated Melbourne beds) at Vero, |
St. Lucie County, have been collected 29 species of mammals, of which
21 are extinct, 67 per cent. Among these are 4 species of edentates,
3 species of horses, a capybara, an undetermined camel, and the
Florida saber-tooth tiger. Three miles away, in a corresponding
formation, was found a jaw of Elephas imperator.”
From Melbourne, Brevard County, a collection of forty species of
mammals has been reported, at least 60 per cent of which are extinct.
Among these are Chlamytherium, a species of glyptodon, a camel,
and EHlephas imperator.#
Seminole Field, Pinellas County, has contributed 46 mammalian
species. At least 27 of these are no longer living, 59 per cent. Five
20, Pe Hay. Op. crt. 163.
13G.G.Srmpson. Florida Geol. Survey Ann. Rept. 20: 268.
dbieg
@y
.
|
DEC. 19, 1930 HAY: PLEISTOCENE MAMMALS 505
species of edentates, two horses, three camels, and a saber-tooth are
among the number."
Not far from Sarasota, Sarasota County, have been collected 23
species of mammals, of which at least 15 species, 65 per cent, are ex- _
tinct. Among these are a Glyptodon, a camel, a horse, and a saber-
tooth tiger.
About seven miles east of Sarasota have been secured 14 species of
mammals, 11 of which, 80 per cent, are extinct. These include a
camel, Chlamythervum and a horse."
Near Arcadia, DeSoto County, along Peace Creek, have been found
12 species of land mammals, of which 11, 91 per cent, are extinct.
These include Glyptodon, two horses and Elephas vmperator.""
These Melbourne beds and their fossils are now to be compared with
those of western Iowa and those found from South Dakota to the Gulf.
Certainly the fossils of Florida resemble in a general way those collected
in the western region. ‘There are in both states numerous edentates
(such as ground sloths, and glyptodons), wolves, bears, great cats,
elephants, mastodons, horses, tapirs, peccaries, camels, deer, bisons,
gigantic beavers, and gigantic capybaras. Nearly every family of
mammals found in Florida occurs also on the Plains. Of 51 genera of
Melbourne mammals recorded by Simpson!® 18 are found also in
Texas. Of 70 species of Melbourne mammals 14 are known in Texas;
and quite certainly more collecting in the two states will increase the
numbers of species possessed in common. Of the genera occurring in
the Melbourne beds 23 are recorded from the deposits regarded as
Aftonian of the region from western Iowa to the Gulf of Mexico.
The collections made in Florida contain usually more species than
those of the western region. This is simply because the Florida fossils
were buried in ponds and slowly flowing streams, while those of western
Iowa and of the Plains were deposited by swift waters which swept
away the bones of the small creatures. At Vero, Florida, occur 29
species, of which seven are small, 24 per cent of the whole. At Mel-
bourne were found 44 species of which four were small, 9 per cent.
At Lecanto 26 species were collected of which eight were small, 30
percent. At Seminole Field 44 species were secured, 12 of which were
small, 27 per cent.
144G.G.Simpson. Op. cit. 264.
15G.G.Srtmpson. Op. cit. 274.
146G.G.Simpson. Op. cit. 275.
“O.P. Hay. Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 322: 381.
18G.G.Simpson. Florida Geol. Survey Ann. Rept. 20: 251.
506 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 21
On the other hand, in the Cox pit, near Missouri Valley, Harrison
County, Iowa, have been collected 19 species, all of them large.
At Peters, Nebraska, have been taken 21 species, only two small,
9 per cent. At Frederick, Oklahoma, have been collected at least 23
species, none small. From Rock Creek, Texas, have been reported
18 species, none small. At Pittbridge, Texas, have been secured 14
species, none small.
If in this region the microfauna were duly represented, the collec-
tions'would be quite as large in species as those of Florida and probably
the number of species common to both regions would be augmented.
It is in order now to determine in what way Florida is-related in its
Pleistocene mammalian paleontology to that of the Great Plains.
In looking over the records it is found that 50 species have been dis-
covered in the collections made in Texas and referred by the writer to
the early Pleistocene and that, of these, 16 species are regarded as
common to Florida, that is, 32 per cent, and few small species occur.
In Nebraska there have been collected apparently 22 species of mam-
mals, very few small forms, and, of these 22, only six are known from
Florida, 27 per cent. In Iowa have been secured 25 species of which
apparently eight, none small, are known from Florida, 32 per cent.
Now are these differences in the composition of the various collec-
tions such as we can or can not expect? Do they indicate different
geological stages of existence? ‘Taking into consideration the distance
of the Plains from Florida, but more especially the differences in lati-
tude and of faunal zones, what do we find at the present day? So far
as I can determine there exist now in Texas 111 species of mammals.
Of these 23 live in Florida, 20 per cent. In Nebraska there are approx-
imately 50 existing mammals, of these 11 seem to belong also in Florida,
22 per cent.
It will hardly be questioned that these existing mammals of Florida,
Texas, and Nebraska belong to the same geological time; but what
reason is there that quite similar differences should not be expected
in the case of the animals of an early Pleistocene stage?
The reader who is interested in this discussion is now invited to ex-
amine the lists of fossils taken at various European localities from
deposits which Mayet and Roman call the ‘‘Pliocéne récent”’ and the
“‘Pléistocéne ancien.’’2° This ‘‘Recent Pliocene,’ however, corre-
19Q0.P.Hay. Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 322A: 296.
20 Mayetand Roman. Ann. Univ. Lyon (n.s.) fase. 42: 22-68.
DEC. 19, 1930 HAY: PLEISTOCENE MAMMALS 507
sponds to the first and second glacial and first and second interglacial
stages of North American geology. Most of the lists cited belong to
the first glacial stage, known to us as the Nebraskan, but the deposits
lie well outside the glaciated region. The Red Crag, however, is
placed by Haug at the top of his period Neogene.”! The pages of
Mayet and Roman’s work on which each list begins is here cited.
1. Sables de Chagny (p. 22). The list presents 18 species, of which
all are extinct; no small species. Sixteen genera (including subgenera) ;
five of them extinct, 31 per cent.
2. Perrier (p. 29). Thirty-six species, all except one extinct; four or
five small. ‘Twenty-seven genera, four extinct, 14 per cent.
3. Du Puy (p. 35). Thirteen species, all extinct; none small. Nine
genera, three extinct, 33 per cent.
4. Val d’Arno (p. 50). Thirty-five species, all extinct. Four or
five species small. Twenty-five genera, six extinct, 24 per cent.
5. Red Crag (p. 58). Eighteen species of land mammals, all extinct,
one small. Sixteen genera, three extinct, 19 per cent.
6. Cromer Forest bed (p. 66). Thirty-eight species, 14 extinct, 37
per cent. ‘Twenty-seven genera, four extinct, 15 per cent. Ten
species small.
This locality and its fossils are arranged by the French authors at the
top of the Old Pleistocene (Yarmouth). ‘They employ the prevailing
nomenclature. It is now believed, however, that most of the species
need revision; also many of the genera.
It will be observed that these lists, like those of our country, differ in
number of species from place to place and often in the identity of
species; but in all of them, for identification of geological position, are
a few prominent forms, such as primitive elephants, mastodons, rhinoc-
eroses, Hquus, etc.; as in America we must rely on Elephas imperator,
EL. haroldcooki, Stegomastodon, Equus, and the Camelide. In both
these countries these fossils, for the most part, bind the formations to
the early Pleistocene; the Cromer fossils attach the Cromer beds appar-
ently to the first or second interglacial stages.
Therefore as regards the Melbourne beds of Florida, the writer
is confident that, notwithstanding the prevalent theories of successive
Pleistocene submergences and consequent terraces, of dissolution of
fossils from these terraces by percolating waters, of terraces formed
within 15,000 years; of the notion that Florida was a land where the
*1Havua. Tratté de géologie. 1620. °
508 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 21
mammals were protected from glacial storms until rude barbarians
came and slew them with their arrows and clubs and stones—notwith-
standing these theories, those Melbourne beds belong to the first inter-
glacial stage.
The writer will now consider briefly the Pleistocene paleontology
of a portion of the Pacific Coast region. It is necessary to mention
only two localities, Fossil Lake, Oregon, and La a near Los Angeles,
California.
In deposits of an ancient desiccated lake, now Fossil Lake, have been
collected 22 species of mammals and 50 of birds. Of the mammals
12 species, 52 per cent; of the birds 16, 32 per cent, are extinct. Of the
mammals three species only are small. Ten of the genera are found in
Florida and at least two species. Four species of camels, one horse,
and Elephas wmperator have been collected.”2
La Brea furnishes a vast number of finely preserved, but disarticu-
lated, skeletons of mammals in deep pits of asphaltum mingled with
sand. Forty-four species are recorded, a few not determined specifi-
cally. Of these at least 23 are extinct, 57 per cent. Five of the species
are known from Florida. ‘Thirty-six genera are present, of which 11
are extinct, in North America at least. Twenty-two of the genera
occur also in Florida. About ten species are small. Three species of
large edentates, one horse, a bison, five dogs, four large cats (among
them a saber-tooth tiger), a camel, and Hlephas imperator are present.
Only five of the species are recorded in Florida.?*
These localities furnish fossils which indicate first interglacial ani-
mals. ‘The essential species are present. In Oregon and California
not many are found which are known from the states of the Plains and
from Florida; but this is exactly what is to be expected. Let us see
how the existing mammals of the Pacific region agree in species with
those of the eastern third of the United States.
From Mr. G. 8. Minier’s Mammals of North America, 1924, I make
out that in the states east of Mississippi River there are close to 116
species of mammals. In the 11 States, New Mexico, Colorado, Wyo-
ming, Montana, and those between these and the Pacific Ocean, there
are approximately 356 species. Of these there appear to be about 27
species common to the two regions, about 7 per cent of those of the
western region, and about 23 per cent of those of the eastern.
22Q.P.Hay. Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 322B: 243,
28). Hay. Idem.,.«183.
DEC. 19, 1930 DENSMORE: INDIAN MUSIC 509
In Florida there exist about 40 species of mammals; in California
approximately 190. I find only eight species common to the two states.
If the fossils of Fossil Lake and of La Brea are not regarded as con-
temporaneous with those of the Plains and of Florida, geologists of
some szeons hence who may have in hand fossils of the present day
mammals of the eastern third of our country and of the western third
would, on the same grounds, be justified in referring them to quite
different geological stages or epochs.
ETHNOLOGY .—The music of the American Indians at public gather-
ings (Abstract).! Francks DENsMoRE, Bureau of American
Ethnology.
Music was an important factor in public gatherings of the Indians
and they derived much pleasure from it, yet there were no concerts and
the European custom of ballad singing was unknown. The American
Indian never sang for the approval of others, neither did he sing in
order to be paid for his performance. His pleasure in music was not
connected with technic but with the melodies, their words, and certain
associations of the songs. In the old days every Indian song was an
inspiration, not a creation of man according to rule and precept.?
After describing the Indian custom of “receiving songs in dreams’’
the writer considered her subject under four divisions: poetry, drama,
dancing and games. The accompanying instruments were various
forms of drums and rattles producing rhythm but not melody.
The poetry of the Indians is contained in the words of songs and
rituals. ‘There is no attempt to interpret these words by the manner
of rendering the songs. Many song-cycles of southwestern tribes
relate the journeys of mythical personages, and the people dance dur-
ing a portion of these songs. The beauties of nature form the subject
of many songs, the words being few but highly poetic.
Primitive drama is closely associated with music. There is rich
1 Received Oct. 9, 1930. The paper of which this is an abstract was read by Miss
Elizabeth Burchenal, September 1, 1930, at the International Congress of Popular Arts,
held at Antwerp. It was the only paper from the United States on the program. The
other papers were from England, Spain, Holland, Belgium, Germany, France, and Italy.
2 With reference to my paper on the music of the American Indian (this JouRNAL 18:
395-408, 1928), Prof. Constans MALTEzOS, a member of the Academy of Athens anda
student of ancient oriental and Peruvian music, who had thought that there might be an
intelligent system underlying the music of the American Indians, writes me as follows:
‘“‘Je trouve que vous avez raison: vos Indiens ne pouvent avoir eu une idée de intervalle
duton. Cette musique n’a pas passé par le mains de théoreticiens.”’
510 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 21
pageantry, as well as music, in the ceremonies to bring rain. The Sun
Dance of the Plains tribes had its ceremonial songs, and the warrior dram-
atized his victory over the enemy. Among the Sioux, the man who
had received a vision acted it out, that all might know he had the elk
or the bear as his spiritual helper, and he sang the song given in his
vision. ‘The history of Indian tribes is replete with drama in ritual
and ceremony.
Dancing differs in style among the various tribes, some maintaining a
dignified manner while others have contests in acrobatic dancing with
many contortions. ‘There are dances of individual expression, dances
imitating birds and animals, and dances in which the people stand still,
flexing the knees, but in a majority of Indian dances the people move in
a circle around a large drum.
Games of pure skill and calculation, like chess, are unknown among
the American Indians, their games being contests of dexterity or games
of chance. Success in games was formerly attributed to supernatural
aid, and songs were sung to ensure that aid.
In closing, the writer described various customs connected with
Indian music and noted the absence of self-aggrandisment on the part
of Indian musicians. It was the old belief that songs were given by
friendly spirits, and their use was chiefly associated with securing help
and benefit to human beings.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
421sT MEETING
The 421st regular meeting of the Entomological Society of Washington was
held at 8 p.m., Thursday, June 5, 1930, by special invitation at the University
of Maryland, beginning with an informal picnic and basket dinner from 6 to
8 p.m. on the campus and continuing with the formal session at 8 p.m. in the
University Auditorium at College Park, Maryland. J. E. Grar, president,
presided. H. L. Parker, European Parasite Laboratory, Hyéres, Var,
France; NEweuu E. Goon, Bureau of Entomology, Washington, D. C.; and
JAMES ZETEK, Barro Colorado Island Biological Laboratory, Canal Zone,
were elected to membership in the society.
A brief informal address was given by H. J. Patrrerson, Director of Mary-
land Agricultural Experiment Station, in which he greeted the society and
extended welcome for all to the University. He then read a note from R. A.
PEARSON, the President of the University, expressing regret at inability to be
present and writing in highly appreciative terms of Doctor Howard and their
personal associations. Doctor Patterson expressed hope that all the scientific
:
DEC. 19, 1930 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 511
organizations of Washington would continue more and more to make regular
use of the facilities of the University for various gatherings and assured a
hearty welcome to all. He also referred to the practical value of entomologi-
eal work and the annual savings effected through such research, and made
very brief mention of the work of some of the early entomologists connected
with the Maryland Station or the University, and the publications issued
therefrom dealing with entomological topics. He stated that all were
honored by the presence at the meeting of Doctor Howard, and an especial
welcome was extended to him
E. N. Cory also made a very brief address of welcome to the society and
referred appreciatively to the work of the various entomologists connected
with the Maryland institution, many of whom were later with the Federal
Bureau.
Program: L. O. Howarp, of the U. S. Bureau of Entomology, Some early
entomologists. Apropos of the letter from Doctor Pearson just read, Doctor
Howard spoke appreciatively of the association reaching back for thirty
years or more with Doctor Pearson, and of the latter’s ability to “‘pull ideas
down from the sky.’ It was due to one of these ideas that Doctor Howard
first was made one of the trustees of Cornell University. In discussion of
his subject, Doctor Howard placed especial emphasis on reminiscences of the
careers of certain of the early entomologists who had been connected in one
way or another at various periods of their lives with the work of the Maryland
Station. The first of these to whom consideration was given was Townend
Glover, who later was the first entomologist of the U. 8S. Department of
Agriculture, and a brief résumé of his biography was given with special
emphasis on his very strongly marked individuality and his personal eccen-
tricities. All interested were advised to read the vivid and colorful biography
of Glover by Charles Richard Dodge, published in 1888 as U. 8. Division of
Entomology Bulletin, old series, No. 18. Several extracts were read by the
speaker from various papers not yet published dealing with sundry phases of
Glover’s career. There was also considerable discussion by the speaker of
other entomologists connected at one time or another with the Maryland
Station, including C. V. Riley, R. 8S. Lull, W. G. Johnson, E. D. Sanderson,
and others. Slides bearing portraits of these and a number of their con-
temporaries in entomological work were shown and various phases of the
career of each individual were given brief consideration.
W. D. Pierce discussed some entomological experiences in the Philippines,
under the title The sugar-cane insect problem in Negros; an abstract of this
will be published later in the Proceedings of the Entomological Society of
Washington. Doctor Pierce’s remarks were discussed by GRAF, GAHAN,
BisHopp, and Howarp.
A. B. GAHAN reported the recent rearing by McCreary, of the University
of Maryland, of Dicymolomia julianalis Walker, a small moth which he found
to be feeding on the eggs of the common bagworm of evergreens (Thyridop-
teryx ephemeraeformis Haw.). Mr. Gahan first observed this insect in a
similar relation to the bagworms some fifteen years ago in the same locality,
while connected with the University of Maryland. So far as he knew, no
other like observation had been made by any other person since that time.
The normal habit of the moth is said to be to infest the heads of the common
cattail or Typha.
Professor Cory reported the recent finding of Argentine ant (Iridomyrmex
humilis Mayr) in a greenhouse in Baltimore, Maryland. This is a new dis-
512 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 21
tribution record and is the northernmost point of the known spread of this
pest.
Austin H. Cuiark, Notes on some local butterflies. This has been pub-
lished in the Proceedings of the Entomological Society of Washington, 32:
80-82, 1930.
On motion of F. C. Bishopp, a vote of thanks was extended by the society
to the authorities of the University of Maryland and to Professor Cory and his
associates for the generous hospitality and for the splendid welcome given our
society at the 421st meeting.
J. S. Wave, Recording Secretary.
| @Obituary
OLIVER Perry Hay, a member of the Academy and of the Biological and
Geological societies, died November 2, aged 84. He was born at Saluda,
Jefferson County, Indiana, May 22, 1846, and studied at Eureka College,
Yale University, University of Indiana, and the University of Chicago. After
teaching several years at Eureka College and at Butler College, he became, in
1895, an associate curator in the Field Museum. He was engaged in research
work at the National Museum from 1897 until 1900, when he was appointed
assistant and later associate curator in the department of vertebrate paleon-
tology of the American Museum of Natural History. In 1907 he returned to
Washington. He was a collaborator of the Carnegie Institution of Washing-
ton from 1902 to 1906; research associate, 1912 to 1916; and associate from
1917 until his retirement in 1926. ‘
He was the author of many papers on vertebrate paleontology. His longer
works include a Bibliography and catalogue of the fossil Vertebrata of North
America (1902), The fossil turtles of North America (1908), The Pleistocene
age [of Indiana] and its Vertebrata (1912), The Pleistocene mammals of Iowa
(1914), and three volumes on The Pleistocene of North America and its verte-
brated animals (1923, 1924, 1927). Dr. Hay was a frequent contributor to
this JouRNAL. His last contribution, which appears in this number, was
handed to the editor only a few days before his death.
INDEX TO VOLUME 20
An * denotes the abstract of a paper before the AcaADrEmy or an affiliated society.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Biological Society of Washington.
Entomological Society of Washington.
Geological Society of Washington.
Philosophical Society of Washington.
Washington Academy of Sciences.
Proceedings: 84, 346.
Proceedings: 15, 114, 153, 185, 384, 438, 495, 510.
Proceedings: 29, 151, 241, 354, 435.
Proceedings: 12, 28, 118, 137, 149, 183.
Proceedings: 68, 340, 418.
AUTHOR INDEX
Apvams, L.H. The compressibility of rub-
ber. 213.
*The creation of the earth. 340.
Auspricut, H.M. *Some biological prob-
lems in National Park administration.
349.
AupricH, J. M. *Notes on the life zones
of northern Europe. 84.
*Recent entomological experiences
in Europe. 114.
*Reminiscences. 495.
ANDERSON, E. G. *Colored light meas-
urements on various photometers.
13.
Austin, L. W. Note on a comparison of
sunspot numbers, terrestrial magnetic
activity, and long wave radio signal
strength. 73.
BaILey, VERNON. *Some biological prob-
lems of the Grand Canyon region.
352.
Baupur, W. V. *Remarks on the use of
amite in cheese making. 189.
Bax, Ropert. *Structural survey of the
Adirondack anorthosite. 241.
Barty, Tom. F. W. Pacificite, an ane-
mousite basalt. 60.
BartscH, Pauu. *Collecting in
Caribbean Islands. 351.
Bennett, H. H. *Contributions by the
Bureau of Soils to the problem of
erosion. 30
the
513
BERKSON, JOSEPH. On the equation for
the reaction between invertase and
sucrose. 157.
Berry, EpwarpD W. A new Pterophyllum
from the Shinarump conglomerate in
Utah. 458.
*The origin and evolution of plants.
344.
*The history of the Andes. 69.
Berry, Wittarp. A new hypural fan
from the Miocene of Maryland. 41.
—— Contributions to the paleontology
of Peru, IV: ‘‘Orthophragmina’”’ (Dis-
cocyclina) meroensis W. Berry, D. sp.
432.
Bowig, Wiuiiam. The scientific and
practical value of triangulation. 53.
BRIDGE, JOSIAH. *Early structural his-
tory of the Ozark region. 151.
Brooks, H. B. *The sensitivity of a
galvanometer as a function of its re-
sistence. 118.
CampBELL, M. R. *The problem of the
scientific classification of coal. 485.
Carter, E. E. *The 1929 scientific ex-
plorations in Alaska: Forestry. 71.
CarTER, WALTER. *Some phases of the
sugar-beet leafhopper problem. 153.
Casz, E.C. Discovery of Permo-Carbon-
iferous vertebrates in the Dunkard
formation of West Virginia. 370.
514 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 21
CHAMBERLIN, R. T. *Isostasy from the
geological point of view. 454.
Cuapin, Epwarp A. New Coccinellidae
from the West Indies. 488.
— *Remarks on exotic Scarabaeidae
imported into the United States. 499.
CuHRISLER, V. L. *Absorption of sound
at oblique angles of incidence. 28.
Cuark, AustINH. *Evolution. 68.
Cops, N. A. The demanian vessels in
nemas of the genus Oncholaimus; with
notes on four new Oncholaims. 225.
Coz, E.F. *America’sowntropics. 85.
Coteman, L. V. *Museums in South
America.
Couuins, H. B. *The 1929 scientific
explorations in Alaska: Archeology.
70.
Cooks, C. WytHeE. Pleistocene seashores.
389.
CusHMAN, JosepH A. The interrrelation
of Foraminifera and Algae. 395.
DACHNOWSKI-STOKES, ALFRED P. Peat
profiles of the Everglades in Florida:
the stratigraphic features of the ‘‘Up-
per’ Everglades and correlation with
environmental changes. 89.
— Peat profiles in Maine: The South
Lubec “‘heath’’ in relation to sea level.
124.
— Peat profiles in the Puget Sound
Basin of Washington. 193.
DAVENPORT, CHARLESB. The mechanism
of organic evolution. 317, *345.
DENSMORE, FrANcES. The music of the
American Indian at public gatherings.
509.
DRECHSLER, CHARLES, Some new species
of Pythium. 398.
Drypven, H. L. *Effect of turbulence in
wind-tunnel experiments. 187.
Evans, O. F. The antiquity of man as
shown at Frederick, Oklahoma: a
criticism. 475.
FarirRcHILD, JouHN G. The volumetric
determination of fluorine by the use of
ferric chloride. 141.
Ferauson, H. G. *Vein quartz of the
Alleghany district, California. 151.
Fisk, Hartan W. *Secular variation of
magnetic intensity, and its accelera-
tions in Pacific countries. 13.
FRIEDMANN, Hersert. The geographic
variations of Neocichla gutturalis
(Bocage). 434.
*Parasitism in birds. 85.
GauM, O. E. *Insect pests and mites
related to the mushroom industry.
384.
*Note on ILinopodes antennaepes
Banks. 155.
Gautsorr, Paut 8. *Old and new con-
cepts of the organism in the light of
experimental studies on sponges.
344.
Gipson, R. E. The compressibility of
rubber. 213.
GoutpMaNn, E. A. A new pocket mouse
from Lower California. 223.
—— Anewracoon from Lower California,
82.
GoutpMAN, Marcus I. *Types of silicifi-
cation in the Paleozoic of Virginia.
356.
Goranson, R. W. *Some problems in
isostasy. 447.
Greece, W. R. *The 1929 scientific ex-
plorations in Alaska: Meteorology.
pe
GUTENBERG, B. Hypotheses on the de-
velopment of theearth. 17.
Hai, Maurice C. *Parasites of elk and
other wild ruminants. 87.
Hay, Outver, P. On the fossil Mammalia
of the first interglacial stage of the
Pleistocene of the United States.
501.
— Remarks on Dr. George G. Simp-
son’s work on the Pleistocene paleon-
tology of Florida. 331.
Hewett, D. F. *Genesis of iron-manga-
nese carbonate concretions in Central
South Dakota. 248.
Heyt, P. R. *Absorption of sound at
oblique angles of incidence. 28.
Hiegerns, Ermer. *Great Lakes investi-
gations. 348.
Hitcucockx, A. S. Four new grasses.
381.
Howarp, C. S. *Suspended matter in
the Colorado River. 30.
Howarp, L. O. *Observations on some
entomologists and their work, during
a recent western trip. 15.
:
:
DEC. 19, 1930
Howarp, L.O. Someearly entomologists.
511.
HoLLANDER, FRANKLIN. On the equa-
tion for the reaction between inver-
tase and sucrose. 157.
Howe tt, A. H. *Recent notes on birds
and mammals of the Everglades. 85.
HrpurcKa, ALES. *The 1929 scientific
explorations in Alaska: Anthropol-
ogy. 70.
Huupert, HE. O. *Ions and electrical
currents in the upper atmosphere.
29.
Humeureys, W. J. The Philosophical
Society of Washington through a
thousand meetings. 245.
Jounson, C. D. *The strength of metal
tubing for structural purposes. 185.
KatmpacnH, E. R. *Notes on waterfowl
sickness in 1929. 86.
Kiiurep, ELuswortH P. Ten new species
of Passiflora, mainly from Colombia
and Peru. 374.
—— The identity of the South American
fish poisons, ‘‘cube’’ and ‘‘timbd.”’
74.
*Over the Peruvian Andes and down
the Amazon for plants. 352.
Kirk, Epwin. Trophocrinus, a new Car-
boniferous crinoid. 210.
Kuetue, A.M. *Effect of turbulence in
wind-tunnel experiments. 187.
Lane, A.C. *Geotherms. 450.
Lane, WALTER B. Note on temperature
gradients in the Permian basin. 121.
Larson, A. O. *Bean-weevil infesta-
tions. 4838.
LEONARD, EMERY C. The genus Trichan-
thera. 484.
LONGWELL, CHESTER R. *Some problems
of mountain structure and mountain
history. 441.
Marsa, C. D.
300.
MartTINDALE, P. N. *Intimate habits of
wild animals. 349.
McComs, H. HE. *Some recent instru-
mental investigations in terrestrial
magnetism and seismology. 149.
Merriam, C. Hart. Little-known tribes
of the Salmon, New, and Trinity
Rivers in northwestern California.
148.
*The poisonous laurel.
AUTHOR INDEX
O15
Mertir, J. B., JR.
in Alaska. 354.
Mertcatr, Maynarp M. *Origin and evo-
lution of the higher one-celled animals
346.
Morton, C. V. A new cannon-ball tree
from Panama. 396.
— A new species of Calathea from
Panamé. 372.
— A new species of Hsenbeckia from
Texas. 1385.
Mounns, E. N. *Some forestry observa-
tions in Kurope. 349.
Moris, O. J. *Elk studies in the Jackson
Hole region. 87.
Newson, H.W. Anew pocket mouse from
Lower California. 223.
— A new raccoon from Lower Cali-
fornia. 82.
Nouan, THomas B. Paleozoic formations
in the Gold Hill quadrangle, Utah.
421.
Peters, H. S.
birds. 351.
PETRENKO, S.N. *The strength of metal
tubing for structural purposes. 185.
PittieER, H. Botanical notes on, and
descriptions of, new and old species of
Venezuelan plants—III. Old and
new species of Euphorbiaceae. 3.
*Mountain building
*External parasites of
Poos, F. W. *Leafhopper injury to leg-
umes. 116.
Putnam, G. R. *Isostasy: what gravity
measurements reveal. 336.
Raper, KENNETH B. Myxamoebae in soil
and decomposing crop residues. 362.
RaprPlEYE, Howarp 8. *Observers’ pat-
terns. 118.
Ratupun, Mary J. A new Callianassa
from the Cretaceous of South Dakota.
1.
—: Hoploparia westonti Woodward. 180
REESIDE, JOHN B., Jr. A Cretaceous
pelecypod with color markings. 59.
— The Cretaceous faunas in the sec-
tion on Vermilion Creek, Moffat
County, Colorado. 35.
Rico, W. H. *Alaska salmon investiga-
tions. 347.
Rorsser, W. F. *Thermoelectric pyrom-
etry. 183.
*Note on the pink boll-
189.
RouWER, S. A.
worm in Arizona.
516 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ‘VOL. 20, No. 21
Rouwer, S. A. *Pink bollworm in Ari-
zona and Mediterranean fruit fly in
Florida. 489.
Ross, C. P. *Classification of the ore
deposits of south-central Idaho. 436.
Rosssy, C.-G. On the effect of vertical
convection on lapse rates. 33.
Sarcent, R. H. *Photographing Alaska
and its glaciers from the air. 348.
ScuraDER, F. C. *Antimony deposits.
436.
ScHREINER, OSWALD. *Biological science
in the East Indies. 354.
SEEGER, R. J. Appell’s equations. 481.
Serre, O. E. *Mackerel investigations.
347.
SHaMEL, H. Harotp. A new murine
opossum from Argentina. 83.
SHOEMAKER, CLARENCE R. Descriptions
of two new amphipod crustaceans
(Talitridae) from the United States.
107.
Smitu, A. C. The identity of the South
American fish poisons, ‘‘cube’’ and
“timb6é.”’ 74.
SmitH, Froyp F. *Studies of the black
vine weevil. 185.
SmitH, Puitie S. *The 1929 scientific
explorations in Alaska: Geology. 71.
Snoperass, R.E. *Howinsects fly. 115.
*Reviews of some European litera-
ture on insect morphology. 15.
Snyper, W. F. *Absorption of sound at
oblique angles of incidence. 28.
Stites, C. W. *Proposals submitted as
amendments to International Rules of
Zoological Nomenclature. 86.
Stose, G. W. *Review of the peneplains
and gravel terraces of the northern
Appalachians. 152.
| Wiis, J. E.
Stuart, R. Y. *The 1929 scientific ex-
plorations in Alaska: Forestry. 71
Taytor, L.8. *Standardization of X-ray
dosage. 184.
THom, CHARLES. Myxamoebae in soil
and decomposing crop residues. 362.
Titton, L. W. *Variations in the optical
density of glass. 12.
Titus, Harry W. The symmetry of the
autocatalytic curve. 357.
TucKERMAN, L. B. *The strength of
metal tubing for structural purposes.
185.
Watuis, W. F. *A comparison of mag-
netic disturbance at different stations.
138.
Warren, F. A. *Along the trails of
Mount Rainier. 350.
We tts, R.C. Thesolubility of some rare-
earth nitrates inether. 146.
WENSEL, H.T. *Optical pyrometry. 184.
Westover, H. L. *Plant exploration in
Turkestan. 353.
Wuerry, Epaar T. A long-lost Phloz.
2.
— Plants of the Appalachian shale-
barrens. 43.
WuippLe, R. W. Discovery of Permo-
Carboniferous vertebrates in the
Dunkard formation of West Virginia.
370.
Wiese, A. H. *Some observations in
increasing pond productivity. 350.
Wiuuiams, R.S. Haitian mosses collected
by E. C. Leonard. 173.
— Mosses collected in Brazil and
Argentina by J. N. Rose in 1915. 465.
*Recent experiments with
timekeepers. 138.
SUBJECT INDEX
Anthropology. *Alaska, scientific explor-
ations in 1929. ApS HrpuicKa. 70.
- Man, antiquity of, at Frederick, Okla-
homa. O.F. Evans. 475.
Archeology. *Alaska, scientific explora-
tions in 1929. H.B. Couns. 70.
Biography. *Reminiscences. J. M. Aup-
RICH. 495.
Biology. *Hast Indies, biological science
in. OSWALD SCHREINER. 354.
*Grand Canyon, biological problems of.
VERNON BAILEY. 352.
*Life zones of northern Europe. J. M.
ALDRICH. 84.
Myxamoebae in soil and decomposing
erop residues. CHARLES THOM and
KENNETH B. Raper. 362.
*National Park administration, biolog-
ical problems of. H. M. Ausricur.
349,
Botany. Appalachian shale-barrens plants.
HpGar T. WHERRY. 43.
Calathea, new species from Panama.
C. V. Morton. 372.
Cannon-ball tree, new, from Panama.
C.V.MorrTon. 396.
“Cube”’ and ‘‘timbé,’’ South American
nich y poisons, “identity “of. Ey P.
Kiuurp and A. C. Smita.
Esenbeckia, a new species of, from
Texas. C.V.Morron. 135.
Euphorbiaceae, Venezuelan. H. Pir-
TIER. 93.
*Forestry in Europe. E. N. Mun s.
349.
Grasses, four new. A. S. Hrrcncock.
381.
Haitian mosses. R.S. Winuiams. 173.
*Laurel, the poisonous. C. D. Marsa.
350.
Mosses from Brazil and Argentina.
R.S. Witutams. 465.
Passiflora, new species from Colombia
and Peru. Exusworta P. Kip.
374,
or
~I
*Peruvian Andes and the Amazon,
expedition to. E. P. Kinurp. 352.
Phlox, a long lost. Epaar T. WHERRY.
25.
Pythium, new species of. CHARLES
DRECHSLER. 398.
Trichanthera. Emery CC. LEONARD.
484,
*Turkestan, plant exploration in. H.
L. WESTOVER. 353.
Chemistry. Fluorine, volumetric deter-
mination of. JOHN G. FAIRCHILD.
141.
Invertase and sucrose, reaction between.
JOSEPH BERKSON and FRANKLIN HOL-
LANDER. 15/7.
Rare-earth nitrates, solubility in ether.
R.C. Weuts. 146.
Entomology. *Bean-weevil
A.O. Larson. 488.
*Black vine weevil.
185.
Coccinellidae, new West
Epwarp A. CHAPIN. 488.
*Experiences in Europe. J.M.ALpDRICH.
114.
*How insects fly. R. E. SNoparass.
IIL,
*Insect morphology, European litera-
tureon. R.E.Snoperass. 15.
*Leafhopper injury to legumes. F. W.
Poos. 116.
*Mite (T'yroglyphus siro) used in cheese
making. W.V. Baupur. 189.
*Mushroom industry, insect pests and
mites related to. O. E. Gan, 384.
*Mushroom mite Linopeodes antennaepes.
O.E.Gaum. 155.
*Pink bollworm in Arizona. S. A.
Rouwer. 189.
*Pink bollworm in Arizona and Mediter-
ranean fruit fly in Florida. S. A.
RouHWER. 489.
*Scarabaeidae, imported exotic.
CHAPIN. 499.
infestations.
Fioyp F. Smita.
Indian.
B. A.
518 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 21
*Sugar-beet leafhopper problem. Wat-
TER CARTER. 153.
*Western entomologists, work of.
Howarp. 15.
Ethnology. Indian tribes of California.
C. Hart Merriam. 148.
Music of the American
FRANCES DENSMORE. 509.
Evolution. *Earth, creation of.
Apams. 340.
*Evolution. Austin H. Cuarx. 68.
*Higher one-celled animals, origin and
evolution of. Maynarp M. Mercatr.
346.
Organic evolution, mechanism of.
CHARLES B. DAVENPORT. 317. *345.
*Organism, the, old and new concepts of.
PauLS. GautTsorr. 344.
L.'Os
Indian.
ia 3
*Plants, origin and evolution of. E.W.
Berry. 344.
Forestry. *Alaska, scientific explorations
in 1929. R. Y. Stuart and E. E.
CARTER. 71.
General Science. The Philosophical Soci-
ety of Washington through a thousand
meetings. W. J. Humpureys. 245.
Geodesy. *Observers’ patterns. How-
ARD §. RappLeye. 118.
Triangulation, scientfic and practical
value of. Witi1amM Bowie. 53.
Geography. *Alaska and its glaciers from
the air. R.H.Sarcent. 348.
*American tropics. E.F.Cor. 85.
Geology. *Alaska, mountain building in.
J.B. Mertig, Jr. 354.
*Alaska, scientific explorations in 1929.
Puitip SmirH. 71.
*Andes, history of. Epwarp W. BErry.
69.
*Anorthosite, Adirondack, structural
survey of. Rospert BALK. 241.
*Antimony deposits. F.C. ScHraDER.
436.
*Alleghany district, California, vein
quartz of. H.G. Frreuson. 151.
Cretaceous faunas on Vermilion Creek,
Colorado. JoHNB.ReEEsIDE, JR. 35.
*Coal, scientific classification of. M.
R. CAMPBELL. 435.
*EHrosion, contributions by the Bureau
of Soils to the problem of. H. H.
BENNETT. 30.
Gold Hill quadrangle, Utah, Paleozoic
formations in. THomas B. Nowan.
421.
*Idaho, classification of ore deposits of.
C.P.Ross. 436.
*Tron-manganese carbonate concretions,
genesis of. D.F. Hewett. 248.
*Ozark region, early structural history
of. JostaH BripGe. 151.
*Peneplains and gravel terraces of the
northern Appalachians. G.W.SrTossE.
152.
Pleistocene seashores.
389.
*Silicification, types of, in the Paleozoic
of Virginia. Marcus I. GoLpMaANn.
356.
Geophysics. Development of the earth,
hypotheses on. B. GUTENBERG. 17.
*Geotherms. A.C. Lane. 450.
*Gravity measurements, what they
reveal. G.R. Putnam. 336.
Isostasy, abstracts of paperson. 441.
*Isostasy from the geological point of
view. R.T.CHAMBERLIN. 454.
C. W. Cooke.
*Isostasy, problems in. R. W. Goran-
son. 447.
*Mountain structure, problems of.
CHESTER R. LONGWELL. 441.
Sunspot numbers, terrestrial magne-
tism, and long-wave radio signal
strength, comparison of. L.W. Aus-
PENG Hess
Temperature gradients in the Permian
basin. WALTER B. Lane. 121.
*Terrestrial magnetism and seismology,
instrumental investigations in. H.
E.McComps. 149.
Hydrology. *Colorado River, suspended
matterin. C.S.Howarp. 30.
Mathematical physics. Appell’sequations.
R.J.SEEGER. 481.
Mathematics. Autocatalytic curve, sym-
metry of. Harry W. Titus. 357.
Meteorology. *Alaska, scientific explora-
tions in 1929. W.R.Greeae. 71.
Vertical convection, effect of, on lapse
rates. C.G.Rossspy. 33.
Museums. *Museums in South America.
L. V. ConEMAN. 86.
Necrology. Autt, JAMES Percy. 120.
FEWKES, JESSE WALTER. 420.
FRANKLIN, WILLIAM SuppARDS. 420.
Hau, AsapH. 172.
DEC. 19, 1930
Hay, OLIVER Perry. 512.
JENISON, HinpeRTA.C. 190.
Katz, FRANK JAMES. 480.
Orton, WILLIAM ALLEN. 88.
SIEBENTHAL, CLAUDE E.tswortH. 191
TonporrF, Francis ANTHONY. 16.
Wit8y, Harvey WASHINGTON. 420.
Woop, GrorcE McLane. 480.
Ornithology. *Everglades, the, birds and
mammalsof. A.H.HowELu. 85.
Neocichla gutturalis, variations of.
HERBERT FRIEDMANN. 484.
*Parasites, external, of birds. H. S.
Berers. 350.
*Parasitism in birds. HERBERT FRIED-
MANN. 89.
*Waterfowl sickness in 1929. E. R.
KALMBACH. 86.
Paleobotany. Pterophyllum, new, from
Utah. Epwarp W. Berry. 458.
Paleontology. Callianassa, new, from the
Cretaceous of South Dakota. Mary
JRRATHBUN. 1.
Color markings on a Cretaceous pelecy-
pod. JoHN B. ReEsIpe£, Jr. 59.
Dunkard formation of West Virginia,
Permo-Carboniferous vertebrates in.
R. W. Wuiprte and E. C. Case.
370.
Hoploparia westoni Woodward. Mary
J. RatTHBun. 180.
Hypural fan, new, from the Miocene of
Maryland. WiLuARD Berry. 41.
Mammalia of the first interglacial stage
of the Pleistocene. Outver P. Hay.
501.
“Orthophragmina”’ (Discocyclina) mero-
ensis. WILLARD Berry. 482.
Pleistocene of Florida, Simpson’s work
on: QOxviver P: Hay. 33l-.
Trophocrinus, a new Carboniferous eri-
noid. Epwin Krrx. 210.
Petrography. Pacificite, an anemousite
basalt. Tom. F.W.Bartu. 60.
Physical chemistry. Rubber, compres-
sibility of. L. H. Apams and R. E.
Gisson. 213.
Physical geography. Everglades, the,
peat profiles in. ALFRED P. Dacu-
NOWSKI-STOKES. 89.
Puget Sound Basin of Washington, peat
profiles in. ALFrep P. DacHNnowskI-
STokes. 193.
SUBJECT INDEX
519
South Lubec “‘heath’’, Maine, peat pro-
files in. ALFRED P. DacHNowskI-
Strokes. 124.
Physics. *Absorption of sound at oblique
angles ‘of incidence. P. R. Hey,
V. L. Curister, and W. F. Snyper.
28.
*Atmosphere, upper, ions and electrical
currentsin. E.O. HuLperr. 29.
*Galvanometer, sensitivity of. H. B.
Brooks. 118.
*Magnetic disturbance, comparison of.
W.F. Watts. 138.
*Magnetic intensity, secular variation
of, and its accelerations in Pacific
countries. Haran W. Fisk. 13.
*Metal tubing, strength of. L. B.
TuckeRMAN, 8S. N. PETRENKO, and
C.D. Jounson. 185.
*Optical density of glass, variations in.
L. W. Tinton. 12.
*Optical pyrometry. H. T. WENSEL.
184.
*Photometers, colored-light measure-
mentson. E.G. ANDERSON. 13.
*Thermoelectric pyrometry. W. F.
Roeser. 183.
*Timekeepers, recent experiments with.
J. HE. Wiis. 138.
*Wind-tunnel experiments, effect of
turbulence in. H. L. DrypEn and
A.M. Kuetue. 137.
*X-ray dosage, standardization of. L.
S. Tayutor. 184.
Scientific Notes and News. 31, 52, 71, 88,
119, 139, 156, 171, 190, 244, 388, 419,
463, 479, 500.
Zoblogy. Amphipod crustaceans
tridae), new American.
R. SHOEMAKER. 107.
*Caribbean Islands,
Paut BartscH. dol.
*Elk studies in the Jackson Hole region.
OF Miumim. 87.
*Hverglades, the birds and mammals of.
A.H. Hower. 85.
Foraminifera and Algae, interrelation
of. JosppH A. CUSHMAN. 395.
*Great Lakes investigations. ELMER
Hiearns. 348.
*Mackerel investigations.
347.
(Tali-
CLARENCE
collecting in.
O. E. SETTE.
~
520 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 20, No. 21
*Mount Rainier, along the trails of. F.
A. WARREN. 3850.
Nemas of the genus Oncholaimus, de-
manian vesselsin. N.A.Cobb. 225.
*Nomenclature, proposed amendments
to international rules. C. W. STILEs.
86.
Opossum, new murine, from Argentina.
H. HAROLD SHAMEL. 88.
Pocket mouse, new, from Lower Cali-
fornia. E. W. Newson and E. A.
GOLDMAN. 2283.
*Parasites, external, of birds. H. S.
Peters. 351.
*Parasites of wildruminants. MAaAvRIcE
C. Hann. § 87.
*Pond productivity, increasing. A. H.
WIEBE. 350.
Raccoon, new Lower Californian. E.
W.Neuson and E. A.GoupMANn. 82.
*Salmon investigations, Alaskan. W.
H. Ric. 347.
*Wild animals, intimate habits of. P,
N.MartTINDALE. 349.
OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS
THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Philosophical Sith
~ The address by W. J. Humphreys, The Philosophical Society of Washington
through a thousand meetings, which appeared in the issue of this JouRNAL
for July 19, 1930, has been published in pamphlet form by the Philosophical
Society. Copies, bound in stiff covers, may be obtained for forty cents
each, postpaid, from the Treasurer, Capt. N. H. Heck, U. 8. Coast and
Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C.
ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS
Friday, December 19 The Geographic Society
Saturday, December 20 The Helminthological Society
) : The Philosophical Society
Wednesday, December 24 The Geological Society
The Medical Society
‘Friday, December 26 The Geographic Society
Saturday, December 27 The Biological Society
Wednesday, December 31 The Medical Society
Thursday, January 1 The Entomological Society
Friday, January 2 The Geographie Society
Saturday, January 3... The Philosophical Society
The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if sent
to the editors by the eleventh and ae cal: day of each month.
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Wru1am Bowlg, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Corresponding Secretary: L. B. TucKERMAN, Bureau of Standards.
Br _ Recording Secretary: CHARLES THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils.
easton
| Treasurer: Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Oprruary: Gime He
. ae? yes | . > — “i tw
Fay ar Lh af oe St >; ee en Shae so Se ena!
; pte hy yeh
Py ae “ Fat = no ™
au Ce PtL + "i
i. “i ear re ~ . Sh : ‘
ate? oe, & ie s
La “Fe! _ * om af
“ f A +! oa
on rhe ane
> Le i
2 ¢ <7 é
gh a
7 a Ye
aw am >
; -
i, & ‘a ” a) .
ee iy rvs
. > mean ka
a . } -
cr) id » i
] $
© gw i -
4* :
x 2)
rm , Y 5 Sia ;
rd ¥ cea
ee
Pi vp »
‘ A ad
wy
a)
.
a
CONTENTS —
ORIGINAL PAPERS :
Paleontology.—On the fossil mammalia of the first. interglacia
Pleistocene of the United States. Oxiver P. Hay.......
Ethnology.—The music of the American Indians at publi ge
(Abstract). Frances DENSMORE..................4. oe
Fi
‘PROCEEDINGS
The Bahahelericnl Becleta tit ct eee ar
“ee
4
_ INDEXES
ie a are em gp ga eelLG
Sg a Re eit ge
Tay as he
i ? ij
in.
Meaatitde Sitar
‘peo as
ne > 7 a hha tae Meee ak be i 4 fA Be *
re 1 Mang at ee mraRAARaAcem Vyas ead ihr) tu leas YT
ny Thy % ™ 7” a |
I Wy ar PQA Ki! . AMALARUANS . AaseaannanspAAyashlar ™ Mea Asuipiian, TTY Neh ort {ue |
a“
-~ - = ta a sa” = MERGE a.
ap © 6 AAS SL) xs 7
\* we POON ARARa). ‘ted P
| | ply 5 aA OA reer. AA nee Tye ar i La ae % &
ry | aia err TTT ANAAD pa ay ‘akhb ban Ae ; Ty Bice Ranji
ae Ma,
: p ead
a P
wn hie a etd
WN meal Nr mes
An ~ p a wal ab wy!
- a x. ° TNA Wot! Basan apanni®ONNa, ma £ \ ce yl “a 4 apn LY fi
1a. meni Nd | ane ~paac® « r ob Ce 4 hr, ASS aS B.
\a7, Sam 4 sae wPR'Y co aA a gas Sa P a er aRene” aa”
hee | : Sear a ee ARADY a er aam p*’ 4s § Al Gg. an AL re
a Cems a ad haped —_ ) Na, a ea ann Nap © an am BY A a > . x ~~ ’ PS
Tee ane Bad ALE EEE Cp py Yate | in Ye Neee Anka Aaeeeg tenn, rei
Aa Ay avy LAS” Ven aan SINAN APA PY Pes EL T “ay* oa. | GE i. eg WAALS P
=n ~&, . ™ a AA NA A N= mn : “a AHORA) Laie AAALAA aiid ARAL a “A, i: ge . PY ano
pitas) | su lela) Lae
; Lebiint LUE \}
weil T\ elat! ) 1 ami Tee SmOn"GPAAyallp ptatuas
i" TT
“ Bult VAT _